Copyright: Family Tree Maker Version 8.0 for Windows 95/98
Citation: Family Tree Maker Version 8.0 for Windows 95/98


Backup files
Backup file

A backup is an exact copy of your Family File, but with a slightly different name.  The backup is stored separately from the Family File that you regularly work with, either on your computer's hard disk or on a floppy disk.  Making regular backup copies of your Family File can help ensure that you won't loose all of your genealogical information if something ever happens to the Family File that you work with regularly.  It's a good idea to save as frequently as once every half hour, you never know when you will have a power failure!


Compacting files

Anytime you import a picture or object into the scrapbook, Family Tree Maker automatically allocates space in your file for it.  If you decide to remove the picture or object imported into a scrapbook, you will notice that the size of the Family File is not automatically reduced.  To reclaim this space, you will need to compact your Family File.


Family File

A Family File is where Family Tree Maker stores all of the information that you enter about your family.  Each Family File will contain multiple Family Pages with information about multiple nuclear families.


Family Page

The Family Page is where you enter basic information — such as a name and birth date — about each individual in your family.  Each nuclear family (two parents and their children) in your Family File has a Family Page.  In addition, each person in your Family File appears on two Family Pages:  each individual is shown as a child on his or her parents' Family Page and also as an adult on his or her own Family Page.


Nuclear family

A nuclear family is simply two parents and their children.  Your entire family is made up of several nuclear families, and each nuclear family has its own Family Page.


"." on the View menu

A symbol that appears next to an item on the View menu.  This symbol indicates which view Family Tree Maker is currently displaying.


Fields

Fields are the places in Family Tree Maker where you enter information. For example, the Family Page consists of several fields where you enter the names of a husband, a wife, and their children, as well as all of their birth dates.  You type information into the fields and then move from field to field using Tab, Enter, the cursor keys, or by clicking on the field with your mouse pointer.  Some fields only allow you to enter certain kinds of information.  For example, date fields only allow you to enter a date, the word "unknown,'' or a question mark.


Sibling

A sibling is an individual's brother or sister.  Siblings should be listed in the same "Children" list if they were born to the same parents.


ASCII

ASCII files are generic text files that many programs can read and create.  DOS programs create PC-8 files, while Windows programs create ANSI files.  Check the manual of your other program to see if and how you can export your information to an ASCII file.  Look under "ASCII," "PC-8," "ANSI," or "Export" in the index of the other manual.


Clipboard

The clipboard is a temporary storage space in Windows.  When you use an editing command like Copy, Windows stores the copied  information on the Clipboard.  You can then paste the information from the Clipboard to another location.  A piece of information stays on the Clipboard until you cut or copy new information to it.


Primary individual

In a family tree or report, the primary individual is the individual upon whom the tree or report is based.  For example, in a Descendant tree, the primary individual is the individual at the top of the tree from whom everyone else in the tree descends. For instructions on selecting the primary individual, click here.


Research Journal

The Research Journal is a single page, or view, in Family Tree Maker where you create, categorize, and sort your personal “To-Do” items.

Use the To-Do list to organize and plan how you will research the names generated by the FamilyFinder Search and displayed in your FamilyFinder Report.  Then, monitor your research progress as you mark those To-Do items as “Done.”  The Research Journal is a great tool to keep you focused and organized as you continue investigating your family history.


Ancestor tree

Ancestor trees (sometimes called "pedigree" trees) show the family roots for any individual.  For example, if you created your own Ancestor tree, it would show your two parents, four grandparents, eight great-grandparents, and so forth.   It would not show your aunts, uncles, nieces, nephews, or cousins.


Vertical Ancestor tree

Vertical Ancestor trees, like Standard Ancestor trees, show the family roots for any individual.  For example, if you created your own Vertical Ancestor tree, it would show your two parents, four grandparents, eight great-grandparents, and so forth.  It would not show your aunts, uncles, nieces, nephews, or cousins. The Vertical Ancestor tree centers the primary individual at the bottom of the tree, with his or her ancestors branching upward.


Descendant tree

Descendant trees show where everyone fits in the family.  Starting with a relative in the distant past, a Descendant tree moves to the present, showing the primary individual's children, grandchildren, great-grandchildren and so on, generation by generation.

When you choose the Descendant Tree view, you can also create a Direct Descendant tree.  This type of tree shows the direct lineage from one individual to another.  Siblings can be included, but sibling's spouses, cousins, and others who aren't direct descendants cannot.


Outline Descendant tree

Outline Descendant trees, like Descendant trees, show where everyone fits in the family.  Starting with a relative in the distant past, an Outline Descendant tree moves to the present, showing the primary individual's children, grandchildren, great-grandchildren and so on, generation by generation.  The difference between a Descendant tree and an Outline Descendant tree is that Outline Descendant trees don't use boxes to display each individual's information.  Instead, the information is displayed in outline format, with each individual on a separate line.

When you choose the Outline Descendant Tree view, you can also create an Outline Direct Descendant tree.  This type of tree shows the direct lineage from one individual to another.  Siblings can be included, but sibling's spouses, cousins, and others who aren't direct descendants cannot.


Fan tree

The branches of a Fan Tree radiate out from the primary individual to form an expanding circle similar to the spokes of a wheel.  You can create an Ancestor Fan tree, a Descendant Fan tree, or a Direct Descendant Fan tree.


Hourglass tree

Hourglass trees combine the best of both ancestor and descendant trees.  Starting from an individual in the middle of the tree, an hourglass tree shows parents and grandparents above and children and grandchildren below in a compact arrangement of boxes.


All-in-One Tree

The All-in-One Tree allows you to display every member of your Family File in one continuous tree.  You can include individuals who are not blood relatives, as well as unrelated individuals who are not linked to anyone else in your Family File. For a detailed description of some the more difficult concepts, click here.


Timeline

Timelines display a horizontal Life bar for each individual in the view.  One of the unique features of this view is that you can choose to display your family history against a setting of historical milestones.  The individuals displayed are those you chose in the Individuals to Include dialog box.


Standard (Ahnentafel) numbers

Ahnentafel numbers are a numbering scheme used to identify each individual in a family tree.  The formula states that an individual's father is twice that individual's number, and an individual's mother is twice that individual's number plus 1.  If your Ahnentafel number is 1, your father's number is 2, and your mother's is 3.


Civil and Canon relationships

When you're in a Kinship report, you can see two columns labeled "Civil" and "Canon."  These words, "Civil" and "Canon" refer to the degree of a relationship.  The degree of a relationship is a legal term.  It refers to the number of "steps" between two people who are related by blood.

Canon law is used in most of the United States.  It measures the maximum number of steps from the nearest common ancestor.  For example, you would be 2 direct steps away from your first cousin because your nearest common ancestor is one of your grandparents.  So in this case, the degree is 2.

The degree in civil law represents the total number of steps through the blood line that separate two individuals.  For example, there are 2 steps from you to your grandparent, and then 2 more steps back down to your first cousin, so the degree is 4.


Double dates

Beginning in 45 B.C., many parts of the world used the Julian calendar to mark the passage of time.  According to the Julian calendar, March 25 was the first day of the year and each year was 365 days and 6 hours long.  In 1582, Pope Gregory XIII determined that the Julian calendar was incorrect:  each day was just a little bit too long.  This meant that the human calendar wasn't keeping up with nature's calendar, and the seasons kept arriving slightly earlier in the year.  To solve the problem, Pope Gregory XIII created the Gregorian calendar.  This is the calendar that we use officially in the United States.  As you know, this new calendar changed the first day of the year from March 25 to January 1.  Pope Gregory also had everyone jump ahead by 10 days to make up for the days that were lost when the world was using the old Julian calendar.

The practice of writing double dates resulted from this switch from the Julian to the Gregorian calendar, and also from the fact that not all countries and people accepted the new calendar at the same time.  For example, England and the American colonies didn't officially accept the new calendar until 1752.  Before 1752, the English government still observed March 25 as the first of the year, but most of the population observed January 1 as the first of the year.  For this reason, many people wrote dates falling between January 1 and March 25 with both years, as in the following examples.

Julian or Old Style	Gregorian or New Style	Double Date
December 25, 1718	December 25, 1718	December 25, 1718
January 1, 1718	January 1, 1719	January 1, 1718/19
February 2, 1718	February 2, 1719	February 2, 1718/19
March 25, 1719	March 25, 1719	March 25, 1719
By the time England and the colonies adopted the new Gregorian calendar, the discrepancy between the two calendars was eleven days, instead of ten.  To resolve the discrepancy, the government ordered that September 2, 1752 be followed by September 14, 1752.  Some people also added 11 days to their birth dates (a fact which is not noted on their birth certificates).


Layout and connections

The tree layout is the placement of the boxes on a page.  For example, in Family Tree Maker you can choose between three different types of layouts:  Perfect, Squished, and Collapsed. "Perfect" creates the largest tree, "Squished" creates the smallest, and "Collapsed" will give you a tree somewhere in the middle.

Box connections are the way that the boxes on the lowest level of your tree are connected to the tree.  For example, Detached attaches the boxes by placing lines between them.  Fishtail, on the other hand, places the boxes against the right edge of the box on the left.

Experiment with these settings and watch how your tree responds to different layouts and box connections.


Object Linking and Embedding (OLE)

Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) is a technology that lets you create items in one software program and place them in another software program.  For example, you can use video capture software to transfer clips of your home videos onto your computer.  Then, with the help of Object Linking and Embedding you can transfer video clips from your video capture software into Family Tree Maker Scrapbooks.


Archive

A group of records, such as a land record archive or death record archive.


Record

A set of information, usually pertaining to one individual.  For example, death records, birth records, or marriage records.


Index

The Index of Individuals lists everyone in your Family File.  You can use the Index of Individuals to jump between the Family Pages of distant relations.  It's also used for changing the primary individual.


"+" Plus sign

A symbol that appears next to a child's name in a Genealogy Report.  This symbol indicates that this child has children and the family line is continued in the next generation; therefore there is another reference to this child in the report.

A child's name that appears without the "+" symbol indicates that the child has no children and therefore there is no other reference to that child in the report.


"s" on the Family Page

A symbol that appears next to a location field on a Family Page.  This symbol indicates that the date or location information has source information connected with it.


"a" on the Family Page

A symbol that appears next to a field on the Family Page.  This symbol indicates that you have recorded alternate information for this field.


Toolbar

The toolbar contains buttons you can click to move to different views in Family Tree Maker.  To change views, just click the button corresponding to the view you want to see.  For example, if you want to see the Index of Individuals, click the button on the left that is labeled "Index."  If you want to create and display an Ancestor tree, click the Ancestor button.  See Toolbar buttons for additional information.

You can also customize the toolbar. Maybe you want to remove buttons you don’t use that often, add other buttons, or change the order of the buttons on the toolbar. Family Tree Maker makes it easy for you to display the buttons you want for the features you use most often.  See Customizing the toolbar for more information.


Family Tree Maker Help Contents

Getting started

Select this topic to get help about working with Family Files, customizing Family Tree Maker, importing files from other programs, and using the toolbar, menus, mouse, and keyboard.

Entering and editing information

Select this topic to get help about adding information and correcting mistakes in existing information.

Printing Family Tree Maker documents

Select this topic to get help about printing all Family Tree Maker documents.  You will also find information about Print setup, batch printing, and creating family books.

Creating Family Books

Select this topic to learn how to create family books. Learn how to include customized trees and reports in a book, complete with a title page, table of contents, and index.

Researching your family from home

Select this topic learn about Family Tree Maker’s powerful research tools. Search the Family Archives, as well as genealogy sites on the Internet, for your relatives and expand your Family File with new information.

Sharing information with others

Select this topic to learn how to export selected individuals to a new file, or save portions of your file for use in another program. Learn more about publishing your family information on the Family Tree Maker Web site, and contributing to the World Family Tree Project.

Other information

Select this topic to get information about the README file, technical support, sources for genealogical research, and preserving photographs.  You'll also find instructions for getting information about your Family File and your computer.

If you are not familiar with Windows Help systems, you may want to skim through the Windows "How to Use Help" Help system. To open it, from the Help menu, select How to Use Help (ALT, H, H).

Note:  For troubleshooting help and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs), remember to visit www.familytreemaker.com/support.html — this is your best source for accurate assistance with Family Tree Maker.


Getting started

Basic Family File operations

Get help about things that you can do with Family Files, such as creating new files, opening existing files, backing up files, finding files, deleting files, copying files, and appending files.

The toolbar and menu commands

Find out about the toolbar and each of the commands in the pull-down menus.

Using the mouse and keyboard

Get helpful tips about using your mouse effectively in Family Tree Maker.  You will also find a table of Family Tree Maker's shortcut keys.

Customizing Family Tree Maker

Find out about using the commands on the Preferences sub-menu.  These commands help you set defaults for date and name formats, field label names, the toolbar, error checking, Fastfields, Picture/Object resolution and compression, Help tools, and the way in which your Family File is backed up.

Note:  For troubleshooting help and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs), remember to visit www.familytreemaker.com/support.html — this is your best source for accurate assistance with Family Tree Maker.


Entering and editing information

Entering family information

Select this topic to get help about entering family information into the Family Page, More About dialog boxes, and Scrapbook.  You will also find information about editing information and navigating between your family members.

Moving between Family Pages

Select this topic to get help about moving from one Family Page to another and finding information in your Family File.

Editing information

Select this topic to get help about removing individuals from your Family File, unlinking individuals who are incorrectly linked, and linking individuals who should be linked together.  If you need to correct typos and misspellings, see "Entering family information."

Note:  For troubleshooting help and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs), remember to visit www.familytreemaker.com/support.html — this is your best source for accurate assistance with Family Tree Maker.


Basic Family File operations

Creating new Family Files

Opening Family Files

Opening Family Tree Maker for DOS files

Opening PAF files

GEDCOM import and export

Saving Family Files

Backing up Family Files

Opening backup files

Compacting Family Files

Copying/Exporting Family Files

Copying/Exporting groups of individuals

Appending (combining) files

Finding files

Deleting files

Exiting Family Tree Maker

Note:  For troubleshooting help and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs), remember to visit www.familytreemaker.com/support.html — this is your best source for accurate assistance with Family Tree Maker.


Creating new Family Files

To create a new Family File:

1.	From the File menu, select New Family File (ALT, F, N).

2.	Type a name for your file in the File name field.

The file name can be any valid Windows file name, up to 255 characters, although it must have the extension .FTW.  For example, you could type myfamily.ftw or smith.ftw  If you do not type in the .FTW extension, Family Tree Maker will add it for you.

3.	In the Save in lists, select the drive and folder where you want to save your new file.

4.	Click Save.

Family Tree Maker creates your new Family File and takes you to the first page of the Data Entry Wizard.

Note:  For troubleshooting help and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs), remember to visit www.familytreemaker.com/support.html — this is your best source for accurate assistance with Family Tree Maker.


The New Family File dialog box

1.	Type a name for your file in the File name field.

The file name can be any valid Windows file name, up to 255 characters, although it must have the extension .FTW.  For example, you could type myfamily.ftw or smith.ftw  If you do not type in the .FTW extension, Family Tree Maker will add it for you.

2.	In the Save in list, select the drive and folder where you want to save your new file.

3.	Click Save.

Family Tree Maker creates your new Family File and takes you to the first page of the Data Entry Wizard.


Opening Family Files

To open a file:

1.	From the File menu, select Open Family File (ALT, F, O).

2.	Click the Files of type drop-down list and select the format of the file that you want to open.

3.	In the Look in lists, select the drive and folder where the file you want to open is located and then select the file name.  If you are unsure where your file is, click Find file and follow the instructions in Finding files.

Note:  You cannot use a Family Tree Maker file (*.FTW) while it is on a diskette (or other removable media).  Before opening it, Family Tree Maker transfers it to your hard drive.  You can, however, open Family Tree Maker Backup files (*.FBK and *.FBC) on diskettes.

4.	Click Open.

If you are opening a Family Tree Maker for Windows file on your hard drive, your file is ready, so skip the remaining steps.

5.	If your file is not a Family Tree Maker for Windows file, Family Tree Maker displays the New Family File dialog box.  Either click Save to accept the name that Family Tree Maker suggests or type a new name in the File name field and then click Save.  The file name can be any valid Windows file name, up to 255 characters, although it must have the extension .FTW.  If you do not type in the .FTW extension, Family Tree Maker will add it for you.

Family Tree Maker reloads your file as a Family Tree Maker for Windows file.

See also

Combining (appending) files

GEDCOM Import and Export


Opening Family Tree Maker for DOS files

To open a Family Tree Maker for DOS file:

1.	From the File menu, select Open Family File (ALT, F, O).

2.	Click the Files of type drop-down list and select Family Tree Maker for DOS (*.FTM).

3.	In the Look in lists, select the drive and folder where the file you want to open is located and then select the file name.  If you are unsure where your file is, click Find file and follow the instructions in Finding files.

4.	Click Open.

5.	In the New Family File dialog box, you can either click Save to accept the name that Family Tree Maker suggests or type a new name in the File name field and then click Save.  The file name can be any valid Windows file name, up to 255 characters, although it must have the extension .FTW.  If you do not type in the .FTW extension, Family Tree Maker will add it for you.

Family Tree Maker reloads your file as a Family Tree Maker for Windows file and then displays a Family Page.

See also

Combining (appending) files

Note:  For troubleshooting help and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs), remember to visit www.familytreemaker.com/support.html — this is your best source for accurate assistance with Family Tree Maker.


The Open Family File dialog box

The following steps can be used to open or restore existing Family Tree Maker Family Files.  If your original Family File is damaged or you want to revert to a previous copy, you need to restore it from a backup.  Backup files are stored as either *.FBK or *.FBC files.

1.	Click the Files of type drop-down list and select the format of the file that you want to open.

2.	In the Look in lists, select the drive and folder where the file you want to open is located and then select the file name.  If you are unsure where your file is, click Find file and follow the instructions in Finding files.

Note:  You cannot use a Family Tree Maker file (*.FTW) while it is on a diskette (or other removable media).  Before opening it, Family Tree Maker transfers it to your hard drive.  You can, however, open Family Tree Maker Backup files (*.FBK and *.FBC) on diskettes.

3.	Click Open.

If you are opening a Family Tree Maker for Windows file, your file is ready, so skip the remaining steps.

Note:  If you wish to combine the contents of one Family File with another file, click Append file instead.  Please carefully follow the directions in Combining Files.

4.	If your file is not a Family Tree Maker for Windows file (*.FTW), Family Tree Maker displays the New Family File dialog box.  Either click Save to accept the name that Family Tree Maker suggests or type a new name in the File name field and then click Save.  The file name can be any valid Windows file name, up to 255 characters, although it must have the extension .FTW.  If you do not type in the .FTW extension, Family Tree Maker will add it for you.

Family Tree Maker reloads your file as a Family Tree Maker for Windows file.


Saving Family Files

You do not need to save your information because Family Tree Maker is a database program that saves your information regularly while you are using the program, as well as when you quit.  This reduces the risk of losing your data.

Note:	This means that you cannot quit the program without saving.  To get rid of any changes you make, you must fix them manually or make separate backup files regularly so you can revert to an old file if you need to.  You may especially want to make a separate backup right before you make any major changes to the data in your file.

See also

Backing up Family Files

How to: select startup preferences

Note:  For troubleshooting help and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs), remember to visit www.familytreemaker.com/support.html — this is your best source for accurate assistance with Family Tree Maker.


Backing up Family Files

To manually backup your Family File:

1.	From the File menu, select Backup Family File (ALT, F, B).

2.	The Currently selected backup destination field lists where your backup copy would be if you clicked OK now.  To change the location of your backup, select one of the option buttons in the Backup Destination Choices group box.  Each of your options is described below.

Working directory will place your file in the directory where Family Tree Maker is installed.  Custom directory lets you choose a different directory on your hard drive.  The other option buttons let you place your file on a floppy diskette.

If you select Custom directory, click Change filename or directory to choose a new backup destination.  In the Change filename or directory dialog box, select a location and then type a name in the File name field.  The file name can be any valid Windows file name, up to 255 characters, although it must have the extension .FBC.  If you do not type in the .FBC extension, Family Tree Maker will add it for you.  Click OK when you've made your selections.

3.	Click OK after making your selections.

If the backup file that you want to create already exists, Family Tree Maker may not let you create the file.  See How to: select startup preferences.

If you are backing up a large file to a diskette drive, Family Tree Maker will ask you to insert new diskettes as needed.  When the backup requires multiple diskettes, be sure to label them in the order in which they are used.

See also

Opening backup files

Copying/Exporting Family Files

Note:  For troubleshooting help and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs), remember to visit www.familytreemaker.com/support.html — this is your best source for accurate assistance with Family Tree Maker.


The Backup Family File dialog box

1.	The Currently selected backup destination field lists where your backup copy would be if you clicked OK now.  To change the location of your backup, select one of the option buttons in the Backup Destination Choices group box.  Each of your options is described below.

Working directory will place your file in the directory where Family Tree Maker is installed.  Custom directory lets you choose a different directory on your hard drive.  The other option buttons let you place your file on a floppy diskette.

If you select Custom directory, click Change filename or directory to choose a new backup destination.  In the Change filename or directory dialog box, select a location and then type a name in the File name field.  The file name can be any valid Windows file name, up to 255 characters, although it must have the extension .FBC.  If you do not type in the .FBC extension, Family Tree Maker will add it for you.  Click OK when you've made your selections.

2.	Click OK after making your selections.

If the backup file that you want to create already exists, Family Tree Maker may not let you create the file.  See How to: select startup preferences.

If you are backing up a large file to a diskette drive, Family Tree Maker will ask you to insert new diskettes as needed.  When the backup requires multiple diskettes, be sure to label them in the order in which they are used.

See also

Opening backup files

Copying/Exporting Family Files


The Change Filename or Directory dialog box

You can use this dialog box to choose a new backup destination and/or name for your Family File.

1.	In the In the Look in lists, , select the drive and folder where you want to place the backup copy of your file.

2.	Type a name in the File name field.

The file name can be any valid Windows file name, up to 255 characters, although it must have the extension .FBC.  If you do not type in the .FBC extension, Family Tree Maker will add it for you.

3.	Click OK when you've made your selections.


The Backup Info dialog box

You are attempting to create a backup file that has the same name and path of a backup file that already exists.  You have two options:

 Click Yes if you want to replace the existing backup file with the new backup file that you are currently attempting to create.

 Click No if you want to stop the backup process.  Your old backup file will not be affected in any way.  You can then restart the backup process and give your new backup file a different name or create it in a different directory.


The Open Compressed Backup dialog box

1.	Type a name for your file in the File name field.

The file name can be any valid Windows file name, up to 255 characters, although it must have the extension .FTW.  If you do not type in the .FTW extension, Family Tree Maker will add it for you.

2.	Click Open.

Family Tree Maker begins restoring your file.  If you are restoring a file from diskettes, Family Tree Maker will prompt you to insert the diskettes as needed.


Opening backup files

To open a backup copy of your Family File:

1.	From the File menu, select Restore From Backup (ALT, F, S).

2.	In the Look in lists, select the drive and folder where the file you want to open is located and then select the file name.  If you are unsure where your file is, click Find file and follow the instructions in Finding files.

3.	Click Restore.

4.	In the Save in list, select the drive and folder where you installed Family Tree Maker.  Usually this is the FTW folder on drive C.

5.	You must give your file a new name so that Family Tree Maker can make a copy of your original file and then convert the copy to a Family Tree Maker for Windows file.  Click Save to accept the name that Family Tree Maker suggests, or type a new name in the File name field and then click Save.

The file name can be any valid Windows file name, up to 255 characters, although it must have the extension .FTW.  If you do not type in the .FTW extension, Family Tree Maker will add it for you.

Family Tree Maker begins restoring your file.  If you are restoring a file from diskettes, Family Tree Maker will prompt you to insert the diskettes as needed.

Note:  For troubleshooting help and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs), remember to visit www.familytreemaker.com/support.html — this is your best source for accurate assistance with Family Tree Maker.


Compacting Family Files

If you decide to remove pictures that you have imported into a scrapbook, you will notice that the size of the Family File is not automatically reduced.  To reclaim this space, you will need to compact your Family File.

To compact your current Family File:

1.	Open the Family File that you wish to compact.  For more instructions on how to open a file, see Opening a Family File.

2.	Press Ctrl+Alt+C

Family Tree Maker will display a progress meter while it compacts your file.

Note:  For troubleshooting help and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs), remember to visit www.familytreemaker.com/support.html — this is your best source for accurate assistance with Family Tree Maker.


The New Family File dialog box

If your Family File is accidentally deleted or the data is corrupted in some way, Family Tree Maker cannot open it.  When this is the case, you are given the option of opening a backup copy of your Family File.  In order to use a backup of your Family File, you must first convert it to a Family Tree Maker for Windows  file (*.FTW) and give it a name that is different from the name of the original Family File.

When Family Tree Maker displays the New Family File dialog box:

1.	In the File name field, type a new name for your file.

The file name can be any valid Windows file name, up to 255 characters, although it must have the extension .FTW.  In addition, the name must be different from the name of the original file that can no longer be opened.  For example, if the name of the original file was SMITH.FTW, you could rename the backup file SMITH2.FTW

2.	The Save in lists show the drive and folder where Family Tree Maker will place your new Family File.  If you want to select a different location for your file, use these fields to select one.

3.	Click Save.

Family Tree Maker creates your new Family File and then displays an empty Family Page.


Copying/Exporting Family Files

If you want to export your Family File to GEDCOM, see the topic Exporting GEDCOM files from Family Tree Maker.  If you want to export your Family File for the World Family Tree Project, click here for instructions.

If you want to copy your Family File onto a diskette, make sure that the file is small enough to fit on a single diskette.  If your file is too large to fit on a single diskette, click here for instructions.

To make a copy of your Family File:

1.	From the File menu, select Copy/Export Family File (ALT, F, C).

2.	In the File name field, type a new file name.

The file name can be any valid Windows file name, up to 255 characters.

3.	In the Save in lists, select the drive and folder where you want your file copied.

4.	Click the Save as type drop-down list and select the format to which you want to export or copy the file.

5.	Click Save when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker copies or exports your file to the drive, folder, and file name that you chose.

Note:  For troubleshooting help and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs), remember to visit www.familytreemaker.com/support.html — this is your best source for accurate assistance with Family Tree Maker.


The Copy/Export dialog box

1.	Click the Save as type drop-down list and select the format to which you want to export or copy the file.

2.	In the Save in lists, select the drive and folder where you want your file copied.

3.	In the File name field, type a new file name.

4.	Click Save when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker copies or exports your file to the drive, directory, and file name that you chose.


Copying/Exporting groups of individuals

To export or delete a group of individuals:

1.	Create either a report, Ancestor tree, Descendant tree, or Outline Descendant tree containing the group of individuals that you want to export or delete.

2.	If you want to export the group of individuals to a new file, from the File menu, select Copy/Export Individuals (ALT, F, E) and then continue with step 3.  If you want to permanently delete the group of individuals, from the People menu, select Delete Individuals (ALT, P, L).  Skip the remaining steps.

3.	In the Copy/Export Individuals dialog box, click the Save as type drop-down list and then select a file format for your new file.

4.	Type a name for your new file in the File name field.

The file name can be any valid Windows file name, up to 255 characters, although it must have a three-letter extension corresponding to the file format you selected in step 3.  If you do not type in a three-letter extension, Family Tree Maker will add it for you.

5.	In the Save in lists, select the drive and folder where you want Family Tree Maker to create your new file.

6.	Click Save when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker creates a new file containing a copy of the selected information.  Your original Family File has not changed in any way.

Note:  For troubleshooting help and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs), remember to visit www.familytreemaker.com/support.html — this is your best source for accurate assistance with Family Tree Maker.


The Copy/Export Individuals dialog box

1.	Click the Save as type drop-down list and then select a file format for your new file.

2.	Type a name for your new file in the File name field.

The file name can be any valid Windows file name, up to 255 characters, although it must have a three-letter extension corresponding to the file format you selected in step 1.  If you do not type in a three-letter extension, Family Tree Maker will add it for you.

3.	In the Save in lists, select the drive and folder where you want Family Tree Maker to create your new file.

4.	Click Save when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker creates a new file containing a copy of the selected information.  Your original Family File has not changed in any way.


GEDCOM import and export

GEDCOM is a standard file format for exchanging information between genealogy programs.  The acronym GEDCOM stands for GEnealogical Data COMmunications.  The Family History Department of the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints (LDS Church) developed the GEDCOM standard.

You can use GEDCOM to transfer information into Family Tree Maker from another genealogy program that supports GEDCOM and vice versa.  By using GEDCOM, you can avoid retyping all of your family information when you switch from one program to another.

See also

Importing GEDCOM files into Family Tree Maker

Exporting GEDCOM files from Family Tree Maker

Note:  For troubleshooting help and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs), remember to visit www.familytreemaker.com/support.html — this is your best source for accurate assistance with Family Tree Maker.


Importing GEDCOM files into Family Tree Maker

To open a GEDCOM file in Family Tree Maker for Windows:

1.	From the File menu, select Open Family File (ALT, F, O).

2.	Click the Files of type drop-down list and then select GEDCOM (*.GED).

Note: If you are trying to open a PAF file from the Macintosh version of PAF, you must first save the PAF file in PAF's DOS format before attempting to open it in FTW.

3.	In the Look in lists, select the drive and folder where the file you want to open is located and then select the file name.  If you are unsure where your file is, click Find file and follow the instructions in Finding files.

4.	Click Open.

Family Tree Maker displays the New Family File dialog box.

5.	In the Save in lists, select the drive and folder where you installed Family Tree Maker.  Usually this is the FTW folder on drive C.

6.	In the New Family File dialog box, you must give the GEDCOM file a new name so that Family Tree Maker can make a copy of it and convert the copy to a Family Tree Maker for Windows file.

You can either click Save to accept the name that Family Tree Maker suggests or type a new name and then click Save.  The file name can be any valid Windows file name, up to 255 characters, although it must have the extension .FTW.  If you do not type in the .FTW extension, Family Tree Maker will add it for you.

Family Tree Maker reloads your file as a Family Tree Maker for Windows file and then displays the Import from GEDCOM dialog box.

7.	Some programs format information slightly differently than Family Tree Maker.  Using the options listed below, you can reformat your information.

Location — Family Tree Maker will allow up to 256 characters in this field.  You may select either the Keep first part if location fields are too long, or, Keep last part if location fields are too long option buttons if you are importing from a file format that allows more than 256 characters.

Options — Some programs (like PAF) add an underscore between compound names (for example, St._Germaine).  Select the Delete underscore from names check box to replace the underscore with a space.  Some programs also don't put spaces between the city, county, and state in location fields.  Select the Add spacing in location fields check box to add the normal space between these words, if necessary.

Facts to Import — Click this button to display the Facts to Import dialog box.  The list on the left contains the Family Tree Maker fact names available to be imported.  The list on the right shows what those facts will be called after they are imported.  After selecting a fact, use the option buttons to Change a Fact, Create a New Fact, or Don’t Import the fact at all.

8.	Click OK again to create the Family File.

If any errors were generated as your Family File was created, Family Tree Maker asks you if you want to see an error report.  If you choose to look at the error report immediately, Family Tree Maker will display it in a dialog box on screen.  If you want to look at it later, you can open it in a word processor such as Notepad or MS Word.  The file will be in the same folder and have the same name as the Family File you just created, except with the extension .LST.

Note:  For troubleshooting help and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs), remember to visit www.familytreemaker.com/support.html — this is your best source for accurate assistance with Family Tree Maker.


The Import from GEDCOM dialog box

Location — Some programs (like PAF) have longer location fields than Family Tree Maker does.  For example, PAF can hold the location "Warren, Trumbull County, Ohio, United States of America."  Select the Keep first part if location fields are too long option button to keep the first part of the location.  The example above would become, "Warren, Trumbull County, Ohio."  Select the Keep last part if location fields are too long option button to keep the last part of the location.  The example above would become, "Ohio, United States of America."

Options — Some programs (like PAF) add an underscore between compound names (for example, St._Germaine).  Select the Delete underscore from names check box to replace the underscore with a space.  Some programs also don't put spaces between the city, county, and state in location fields.  Select the Add spacing in location fields check box to add the normal space between these words, if necessary.


Exporting GEDCOM files from Family Tree Maker

To export your Family File to GEDCOM:

1.	From the File menu, select Copy/Export Family File (ALT, F, C).

2.	Click the Save as type drop-down list and select GEDCOM (*.GED).

3.	In the File name field, type a name for the GEDCOM file.  It must have the extension .GED.

4.	In the Save in fields, select the drive and folder where you want to place your file.

5.	Click Save.

Family Tree Maker displays the Export to GEDCOM dialog box.

6.	Make your selections from the dialog box.  Each of the options is described below.

File Type  The "Destination" field allows Family Tree Maker to check for special requirements of the program that will read the GEDCOM file.  The table below will help you make a selection.  FTW offers the most complete export; select it if you plan to later re-import the file into Family Tree Maker for Windows.  If the program you are exporting to is not listed, choose FTM.

Select this		To create this type of file
FTM		Family Tree Maker for DOS
FTW		Family Tree Maker for Windows
TempleReady		Temple submission to LDS Church
PAF		Personal Ancestral File, 2.1 or later
ROOTS		Roots II, Roots III, Roots IV, Roots V, Visual Roots

When you make a selection in the "Destination" field, Family Tree Maker makes suggestions for the "GEDCOM" and "Character set" fields.  However, if Family Tree Maker's suggestions are incorrect for your purposes, make your own selections.  Whenever possible, choose Version 5.5 in the "GEDCOM" field; it offers the best export.  When you don't know which file type to use, or when you're exporting to PAF version 2.31 or earlier, select Version 4.

Options — Select the Indent records check box to make the file more readable in a word processor.  Some programs cannot read indented records, in which case this setting will be ignored.  Select the Abbreviated tags check box to use abbreviations for the GEDCOM tags, instead of full names.

7.	Click OK.

Family Tree Maker creates the GEDCOM file.

Note:  For troubleshooting help and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs), remember to visit www.familytreemaker.com/support.html — this is your best source for accurate assistance with Family Tree Maker.


The Export to GEDCOM dialog box

Destination — This field allows Family Tree Maker to check for special requirements of the program that will read the GEDCOM file.  The table below will help you make a selection.  FTW offers the most complete export; select it if you plan to later re-import the file into Family Tree Maker for Windows.  If the program you are exporting to is not listed, choose PAF.

Select this		To create this type of file
FTM		Family Tree Maker for DOS
FTW		Family Tree Maker for Windows
TempleReady		Temple submission to LDS Church
PAF		Personal Ancestral File, 2.1 or later
ROOTS		Roots II, Roots III, Roots IV, Roots V, Visual Roots

GEDCOM and Character set — When you make a selection in the "Destination" field, Family Tree Maker makes suggestions for the "GEDCOM" and "Character set" fields.  However, if Family Tree Maker's suggestions are incorrect for your purposes, make your own selections.  Whenever possible, choose Version 5 in the "GEDCOM" field; it offers the best export.

Indent records — Select this check box to make the file more readable in a word processor.  Some programs cannot read indented records, in which case this setting will be ignored.

Abbreviated tags — Select this check box to use abbreviations for the GEDCOM tags, instead of full names.


Opening PAF files

To open a PAF file (version 2.1 or later) in Family Tree Maker for Windows:

Note: If you are trying to open a PAF file from the Macintosh version of PAF, you must first save the PAF file in PAF's DOS format before attempting to open it in FTW.

1.	From the File menu, select Open Family File (ALT, F, O).

2.	Click the Files of type drop-down list and then select Personal Ancestral File (INDIV2.DAT).

Please note:  There are two Import options.  PAF 3.0 (*.PAF) and PAF 2.x (INDIV2.DAT).  PAF versions 3.0 and later use .PAF extensions.

3.	In the Look in lists, select the drive and folder where the file you want to open is located and then select the file name.  If you are unsure where your file is, click Find file and follow the instructions in Finding files.

4.	Click Open to open the New Family File dialog box.

5.	In the New Family File dialog box, you must give the PAF file a new name so that Family Tree Maker can make a copy of it and convert the copy to a Family Tree Maker for Windows file.

Either click Save to accept the name that Family Tree Maker suggests or type a new name in the File name field and then click Save.  The file name can be any valid Windows file name, up to 255 characters, although it must have the extension .FTW.  If you do not type in the .FTW extension, Family Tree Maker will add it for you.

6.	If Family Tree Maker encountered any difficulties while importing your file, it tells you that you can view a list of warnings and errors.  After viewing the error list (if necessary) you can begin working with your Family File.

Note:  For troubleshooting help and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs), remember to visit www.familytreemaker.com/support.html — this is your best source for accurate assistance with Family Tree Maker.


The Open Personal Ancestral File dialog box

1.	Click the Files of type drop-down list and then select Personal Ancestral File (INDIV2.DAT).

2.	In the Look in lists, select the drive and folder where the file you want to open is located and then select the file name.  If you are unsure where your file is, click Find file and follow the instructions in Finding files.

3.	In the Open Personal Ancestral File dialog box, you must give the PAF file a new name so that Family Tree Maker can make a copy of it and convert the copy to a Family Tree Maker for Windows file.

Either click Save to accept the name that Family Tree Maker suggests or type a new name and then click Save.  The file name can be any valid Windows file name, up to 255 characters, although it must have the extension .FTW.  If you do not type in the .FTW extension, Family Tree Maker will add it for you.

4.	If Family Tree Maker encountered any difficulties while importing your file, it tells you that you can view a list of warnings and errors.  After viewing the error list (if necessary) you can begin working with your Family File.


Finding files

You can begin a search from two different locations:

 The Open Family File dialog box, which Family Tree Maker displays when you select Open Family File from the File menu (ALT, F, O).

 The Insert Picture dialog box, which Family Tree Maker displays when you select Insert Picture from File from the Picture/Object menu (only available from the Scrapbook view) (ALT, O, F).

From either of those dialog boxes, follow these steps to find your file:

1.	Click Find file.

2.	Click the File name field and type in a file name if you already know part or all of it.

3.	Click the File format drop-down list and then select a file type.

4.	Click the Search drop-down list and then select a set of drives for Family Tree Maker to search.

5.	Click Search.

6.	If several file names appear in the box, use the scroll bar to scan the list for the file name you're trying to find.  To open a file in the list, select the file name and click Open.

Note:  For troubleshooting help and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs), remember to visit www.familytreemaker.com/support.html — this is your best source for accurate assistance with Family Tree Maker.


The Find File dialog box

1.	Click the File format drop-down list and select a file type.

2.	Type in a file name in the File name field if you know part or all of it.

3.	Click the Search drop-down list and select a set of drives for Family Tree Maker to search.

4.	Click Search.

Family Tree Maker lists the matching file paths in the Found files box.

5.	If several file names appear in the box, use the scroll bar to scan the list for the file name you're trying to find.  To open a file in the list, select the file name and click Open.


Deleting files

You can delete a Family File from the Open Family File dialog box.  You can also use Windows file management utilities if you need to delete files.  In Windows 95, you can use either the Windows Explorer or My Computer utilities.  See your Microsoft Windows User's Guide or On-line Help for more information about these utilities.

To delete a file:

1.	From the File menu, select Open Family File (ALT, F, O).

2.	Click the Files of type drop-down list and select the format of the file that you want to delete.

3.	In the Look in lists, select the drive and folder where the file you want to delete is located and then select the file name.  If you are unsure where your file is, click Find file and follow the instructions in Finding files.

4.	Press the DELETE key or right-click the file name and select Delete from the menu.

5.	When asked if you want to send the file to the Recycle Bin, click Yes.

6.	Click Cancel to return to the current Family File.

Note:  For troubleshooting help and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs), remember to visit www.familytreemaker.com/support.html — this is your best source for accurate assistance with Family Tree Maker.


Exiting Family Tree Maker

To quit Family Tree Maker:

1.	From the File menu, select Exit (ALT, F, X).

Family Tree Maker backs up your information and closes the program.

2.	If you're done using your computer, Shut Down the computer.

Note:  For troubleshooting help and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs), remember to visit www.familytreemaker.com/support.html — this is your best source for accurate assistance with Family Tree Maker.


What's New in Family Tree Maker?

New in Family Tree Maker Version 8.0

•	The Publishing Center — This new Family Tree Maker view contains interactive “links” making it fast and easy to create, edit, and update your own Family Home Page or Family Books.  Add trees, reports, pictures, and more — all from this single location — and then share your personalized (and secure) Home Page with friends and family alike.

•	Find and Replace — From the Family Page view, you can search your entire Family File for a particular name or location and then, with a click of your mouse, replace any single instance — or all instances— with the text of your choice.

•	FamilyFinder Tips — From the Toolbar, or from the Genealogy “How-To” Guide, select FamilyFinder Tips to display this helpful collection of hints and Internet links to keep your research moving smoothly.  Use the searchable Index to select the state, country, or date you’re researching for additional ideas and suggestions.

•	Family Group Sheets — New formatting options allow you to select from a wider variety of templates providing even more ways for you to share information on your Family Group Sheet.

Show me more about:

The Publishing Center

Find and Replace

Note:  For troubleshooting help and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs), remember to visit www.familytreemaker.com/support.html — this is your best source for accurate assistance with Family Tree Maker.

<><><><><><><><><><><><><><><><><><><><><><><><><><><><><><><><><><><><>

Features from Previous Versions

Introduced in Version 7.5

•	Drag and Drop Boxes — let you move a single box or whole branch of your Ancestor or Descendant Tree exactly where you want it.

•	Drag and Drop Images — allow you to insert and re-position multiple images in the background of your family trees anywhere on the page.

•	Drag and Drop Captions — display your favorite family stories right next to the branches they involve — what a great way to personalize your trees.

•	Saved Views — keep you from repeating customization steps by letting you easily store and re-use custom formatting in any tree or report you’ve created.

•	Printing Enhancements — include a list of reports, an expanded Medical Information Report, and state abbreviations.

Introduced in Version 7.0

•	Family Maps — plot events on maps of the U.S., North America, Western Europe, or the World.  Crop, scale, add your personal text, font, and border styles and you’re ready to dazzle in your Family Books or at your next reunion.

•	Fit-to-Page Ancestor Trees — automatically fit up to six generation on one page — up 50% from the limit of four.

•	FamilyFinder Center — gives you access to vast genealogical resources — from CD to Internet — all in one convenient location.  Easy links create instant Family Reports, Research Journals, and more.

•	Improved FamilyFinder Search — pinpoints and prioritizes Family Archives that are most likely to yield information about your ancestors.

•	Improved Merging — now identifies more possible matches to help prevent the creation of duplicate individual records.

•	Burial Information — now appears right on the Family Page below the death and date location.

•	Alternate Names — help you easily record and search for an individual’s “aka” (also know as) like any other alternate fact or event.

Introduced in Version 6.0

•	All-One-Trees — neatly display everybody in your Family File, even unrelated individuals.

•	Vertical Ancestor Trees — look more like a real tree, growing from bottom to top instead of side to side like a traditional ancestor tree.

•	Back and Forward Buttons — help you navigate between views of your Family File as easily as you browse around your favorite Internet sites.

•	Relationship and Soundex Calculators — give you easy insight into individuals’ kinship and variations on their names.

•	Privacy Mode — can help you easily create printouts or copy your file for others to use without including the private data of living relatives.

•	Foreign Language Form Letters — assist you in requesting records from overseas government agencies in Spanish, German, Italian, or French.

Introduced in Version 5.0

•	Hourglass Trees — display both ancestors and descendants together in one tree, in either standard or fan format and fully customizable with fonts, colors, borders, line, and box styles.

•	Expanded Facts and Events — go far beyond the original 13 fields — you can record a virtually unlimited amount of information about individuals, including alternate and conflicting information.

•	Historical Timelines — show each ancestor’s life span as a bar that’s graphed horizontally across he decades of time and landmark events.

•	Interactive Research Journal — helps you record, categorize, sort, and update your own research To-Do List.

•	Color Coding — creates trees that are much easier to read — it uses different shades to distinguish individuals’ tree boxes by gender or generation.

•	Custom Report Sorting — allows you to choose any two columns and sort each line of a report in chronological or alphabetical order.

•	PAF 3.0 Support — makes it easy to read just about everything you’ve recorded in PAF files, such as marriage notes, reference numbers, LDS ordinances, and more.

Introduced in Version 4.4

•	Fan Trees — display ancestors or descendants in an expanding circle around a primary individual.

•	Reference Numbers — for individuals and marriages make it easy to identify individuals — you can even set prefixes or suffixes to track the source of the information.

•	Spell-Checker — can scan your notes and text items and alert you to potential mistakes.

•	Online FamilyFinder Reports — scour the Internet for references to individuals in your Family File.

Introduced in Version 4.0

•	Family Books — automatically assemble your choice of trees, reports, and other printouts into one continuous document with Table of Contents and Index.

•	Book Layout Trees — neatly split large family trees onto as many standard-size pages as it takes, labeling each split with the page number where that branch is continued.  Boxes are never cut in half on page breaks.

•	Sources Database — helps you easily keep track of details about your research sources in a computerized card file.

•	Free Web Page — where you can post trees and reports to help your long-lost relatives locate you and collaborate on research.


Entering family information

Entering basic information in Family Pages

Entering details in the More About dialog boxes

Entering pictures, sounds, etc. in Scrapbooks


Entering basic information in Family Pages

Overview

All about the Family Page

How to...

Fill in a Family Page

Enter more detailed information

Check for errors

Correct errors

Note your sources

Add another spouse

Add another set of parents

Add someone whose link is unclear

Move between Family Pages

Print Family Pages

Change field labels

See reports and trees

What is this?

Family Page tabs

The More button

The Scrapbook button

The Spouses button

The Fastfields trash can button

The toolbar

Field labels

"a" next to a field

"s" next to a field


The Family Page tabs

These tabs let you move between Family Pages.  Click the tab labeled with the name(s) of the individual(s) that you want to see.


The More button

Click this button to record or view more detailed information about the individual or marriage that the button is next to.


The Scrapbook button

Click this button to insert or view pictures, videos, sounds, and more for the individual or marriage that the button is next to.


The Spouses button

Click this button to create another spouse, navigate to another spouse, or change the preferred spouse of the individual that the button is next to.


The Fastfields trash can button

Click this button to delete the currently displayed word from the Fastfield word list.


The Toolbar

The Toolbar appears below the menu bar.  It displays icons (buttons) that you can click to change views or to open dialog boxes, depending on the current view.

You may also select to display the Side Toolbar which, depending on the current view, displays the options available for that view.


Field labels

Field labels are the descriptions (such as Husband/Wife, Date, or Married) that appear next to empty spaces where you enter names, dates, and other information.  They indicate what information you should type in the blank space.


Buttons on the Family Page

The More buttons

Click these buttons to record or view more detailed information about the individual or marriage that the button is next to.

The Scrapbook buttons

Click these buttons to insert or view pictures, videos, sounds, and more for the individual or marriage that the button is next to.

The Spouses buttons

Click these buttons to create another spouse, navigate to another spouse, or change the preferred spouse of the individual that the button is next to.


Toolbar buttons

Selecting Toolbar buttons allows you to quickly change views in Family Tree Maker.  You may also customize your toolbar by choosing which icons you want to display.

Please note that not all buttons are available in all views and resolutions.

Index — Click this toolbar button to go to the Index of Individuals.

Go Back — Click this toolbar button to go back to a previous view (i.e. another tree, report, or family page you were working on previously).

Family Page — Click this button to see the current individual's Family Page.

Research Journal — Click this button to display a Research Journal with the current individual as the primary individual.

Scrapbook — Click this button to see the current individual's (or marriage) Scrapbook.

Ancestor Tree — Click this button to display an Ancestor Tree with the current individual as the primary individual.

Descendant Tree — Click this button to display a Descendant Tree with the current individual as the primary individual.

Hourglass Tree — Click this button to display an Hourglass Tree with the current individual as the primary individual.

All-in-One Tree — Click this button to display an All-in-One Tree with the current individual as the primary individual.

Outline Descendant Tree — Click this button to display an Outline Descendant Tree with the current individual as the primary individual.

Genealogy Report — Click this button to display one of three Genealogy Reports for the primary individual.

Family Group Sheet — Click this button to display a Family Group Sheet for the current individual.

Report — Click this button to display a Report.

Books — Click this button to display a Family Book.

Timeline — Click this button to display a Timeline.

FamilyFinder Center — Click this button to go to the FamilyFinder Center.

Maps — Click this button to display a Map.

Calendar — Click this button to display a calendar.

Publishing Center — Click this to go to the Publishing Center.

Online — Click this button to go to the Family Tree Maker Web site.

FamilyFinder (Search CD) — Click this button to research your family tree from your own computer.

Print — When you're in Scrapbook print preview, you can click this button to print the Scrapbook that's currently open.

Setup — When you're in Scrapbook print preview, you can click this button to change the print setup for the Scrapbook view.


All about the Family Page

To enter basic family information you fill out a Family Page, which is the first screen that you see after you open a Family File.

A Family Page is just like a paper form.  It consists of labeled blanks to fill with information.  Some fields only allow you to enter certain kinds of information.  For example, sex fields only allow you to enter "M", "F", or a question mark.  You can try to enter something else, but Family Tree Maker will catch it and ask you to fill in the field appropriately.

Some fields are "Fastfields."  Fastfields help you enter your information into Family Tree Maker more quickly by remembering the words that you type most often.  We'll describe Fastfields in the topic Fastfields.

Family Tree Maker can also catch any conflicting information that you enter.  For example, if you enter a child's birth date that is prior to the mother's birth date, Family Tree Maker will catch this conflict.  To turn this type of error checking on and off, see the topic How to: select errors to check for during data entry.


Filling in a Family Page

Entering names

Entering dates

Entering locations

Entering information about a marriage

Entering information about children


Moving between Family Pages

Displaying a parent's Family Page

Displaying a child's Family Page

Displaying additional spouses

Displaying additional parents

Using the Index of Individuals

Locating individuals in your Family File


Moving between Family Pages

Displaying a parent's Family Page

Displaying a child's Family Page

Displaying additional spouses

Displaying additional parents

Using the Index of Individuals

Locating individuals in your Family File


Entering details in the More About dialog boxes

To display the More About dialog box for an individual or marriage:

1.	Go to the Family Page containing the individual or marriage whose More About dialog boxes you want to see.

2.	On the Family Page, place the cursor on the name of the individual or marriage for which you want to display the More About dialog box.

3.	From the View menu, select More About (ALT, V, M).  From the submenu, select the name of a More About dialog box.

Family Tree Maker displays the dialog box that you selected.

To display the More About dialog box for Scrapbooks:

1.	Follow the steps above to select the individual for whom you want to see a Scrapbook.

2.	From the View menu, select Scrapbook.

3.	Then, from the Picture/Object menu, select More About.

For detailed descriptions of the More About dialog boxes, select the topics below.

See also

Entering brief biographical facts

Entering nicknames, titles, and parental relationship information

Entering medical information

Entering addresses

Entering stories and notes

Entering marriage stories and notes

Entering pictures, sounds, etc., in Scrapbooks


Entering pictures, sounds, etc. in Scrapbooks

Overview

All about Scrapbooks

How to...

Open Scrapbooks

Insert items into Scrapbooks

Create captions and categories for Picture/Objects

Move around in a Scrapbook

Find information in a Scrapbook

Rearrange Scrapbook items

Edit Picture/Objects

Set brightness and contrast

Set compression and resolution

Play objects or view pictures at full size

Print Scrapbook pages

See reports and trees

What is this?

The More button

The Picture/Object areas

The page-turning buttons

The toolbar


Correcting errors

Editing text

Removing an individual from your Family File

Removing groups of individuals from your Family File

Detaching incorrect spouses from each other

Linking individuals by marriage

Detaching a child from the wrong parents

Linking children to their parents

Rearranging children

Merging duplicate individuals

Merging specific individuals


Adding someone whose link is unclear

To use the Add Unrelated Individual command:

1.	From the People menu, select Add Unrelated Individual (ALT, P, U).

2.	Family Tree Maker displays a blank Family Page.  Enter the individual's name and birth and death dates in the appropriate fields.

Note:  Because this individual is not currently related to anyone in your file, you will need to use the Index of Individuals to navigate to any other Family Page.  See Using the Index of Individuals.

Unrelated individuals will not appear in trees or Kinship reports until you attach them to the rest of the family.  When you find the link between the individual and the rest of your family, use the Attach Spouse or Attach Child command, to connect them to the rest of your family.

See also

Linking individuals by marriage

Linking children to their parents


Entering names

When you enter names use full given names, including the middle name.  Type names first-name-first and use maiden names for women.

Aka’s (or nicknames) — Enter them in the Lineage dialog box.  See Entering nicknames, titles, and parental relationship information.

Name changes — Name changes should also be entered in the Lineage dialog box.  See Entering nicknames, titles, and parental relationship information.  For example, if "Johann Smythe" changed his name to "John Smith," you could enter "John Smith" as his name on the Family Page and record the fact that he was also known as "Johann Smythe" in the Lineage dialog box.

Unusual last names — If at some point you notice that Family Tree Maker has incorrectly identified someone's last name, place the entire last name between backslash characters.  In this example, Connie \Irish Hess\, Family Tree Maker interprets the last name as "Irish Hess."

A note about “special characters” — If the name you are searching for contains a special letter with a symbol over it (such as š or û), try searching for that name by replacing the special letter with the "wildcard" asterisk (*).

Last names with suffixes — If a suffix is attached to the last name (for example, "Jr." or, "Ph.D.") be sure to separate it from the last name with a comma (John Smith, Jr.).  You don't need to use commas with Roman numerals, unless the number is greater than eight.

Missing last names — To show that an individual has no last name, place two backslash characters together without a space between them at the end of the name.  For example, Running Bear\\.

Titles — Do not enter titles such as "Mr.," "Mrs.," or "Dr." on the Family Page.  You can use the Titles dialog box described in How to: select title preferences(Mr., Mrs., etc.), to select titles such as "Mr." or "Mrs." for most of the individuals in your Family File.  If an individual has a special title, such as "Dr." or "Reverend," enter it in the Lineage dialog box.  See Entering nicknames, titles, and parental relationship information.


Entering dates

The "Date" fields in Family Tree Maker can handle any date after 1/1/100 A.D.  You can enter a date almost any way you want, but Family Tree Maker will automatically put it in a standard format.  To change the standard format, see How to: choose the date format and units of measure.

Leaving a date field blank means the event hasn't happened.  Entering a question mark means that you know the event happened, but aren't sure when.  You can also type "Dead" or "Deceased" in death date fields and date codes used by the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints in any date fields

There may be events for which you don't know an exact date.  The table below shows how you can record estimated and partial dates, as well as date ranges.  In the table, you'll notice that the words "ABOUT", "ABT", and "Bet." are used to indicate approximate dates or ranges.  If you like, you can change these words.  See How to: change field labels.

You type this	You get this
1776	1776
Jul 1776	July 1776
4 Jul	July 4
est 7/4/1776	Abt. July 4, 1776
abt 7/4/1776	Abt. July 4, 1776
about 7/4/1776	Abt. July 4, 1776
circa 7/4/1776	Abt. July 4, 1776
bef 7/4/1776	Bef. July 4, 1776
before 7/4/1776	Bef. July 4, 1776
aft 7/4/1776	Aft. July 4, 1776
after 7/4/1776	Aft. July 4, 1776
April 3-6, 1932	Bet.  April 3 - 6, 1932
Bet. Apr 24, 1718 and May 1, 1718	Bet. Apr. 24 - May 1, 1718
April 1943-April 1945	Bet. Apr. 1943 - Apr. 1945
Bet. 2/2/1908 and 10/1/1909	Bet. Feb. 2, 1908 - Oct. 1, 1909
?	Unknown
Double Dates — Family Tree Maker can display double dates to account for the crossover between the Julian and Gregorian calendars.  If you enter a date that falls between January 1 and March 25 for any year before 1753, a double date will appear.

Double dates work as follows:  you can type either Jan 1, 1493/4 or Jan 1, 1493/1494; both display as January 1, 1493/94.  If you don't type in both of the years, Family Tree Maker interprets the year you typed as the second year.  For example, if you type January 1, 1494, it's displayed as January 1, 1493/94.


Selecting title preferences (Mr., Mrs., etc.)

When you display or print Family Tree Maker trees, reports, and other views, you can choose to include titles, such as "Mr." and "Mrs." in front of people's names.  The Title dialog box, where you can select the default titles to use with most people in your Family File, is described below.  If anyone in your Family File uses a more unique title, such as "Dr." or "Reverend," enter that title in the Lineage dialog box.  For more information see the topic Entering nicknames, titles, and parental relationship information.

To change title preferences:

1.	From the File menu, select Preferences (ALT, F, F).

2.	From the Preferences sub-menu, select Titles (ALT, T).

3.	Make your changes in the Titles dialog box.

For a description of the options in the Title Preferences dialog box, click here.

4.	Click OK when you've made your changes.


The Title Preferences dialog box

Married Males/Married Females — The title that you type here will appear on labels and cards for all men and women who are currently married or have ever been married.  The defaults are "Mr." and "Mrs."

Not married Males/Not married Females — The title that you type here will appear on labels and cards for all men and women who have never been married.  The defaults are "Mr." and "Ms."

Children Males/Children Females — The title that you type here will appear on labels and cards for all children.  The default is to have no title.

Children are individuals younger than X years old  All individuals under the age that you type in this field will appear on labels and cards with the "Children" title.  All individuals this age and over will appear with either the "Married" or "Not married" title.  The default age is 13.

Use defaults — Use this button to reset the titles and the cutoff age to their default values.


Entering and abbreviating locations

"Location" fields are for entering an individual's place of birth, death, or marriage (these fields are usually preceded by the field label "in”).  Normally, you enter the city and state.  You might also want to enter the county if it's important.  To conserve space, enter the country name only if it's unusual.  Be sure to put commas between the city, county, state, and country names.  Correct punctuation allows Family Tree Maker to abbreviate correctly when necessary.

Note for Maps:  When displaying your family history in a Map view, keep in mind that Family Tree Maker takes the information to display from your More About Facts, and Marriage pages.  You will have the best success if you enter your comment, if any, followed by a slash “/” mark, and then the location.  Family Tree Maker takes the text after the slash mark, or after the last slash if more than one appears, as the location.  And since there are many cities and towns across the country, and worldwide, that share the same names, you will have fewer ambiguous location errors if you also include the county, state, or country along with the town or city name.

To help you save time when entering family information, Family Tree Maker has a special feature called Fastfields.  Most of the Fastfields in Family Tree Maker are location fields.  The Fastfields feature remembers the names of the last 50 locations that you've entered into any location field.  This means that when you start typing the name of a town that you've previously typed in a location field, Fastfields automatically fills in the rest of the letters for you.  For more information, see the two topics listed below.

See also

Fastfields

How to: select Fastfield preferences


Fastfields

To help you save time when entering family information, Family Tree Maker has a special feature called Fastfields.  Most of the Fastfields in Family Tree Maker are location fields, such as birth location and marriage location fields. In addition, Fastfields work with last names in name fields.  Here, we'll explain Fastfields in terms of location fields.

The Fastfields feature remembers the names of the last 50 locations that you've entered into any location field.  This means that when you start typing the name of a town that you've previously typed in a location field, Fastfields automatically fills in the rest of the letters for you.

For example, say that you have typed the following two birth locations into Family Tree Maker:  "Abilene, Louisiana" and "Arlington, Virginia."  Then, you go to another birth location field and type the letter "A."  Fastfields immediately looks for a location beginning with "A" that you've previously typed.  Since "Abilene, Louisiana" is alphabetically the first location beginning with an "A," Fastfields automatically places "Abilene, Louisiana" into the field.  If you then typed an "r" after the "A," Fastfields would replace "Abilene, Louisiana" with "Arlington, Virginia."  If "Arlington, Virginia" wasn't the name that you wanted in that birth location field, you would just continue typing the name that you wanted, such as "Argyle, New York."  In short, Fastfields refines its suggestions as you type, and quits making suggestions when it no longer has any logical choices.

If you are not comfortable using Fastfields, you can turn them off in the Fastfields preferences dialog box.  See the topic How to: select Fastfield preferences.  You can also delete individual words from a Fastfield word list.  See the topic Deleting Fastfield words.


Deleting Fastfield words

To delete a word from a Fastfield word list:

1.	Go to a Fastfield for the type of word that you want to delete.  For example, if you want to delete a last name, go to a name field.

2.	Start typing the word.

3.	When the word appears, click the trash can button that appears on the right side of the Fastfield.

4.	If necessary, re-type the correct information in the field where you just deleted the Fastfield word.


Entering information about a marriage

The "Marriage" fields record the date and location of a couple's marriage.  You can also record the status of their relationship in the relationship status fields.  For example, if a couple was married, you would choose "Married" from the "Beginning status" drop-down list.  When you choose "Partner" or "Friend" in the "Beginning status" field, Family Tree Maker automatically substitutes "Meeting date" for "Marriage date" in the records you're keeping about those two individuals.  If you merged information from a World Family Tree, some marriage fields may contain the word "Private."  This is to protect the privacy of individuals who are still living.

Note for Maps:  When displaying your family history in a Map view, keep in mind that Family Tree Maker takes the information to display from your More About Marriages, and Facts pages.  You will have the best success if you enter your comment, if any, followed by a slash “/” mark, and then the location.  Family Tree Maker takes the text after the slash mark, or after the last slash if more than one appears, as the location.  And, since there are many cities and towns across the country, and worldwide, that share the same names, you will have fewer ambiguous location errors if you also include the county, state, or country along with the town or city name.

Each marriage has its own set of More About dialog boxes for recording additional information about a marriage, including special marital events.  The More About dialog boxes for a marriage are also where you'll find the "Ending status" field.  For more information about the More About dialog boxes for a marriage, see Entering marriage stories and notes.

Each marriage also has a Scrapbook for entering pictures, videos, and other non-textual information about a couple.  See Entering pictures, sounds, etc. in Scrapbooks.

See also

Recording intermarriage


Entering information about children

The "Children" list at the bottom of the Family Page is for recording the names, sexes, and birth dates of the children of the parents on that Family Page.

Family Tree Maker automatically inserts the husband's last name after children's first and middle names in the name field.  You can type over the name that Family Tree Maker inserts if the children have different last names.

The "Sex" field accepts the letters "M" and "F" for "male" and "female," as well as "?" for cases where the sex is unknown.

Note:	You can change a child's sex at any time by typing over the current sex.  If the child is married, the spouse's sex will not change automatically.

There are different ways that you can enter the names of children who were not born to their parents, such as stepchildren, foster children, or adopted children.  Some people prefer only to record bloodline relationships in their family trees, while others just want to show who makes up the family.

If you are interested in tracing your family's bloodline, only enter the names of children born to the parents on each Family Page.  If you want to record everyone who makes up the family, enter all children as you wish.  You can enter adopted, foster, and stepchildren as children of their foster, adoptive, or stepparents and leave it at that, or you can use the Lineage dialog box to indicate the special nature of the relationship.  See Entering nicknames, titles, and parental relationship information.  If children have more than two parents due to divorce and remarriage or other circumstances, you can enter those children on multiple Family Pages.

When you enter children on a Family Page, it's good practice to list them in the order in which they were born.  The oldest child goes first.  If you are unsure of the exact birth date of a child, but know that the child was born before or after one of his siblings, give the child an approximate birth date using "Before," "After," "About," "Circa," or "Estimated."  This way, the child will sort in the correct birth order.

Sometimes you'll uncover new children that need to be inserted between two children that are already listed.  You may also find errors in children's birth dates so that you need to re-order them.  Family Tree Maker provides commands such as Move Child, Insert Child, and Sort Children that let you rearrange children.  See Rearranging children for details.


Rearranging children

These three commands let you rearrange the individuals in a "Children" list on the Family Page.  Always use these commands to rearrange children.  Never attempt to rearrange children by typing over names that are already there.

Using Insert Child

Select this topic to get help about inserting a new child between two children who are already in the "Children" list.

Using Move Child

Select this topic to get help about moving a child from one position to another position in a "Children" list.

Using Sort Children

Select this topic to get help about sorting the children in a "Children" list so that they appear in the order of their birth dates.


Using Insert Child

The Insert Child command lets you add a new child between two existing children on a Family Page.

To insert a new child:

1.	Place the cursor on the row where you want the new child's name to appear.

2.	From the People menu, select Insert Child.

The child whose name the cursor is on moves down (as do the children below), leaving the cursor at the beginning of a new, empty line.  You may now enter the new child's name, sex, and birth date on the empty line.

See also

Using Move Child

Using Sort Children


Using Move Child

With the Move Child command you can move a child from one location to another within the same Family Page.  To move a child from one Family Page to another, use the Detach Child and Attach Child commands described in Detaching a child from the wrong parents and Linking children to their parents.

To move a child within a "Children" list:

1.	In the Children list, place the cursor on the child you want to move.

Note:  To exchange two adjacent children in a "Children" list, select the lower child as the one to move, then move that child upward.

2.	From the People menu, select Move Child From (ALT, P, M).

Family Tree Maker displays a message asking you to confirm the move.

3.	Click OK.

4.	In the Children list on the same Family Page, place the cursor on the row where you want the child to end up.

5.	From the People menu, select Move Child To (ALT, P, M).

The other children on the list move down, and the individual you moved ends up in the row that you selected in step 4.

See also

Using Insert Child

Using Sort Children


Using Sort Children

To sort the children on a Family Page by birth order:

1.	Go to the Family Page where you want to sort the children.

2.	From the People menu, select Sort Children (ALT, P, S).

Family Tree Maker tells you that it is sorting the children.

3.	Click OK to continue.

When the children are sorted, the oldest child's information appears at the top of the list, and the youngest child's information appears at the bottom.  Twins or triplets stay in the order in which you entered them.

Note:  If a date field is blank, that child will sort at the top of the list.  If a date field has a question mark (?), that child will sort at the bottom of the list.  If you don't know the exact birth date of a child, but know that the child was born before or after another child, use a "Before" or "After" date prefix so that the child sorts in the correct order.  See Entering dates for more information.

See also

Using Insert Child

Using Move Child


Recording intermarriage

To enter an intermarriage:

1.	On the Family Pages where each individual appears as a child, enter all of their information.

2.	Go to the Family Page of one of the individuals.  Enter only the name and birth date of their spouse.  Don't enter the spouse's parents a second time!

Make sure that the names and birth dates match the ones you entered in step one exactly.

3.	Family Tree Maker will ask if the two individuals are the same.  If it doesn't ask, double-check that the names and birth dates are exactly the same.

4.	Click Yes.

Family Tree Maker displays the Merge Individuals dialog box.

5.	Click Merge.

Family Tree Maker links the two together.


Documenting your sources

To record source information for a field:

1.	Place your cursor in the field for which you want to record source information.

2.	From the View menu, select Source (ALT, V, U).

3.	Type the source information in the Source-Citation dialog box.

For a description of the options in the Source-Citation dialog box, click here.

4.	When you're finished entering source information, click OK.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the field for which you recorded sources.  There should be an "s" next to that field.  If you want, you can print source information in your trees.  See How to: select formats for names, dates, etc.


The Source-Citation dialog box

Title of source — Type the name of the source, or click the Find Master Source button to choose from a list of existing sources.  For a description of the Find Master Source dialog box, click here.  The source is the document or resource where you found the information.  For example, if you found marriage information in a church register, type the name of this document in this field.  If your source of information was an individual, type that individual's name in the field.  Make sure your source names are descriptive so that you can tell the difference between similar documents.  For example, many of your birth dates may come from birth certificates.  If you simply enter birth certificate in the "Title of source" field, you can't tell the difference between your mother's birth certificate and grandmother's birth certificate.  So your source titles should look more like this:  birth certificate for Jane Smith.

Edit Master Source — When you add a new source, you can click this button to enter detailed information about the source. For a description of the options in the Edit Master Source dialog box, click here.

Citation page — Type the page number, record number, or a brief description of the location of the information in the source. For instance, you would type the page number where you found the marriage information in this field.  If your source of information was an individual, you could type the date the conversation took place in the field.

Citation text — Type the information you found in the source that is relevant to the current field in your Family File. For example, if you are documenting a death date/location, and your source is a letter, you might type the relevant passage exactly as it appears in the letter.

Footnote — Shows how this source-citation will appear when you print it.  You can change the footnote text by typing over the default footnote text. If you later change your mind and want to return to the original footnote text, then click Restore Footnote to undo your footnote changes.  If you entered source information in a previous version of Family Tree Maker, the information you entered will appear in this field.

Include citation text in footnote — Select this check box if you want to include the citation text in your footnote.

New — Click this button if you want to enter another source-citation for the same field.  This button saves the current entry and clears the screen for the next entry.  For example, if you just documented an individual's death date from the Social Security Death Index, and you also have a death notice from the newspaper, you can document the newspaper source as well.

Delete — Click this button to delete the current source-citation.

Next — If you've already entered other source-citations for this field, you can click this button to move forward to the next entry.

Prev — If you've already entered other source-citations for this field, you can click this button to move back to the previous entry.

First — If you've already entered other source-citations for this field, you can click this button to jump to the first entry.

Final — If you've already entered other source-citations for this field, you can click this button to jump to the last entry.


The Master Source dialog box

Author/Originator — Type the name of the person or organization that created the source.

Publication facts — Type information about the source publisher or publication.

Source media — Select the source document type from the list.

Call number — Type the reference number used to identify the source in the archive containing the source.

Source location — Type the location of the archive containing the source.

Comments — Type any additional information you wish to record about the source.

Source quality — Type a note about the condition of the source document and the quality of the information in the source.


Deleting Master Sources

Some times you may make mistakes when documenting your sources and you'll want to remove some sources entirely. Family Tree Maker makes it easy for you to delete the Master Sources that you no longer need. However, before a master source can be deleted, all citations associated with that source must first be removed.

To quickly pinpoint the citations associated with a particular Master Source, you can print the Documented Events report (a list of all fact, dates, and locations you've documented). Use the Documented Events report to find out which citations are associated with the master sources you want to delete.

Step 1: Print the Documented Events Report

1.	From the View menu, select Report.

2.	From the Format Menu, select Report Format.

3.	Select Documented Events from the list, and then click OK.

Family Tree Maker displays the Documented Events Report on screen.

4.	To print the report, from the File menu, select Print Documented Events Report.

5.	Click OK to begin printing.

Step 2: Delete the Citations

1.	First navigate to the fact associated with the citation you want to delete. For example, to delete one of the citations associated with John Milkovic's birth date, you would first need to display his Family Page.

2.	Click in the appropriate fact field, and then from the View menu, select Source (or press CTRL+S keys on your keyboard).

Family Tree Maker displays the Source-Citation dialog box.

3.	Click Delete.

4.	Repeat steps 1-3 for all citations you want to delete.

Step 3: Delete the Master Sources

1.	From the Edit menu, select Edit Master Sources.

Family Tree Maker displays the Edit Master Sources dialog box.

2.	Find and go to the Master source you want to delete. Use the navigation buttons to cycle through each source one-by-one or click Find Master Source to display a list of all Master Sources at once.

3.	Once you have located the Master Source you want to delete, click Delete.

For more information or assistance, you can contact Technical Support at:

www.familytreemaker.com/support.html


The Find Master Source dialog box

In the Title field, type the name of the source you want to find.  Family Tree Maker scrolls to the first source with a similar name.  If you don't know the name of the source, scroll through the list of sources and click a source to select it from the list.


Displaying a parent's Family Page

If you are on a Family Page and you want to see the current wife's parents, click the tab on the right side of the screen that says "Parents of <wife>." Family Tree Maker will display a Family Page with the wife listed as a child, and "Husband" and "Wife" fields where her parents should be.  If you are on a Family Page and you want to see the current husband's parents, click the tab on the right side of the screen that says "Parents of <husband>."

See also

Using the Index of Individuals

Locating individuals in your Family File


Displaying a child's Family Page

To see the Family Page of a child, click the tab on the right side of the screen labeled with that child's name.  Family Tree Maker will display a Family Page with the child listed either as a husband or wife, and a "Children" list where his or her children should be.

See also

Using the Index of Individuals

Locating individuals in your Family File


Displaying the Family Pages of siblings

To see the Family Page of a husband's or wife's sibling:

1.	Click the tab for the husband's or wife's parents.

2.	On the parents' Family Page, click the tab labeled with the name of the child whose Family Page you want to see.

If the child whose Family Page you want to see is not visible in the "Children" list, use the scroll bar on the right side of the list to scroll through the children.

See also

Using the Index of Individuals

Locating individuals in your Family File


Displaying additional spouses

If you have not yet added the "additional spouse" to your Family File, see the topic How to: add another spouse.

To see a Family Page containing another of an individual's spouses:

1.	On the Family Page, click Spouses next to the individual whose Spouses dialog box you want to see.

2.	In the Select a spouse to go to list, click the name of the spouse whose Family Page you want to see and then click OK.

Family Tree Maker displays the Family Page containing the other spouse.

See also

Using the Index of Individuals

Locating individuals in your Family File


Displaying additional parents

If you have not yet added the "additional parents" to your Family File, see the topic How to: add another spouse.

To see a Family Page containing a child's other parents:

1.	On the Family Page, select the child whose Other Parents dialog box you want to see.

2.	From the People menu, select Other Parents (ALT, P, P).

3.	In the Parents list, click the names of the parents whose Family Page you want to see and then click OK.

Family Tree Maker displays the Family Page containing those parents.

See also

Choosing preferred parents


Displaying trees, reports, and other views of your information

To see another view of your family information, click the View menu and select one of the following items:

Family Page (ALT, V, F)	Kinship Report (ALT, V, K)
More About (ALT, V, M)	Custom Report (ALT, V, R, C)
More About — Facts (ALT, V, M, F)	Alternate Facts Report (ALT, V, R, F)
More About — Address (ALT, V, M, A)	Address Report (ALT, V, R, A)
More About — Medical (ALT, V, M, M)	Medical Information Report (ALT, V, R, I)
More About — Lineage (ALT, V, M, L)	Birthdays/Living Individ’s Report (ALT, V, R, L)
More About — Notes (ALT, V, M, N)	Marriage Report (ALT, V, R, M)
Source (ALT, V, U)	Parentage Report (ALT, V, R, P)
Scrapbook (ALT, V, S)	Bibliography Report (ALT, V, R, B)
All-in-One Tree (ALT, V, N)	Date Errors Report (ALT, V, R, D)
Ancestor Tree (ALT, V, A)	Documented Events Report (ALT, V, R, E)
Ancestor Tree — Fan (ALT, V, A, F)	Books (ALT, V, B)
Ancestor Tree — Standard (ALT, V, A, S)	Research Journal (ALT, V, J)
Ancestor Tree — Vertical (ALT, V, A, V)	Calendar (ALT, V, C)
Descendant Tree (ALT, V, D)	Labels/Cards (ALT, V, L)
Descendant Tree — Fan (ALT, V, D, F)	Timeline (ALT, V, T)
Descendant Tree — Standard (ALT, V, D, S)	Index of Individuals (ALT, V, X)
Hourglass Tree (ALT, V, H)	Publishing Center (ALT, V, I)
Hourglass Tree — Fan (ALT, V, H, F)	FamilyFinder (Search CD) (ALT, V, Y, V)
Hourglass Tree — Standard (ALT, V, H, S)	FamilyFinder Center (ALT, V, Y, C)
Outline Descendant Tree (ALT, V, O)	FamilyFinder Search/Report (ALT, V, Y, S)
Family Group Sheet (ALT, V, G)	FamilyFinder Research Journal (ALT, V, Y, R)
Genealogy Report (ALT, V, E)	Zoom (ALT, V, Z)


Using the Index of Individuals

Overview

All about the Index of individuals

How to...

Scroll through the name list

Find a name automatically

Put the names in a different order

See reports and trees

What is this?

The Name field

The Name list

The Find/Next/Previous buttons

The Go to Family Page button

The Options button


All about the Index of Individuals

The Index of Individuals lists everyone in your Family File.  You can use the Index of Individuals to jump between the Family Pages of distant relations.  It's also good for changing the primary individual.

To view the Index of Individuals, click View on the menu bar and select Index of Individuals (ALT, V, I).  The individuals are listed alphabetically by last name and each individual's birth and death dates are listed next to his or her name.  You'll see that individuals with nicknames (aka's) appear in the index twice, one entry for each of their names.


The Name field

To find a name in the Index of Individuals quickly, type it in this field in the following format:  Last, First, Middle.  The list must be sorted alphabetically by last name from A to Z.


The Name list

This list includes the names, birth dates, and death dates of everyone in your Family File.  Select a name and then click OK to return to the current view.  Click Go to Family Page to see the individual's Family Page instead.  To change the order of the names, click Options.


The Find/Previous/Next buttons

Click Find to search for any name or name part.  Click Next and Previous to look through the matching names.


The Go to Family Page button

Select a name and then click this button to see the selected individual's Family Page.


The Options button

Click this button to change the order in which the individuals are listed.


Scrolling through the name list

To use the Quick Search feature:

1.	Click in the Name field at the top of the Index of Individuals.

2.	Start typing the last name of the individual that you want to find.

With each character you type, you will get closer to the name you are looking for.  You can type part or all of the name, as long as it is in the same format as the Index of Individuals (Last name, First name Middle name).

Note:  You cannot use this search feature when the Index of Individuals is arranged by birth dates rather than by last names, nor when it is sorted alphabetically from Z to A. To rearrange the names, see How to: put the names in a different order.


Finding a name automatically

To use the Find Name command in the Index of Individuals:

1.	Click Find, located at the bottom of the Index of Individuals dialog box.

2.	Type an individual's name.

If you're not sure of the exact name, type any part of the name.  Family Tree Maker will find any name containing those same letters.  For example, if you type hess, Family Tree Maker will find "Kenneth Hess," "Hessel Smith," "George Chess, III," and so on.

3.	Click OK to begin searching.

Family Tree Maker highlights the name of the first individual meeting your request.  If there are no matches, Family Tree Maker displays a message telling you this.

4.	If you want to continue searching through the list of names, click Next to move to the next name that meets your request.

Once you have moved past the first match in the list, you can also click Previous to go back to previous matches.

Note:  If you didn't find the name you were looking for, try typing a smaller portion of the name.  You can search on any part of a name.


The Find Name dialog box

Name — Type an individual's name in this field and then click OK to search for that name in the Index of Individuals.  If you're not sure of the exact name, type any part of it.  Family Tree Maker will find any name containing those same letters.  For example, if you type hess, Family Tree Maker will find "Kenneth Hess," "Hessel Smith," "George Chess, III," and so on.


Displaying reports, trees, and other views

Once you find the name of the individual that you are looking for, you can do one of two things:

 Click Go to Family Page to see the Family Page containing the individual whose name is highlighted.  That individual will be shown as a husband or wife on the Family Page.

 Click OK to go to the current view of the individual whose name is highlighted.  The "current view" is the view that you were in before you opened the Index of Individuals.  For example, if you were previously looking at an Ancestor tree, clicking OK in the Index of Individuals would take you to an Ancestor tree for the individual whose name is highlighted.


Selecting an individual to attach

When you select the Attach Spouse or Attach Child commands, Family Tree Maker displays the Index of Individuals so you can choose an individual to attach.  Just click the name of the individual that you want to attach and then click OK.  Family Tree Maker closes the Index of Individuals and displays the Family Page containing the newly attached individual.

If you click the name of an "illegal" individual, Family Tree Maker displays an error message.  An "illegal" individual is someone that, for logical reasons, could not possibly be the spouse or child of the individual for whom you are selecting a new spouse or child.  For example, you cannot attach an individual's mother as the individual's child.

In addition, you cannot attach an individual as a spouse unless they have less than 99 spouses.


Putting the names in a different order

To rearrange the list of names in the Index of Individuals:

1.	Click Options, located at the bottom of the Index of Individuals dialog box.

2.	Select the option button for the type of sorting you prefer.

Note:  You can only use the Quick Search feature when "Last name (A first)" is selected.

3.	Click OK when you've made your selection.

Family Tree Maker sorts the Index of Individuals.


The Sort dialog box

Sort individuals by: — Make your selection to sort the list of individuals by last name beginning with “A” (ascending), last name beginning with “Z” (descending), birth date beginning with the oldest individual, or by birth date beginning with the youngest individual in the list.

Use aka if available — If you prefer to include nicknames in the index, select this check box.  You can include the nickname as an additional entry, or place it after the middle name.

Use married names for females — To list women by their married names, select this check box.  Otherwise Family Tree Maker uses women's maiden names.


Locating individuals in your Family File

Using the Find Individual command, you can quickly locate anyone in your Family File.  You can search for individuals using names, dates, comments, or even phrases from the Notes dialog box.

Searching for names

Searching for other items


Searching for names

To search for an individual in your Family File by name, go to any Family Page and then:

1.	From the Edit menu, select Find Individual (ALT, E, F).

2.	Click the Search drop-down list and then select Name.

3.	In the for field, type the name of the individual you wish to find.

If you're not sure of the exact name, type any part of the name.  Family Tree Maker will find any name containing those same letters.  For example, if you type hess, Family Tree Maker will find "Kenneth Hess," "Hessel Smith," "George Chess, III," and so on.

A note about “special characters” — If the name you are searching for contains a special letter with a symbol over it (such as š or û), try searching for that name by replacing the special letter with the “wildcard” asterisk (*) mentioned above.

4.	Click Find next to start the search.

Family Tree Maker displays the Family Page of the first individual who matches your request.  If no matches are found, Family Tree Maker displays a message saying "No individuals found."

If you like, you can edit any Family Pages that are found and then continue your search by reopening the Find Individual dialog box and clicking Find Next.

5.	Click Find next to continue your search.

Continue clicking Find next until you're done searching or until Family Tree Maker runs out of matches.  To go back to previous matches, click Find previous.

6.	To quit the search, click Cancel.

7.	If you want to go through the same search again, click Restart Search.

See also

Searching for other items


The Find Individual dialog box

1.	Click the Search drop-down list and then choose the name of the field that you want to search.

2.	In the for field, type the information that you want to find.

Click here for searching tips.

If the item you are searching for only has certain legal values (such as male, female, and unknown), then a drop-down list may be displayed in the "for" field.

3.	Click Find next to start the search.

Family Tree Maker displays the Family Page of the first individual who matches your request.  If no matches are found, Family Tree Maker displays a message saying "No individuals found."

If you like, you can edit any Family Pages that are found and then continue your search by reopening the Find Individual dialog box and clicking Find next.

4.	Click Find next to continue your search.

Continue clicking Find next until you're done searching or until Family Tree Maker runs out of matches.  To go back to previous matches, click Find previous.

5.	To quit the search, click Cancel.

6.	To go through the same search again, click Restart Search.


Searching for other items

To search for information other than a name, go to any Family Page and then:

1.	From the Edit menu, select Find Individual (ALT, E, F).

2.	Click the Search drop-down list and then choose the name of the field that you want to search.

3.	In the for field, type the information that you want to find.

Click here for searching tips.

If the item you are searching for only has certain legal values (such as male, female, and unknown), then a drop-down list may be displayed in the "for" field.

4.	Click Find next to start the search.

Family Tree Maker displays the Family Page of the first individual who matches your request.  If no matches are found, Family Tree Maker displays a message saying "No individuals found."

If you like, you can edit any Family Pages that are found and then continue your search by reopening the Find Individual dialog box and clicking Find next.

5.	Click Find next to continue your search.

Continue clicking Find next until you're done searching or until Family Tree Maker runs out of matches.  To go back to previous matches, click Find previous.

6.	To quit the search, click Cancel.

7.	To go through the same search again, click Restart Search.

See also

Searching for names


Tips for searching

When using the Find Individual command...

If you type this...	Family Tree Maker finds this...
=	All places where the field is empty
!=	All places where the field contains information
<10/2/1988 BEFORE 10/2/1988 BEF 10/2/1988	All dates before October 2, 1988, including dates entered as "Before October 2, 1988"
<=10/2/1988	The date October 2, 1988 and all dates before it, including dates entered as "Before October 2, 1988"
>10/2/1988, or AFTER 10/2/1988, or AFT 10/2/1988	All dates after October 2, 1988, including dates entered as "After October 2, 1988"
>=10/2/1988	The date October 2, 1988 and all dates after it, including dates entered as "After October 2, 1988"
ABOUT 10/2/1988, or  CIRCA 10/2/1988, or  EST 10/2/1988	All dates entered as "About October 2, 1988," "Circa October 2, 1988," or "Est October 2, 1988"
10/2/1988..10/2/1990, or >=10/2/1988..<=10/2/1990	All dates between October 2, 1988 and October 2, 1990 including those two days
>10/2/1988..<10/2/1990	All dates between October 2, 1988 and October 2, 1990 not including those two days
UNKNOWN or ?	All dates entered as "Unknown" or "?"
If you want to search for numbers, you can use the operators >, <, >=, <=, and >X..<Y, just as they are used with dates in the table above.  For example, if you want to find someone who is older than 82, you would enter >82.  If you want to find someone who is six feet or taller, you would enter >=6.


Entering more detailed information

Entering details in the More About dialog boxes

Entering pictures, sounds, etc. in Scrapbooks


The vertical toolbar

Click the buttons on this toolbar to take you to the different more about dialog boxes.  To exit the More About dialog boxes, click one of the buttons on the horizontal toolbar.


Entering brief biographical facts

Overview

All about the Facts dialog box

How to...

Add Alternate Facts

Enter information in the fields

Print More About dialog boxes

See trees and reports

What is this?

The toolbar


All about the Facts dialog box

The Facts dialog box contains all of the facts for an individual, including the Born and Died events that are entered on the Family Page.  You can also enter additional facts from an individual's life, such as special events, personal characteristics, or favorite activities.  Family Tree Maker can print information from the Facts dialog box in your trees and other documents.  If you want to enter longer stories or biographical sketches, use the Notes dialog box instead (see Entering stories and notes).


Entering facts

The Facts dialog box contains all of the facts for an individual, including the Born and Died events that are entered on the Family Page.  You can also enter additional facts from an individual's life, such as special events, personal characteristics, or favorite activities.  Other information that you may want to record here includes christening dates and places, burial dates and places, and graduation dates and places.

To enter information on the More About Facts page:

1.	From the View menu, select More About (ALT, V, M).

2.	From the sub-menu, select Facts.

3.	Family Tree Maker displays the More About Facts page for the selected individual.  This page always shows a new, empty line of fact fields at the top of the list.

Note:  The Born and Died events displayed on the Facts page are "linked" to the same information on the Family Page.  Changing this information on either page affects the way both are displayed.  Likewise the Marriage event on the Marriage Facts page is linked to the Family Page.

4.	From the empty Fact Name field, use the pull-down menu to select a pre-defined fact name, or enter one of your own.

Note:  Entering a fact name is required before additional information can be entered in either the Date, or Comment/Location fields.

5.	Click the Date field and enter a date for this event if you wish.  See Preferences for Dates and Measures for information about valid date formats.

6.	Click the Comment/Location field and enter a comment or the location for this fact.

Note about Maps: When displaying your family history in a Map view, Family Tree Maker uses the information from the More About Facts, and More About Marriage pages to display in the map legend.  You will have the best success if you remember to enter your comment first, followed by a slash “/” mark, then the location.  Family Tree Maker looks for text after the slash mark, or after the last slash, if there is more than one, as the location.  Since many cities and towns worldwide share common names, you will have fewer ambiguous location errors if you also add the county, state, or country names to locations in these two More About pages.

7.	Click the final field in this Fact line: the Preferred checkbox.

When selected, this date/location is the one that is preferred for this individual and will be displayed for all facts with the same Fact Name, both in the family page, and in all reports and trees.

8.	Press Enter to leave the fact line.

Family Tree Maker sorts the new fact into the list of Facts.

See also

How to: add Alternate Facts

Fastfields

Entering stories and notes.


The New Fact Name dialog box

Family Tree Maker displays a confirmation dialog box each time you enter a new Fact Name.  You can either click OK to accept the new fact name you have just entered, or click Cancel to enter a different name.  Click the Click here if you don't want to see this message again checkbox, if you don't want Family Tree Maker to display this confirmation dialog the next time you enter a new fact name.


The Change Fact Name dialog box

You have changed the name of a fact.  Click Yes to have Family Tree Maker apply this change to all of the facts in your Family File with the original name.  Click No to leave the other facts with the original name.


Adding Alternate Facts

As you add facts to your Family File from varying sources, there is a good chance that you will find conflicting information regarding the same event or fact. Depending on the source, there may be a disagreement about the date, location, or some other detail. Family Tree Maker allows you to record and display conflicting information as alternate facts until you can confirm which is correct by later research. For example, suppose there are two possible birth dates for one of the individuals in your file, and you won't know which one is correct until you verify the sources. With Family Tree Maker, you can record both birth dates until you have time to do more research.

To add an alternate fact or event:

Follow the steps for entering facts.  After you have completed the steps and clicked Enter, Family Tree Maker sorts the new fact into the Fact List.  Because the list is sorted alphabetically, alternate facts will appear sequentially in the Fact list.

Note:  When you display a view that includes alternate facts, a small "a" is placed next to that field indicating that you have recorded duplicate information for this field.


Change Fact Name dialog box

This error dialog appears when you are trying to enter more information for an individual on the Marriage Facts page instead of the Facts page.  Click Ok to continue entering facts about this marriage on the More About Pages.  Please note that Family Tree Maker did not save the fact you were just typing.  You can either re-enter the fact if you received the dialog in error or goto the Family Page and enter the fact in the More About section for the individual.

To get to the Facts page from the Marriage Facts page:

1.	From the View menu, click Family Page (ALT, V, F).

2.	Click the More About button next to the individual's name.


Entering nicknames, titles, and parental relationship information

Overview

All about the Lineage dialog box

How to...

Enter information in the fields

Print More About dialog boxes

Assign automatic reference numbers

See trees and reports

What is this?

The toolbar

The field labels


All about the Lineage dialog box

The Lineage dialog box contains fields for recording special information about the relationship between an individual and his or her parents, such as an adoption or a step- relationship.  When you open a husband's or wife's Lineage dialog box, the husband's or wife's Preferred Parents are shown.  When you open a child's Lineage dialog box, the parents currently on the Family Page are shown.  If you want to view other sets of parents, from the People menu, select Other Parents (ALT, P, P).  This dialog also contains a check box if you want to prevent this relationship information from displaying in trees and Kinship report.

The Lineage dialog box is also where you enter nicknames (aka's) or special titles that people use (or choose to exclude them from the Calendar view).  If the current individual is female, you can also choose how to handle her married name in trees.  In addition, if you have a filing system, you can create reference numbers for each individual, or override the automatically generated reference numbers.


Entering lineage information

Title (Dr., Reverend, Colonel, etc.) — Some individuals in your Family File may go by a special title, such as "Dr." or "Reverend."  When an individual has a special title, enter it in this field.  For all other individuals, leave the Title field blank.  Family Tree Maker will use the title that you selected in the Title preferences dialog box for all other individuals.  See the topic How to: select title preferences (Mr., Mrs., etc.).

This person is also known as (aka) — Enter nicknames, name changes, and hyphenated married names as follows:  In the Family Page, make sure you enter the individual's full given name.  For example, you could enter Gerald Charles Jansen.  Then in the Lineage dialog box you could enter only the nickname Bud.  Entering the aka/nickname, and the last name, would cause the last name to appear twice when displayed in some aka formats (Gerald Charles “Bud Jansen” Jansen.

Reference number — This field can contain any numbers or letters that you choose.  You might use this number as part of your own filing system. If you use the automatic reference number feature, the generated numbers appear in this field.  See the topic How to: select automatic reference number preferences for details.

Exclude from Calendars —  If you don't want this individual to appear in calendars, select this check box.  Only this individual is affected; his or her ancestors and descendants will appear in calendars.

Married name format — This field lets you pick how married names are handled in trees and reports.  Choose from First Maiden Married, First Middle Married, or First Middle Maiden.  This option will only appear for individuals entered as female.

Relationship with Mother and Relationship with Father — Use these fields to record special parent/child relationships.  If a special relationship exists with either parent, click the appropriate parent's drop-down list and select "Adopted," "Foster," "Unknown," "Step" or "Family member."  Each child can only have one natural father and one natural mother.

If you imported information from a World Family Tree CD, the word "Private" may appear in this drop-down list in some cases.  This is to protect the privacy of individuals who may still be living.  For your own purposes, it's better not to use this term.  If you submit your Family File to the World Family Tree Project, "Private" will be selected automatically where necessary.

Exclude this relationship from Trees and Kinship — Many people only want to include blood relationships in family trees and Kinship reports.  If you don't want a parent-child relationship included in trees or Kinship reports, select this check box for that parent.  For example, if you selected this check box for the relationship between you and your mother and then displayed a Descendant tree for your grandmother, you and your father and your descendants would appear in the tree, but your mother wouldn't.  However, if you selected this check box for the relationship between you and your father as well, neither you, nor your mother and father, nor your descendants would appear in the tree.  It works the same way for Ancestor trees, except in reverse.  You can use this option to eliminate duplicate branches from your trees when a child has more than one set of parents.


Entering medical information

Overview

All about the Medical dialog box

How to...

Enter information in the fields

Choose the date format and units of measure

Print More About dialog boxes

See trees and reports

What is this?

The Toolbar

The field labels


All about the Medical dialog box

The Medical dialog box contains fields for recording physical and medical information about an individual, including height, weight, cause of death, and medical history.


Entering medical information

Height — If your system is set for Metric units, enter the individual's height in meters.  If your system is set for English units, enter the individual's height in feet and inches.

Note:  For information about changing your system from Metric units to English units, see How to: choose the date format and units of measure.

Weight — If your system is set for Metric units, enter the individual's weight in kilograms.  If your system is set for English units, enter the individual's weight in pounds.

Cause of death — Use this field to record the cause of an individual's death.

Medical information — You can enter any type of medical information about the individual in this field.  You might want to record diseases, allergies, or serious illnesses.

Note:  Only name, date of birth, and information listed in the Medical Information field will appear on the Medical Information report.


Entering addresses

Overview

All about the Address dialog box

How to...

Enter information in the fields

Print More About dialog boxes

See trees and reports

What is this?

The toolbar

The field labels


All about the Address dialog box

In the Address dialog box, you can record an individual's address and phone number.  This information is handy if you're planning to send invitations to a family reunion or other family gathering, because this is where Family Tree Maker gets the addresses for printing mailing labels.

For the purpose of mailing labels, you do not have to type an address into each individual's Address dialog box.  This is because individuals can "inherit" addresses from their parents and spouses.  If an individual does not have an address in his or her Address dialog box, Family Tree Maker first checks to see if the individual's spouse has an address.  If the individual's spouse does not have an address, Family Tree Maker uses the address of the individual's parents.  If the parents do not have an address either, the individual has no address.


Entering the address

Street 1 and Street 2  Type the house or apartment number and street name in the "Street 1" field.  You only need to use the "Street 2" field if the address is particularly long.

Note:  For the purpose of mailing labels, you do not have to type an address into each individual's Address dialog box.  This is because individuals can "inherit" addresses from their parents and spouses.  Family Tree Maker will display a message underneath the address fields when it has found a possible address for this individual.

Phone(s)  You can enter more than one phone number in this field.


Entering stories and notes

Overview

All about the Notes dialog box

How to...

Enter text

Edit text

Move around

Find text

Import text from another program

Export Notes to another program

Format text

See trees and reports

What is this?

The field labels


All about the Notes dialog box

Each individual and each marriage in your Family File has a Notes dialog box.  You can use the Notes dialog box to enter and organize virtually any type of information, including a family member's favorite recipes, jokes, or even a short biography.  Just start typing -- the Notes page works like a mini-word processor.  You can print your Notes on separate pages for easy filing or as part of a Family Group Sheet printout.


Moving around

You can enter much more text into the Notes dialog box than can appear on the screen at any one time, so to edit your text you need to know how to move up and down through it.  The scroll bar on the right side of the screen is the easiest way to do this.  Just position the mouse pointer on the scroll box (that's the rectangle in the scroll bar), hold down your primary (usually left) mouse button, and drag the scroll box up or down.

You can also use your keyboard to move through your text, as explained in the table below.

Press this key	To do this
Left arrow	Move the cursor one character to the left
Right arrow	Move the cursor one character to the right
Up arrow	Move the cursor up one line
Down arrow	Move the cursor down one line
Ctrl + left arrow	Move the cursor one word to the left
Ctrl + right arrow	Move the cursor one word to the right
Page up	Move up a whole screen's worth of text
Page down	Move down a whole screen's worth of text
Home	Move the cursor to the beginning of the line
End	Move the cursor to the end of the line
Ctrl + Home	Move the cursor to the beginning of the Notes
Ctrl + End	Move the cursor to the end of the Notes


Editing text

Cutting and pasting text and Picture/Objects

Copying and pasting text and other items

The Undo command

Find and Replace text


Entering notes

The Notes dialog box is just like a mini-word processor.  Simply type the text that you want to enter.  You do not need to put a carriage return at the end of each line; the text will wrap from line to line automatically.  When you want to insert a blank line, press the Enter key on your keyboard.

If you make a mistake, use the left arrow on your keyboard to move the cursor back to the left and then press the Backspace key to delete the incorrect characters.  If you need to move the cursor back to the right, press the left arrow on your keyboard.

For more navigational keys, see the topic How to: move around.


Finding text

To find text in a Notes dialog box:

1.	Make sure you are in the Notes dialog box that you want to search.

2.	From the Edit menu, select Find (ALT, E, F).

3.	In the Find what field, type the text that you want to locate.

If you type the letters the Family Tree Maker will locate any word with "the" in it, including "there," "These," and "other," as well as "the."  If you only want to find the whole word, and not pieces of other words, select the Match whole word only check box.  If you only want to find words that are capitalized the same way as the text you typed in the "Find what" field, select the Match case check box.

4.	Click Find next to start the search.

When Family Tree Maker locates the text, the cursor will stop on it.  You can click Find next to look for additional occurrences of the text or Cancel to quit the search.

5.	If you didn't start searching at the top of the Notes, Family Tree Maker will ask if you want to continue the search from the top.  Click Yes to continue searching from the top or click No to quit the search.


The Find dialog box

1.	In the Find what field, type the text that you want to locate.

If you type the letters the Family Tree Maker will locate any word with "the" in it, including "there," "These," and "other," as well as "the."  If you only want to find the whole word, and not pieces of other words, select the Match whole word only check box.  If you only want to find words that are capitalized the same way as the text you typed in the "Find what" field, select the Match case check box.

2.	Click Find next to start the search.

When Family Tree Maker locates the text, the cursor will stop on it.  You can click Find next to look for additional occurrences of the text or Cancel to quit the search.

3.	If you didn't start searching at the top of the Notes, Family Tree Maker will ask if you want to continue the search from the top.  Click Yes to continue searching from the top or click No to quit the search.


Formatting text

In the Notes dialog box, when you make formatting choices, you are formatting all of the notes for this one individual.  In addition, the formatting selections will only appear on printed copies of the notes, not on the screen.

To format text in a Notes dialog box:

1.	From the Format menu, select Text Font, Style, & Size (ALT, T, T).

2.	Family Tree Maker tells you that your formatting choices will appear only when you print.  Click OK to continue.

3.	In the Items to format list, select an item that you want to format, such as Name.

4.	Choose formatting options for the selected item.

For a description of the options, click here.

5.	When you're finished making your selections, click OK to return to the Notes dialog box.


Copying text from a Windows program into Notes

To transfer information from another Windows program into Family Tree Maker:

1.	In the other Windows program, copy the information to the Clipboard.

If you need assistance with this, please consult the manual that came with the other program.

2.	In Family Tree Maker, go to the Notes dialog box where you want to place the information.

3.	Position your cursor where you want to insert the text.  If you want to use the new text to replace a section of existing text, highlight that section of text.

4.	From the Edit menu, select Paste (ALT, E, P).

See also

Importing text into Notes from another program


Importing text from another program

Copying text from a Windows program into Notes

Importing text into Notes from another program


Importing text into Notes from another program

To import text from another program, the other program must be able to create an ASCII file.

Once you've created the ASCII file in the other program:

1.	Go to the Notes dialog box where you want to place the text.

2.	Position the cursor where you want to insert the information.

3.	From the File menu, select Import Text File (ALT, F, I).

4.	Select the correct file type from the Files of type drop-down list.

5.	In the Look in lists, select the drive and folder where the file is located and then select the file name.

6.	Click Open.

Family Tree Maker inserts a copy of the information into the Notes dialog box.


The Import Text File dialog box

1.	Select the correct file type from the Files of type drop-down list.

2.	In the Look in lists, select the drive and folder where the file is located and then select the file name.

3.	Click Open.

Family Tree Maker inserts a copy of the information into the Notes dialog box.


Exporting Notes to another program

To create an ASCII file containing the information in an individual's Notes dialog box:

1.	Go to the Notes dialog box that has the text you want to export.

2.	From the File menu, select Export Notes (ALT, F, E).

3.	In the Save in lists, select the drive and folder where you want to place the file you're creating.

4.	Select the correct file type from the Save as type drop-down list.

In general, DOS programs create ASCII (PC-8) files, and Windows programs create ASCII (ANSI) files.

5.	Type a file name in the File name field.

If you are exporting the file for use with a non-Windows 95 program, the file name must be eight letters or less plus a three letter extension.  For example, you could type mynotes.txt.  Otherwise, the file name can be up to 255 characters.

6.	Click Save.

Family Tree Maker creates an ASCII file.


The Export Notes dialog box
The Export text dialog box

Use this dialog to export Notes, Genealogy reports, Documented Events reports, or Bibliography reports.

1.	In the Save in lists, select the drive and folder where you want to place the file you're creating.

2.	Select the correct file type from the Save as type drop-down list.

In general, Windows programs can import ANSI files and DOS programs can import PC-8 files.  If you are exporting a report, you can also choose Rich Text Format (.rtf) if your other Windows program supports it.  Use this format to maintain most of the report formatting.

3.	Type a file name in the File name field.

If you are exporting the file for use with a non-Windows 95 program, the file name must be eight letters or less plus a three letter extension.  For example, you could type mynotes.txt.  Otherwise, the file name can be up to 255 characters.

4.	Click Save.

Family Tree Maker creates the file.


Entering marriage stories and notes

Each marriage in Family Tree Maker has its own set of More About dialog boxes:  a Facts dialog box and a Notes dialog box.  You can use these to record information about a marriage, such as a special anniversary or activities that the couple liked to share.  If the status of the relationship has changed over time, you can also record the ending status of the marriage.  For details, see Entering marriage facts.

The Notes dialog box for a marriage works exactly like the Notes dialog box for an individual.  See Entering stories and notes.


Entering marriage facts

Overview

All about the Marriage Facts dialog box

How to...

Enter information in the fields

Print More About dialog boxes

See trees and reports

What is this?

The toolbar

The field labels


All about the Marriage Facts dialog box

The Marriage Facts dialog box allows you to enter a few more details about a couple's relationship.  For example, if the relationship has ended, you can record this.  You may also want to record information about a special event in the couple's relationship, such as the date of the couple's engagement or a special anniversary.


Entering marriage facts

End date — If the relationship has ended, type a date in this field.

Ending location — If the relationship ended, type a location in this field.

Ending status — You will want to record an ending status if the relationship changed over time.  To select an ending status, click the Ending status field and then select a relationship code from the drop-down list.  For example, if a couple divorced, you would choose "Divorce."   If you imported information from a World Family Tree CD, "Private" may be selected in some cases.  This is to protect the privacy of individuals who may still be living.

Marriage fact date/Marriage fact — If the marriage has another significant event or date associated with it, you can use these fields to record it.  For example, you could record the date of the couple's engagement or of a special anniversary party.

Reference number —- This field can contain any numbers or letters that you choose.  You might use this number as part of your own filing system.  Its use is entirely optional.  If you use the automatic reference number feature, the generated numbers appear in this field.  See the topic How to: select automatic reference number preferences for details.


Change Fact Name dialog box

This error dialog appears when you are trying to enter more information about a marriage on the Facts Page instead of the Marriage Facts page.  Click Ok to continue entering facts about this individual on the More About Pages.  Please note that Family Tree Maker did not save the fact you were just typing.  You can either re-enter the fact if you received the dialog in error or goto the Family Page and enter the fact in the More About section for the marriage.

To get to the Marriage Facts page from the Facts page:

1.	From the View menu, click Family Page (ALT, V, F).

2.	Click the More About button next to the Marriage date and location.


Adding another spouse

To create another spouse for an individual:

1.	Display the Family Page containing the individual for whom you want to create another spouse.  If the individual has children that you want to appear on the new Family Page with the new spouse, be sure to display the Family Page containing those children.

2.	Click Spouses next to the individual that you're creating a new spouse for.

3.	Click Create a new spouse.

4.	If the Family Page you displayed in step 1 contained children, Family Tree Maker asks if you want those children to appear on the new Family Page with the new spouse.  Click either Yes or No.

If you choose "Yes" Family Tree Maker creates a step- relationship between the children and the new spouse.  If the children actually have different relationships with the new spouse, you can go to each child's Lineage dialog box and choose the correct relationship.  See Entering nicknames, titles, and parental relationship information.

5.	Family Tree Maker takes you to a new Family Page.  It contains the individual you selected in step 1 and any children that you chose to include.  You can now enter information about the new spouse and any children that the couple had.

See also

Displaying additional spouses

Choosing a preferred spouse


The Other Spouses dialog box

Spouses — Select an individual from this list and click OK to see a Family Page containing that individual.

Create new spouse — Click this to create a new spouse for the current individual.

Make highlighted spouse the preferred spouse — Select an individual from the Spouses list and click this button to make that individual the preferred spouse.  The Family Page of an individual and that individual's preferred spouse is the Family Page that Family Tree Maker will display automatically.


Choosing a preferred spouse

To select an individual's preferred spouse:

1.	On the Family Page, click Spouses next to the individual whose Spouses dialog box you want to see.

2.	In the Select a spouse to go to list, click the name of the spouse that you want to be the preferred spouse.

3.	Click the Make the highlighted spouse the preferred spouse button.

4.	Click OK when you've made your selection.

Family Tree Maker displays the Family Page containing the preferred spouse.

See also

How to: add another spouse

Displaying additional spouses


Displaying the Family Pages of additional spouses
Displaying additional spouses

To see a Family Page containing a spouse other than the one that's currently displayed:

1.	On the Family Page, click Spouses next to the individual whose other spouse you want to see.

2.	In the Select a spouse to go to list, click the name of the spouse whose Family Page you want to see and then click OK.

Family Tree Maker displays the Family Page containing the other spouse.

See also

How to: add another spouse

Choosing a preferred spouse


Adding another set of parents

To create an additional set of parents for a child:

1.	Bring up the Family Page containing the child for whom you want to create another set of parents.  The child must be displayed in the Children list, not in a Husband or Wife field.

2.	From the People menu, select Other Parents (ALT, P, P).

3.	Click Create new parents.

4.	Select one of the three option buttons, Two new parents, Another father, or Another mother.

5.	Click the Relationship with drop-down list(s) in the bottom half of the dialog box and choose the word that describes the relationship between the new parent(s) and the child.

Please note that a child can only have one natural mother and one natural father.

6.	Click OK after making your selections.

7.	If the child has siblings, Family Tree Maker asks whether you want to associate those siblings with the new set of parents.  Click either Yes or No.

If you choose "Yes," Family Tree Maker adds any siblings that have the same preferred parents (see Choosing preferred parents).  Family Tree Maker also gives the siblings the same relationship to the new parent(s), unless the siblings would then have too many natural parents.  In this case Family Tree Maker gives them a step- relationship.  If the children actually have different relationships, you can go to each child's Lineage dialog box and choose the correct relationship (see Entering nicknames, titles, and parental relationship information).

8.	Family Tree Maker displays a new Family Page with children in the "Children" list.  Depending on which option button you selected in step 4, either the "Husband" or the "Wife" field may be filled in already.  Enter information about this set of parents in the Husband, Wife, and other fields.

If either the husband or wife already exists elsewhere in your Family File, Family Tree Maker will ask you to verify the relationships.

See also

Displaying additional parents


Choosing preferred parents

To select an individual's preferred parents:

1.	On the Family Page, select the child whose Other Parents dialog box you want to see.

2.	From the People menu, select Other Parents (ALT, P, P).

3.	In the Parents list, click the names of the parents that you want to be the preferred parents.

4.	Click the Make the highlighted parents the preferred parents button.

5.	Click OK when you've made your selection.

You can change your preferred parents selection at any time by repeating the five steps above.

See also

How to: add another set of parents

Displaying additional parents


Displaying additional parents

To see a Family Page containing a child's other parents:

1.	On the Family Page, select the child whose other parents you want to see.

2.	From the People menu, select Other Parents (ALT, P, P).

3.	In the Parents list, click the names of the parents whose Family Page you want to see and then click OK.

Family Tree Maker displays the Family Page containing those parents.

See also

Choosing preferred parents

How to: add another set of parents


The Other Parents dialog box

Parents — Select a set of parents from this list and click OK to see a Family Page containing those parents.

Create new parents — Click this button to create a new set of parents for the current child.

Make highlighted parents the preferred parents — To choose which parents appear in trees and Kinship reports, select a set of parents from the Parents list and click this button.


The Create New Parents dialog box

1.	Select one of the three option buttons, Two new parents, Another father, or Another mother, depending on which parent(s) you need to create.

2.	Click the Relationship with drop-down list(s) in the bottom half of the dialog box and choose the word that describes the relationship between the new parent(s) and the child.

Please note that a child can only have one natural mother and one natural father.  You must choose a different relationship for any additional parents.

3.	Click OK after making your selections.


Editing the family structure

Removing an individual from your Family File

Removing groups of individuals from your Family File

Detaching incorrect spouses from each other

Linking individuals by marriage

Detaching a child from the wrong parents

Linking children to their parents

Rearranging children

Merging duplicate individuals

Merging specific individuals

Using the Relationship Calculator


Editing text

You can cut, copy, and paste text or almost any other item in Family Tree Maker, such as trees, Family Group Sheets, and Picture/Objects.  In these cases, see any of the first three topics listed below.

However, you should not cut and paste an individual's name.  Cutting and pasting an individual's name does not move that individual to another location.  To move an individual and all of the information associated with that individual, use the Detach and Attach commands.  To get information about the Detach and Attach commands, see the topic Editing the family structure.

Cutting and pasting text and Picture/Objects

Copying and pasting text and other items

The Undo command

Find and Replace text


Cutting and pasting text and Picture/Objects

To cut and paste text and Picture/Objects:

1.	Select the text or Picture/Object you want to move.

2.	From the Edit menu, select Cut (ALT, E, T).

3.	Position your cursor where you want to insert the text or Picture/Object.

If you want to replace a section of existing text with text that you've just placed on the Clipboard, highlight that text before moving on to the next step.  If you want to insert a Picture/Object between two existing Picture/Objects, select the Picture/Object on the right before moving on to the next step

4.	From the Edit menu, select Paste (ALT, E, P).

Family Tree Maker pastes the text or Picture/Object from the Clipboard and repositions any existing text or Picture/Objects if necessary.

Since the Clipboard is not erased until you use the Copy or Cut command again, you can paste the same text or Picture/Object multiple times.


Copying and pasting text and other items

You can copy text, Picture/Objects, trees, and other reports to the Clipboard and then paste them in other another program. When you copy trees and certain reports, you are copying an image from the screen as opposed to copying text. This means that you cannot change the contents of the copied image unless you use an image editing program. You may also need to adjust the size of the image to because multi-page documents are copied as a single image.

To copy and paste text and other items:

1.	If you want to copy text or a Picture/Object, select it.  Some items, such as trees and reports, cannot be selected.  Just display these types of items on screen.

2.	From the Edit menu, select Copy (ALT, E, C).

3.	Position your cursor where you want to insert the text or other item.  If you want to replace a section of existing text or an existing item with the information that you've just copied to the Clipboard, highlight that text or item before moving on to the next step.

4.	From the Edit menu, select Paste (ALT, E, P).

Family Tree Maker pastes the text or item from the Clipboard and repositions any existing text or items if necessary.

Since the Clipboard is not erased until you use the Copy or Cut command again, you can paste the same text or item multiple times.


The Undo command

To reverse an editing command:

1.	Don't type any new text or perform any other editing commands.  If you do, you won't be able to use Undo on the command that you want to reverse.

2.	From the Edit menu, select Undo (ALT, E, U).

It doesn't matter where your cursor is Family Tree Maker will remember what it was that you did last and reverse it.

3.	If you want to restore the editing command that you've just reversed, select Redo immediately.


Editing information

Editing text

Removing an individual from your Family File

Removing groups of individuals from your Family File

Detaching incorrect spouses from each other

Linking individuals by marriage

Detaching a child from the wrong parents

Linking children to their parents

Rearranging children

Locating individuals in your Family File

Merging duplicate individuals

Merging specific individuals

Using the Relationship Calculator


Removing an individual from your Family File

If you've made a mistake entering a single piece of information, such as an incorrect date or location, you don't need to use Delete Individual; just type over the incorrect information.  Do not type over an individual's name unless you are just changing the spelling.  If you need to move an individual to a different Family Page, use the Attach and Detach commands.

To delete an individual:

1.	Go to the Family Page of the individual that you want to delete and place the cursor on the individual's name.

2.	From the People menu, select Delete Individual (ALT, P, D).

Family Tree Maker asks you to confirm the deletion.

Note:  The Delete Individual command severs all ties that the deleted individual created between any other individuals in your tree.  This means that when you've deleted an individual, you may have to reconnect other individuals in your tree.  For example, if you delete a single parent, you've disconnected all of that parent's children from the rest of their relatives.

See also

Detaching incorrect spouses from each other

Linking individuals by marriage

Detaching a child from the wrong parents

Linking children to their parents


Removing groups of individuals from your Family File

To delete a group of individuals:

1.	Create either a report, Ancestor tree, Descendant tree, or Outline Descendant tree containing the group of individuals that you want to delete.

2.	After you have created your document, look through it to make sure that it contains the correct set of individuals.

Note:  You don't have to worry about what information appears in the document, because all information associated with the individuals in the document will be deleted.

3.	From the People menu, select Delete Individuals (ALT, P, D).

Family Tree Maker deletes the individuals after you select Yes in the confirmation dialog box.


Detaching incorrect spouses from each other

To detach someone from an incorrect spouse:

1.	Go to the Family Page containing the individual you want to detach.

Note:  You must be on the Family Page where the individual appears as a husband or wife, not as a child.  If you're on a page where the individual is in the "Children" list, click the tab with the individual's name on it.  This tab is on the right side of your screen.

2.	Place the cursor on the spouse you want to detach.

3.	From the People menu, select Fix Relationship Mistakes (ALT, P, F).

4.	From the Fix Relationship Mistakes sub-menu, select Detach Spouse.

Family Tree Maker asks you to confirm the detachment.

If the individual you are detaching has children, the children will remain with the spouse who was not detached.

To reattach this individual elsewhere in the tree, see Linking individuals by marriage.


Linking individuals by marriage

If two individuals who are married are in your Family File but aren't shown as married to each other, use the Attach Spouse command to join them.

Note:  Before you can attach a spouse, you must have an opening on the Family Page for it.  If you already have two spouses shown on the Family Page, you will need to create a spot for the one you're attaching.  See the topic How to: add another spouse.

1.	Go to the Family Page where one of the individuals appears in the "Husband" or "Wife" field.

Note:  You must be on the Family Page where the individual to whom you want to attach a spouse appears as a husband or wife, not as a child.  If you're on a page where the individual is shown in the "Children" list, click the tab for that individual's Family Page.  The tab is on the right side of your screen.

In order to ensure that the children from this marriage will appear on the same Family Page as their parents, make sure that you are on the Family Page where the children and one of the parents appear.  That way, Family Tree Maker knows to keep the children with the marriage you are creating.

2.	From the People menu, select Fix Relationship Mistakes (ALT, P, F).

3.	From the Fix Relationship Mistakes sub-menu, select Attach Spouse.

4.	Click the name of the individual that you want to attach as a spouse.  For help with this, see Selecting an individual to attach.

5.	Click OK.

Family Tree Maker asks you to confirm your selection.


Detaching a child from the wrong parents

To detach a child from his or her parents:

1.	Go to the Family Page containing the child and the set of parents that you want to detach from each other.

Note:  You must be on the Family Page where the individual is in the "Children" list.  If you're on a page where the individual appears as a husband or wife, click the tab for the individual's parents.  This tab is on the right side of your screen.

2.	Place the cursor on the child you want to detach.

3.	From the People menu, select Fix Relationship Mistakes (ALT, P, F).

4.	From the Fix Relationship Mistakes sub-menu, select Detach Child.

Family Tree Maker asks you to confirm the detachment.

If the child has siblings, Family Tree Maker asks if the siblings should be detached as well.  If you select "Yes," Family Tree Maker will detach all siblings from the parents at once and they will remain together as siblings.  If you select "No," Family Tree Maker will only detach the selected individual.

To reattach this individual elsewhere in the tree, see Linking children to their parents.


Linking children to their parents

If an individual and his or her parents are in your Family File, but the individual does not appear on the parents' Family Page, use the Attach Child command.

To attach a child to his or her parents:

1.	Go to the Family Page where you want the individual to appear as a child (the page that shows the child's parents as spouses).

2.	From the People menu, select Fix Relationship Mistakes(ALT, P, F).

3.	From the Fix Relationship Mistakes sub-menu, select Attach Child.

4.	Click the name of the individual that you want to attach as a child.  For help with this, see Selecting an individual to attach.

5.	If the child has siblings, Family Tree Maker asks whether you want to associate those siblings with the new set of parents.  Click either Yes or No.

If you choose "Yes," Family Tree Maker attaches any siblings that have the same preferred parents (see Choosing preferred parents).

6.	If the child already has another set of parents, Family Tree Maker displays the Set Relationship dialog box.  Click the drop-down list next to each parent's name and select the word that describes the relationship between the parent and the child.

Family Tree Maker gives the siblings that you are also attaching the same relationship to the new parent(s), unless the siblings would then have too many natural parents.  In this case Family Tree Maker gives them a step- relationship.  If the children actually have different relationships, you can go to each child's Lineage dialog box and choose the correct relationship (see Entering nicknames, titles, and parental relationship information).

7.	Click OK after making your selections.

Family Tree Maker displays the Family Page.


The More button

Click this button to enter a caption and other important information about the selected Picture/Object.  You can also indicate your printing preferences for that Picture/Object.


The page-turning buttons

Click the button in the bottom-right corner to see the next page in the Scrapbook.  Click the button in the bottom-left corner to see the previous page in the Scrapbook.


The Picture/Object areas

To place an item in this area, select an appropriate Insert command from the Picture/Object menu.  To edit an existing Picture/Object, from the Picture/Object menu, select Edit.  To view a picture at full size or to play an object, double-click it.


All about Scrapbooks

Each individual and each marriage in your Family File has a Scrapbook — where you can store virtually any type of information about your family, including Kodak Photo CD Pictures; OLE objects such as sound files, video files, text files, and picture files; and non-OLE picture files such as bitmaps (.bmp), JPEG (.jpg), and TIFF (.tif) files.  Family Tree Maker also supports Windows Metafiles (.wmf), Photoshop 3.0 (.psd), and Flashpix (.fpx) graphics files.  Once you insert one of these items, it is called a Picture/Object.

Note:  If you are planning to include large images and video clips in your Scrapbooks, keep the capabilities of your computer in mind.  If you only have the minimum system requirements, your machine will run slowly when you work with large images and video/sound clips.  In fact, if your machine does not have enough RAM, you may not be able to load particularly large files.  In addition, you will need quite a bit of free space on your hard drive to store large images and video clips.

Scrapbook pages allow you to use your creativity — for example, you can display pictures at full size or play videos and sounds.  You can even play a whole Scrapbook at once in a “slide show.”  You can also include scanned pictures, scanned school papers, and video files to create childhood pages in each of your children's Scrapbooks.  Scanned, or Photo CDs of a couple's wedding and anniversary parties combined with special songs would make a beautiful record of a marriage.

After adding a Picture/Object to a Scrapbook — use the More About Picture/Object dialog box to add a caption and category.  Categories are useful when it’s time to print or search for a Picture/Object.  For example, if you want to look at all the Pictures/Objects related to childhood birthdays and you give all those pictures the category “Childhood Birthday,” you can locate and display them easily.  Put some thought into the categories you create.  You will find that it pays off when you print documents that include Pictures/Objects.  Will you want family trees containing a portrait of each individual as an adult?  How about special anniversary address labels that contain each couple’s wedding picture?  Thinking about the types of documents that you might want to print later will help you create clear, concise categories.  Some that might be useful include Portrait, Portrait-Teen, Wedding, Wedding-Reception, Graduation, Bar Mitzvah, Thanksgiving, Vacation.  Some time spent considering categories you will use will save you lots of time later.

Find out more about how to...

Open Scrapbooks

Insert items into Scrapbooks

Create captions and categories for Picture/Objects

Move around in a Scrapbook

Find information in a Scrapbook

Rearrange Scrapbook items

Edit Picture/Objects


Opening Scrapbooks

To display the Scrapbook of a selected individual or marriage:

1.	Go to the Family Page of the individual for whom, or marriage for which, you want to see a Scrapbook.

2.	On the Family Page, place the cursor in the appropriate individual or marriage field.

3.	From the View menu, select Scrapbook (ALT, V, S).

Family Tree Maker displays the Scrapbook of the selected individual or marriage.  If this is the first time you have opened this Scrapbook, you will be on the first page.  If you have opened this Scrapbook before, you will be on the same page as when you last it.


What goes into Scrapbooks?

If you are planning to include large images and video clips in your Scrapbooks, keep the capabilities of your computer in mind.  See the topic Picture size and your computer.

Kodak Photo CD Pictures

A Kodak Photo CD is a CD-ROM disc containing pictures that came from your undeveloped film, negatives, or old photos.  To use Kodak Photo CDs, the only special equipment you need is a CD-ROM player on your computer that can read a Kodak Photo CD (many of the early CD-ROM players cannot).

Pictures

"Pictures," sometimes called graphics, are electronic images.  There are many ways to get pictures:

 Take your undeveloped film, old photos, or negatives to a Kodak processor and have the images placed on a Kodak Photo CD.

 Create, scan, or purchase pictures that you can store on your hard disk in a graphics file.  You can create your own pictures using a graphics software program.  Scanning is described in the next section.

 Cut or copy an image from another software program, another Scrapbook in Family Tree Maker, or another view in Family Tree Maker and store it temporarily on the Clipboard as a bitmap or metafile.

 Cut or copy an image from any OLE server application and store it temporarily on the Clipboard.

Placing pictures into Family Tree Maker is described in the topic How to: insert items into Scrapbooks

Scanning

"Scanning" is making an electronic reproduction of a paper item, such as a photograph.  To scan an item, you must have a scanner and scanner software.  If you are interested in scanning your paper memorabilia, the best thing to do is to talk with your local computer dealer.

Note:  Family Tree Maker recommends scanning at no more than 100 dpi.  Higher resolutions will take up unnecessary amounts of your hard drive space.

Object Linking and Embedding (OLE)

Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) is a technology that lets you create items in one software program and place them in another software program.  For example, you can use video capture software to transfer clips of your home videos onto your computer.  Then, with the help of Object Linking and Embedding you can transfer video clips from your video capture software into Family Tree Maker Scrapbooks.

OLE objects are items, such as the video clips described above, that can be transferred from one software program to another.  The types of objects you might want to use in Scrapbooks include sound clips; video clips; still images or pictures; and text objects from a word processor, spreadsheet, or database.

An OLE server is a software program, such as the video capture software described above, that creates OLE objects.  Any Windows 3.1 (or higher) compatible program can be an OLE server.  Not all are, so it is important to read the box carefully before making a purchase.

An OLE client is a software program, such as Family Tree Maker, into which OLE objects can be placed.  Think of it in terms of a restaurant:  the server creates the food and serves it to the client, and the client eats (or stores) it.

Text

If your child used a word processor to write a paper for school or a letter to grandma, you might want to save the word processor file in a Scrapbook.  To store text (word processor files) in a Scrapbook, you need to treat the text as an OLE object.  See "Object Linking and Embedding (OLE)" above.


Inserting items into Scrapbooks

There are five different ways to place items in Scrapbooks.  Use the table below to determine which method you should use.  For information about what types of items you can place in Scrapbooks, see the topic What goes into Scrapbooks?

When you have...	Use this method...
A Kodak Photo CD Picture.	Picture/Object:  Insert Photo CD Picture
A graphics file, such as a scanned image or clip art, stored on your computer's hard disk.  Compatible file formats include (*.BMP), (*.PCX), (*.TIF), (*.WMF), (*.PSD), (*.FPX), (*.JPG), and (*.JFF).	Picture/Object:  Insert Picture from File
An OLE object in a file.  Also use this method when you want to create a new OLE object and then insert it into a Scrapbook.	Picture/Object:  Insert Object
Items that you have cut or copied to the Clipboard, such as an Ancestor tree, or even a Picture/Object that you are copying from one Scrapbook to another.	Edit:  Paste
OLE objects on the Clipboard, such as pictures, text, video, and sound.	Edit:  Paste or Edit:  Paste Special


Picture/Object, Insert Photo CD Picture
Picture/Object: Insert Photo CD Picture

When you insert pictures, keep the capabilities of your computer in mind.  See the topic Picture size and your computer for more information.

To insert a Kodak Photo CD picture into a Scrapbook:

1.	In the Scrapbook, select the area into which you want to insert the picture.

2.	From the Picture/Object menu, select Insert Photo CD Picture (ALT, O, C).

For a description of the options in the Insert from Photo CD dialog box and a selection of related topics, click here.

3.	Select a picture.

4.	Click OK.

Family Tree Maker displays the Edit Picture dialog box, where you can rotate, flip, or crop the picture.

Note:  If you want to edit a picture, this is the best time to do it.  Once you have placed a picture in a Scrapbook, it must be decompressed and recompressed each time you edit it again.  Decompressing and recompressing reduces the quality of the picture.  (Family Tree Maker uses the industry standard JPEG compression method and does not support LZW compression technology.)

To edit the picture, see the topic How to: edit Picture/Objects.  When you click OK to leave the Edit Picture dialog box, Family Tree Maker compresses your picture and places it in the Scrapbook.  You should now use the More About Picture/Object dialog box to create a caption and to record other important information.  See How to: create captions and categories for Picture/Objects.

See also

Navigating in the Insert Photo CD Picture dialog box

How to: set resolution and compression


The Insert from Photo CD dialog box

Photo CD pictures — Select a picture and then click OK to insert that picture in the Scrapbook.

Find — Use this button to go to a particular picture on the Photo CD.  Simply type the number of the picture in the Find Photo Number field and then click OK.

View — Click this button to display the currently selected picture at full size in the View Picture dialog box.  Click OK in the View Picture dialog box to return to the Insert from Photo CD dialog box.

Resolution — Use this button to change the resolution and compression with which this picture will be stored in the Scrapbook.  See the topic How to: set resolution and compression for a complete description of the Compression/Resolution dialog box.  For most cases, you do not need to change the compression and resolution.

See also

Picture size and your computer

Navigating in the Insert Photo CD Picture dialog box

How to: create captions and categories for Picture/Objects

How to: edit Picture/Objects


Navigating in the Insert Photo CD Picture dialog box

You can use the following keys to navigate through and select pictures in the Insert Photo CD Picture dialog box.

Press this key	To do this
Up arrow	Move to the picture above the currently selected picture
Down arrow	Move to the picture below the currently selected picture
Left arrow	Move to the picture to the left of the currently selected picture
Right arrow	Move to the picture to the right of the currently selected picture
Tab	Move forwards between the buttons in the dialog box
Shift + Tab	Move backwards between the buttons in the dialog box
Home	Move to the first picture on the current screen
End	Move to the last picture on the current screen
Ctrl + Home	Move to the first picture on the CD
Ctrl + End	Move to the last picture on the CD
Page up	Move to the picture one screen up
Page down	Move to the picture one screen down


The Find Picture dialog box

Find Photo Number — To find a picture on the CD, type the number of that picture in this field and then click OK.


Picture/Object, Insert Picture from File
Picture/Object: Insert Picture from File

When you insert pictures, keep the capabilities of your computer in mind.  See the topic Picture size and your computer for more information.

To insert a picture into a Scrapbook with the Insert Picture from File command:

1.	In the Scrapbook, select the area into which you want to insert the picture.

2.	From the Picture/Object menu, select Insert Picture from File (ALT, O, F).

3.	Select the picture that you want to insert.

For a description of the options in the Insert Picture dialog box and a selection of related topics, click here.

4.	Click Open.

Family Tree Maker displays the Edit Picture dialog box where you can rotate, flip, or crop the picture.

Note:  If you want to edit a picture, this is the best time to do it.  Once you have placed a picture in a Scrapbook, it must be decompressed and recompressed each time you edit it again.  Decompressing and recompressing reduces the quality of the picture.  (Family Tree Maker uses the industry standard JPEG compression method and does not support LZW compression technology.)

To edit the picture, see the topic How to: edit Picture/Objects.  When you click OK to leave the Edit Picture dialog box, Family Tree Maker compresses your picture and places it in the Scrapbook.  You should now use the More About Picture/Object dialog box to create a caption and to record other important information.  See How to: create captions and categories for Picture/Objects.

See also

Finding files

How to: set resolution and compression


The Insert Picture dialog box

Look in — Select the drive and folder where the picture file you want to insert is located, then select the picture file name.

File name — Type the file name here.  It will appear automatically if you double-click the file in the Look in list.

Files of type — Click this drop-down list and select the format of the file that you want to insert.

Preview Picture — Select this check box to view the picture at reduced size in the "Preview" box.

Compression — Click this button to change the level of compression applied before storing this picture in the Scrapbook.  See the topic How to: set resolution and compression for a complete description of this dialog box.  For most cases you do not need to change the compression level from its default setting (8:1).

View — Click this button to display the picture at full size in the View Picture dialog box.  Click OK to return to the Insert Picture dialog box.

Find file — Click this button to locate a file when you don't recall where it is.

See also

Picture size and your computer

Finding files

How to: create captions and categories for Picture/Objects

How to: edit Picture/Objects


The Browse dialog box

Look in — Select the drive and folder where the picture file you want is located, then select the file name.

Files of type — Click this drop-down list and select the format of the file that you want to insert.

Source — Select the name of the file from this list and then click OK.


The Change Icon dialog box

Current — Select this option button to use the icon shown to the right of the word "Current."

Default — Select this option button to use the icon shown to the right of the word "Default."

From File — To use a different icon, select this option button and type the icon's file path and name in the field to the right.

Label — If you want text to appear below the icon, type it here.

Browse — Click this button to locate the icon file if you can't remember its path and name.


Picture/Object, Insert Object
Picture/Object: Insert Object

With the Insert Object command, you can insert existing OLE objects or create new OLE objects and then insert them into a Scrapbook.  OLE objects include pictures, text, spreadsheets, sound clips, and video clips.  When you insert pictures, video, or sound files, keep the capabilities of your computer in mind.

Inserting a Picture/Object from a (Twain Compliant)
Scanner or Digital Camera

Many home computer users today have their own scanners or digital camera devices for capturing images of all kinds.  Family Tree Maker allows you to scan your documents or photos directly into a Scrapbook.

To insert a picture/object into a Scrapbook:

1.	In the destination Scrapbook, select the picture frame where you want to insert your scanned image.

2.	From the Picture/Object menu, select Insert Picture from Scanner/Camera.  Family Tree Maker displays the Select Scanner of Camera dialog box showing all the Twain-compliant devices installed in your computer.

3.	Highlight the device you want to use and click Select.  Family Tree Maker closes the dialog box and opens your scanning device software.

Note:  Scanning at resolutions above 100 dpi will take up unnecessary hard drive space on your system.

4.	Scan your image as usual, then click “Final” (or whatever commits the previewed image on your scanner).  Family Tree Maker will automatically display your scanned image in the Edit Picture dialog box.

5.	Select any editing options you wish, then click OK.  Family Tree Maker inserts your scanned picture into the Scrapbook.

For more information see the following topics:

Picture size and your computer

Creating new objects to insert

Inserting existing objects


The Insert Object dialog box

Create New — Select this option button if you want to create a new OLE object to insert into the Scrapbook.

Object Type — Click the name of the OLE object that you want to create and then click OK.

Create from File — Select this option button if you want to insert an existing OLE object into the Scrapbook.

File — In this field, type the path and name of the file containing the OLE object and then click OK.

Browse — Click this button to locate the file if you can't remember its path and name.

Display As Icon — If you prefer to view an icon of the OLE object in the Scrapbook, instead of the OLE object itself, select this check box.

Change Icon — Click this button if you want to select a different icon to represent your OLE object.


Creating new objects to insert

When you insert files, keep the capabilities of your computer in mind.  See the topic Picture size and your computer for more information.

To create a new OLE object to insert into a Scrapbook:

1.	In the Scrapbook, select the area into which you want to insert the object.

2.	From the Picture/Object menu, select Insert Object (ALT, 0, 0).

3.	Select the Create new option button.

4.	In the Object Type scrolling list, click the name of the OLE object that you want to insert into the Scrapbook.

5.	In the other software program, create the OLE object.

6.	When you are finished creating the new OLE object, from the File menu of that software program, select Exit and Return to Family Tree Maker.

Microsoft Windows closes the software program and returns you to Family Tree Maker.  (Windows may also ask you if you want to update or save your information; answer Yes or OK.)  Family Tree Maker places the OLE object in the Scrapbook.

You should now use the More About Picture/Object dialog box to create a caption and to record other important information.  See How to: create captions and categories for Picture/Objects.  You can also edit an OLE object once it's in a Scrapbook.  See Editing OLE objects.


Inserting existing objects

When you insert files, keep the capabilities of your computer in mind.  See the topic Picture size and your computer for more information.

To insert an existing OLE object with the Insert Object command:

1.	In the Scrapbook, select the area into which you want to insert the object.

2.	From the Picture/Object menu, select Insert Object (ALT, O, O).

3.	Select the Create from file option button.

4.	In the File field, type the path and name of the file containing the OLE object that you want to insert into the Scrapbook.

If you do not remember the exact name and location of your file, click Browse.

If you want to view an icon in the Scrapbook instead of the OLE object itself, select the Display As Icon check box.  You can change the appearance of the icon by clicking Change icon.

5.	When the correct file name is in the File field, click OK.

Family Tree Maker places the OLE object in the Scrapbook.

You should now use the More About Picture/Object dialog box to create a caption and to record other important information.  See How to: create captions and categories for Picture/Objects.  You can also edit an OLE object once it's in a Scrapbook.  See Editing OLE objects.


Edit, Paste
Edit: Paste

When you insert pictures, keep the capabilities of your computer in mind.  See the topic Picture size and your computer for more information.

To paste an item from the Clipboard into a Scrapbook:

1.	Make sure that the item you want to paste into the Scrapbook is on the Clipboard.

The item must be either a metafile or an OLE Object to be pasteable into Scrapbooks.

2.	In the Scrapbook, select the area into which you want to paste the item.

3.	From the Edit menu in Family Tree Maker, select Paste (ALT, E, P).

Family Tree Maker places the item in the Scrapbook.

You should now use the More About Picture/Object dialog box to create a caption and to record other important information.  See How to: create captions and categories for Picture/Objects  You can also edit an OLE object once it's in a Scrapbook.  See How to: edit Picture/Objects.

See also

How to: set resolution and compression


Edit, Paste Special
Edit: Paste Special

When you insert pictures, video, and sound, keep the capabilities of your computer in mind.  See Picture size and your computer for more information.

To paste an OLE object from the Clipboard into a Scrapbook:

1.	Make sure that the OLE object you want to paste into the Scrapbook is on the Clipboard.

2.	In the Scrapbook, select the area into which you want to paste the item.

3.	From the Edit menu in Family Tree Maker, select Paste Special (ALT, E, S).

4.	In the As list, click the data type that you want to paste into the Scrapbook.

If you want to view an icon in the Scrapbook instead of the OLE object itself, select the Display As Icon check box.  When you select this option, you can change the appearance of the icon by clicking Change Icon.

5.	Click OK.

Family Tree Maker places the OLE object in the Scrapbook.

You should now use the More About Picture/Object dialog box to create a caption and to record other important information.  See How to: create captions and categories for Picture/Objects.  You can also edit an OLE object once it's in a Scrapbook.  See How to: edit Picture/Objects.


The Paste Special dialog box

Source — This field lists the OLE object that you selected to paste.  If you want to paste a different OLE object, click Cancel to close this dialog box and copy the correct object to the Clipboard.  For instructions, refer to the manual for the program containing the object.

As — Select the type of data that you want to paste into the Scrapbook.

Display As Icon — If you prefer to view an icon of the OLE object in the Scrapbook, instead of the OLE object itself, select this check box.

Change Icon — Click this button if you want to select a different icon to represent your OLE object.


Play objects or view pictures at full size

Viewing a picture at full size

Playing an OLE object

Playing a Scrapbook's Picture/Objects sequentially


Creating captions and categories for Picture/Objects

To record captions and other information about your Picture/Objects:

1.	Make sure you're in the Scrapbook and the Picture/Object that you want to record information about is selected.

2.	From the Picture/Object menu, select More About (ALT, O, A).

In this dialog box, you can create captions, descriptions, specify categories for you pictures, and select the preferred Picture/Object for trees, Labels and Cards, and Family Group Sheets

For a detailed description of the options in the More About Picture/Object dialog box, click here.

3.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker closes the More About Picture/Object dialog box.


The More About Picture/Object dialog box

Caption — Type a caption for your Picture/Object in this field.

Category — Type a category of your own creation into this field.  Categories are useful when it's time to print or search for a Picture/Object.  For example, if you wanted to look at all of the Picture/Objects related to childhood birthdays, and you had given all of the childhood birthday Picture/Objects the category "Childhood Birthday," you'd be able to locate all of these birthday pictures easily.

Date of origin — Type the date on which the original item was created.

Type — Click this drop-down list and select the "type" that applies to the currently selected Picture/Object.

Description — Type a description of the Picture/Object in this field.

Include in show — Select this check box if you want Family Tree Maker to include this Picture/Object when you play Scrapbook.  For more information about playing Scrapbooks, see Playing a Scrapbook's Picture/Objects sequentially.

Include in printed Scrapbook — Select this check box if you want Family Tree Maker to print this Picture/Object when you print the Scrapbook.  Items that you might not want to print include sound clips, because they will only print as icons.

Preferred Picture for Home Page — Select this check box to display this Picture/Object with the selected individual when you include him or her in the My Genealogy section of your Family Home Page (created using the Create a Family Home Page link in the Publishing Center).

Note:  Home Pages created in versions of Family Tree Maker prior to 8.0 must use the Update or Edit your Home Page link from the Publishing Center in order to create the My Genealogy section.

Preferred Picture/Object #1 - #3 for Trees — To make it easier to select Picture/Objects to print in trees, Family Tree Maker allows you to select the three Picture/Objects that you are most likely to print for an individual.  You can designate your three choices using the "Preferred Picture/Object for trees" check boxes.

For example, if you picked each individual's birthday photo as the "Preferred Picture/Object #1 for trees" and told Family Tree Maker to include "Preferred Picture/Object #1 for trees" when you printed a tree, the tree would contain each individual's birthday photo.

Although Family Tree Maker only allows you to designate three "preferred" Picture/Objects for trees, you can still include any other Picture/Object in a tree.  You will simply use Categories, described above, when it is time to print.

Preferred Picture/Object for Labels/Cards — To make it easier to select Picture/Objects to print on labels or cards, Family Tree Maker allows you to select the Picture/Object that you are most likely to print for an individual.  You can designate your choice using the "Preferred Picture/Object for Labels/Cards" check box.

All of the same rules apply to "Preferred Picture/Object for Labels/Cards" as for "Preferred Picture/Object for trees," described above.

Preferred Picture/Object for Fam Grp Sheets — To make it easier to select Picture/Objects to print on Family Group Sheets, Family Tree Maker allows you to select the Picture/Object that you are most likely to print for an individual.  You can designate your choice using the "Preferred Picture/Object for Fam Grp Sheets" check box.

All of the same rules apply to "Preferred Picture/Object for Fam Grp Sheets" as for "Preferred Picture/Object for trees," described above.

CD#, Photo#, Resolution — When the currently selected Picture/Object is a Kodak Photo CD picture, Family Tree Maker displays this information.


Moving around in a Scrapbook

You can navigate through a Scrapbook by moving the mouse pointer to the Picture/Object you want to select and then clicking the primary mouse button.  To turn Scrapbook pages with the mouse, click the page turning buttons in the lower right- and left-hand corners of your screen.

You can also use your computer keyboard to move around in a Scrapbook.  The table below shows which keys work as navigation keys.

Press this key	To do this
Up arrow	Move to the Picture/Object above the currently selected Picture/Object
Down arrow	Move to the Picture/Object below the currently selected Picture/Object
Left arrow	Move to the Picture/Object to the left of the currently selected Picture/Object.  Family Tree Maker turns the page if the previous Picture/Object is on the previous page.
Right arrow	Move to the Picture/Object to the right of the currently selected Picture/Object.  Family Tree Maker turns the page if the next Picture/Object is on the next page.
Tab	Move to the next Picture/Object.  Family Tree Maker turns the page if the next Picture/Object is on the next page.
Shift + Tab	Move to the previous Picture/Object.  Family Tree Maker turns the page if the previous Picture/Object is on the previous page.
Home	Move to the first Picture/Object on the current page
End	Move to the last Picture/Object on the current page
Ctrl + Home	Move to the first Picture/Object on the first page of a Scrapbook
Ctrl + End	Move to the last Picture/Object on the last page of a Scrapbook
Page Up	Move one page forward in a Scrapbook
Page Down	Move one page backward in a Scrapbook
Ctrl + M	Display the More About Picture/Object dialog box for the currently selected Picture/Object


Finding information in a Scrapbook

To find a Picture/Object in a Scrapbook:

1.	Make sure you're in the Scrapbook that you want to search.

2.	From the Edit menu, select Find Picture/Object (ALT, E, F).

3.	Click the Search drop-down list and select the name of the field that you want to search.

4.	In the for field, type the information that you want to find.

If the field that you are searching only has certain legal values (such as "yes" or "no"), Family Tree Maker will display a drop-down list in the "for" field.  In this case, just click the item that you want to search for.

5.	Click Find next to start the search.

Family Tree Maker selects the first Picture/Object that matches your request.  If you like, you can edit this Picture/Object and then continue your search by clicking Find next.

6.	Click Find next to continue your search.

Continue clicking Find next until you're done searching or until Family Tree Maker runs out of matches.  To go back to previous matches, you can click Find previous.

7.	To quit the search, click Cancel.

If you didn't find the Picture/Object you were looking for, try again with a less restrictive request.  For example, search for a portion of a caption rather than a complete caption.


The Find Picture/Object dialog box

Search — Click this drop-down list and select the name of the field that you want to search.

For — Type the information that you want to search for in this field.  If the field that you are searching only has certain legal values (such as "yes" or "no"), Family Tree Maker will display a drop-down list in this field.  In this case, just click the item that you want to search for.

Find next — Click this button to start the search.  Continue clicking Find next until you're done searching or until Family Tree Maker runs out of matches.

Find previous — Click this button to go back to previous matches.

Cancel — Click this button to quit a search.


Viewing a picture at full size

To view a non-OLE picture at full size:

1.	In the Scrapbook, select the Picture/Object that you want to view.

2.	From the Picture/Object menu, select View (ALT, O, V).

Family Tree Maker displays the View Picture dialog box.  Use the Zoom buttons to view your picture at larger or smaller sizes.

3.	Click OK to close the View Picture dialog box.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Scrapbook view.


The View Picture dialog box

Zoom In — Click this button to make the picture appear larger on the screen.

Zoom Out — Click this button to make the picture appear smaller on the screen.

When scroll bars are available, you can use them to view different sections of your picture.


Playing an OLE object

To play an OLE object:

1.	Double-click the Picture/Object that you want to play.

What happens after you double-click depends on the OLE object's server.  In most cases, video and sound files will play.  Picture files will most likely appear at full size and spreadsheets will open.

2.	If the OLE server opened, you can return to Family Tree Maker by closing the server.  From the File menu of the server, select Exit and Return to Family Tree Maker.

Note:  If the program does not have a menu choice such as "Exit and Return" or "Update," refer to that program's manual for instructions.


Playing a Scrapbook's Picture/Objects sequentially

To play the Picture/Objects in a Scrapbook sequentially:

1.	Open the Scrapbook for which you want to create a show.  Do not go into Scrapbook Print Preview.

2.	Click the downward-pointing arrow next to each Picture/Object that you want to include in the show.  Make sure that the Include in show check box is selected.

3.	Make sure that the Picture/Objects are in the order in which you want them to appear in the show.  If not, you can move them.  See the topic Copying Picture/Objects between Scrapbooks or Sorting Scrapbooks.

4.	From the Picture/Object menu, select Play Scrapbook (ALT, O, P).

5.	Enter a number in the Time between Picture/Objects field.

You can enter from 1 to 999 seconds.

6.	Click OK.

Family Tree Maker begins the show.


The Play Scrapbook dialog box

Time between Picture/Objects — Enter the number of seconds for which you want Family Tree Maker to display each picture on the screen during the show.  The number must be from 1 to 999.  Click OK when you're ready to start the show.


Rearrange Scrapbook items

Sorting Scrapbooks

Copying Picture/Objects between Scrapbooks

Deleting Picture/Objects


Sorting Scrapbooks

To sort a Scrapbook:

1.	From the Format menu, select Sort Scrapbook (ALT, T, S).

2.	Click the option button for the type of sorting you prefer.

3.	Click OK when you've made your selection.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Scrapbook view.


Editing Picture/Objects

Opening a picture for editing

Rotating a picture

Flipping a picture

Cropping a picture

Editing OLE objects


Editing Picture/Objects

Opening a picture for editing

Rotating a picture

Flipping a picture

Cropping a picture

Editing OLE objects


Opening a picture for editing

To open a picture for editing:

1.	In the Scrapbook, select the picture that you want to edit.

2.	From the Picture/Object menu, select Edit (ALT, O, E).

3.	Family Tree Maker asks if you want to open and edit the original file.  In general, editing the original file will give you the best quality picture.  If you click Yes, go to step 4.  If you click No, Family Tree Maker displays your picture for editing.  Skip the remaining steps and begin editing now.

Note:  If the picture is either black and white, a Kodak Photo CD picture, stored with 1:1 compression, or was pasted into Family Tree Maker, you will not need to get the original file.  Skip the remaining steps and begin editing now.

4.	Select the name of your file.

5.	Click OK.

Family Tree Maker displays your picture in the Edit Picture dialog box.  To rotate, flip, or crop the picture, select one of the topics listed below.

See also

Rotating a picture

Flipping a picture

Cropping a picture


The Edit Picture dialog box

Zoom In — Click this button to make the image appear larger on the screen.

Zoom Out — Click this button to make the image appear smaller on the screen.

Rotate L — Click this button to rotate the picture ninety degrees to the left (counter-clockwise).

Rotate R — Click this button to rotate the picture ninety degrees to the right (clockwise).

Rotate 180 — Click this button to rotate the picture 180 degrees.

Crop — With your mouse pointer, click and drag a rectangular area on the image.  Then, click Crop to remove the area outside of the rectangle.

Mirror — Click this button to flip the picture from left-to-right.

Flip — Click this button to invert (turn upside down) the picture.


Rotating a picture

To rotate a picture:

1.	If you are not already in the Edit Picture dialog box, follow the instructions in the topic Opening a picture for editing.

2.	Click one of the three following buttons:

Rotate L — Use this button to rotate the picture ninety degrees to the left (counter-clockwise).

Rotate R — Use this button to rotate the picture ninety degrees to the right (clockwise).

180 — Use this button to rotate the picture 180 degrees.

3.	If you are finished editing the picture, click OK to have Family Tree Maker place the newly-rotated picture into the Scrapbook.

See also

Flipping a picture

Cropping a picture


Flipping a picture

To flip a picture:

1.	If you are not already in the Edit Picture dialog box, follow the instructions in the topic Opening a picture for editing.

2.	You can flip the picture using two different buttons:

Mirror — Use this button to flip the picture so that it is right-to-left instead of left-to-right.

Flip — If the items in your picture are upside down instead of right side up, use this button to flip the picture.

3.	If you are finished editing the picture, click OK to have Family Tree Maker place the newly-flipped picture into the Scrapbook.

See also

Rotating a picture

Cropping a picture


Cropping a picture

To crop a picture:

1.	If you are not already in the Edit Picture dialog box, follow the instructions in the topic Opening a picture for editing.

2.	Move the cursor onto the image.

The cursor becomes a cross-hair (large plus sign).

3.	Position the cross-hair over the exact spot where you want the top left corner of the cropped picture to be.

If you want to select a very small portion of the picture, click Zoom In to enlarge the picture on the screen.  This will allow you to select the cropping area more accurately.

4.	Press and hold the mouse button while you drag diagonally to the exact spot where you want the lower right corner of the cropped picture to be, then release the mouse button.

5.	Click Crop.

If you want to remove even more of the original picture, repeat steps 2, 3, and 4.  If you feel that you have cropped too much of the picture, click Cancel to start again.

6.	If you are finished editing the picture, click OK to have Family Tree Maker place the newly-cropped picture into the Scrapbook.

See also

Rotating a picture

Flipping a picture


Editing OLE objects

To edit an OLE object:

1.	Select the Picture/Object, and then from the Picture/Object menu, select Edit (ALT, O, E).

Microsoft Windows opens the software program in which the Object was originally created.  If Family Tree Maker cannot find the correct software program, check to see that you have not deleted the software program or moved it to a new location.

2.	Edit the object as needed.

3.	From the File menu of that software program, select Exit and Return to Family Tree Maker.

Note:  If the program does not have a menu choice such as "Exit and Return" or "Update," refer to that program's manual for instructions.

Microsoft Windows closes the software program and returns you to Family Tree Maker.  (Windows may also ask you if you want to update or save your information; answer Yes or OK, unless you don't want to save your changes.)


Setting brightness and contrast

The Brightness and Contrast controls allow you to change the shading in the non-OLE pictures that you have placed in your Scrapbooks.  If the color in an individual picture isn't quite right, you can change that picture's contrast.  If all of your pictures tend to print too darkly, you can change the brightness for all of the pictures at once.  See the two topics below for instructions.

Changing the contrast for a single Picture/Object

Changing the brightness for all Picture/Objects


Changing the contrast for a single Picture/Object

To change the contrast setting for a single Picture/Object:

1.	Select the Picture/Object whose contrast you want to change.

2.	From the Picture/Object menu, select Contrast (ALT, O, N).

3.	Click and drag the Contrast scroll box to change the contrast.

4.	Click OK.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Scrapbook.


The Contrast dialog box

Contrast — Drag the scroll box on this scroll bar to change the contrast of the currently selected picture.

See also

Changing the brightness for all Picture/Objects


Changing the brightness for all Picture/Objects

When you change the brightness setting for all Picture/Objects at once, you are changing it for the current view, not for all views.

To change the brightness setting for all Picture/Objects in a view:

1.	Make sure you are in a view that can print Picture/Objects, such as the Scrapbook view or the Ancestor Tree view.

2.	From the File menu select Print Setup (ALT, F, R).

3.	Click Brightness.

4.	Click and drag the Brightness scroll box to change the brightness of all Picture/Objects in this view.

5.	Click OK when you have made your selection.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Print Setup dialog box.

6.	Click OK to close the Print Setup dialog box.


The Brightness dialog box

Brightness — Click and drag the scroll box to change the brightness of all Picture/Objects in this view.


Setting compression and resolution

Selecting the resolution and compression for a single picture

Selecting defaults for picture resolution and compression


Selecting the resolution and compression for a single picture

You can change the compression of a picture from several places:

 from the Insert Picture dialog box when you are placing a picture into a Scrapbook from a file.

 from the Insert from Photo CD dialog box when you are placing a new Photo CD Picture in a Scrapbook.

 from the Change Compression/Resolution dialog box whenever you are in a Scrapbook.

In addition, if you want to set a default compression or resolution for all pictures that you place in a Scrapbook in the future, see the topic Selecting defaults for picture resolution and compression.

To change compression or resolution:

1.	Select the picture for which you want to change the compression or resolution.

2.	Open the Compression/Resolution dialog box.

•	Note:  How you open this dialog box depends on your current location:

•	If you are in the Import from Photo CD dialog box, click Resolution.

•	If you are in the Import Picture dialog box, click Compression.

•	If you are in a Scrapbook, from the Picture/Object menu, select Compression/Resolution.

•	If Family Tree Maker displays a message telling you to get the original picture, click OK.  Family Tree Maker displays the Insert Picture dialog box.

3.	Select the picture for which you want to change the compression and click Compression.  Family Tree Maker opens the Change Compression/Resolution dialog box.

4.	Make the compression and/or resolution changes you wish.

5.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker changes the compression and/or resolution of the picture and places it in the Scrapbook.

See also

Picture size and your computer


The Change Compression/Resolution dialog box

Options below not available in all views:

Degree of Compression — Select the option button corresponding to the degree of compression that you want for your picture.  Higher ratios give you a greater loss in picture quality, but the pictures will take up less space on your hard disk.  (Family Tree Maker uses the industry standard JPEG compression method and does not support LZW compression.)  Lower ratios give you pictures with less loss in quality, but will take up the most disk space.

Resolution — This option is only available for Kodak Photo CD pictures.  Select the option button corresponding to the resolution that you want for your picture.  "Resolution" refers to the size of your picture.  A higher resolution will create a larger picture, and a larger picture will be sharper and have more detail.  Choosing resolutions higher (larger) than the recommended "256 x 384" will use up large amounts of your hard disk space.  See Picture size and your computer for more information.

Disk Space Needed — This shows the approximate disk space needed to store the picture that you are currently working with.

See also

Selecting Defaults for Picture Resolution and Compression


Copying Picture/Objects between Scrapbooks

To move or copy a Picture/Object, start with the Scrapbook containing the Picture/Object you want to move or copy:

1.	Select the Picture/Object that you want to move or copy.

2.	From the Edit menu, select Cut (ALT, E, T) to remove the Picture/Object from this location.  Select Copy (ALT, E, C) to copy the Picture/Object to another Scrapbook.

If you want to place the Picture/Object in a new location in the same Scrapbook, select the new location and then from the Edit menu, select Paste (ALT, E, P).  You can skip the rest of these steps.  If you want to place the Picture/Object in a different Scrapbook, continue with step 3.

3.	Open the Scrapbook you want to paste the Picture/Object into.

4.	Select the area where you want to paste the Picture/Object.

5.	From the Edit menu, select Paste (ALT, E, P).

Family Tree Maker pastes the Picture/Object from the Clipboard into the Scrapbook and repositions any existing Picture/Objects if necessary.

See also

Opening Scrapbooks


Deleting Picture/Objects

To remove Picture/Objects from a Scrapbook:

1.	Select the Picture/Object that you want to remove.

2.	From the Edit menu, select Cut (ALT, E, C) to cut the Picture/Object to the Clipboard.

Family Tree Maker displays a confirmation dialog box.  If you really want to delete the Picture/Object, click OK.  Otherwise, click Cancel.

Family Tree Maker removes the Picture/Object from the Scrapbook, as well as any information associated with it.  The Picture/Objects remaining in the Scrapbook move to the left to fill up the empty space.


Printing Scrapbook pages

Formatting and printing for Scrapbooks works differently than for other documents in Family Tree Maker.  With Scrapbooks, you can only make formatting changes when you switch to Print Preview.  To go into Print Preview, from the File menu, select Print Preview.

Once you are in Print Preview, you can make your formatting selections and then print.  For information about formatting and printing Scrapbook pages, see the topic "Scrapbook Print Preview."

See also

Printing Scrapbook pages


The Sort dialog box

Sort by — Select the option button for the type of sorting you prefer.


Editing Master Sources

Sometimes you might misspell a Master Source, or get the title incorrect when entering it for the first time. Fortunately, Family Tree Maker provides a quick and easy method for editing your Master Sources.

To edit your Master Sources:

1.	From the Edit menu, select Edit Master Sources.

Family Tree Maker displays the Master Source dialog box.

2.	Use the navigation buttons or the Find Master Source button to find the master source to be edited.

3.	Add or delete text or type over existing text to make necessary changes.

4.	Click OK when you're finished.

5.	Family Tree Maker displays a dialog box asking whether you're changing the name of the current source, or if you intend to create a new one. Since you're editing the source in this case, click Yes to accept the changes.


Merging Duplicate Sources

Documenting the sources in an ever-growing Family File can be a tough job. Researching and tracking the sources for hundreds of relatives is a painstaking process, and entering them in your Family File can be just as difficult. Sometimes you may misspell a source or associate one with the wrong event. These are common mistakes and relatively easy to fix with Family Tree Maker (to fix problems like this, refer to the instructions for editing and deleting sources). But what happens if you wind up with duplicate sources? Suppose you’ve inadvertently created three different master sources for the same event--deleting the duplicates and reassociating them with a single source can take a long time. Fortunately, Family Tree Maker can save you a lot of time by searching for the duplicates and merging them together for you.

Note:  You must have Family Tree Maker version 4.4 or later in order to merge duplicate sources.

Before Family Tree Maker will merge your duplicates, the spelling and punctuation of each source must be identical. The first step is to rename potential duplicates so that their names are spelled exactly the same.

Step 1: Make the Sources Identical:

1.	From Edit menu, select Edit Master Sources.

2.	Click Find Source to display a list of the sources in your Family File.

3.	Select one of the duplicates from the list (the one whose name you’re going to change), and then click OK.

Family Tree Maker displays the associated Master Source dialog box.

4.	Edit the title of the Master Source so that it exactly matches its duplicate.

When you press Enter or click outside of the field, Family Tree Maker displays a dialog box asking if this source is a duplicate of another in your Family File.

5.	Click Yes to change the title of the source.

Family Tree Maker displays another dialog box asking once again if you want to change the title and suggesting that you merge the duplicates.

6.	Click Yes.

7.	Repeat steps 1-6 for all potential duplicates in your Family File.

Step 2: Merge the Duplicates

Once you’ve completed this process and all duplicates are named exactly the same, you need to run the Merge Duplicate Individuals command to merge them together. To complete the process, refer to our instructions for merging duplicate individuals.

Note: Despite the name, the Merge Duplicate Individuals command merges duplicate sources, as well as the duplicate individuals in your Family File.


The Field labels

Field labels, such as "Husband," " Wife," or "Children" identify the type of information that should be displayed or entered in the adjacent field.


Field Labels

Field labels, such as "Husband," " Wife," or "Children" identify the type of information that should be displayed or entered in the adjacent field.


Printing Family Tree Maker documents

Printing Family Trees

Printing Maps

Printing Family Group Sheets

Printing labels and cards

Printing calendars

Printing Family Pages

Printing reports

Printing Genealogy reports

Printing Scrapbook pages

Printing More About dialog boxes

Printing the Research Journal

Batch printing

Changing margins, printers, and page orientation


Printing family trees

Overview

All about family trees

How to...

Select a tree type

Select options for your tree

Add a background image to your tree

Change a tree's size

Select people to include

Add or remove items on your tree

Add a title and footnote

Select colors and styles

Select formats for names, dates, etc.

Change the layout in box-style trees

Change the layout in outline-style trees

Show page lines

Zoom in and out

Print trees

Use a mouse in trees

Copying trees to other programs

See trees and reports

What is this?

The Toolbar


Printing Family Group Sheets

Overview

All about Family Group Sheets

How to...

Create a Family Group Sheet

Select information to include

Add a title and footnote

Change the appearance of text

Select formats for the information

Choose how the pages break

Zoom in and out

Show page lines

Print Family Group Sheets

Copying Family Group Sheets to other programs

Including the current date and time

See reports and trees

What is this?

The toolbar


Printing Calendars

Overview

All about calendars

How to...

Create a calendar

Select people to include

Select information to include

Select the date range

Add a subtitle and footnote

Select colors and styles

Zoom in and out

Show page lines

Print a calendar

See reports and trees

What is this?

The toolbar


Printing Family Pages

Entering basic information in Family Pages

Changing the appearance of text in printed Family Pages

Changing margins, printers, and page orientation

Printing a single Family Page

Batch printing a set of Family Pages


Printing Family Pages

When you print Family Pages you are actually printing a Family Group Sheet report.  For your convenience you can print this information from both the Family Page and the Family Group Sheet view.

Changing the appearance of text in printed Family Pages

Changing margins, printers, and page orientation

Printing a single Family Page

Printing empty Family Pages

Batch printing a set of Family Pages


Changing the appearance of text in printed Family Pages

To format the text and title in a printed Family Page:

1.	From the Format menu, select Text Font, Style, & Size (ALT, T, T).

2.	In the Items to format list, click an item that you want to format, such as Title.

3.	Select formatting options for the item.

For a description of the options in the Text Font, Style, & Size dialog box, click here.

4.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Family Page view.


The Text Font, Style, & Size dialog box

Items to Format — Select the item for which you want to change the text font, size, and/or style. You can use a different font style for each item in the list.

Sample — Displays a sample of the font you’ve selected.

Font — Click this field to display a list of fonts and then click the name of the font you want.

Size — Click this field to display a list of text sizes and then click the text size you want.

Note:  This option is not available for all views.  Where space is critical in order to display the view, Family Tree Maker will select the font size that fits best.

Style — Click this field to display a list of text styles, such as bold or italic, and then click the style you want.

Color — Click this field to display a list of colors and then click the color that you want.

Note:  This option is not available for Genealogy reports.

Alignment — Click this field to display a list of text alignments, such as "Centered," and then click the alignment you want.

Note:  This option is not available for Family Pages, Family Group Sheets, Calendars, Reports, Genealogy Reports, Timelines, Fan Trees, and Outline Descendant Trees.

Underline — Select this check box to underline an item.

Note:  This option is not available for Genealogy reports.


Printing a single Family Page

To print the information contained in a Family Page:

1.	Go to the Family Page containing the information you want to print.

2.	Turn on your printer.

3.	From the File menu, select Print (ALT, F, P).

4.	Select the printing options that you want.

For a description of the options in the Print dialog box, click here.

5.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker prints your Family Page information.


Printing an empty Family Page

To print an empty Family Page:

1.	Go to a Family Page

2.	Turn on your printer.

3.	From the File menu, select Print (ALT, F, P).

4.	Select the printing options that you want.  Be sure the select the Print empty check box.

For a description of the options in the Print dialog box, click here.

5.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker prints your Family Page information.


Printing Scrapbook pages

Overview

All about printing Scrapbook pages

How to...

Enter pictures, sounds, etc. in Scrapbooks

Select Picture/Objects to print

Select other information to print

Add a title and page numbers

Select colors and styles

Choose the page layout

Rearrange Picture/Objects

Zoom in and out

Show page lines

Print Scrapbooks

See reports and trees

What is this?

A Picture/Object

The toolbar


All about printing Scrapbook pages

Printed Scrapbook pages are great documents to add to family books or other collections of printed family information.  You can print Scrapbook pages with as many or as few Picture/Objects per page as you like.  To personalize them, you can add a title and decorative borders, too.

Formatting and printing for Scrapbooks works differently than for other documents in Family Tree Maker.  With Scrapbooks, you can only make formatting changes when you switch to Print Preview.  To go into Print Preview, from the File menu, select Print Preview (ALT, F, V).

Once you are in Print Preview, you can make your formatting selections from the Contents and Format menus and then print.


Printing More About dialog boxes

Printing More About dialog boxes

Changing the appearance of text

Changing margins, printers, and page orientation


Printing More About dialog boxes

Printing More About dialog boxes

Changing the appearance of text

Changing margins, printers, and page orientation


Printing More About dialog boxes

To print More About dialog boxes:

1.	Go to the Family Page containing the individual or marriage whose More About dialog boxes you want to see.

2.	Place your cursor on the individual or marriage.

3.	From the View menu, select More About (ALT, V, M).  From the sub-menu, select the name of the dialog box that you want to see.

If you go to an individual's Notes dialog box, you will only be able to print that individual's Notes.  If you go to any of the individual's other More About dialog boxes, you can print the information contained in all of the individual's More About dialog boxes, except Notes.

4.	Turn on your printer.

5.	From the File menu, select Print (ALT, F, P).

6.	Family Tree Maker displays a message telling you that the font settings in the Family Group Sheet view control the appearance of the printed More About dialog boxes.  Click OK to clear the message.

7.	Select the printing options that you want.

For a description of the options in the Print dialog box, click here.

8.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker prints your More About information.


Changing margins, printers, and page orientation

When you change your print setup, you are changing it for a specific view, not for all views.  For example, if you change the print setup while you're in the Ancestor Tree view, every Ancestor tree that you print afterwards will have the same setup.  However, Descendant trees would not have that setup.

To change your print setup:

1.	From the File menu, select Print Setup (ALT, F, R).  Or, if you're in the Print dialog box, click Setup.

2.	Select the print setup options that you want.

For a description of the options in the Print Setup dialog box, click here.

3.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the current view.

Note:  For troubleshooting help and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs), remember to visit http://www.familytreemaker.com/support.html — this is your best source for accurate assistance with Family Tree Maker.


Printing banner trees

"Banner" printing is different than printing continuous forms.  Certain HP, Epson, and dot matrix printers can print banners.  Other printers will always leave a margin between each page.  To print trees without margins, you must have a printer that supports banner printing.  Refer to the manual that came with your printer to find out whether it supports banner printing.  If your printer and printer driver support banner printing, you can use this feature to print trees.

To print banner trees with Hewlett Packard printers (currently the HP 670C, 680C, 690C, and 720C support banner printing):

Note:	If the page orientation is set to portrait, or if you are printing an outline tree, the margins will "print" even if you set the top and bottom margins to zero.  However, these steps will allow you to print an ancestor tree in portrait mode without margins.

1.	Exit Family Tree Maker and click the Windows 95 Start button.

2.	Point to Settings and then click Printers.

3.	Right-click the icon for the HP banner printer and select Properties from the menu to open the printer Properties dialog box.

4.	Click the Paper tab and select Banner.

5.	Click OK to accept the change and close the Properties dialog box.

6.	Start Family Tree Maker and go to the view you want to print.

7.	From the File menu select Print (ALT, F, P).

8.	In the Print dialog box, click Setup.

9.	Confirm that the Paper Source setting is In Tray and that the Orientation is Landscape.

10. Select the Print continuous forms check box, and then click OK to return to the Print dialog box.

11. Confirm that you have the correct printer selected, and then click OK to print the current view.

To print banner trees with Epson printers (currently the Epson 400, 500, 1520 and 3000 support banner printing):

1.	Exit Family Tree Maker and click the Windows 95 Start button.

2.	Point to Settings and then click Printers.

3.	Right-click the icon for the Epson banner printer and select Properties from the menu to open the printer Properties dialog box.

4.	Click the Paper tab and select Plain as the paper type and User defined for the size.

5.	Set the User defined width to 8.5" and the height to less than 44".

Note:  If the tree is formatted to Center Across Page and you enter 44" as the height, the printer will print 4 pages and center your tree across 4 pages even if it is only a two-page tree.  Therefore, you may want to turn off "Center Tree Across Page" to get the best results from your banner printing.

6.	Under Printable area select Maximum.

7.	Click OK to accept the change and close the dialog box.

8.	Start Family Tree Maker and go to the view you want to print.

9.	From the File menu select Print (ALT, F, P).

10. In the Print dialog box, click Setup.

11. Confirm that the Orientation is Landscape and that Print continuous forms is checked.

12. Click OK to accept these settings and return to the Print dialog box.

13. Confirm that you have the correct printer selected, and then click OK to print the current view.


The Print Setup dialog box

Default/Specific Printer — The default printer is the printer that is selected in the Windows Control Panel and it is the printer you normally use with your other Windows programs.  If you wish to use a different printer, select the Specific printer option button and select a printer from the list that Family Tree Maker displays.

Note:  If the printer you wish to use is not shown in the "Specific Printer" drop-down list, then you need to install that printer's driver.  Consult your Microsoft Windows User's Guide for information about installing printer drivers.

Portrait/Landscape — If you want your document to print with the short edge of the paper at the bottom (as a letter normally prints) select the Portrait option button.  If you want your document to print with the long edge of the paper at the bottom (sideways), select the Landscape option button.

Size/Source — Click the arrow next to the Size field to choose a paper size, and Source to choose your paper source.

Margins — Use the Top, Bottom, Left, and Right fields to change the margins on your pages.

Print continuous forms — If your printer uses continuous forms, you can select this check box to tell Family Tree Maker to print across the perforations in your paper.  This does not apply to laser printers that automatically feed in single sheets of paper.

Overlap pages — If you want information on the edge of one page to be repeated on the edge of the next page so that it's easier to tape pages together, select this check box.

Brightness — In the Brightness dialog box you can control the color level for all of the Picture/Objects that are printed in the current view.  When you have selected a brightness setting, click OK to return to the Print Setup dialog box.

Options — The options available to you depend on your printer.  Make your selections from this dialog box, and then click OK to return to the Print Setup dialog box.


Printing continuous form trees

If your printer and printer driver support printing continuous forms, you can use this feature to print trees.  Refer to the manual that came with your printer to find out whether your printer supports this feature.

Note:	 When you print continuous forms, your trees will still have a margin between each page.  To print trees without margins, you must have a printer that supports banner printing.  Refer to the manual that came with your printer to find out whether your printer supports this feature.

To print continuous forms:

1.	Exit Family Tree Maker and click the Windows 95 Start button.

2.	Point to Settings and then click Printers.

3.	Right-click the icon for your printer and choose Properties from the menu.

4.	Search through the tabs until you find the Margin settings and set them to 0.  	If you can find Unprintable Area settings, you must set all of them to 0 to print continuous in Family Tree Maker.

5.	Click OK to accept the new settings.

6.	Right-click the printer icon to confirm that this printer is the default printer.

7.	Return to Family Tree Maker and go to the view you want to print.

8.	From the File menu, select Print (ALT, F, P).

9.	In the Print dialog box, click Setup.

10. Select the Print continuous forms check box, and then click OK to return to the Print dialog box.

11. Confirm that you have the correct printer selected, and then click OK to print the current view.


All about family trees

Printing beautiful family trees is one of the most rewarding features of Family Tree Maker.  When you print a family tree, you have an easy way to see a portion of the information that you've entered into Family Tree Maker.

You can create a family tree just by choosing one of the tree views from the View menu.  Once the tree is on the screen, experiment with the formatting options on the Contents and Format menus to create your own special tree.

Read below for more information about:

•	Moveable boxes in trees

•	Moveable pictures in trees

Special Note about Moveable Boxes in Trees

Standard Ancestor and standard Descendant trees allow special customizations that the other trees do not.  Beginning with either tree, you can use your mouse to select or “click” and then “drag” a box to the location of your choice.  Combined with the other formatting options available for all boxes, you can create truly beautiful customized and individually designed trees for your next family gathering.

To customize a tree using moveable boxes:

1.	Display a standard Ancestor or Descendant tree.

Note:  Moveable boxes are available only in these two types of trees, and only in Custom layout.

2.	With your mouse, select or “click” a box you want to move, and while keeping the left mouse button depressed, simply “drag” the box to its new location.  Release the mouse button when you are satisfied with the placement.

Note:  As you move boxes, Family Tree Maker automatically adds pages to your tree as required to accommodate your new layout.

3.	Using the Contents or Format menus, make any stylistic changes you wish.

Note:  Keep in mind that these alterations (prior to step 4) will also be applied to the default tree for the particular type of tree you are editing.  For example, if you are editing a standard Descendant tree, all subsequent standard Descendant trees will appear with the same contents and formatting.

4.	From the File menu, select Save . . .Tree.

Family Tree Maker displays the Save View dialog box.

5.	Use the Please give a name to this view field to type a name for your customized tree, or accept the name Family Tree Maker suggests.  For reference, Family Tree Maker displays all previously Saved Views so that you can verify your new name is unique.

6.	Click OK to create a Saved View, or click Cancel to close the dialog box and return to your tree.

Adding Moveable Pictures to Trees

You can insert pictures (in addition to background pictures) into standard Ancestor and Descendant trees, change their size (scale), add borders, change font styles and add captions to them.  Captions can be either linked to images or used as stand-alone text boxes that can also be moved anywhere on the page.

Images may be from Photo CDs, pictures you have already saved on your computer (pictures from file) such as those used in Scrapbooks, or from scanners and cameras (Twain devices), or other objects.

Pictures are added to trees using the same steps as when adding them to Scrapbooks.  For more information go to Inserting Items into Scrapbooks.


Selecting people to include

Selecting the primary individual

Choosing between Descendant and Direct descendant trees

Selecting the number of generations

Including duplicate ancestors in Ancestor trees and Ancestor Fan trees (due to marriage between cousins, etc.)

Including duplicate descendants in Descendant trees and Descendant Fan trees (due to marriage between cousins, etc.)

Including duplicate descendants in Outline Descendant trees (due to marriage between cousins, multiple spouses, etc.)

Including spouses in Outline Descendant trees

Including siblings of the primary individual in Ancestor trees and Ancestor Fan trees

Emphasizing the relationship between two people in your tree


Selecting the primary individual

To select the primary individual for your tree, report, or other view:

1.	Display a Family Page containing the individual that you want to be the primary individual.

2.	Place the cursor on that individual's name.

3.	From the View menu, select any of the tree or report views shown.

Family Tree Maker displays the new view, with the individual you selected as the primary individual.

Note: You can change the primary individual by selecting a new person from the Index of Individuals:

•	From the View menu, select Index of Individuals. Select the new primary individual from the list, and then click OK.


Choosing between Descendant and Direct Descendant trees

To choose between Descendant and Direct Descendant trees:

1.	From the Contents menu, select Individuals to Include (ALT, C, N). (You must first be in either the Descendant tree view, the Outline Descendant tree view, or the Descendant Fan tree view.)

2.	Choose which individuals you want in the tree.

All descendants — If you want to create a regular Descendant, Outline Descendant, or Descendant Fan tree, select this option button and click OK.  Skip the remaining steps.

Direct Descendants from ... to — If you want to create a Direct Descendant tree, Outline Direct Descendant tree, or Direct Descendant Fan tree, select this option button.

Include siblings of direct descendants — Select this check box if you would like to include each individual's brothers and sisters in an Outline Descendant tree or Outline Direct Descendant tree.

3.	Click Change secondary individual.

4.	Select the name of the individual that you want at the bottom of your tree (the secondary individual) and click OK.

5.	Click OK to close the Individuals to Include dialog box.


The Individuals to Include dialog box

All descendants — If you want to create a regular Descendant or Outline Descendant tree, select this option button and click OK.  Skip the remaining steps.

Direct Descendants from ... to — If you want to create a Direct Descendant or Outline Direct Descendant tree, select this option button.

Include siblings of direct descendants — Select this check box if you would like to include each individual's brothers and sisters in the tree.

Change secondary individual — If you are creating a Direct Descendant or Outline Direct Descendant tree, click this button to choose the secondary individual (the individual at the bottom of the tree).


The Change Secondary Individual dialog box

Name list — Select the name of the individual that you want to be the secondary individual in your tree.  The options described below can help you locate a name in the list.

Name — To find a name in the Name list, type it in this field last name first.  The list must be sorted alphabetically by last name to use this feature.

Find — Click this button in order to start a search for any name or group of letters.  After typing a name and clicking OK, click Next and Previous to look through the matching names.

Options — Click this button to change the order of the names in the Name list.


Selecting a tree type

To choose a tree type:

1.	From the View menu, select a tree view, either Ancestor Tree, Vertical Ancestor Tree, Descendant Tree, Hourglass Tree, Outline Descendant Tree, All-in-One Tree, or Timeline (ALT, V, A), (ALT, V, A, V), (ALT, V, D), (ALT, V, H), (ALT, V, O), (ALT, V, N), (ALT, V, T).

Note:  If you've chosen to view a Descendant tree, or Outline Descendant tree, you will also find information about creating Direct Descendant and Outline Direct Descendant trees in the topic Choosing between Descendant and Direct Descendant trees.

2.	Once you have selected a tree view, you will see a sub-menu.  You can either choose Standard or Fan depending on the format of the tree you want displayed.

Note:  The Fan tree format is not available for the Outline Descendant tree or the Timeline.

3.	For "box style" trees, from the Format menu, select Tree Format (ALT, T, F).

4.	In the Type field, select the option button for the type of tree that you want to create.

Select Fit to Page if you only want a one-page tree.  Select Book layout if you want a tree that is divided into pages (paginated trees) or if you are creating a tree to use in a book.  Otherwise, select Custom.

Note:  The Book layout (paginated trees) option is not available for Fan trees.  For a description of the options available for the Timeline, see Format for Timeline.

5.	Click OK to close the dialog box.  Or, you can choose the tree layout and box connections.  These are described in the topic Changing the layout in box-style trees.


Showing page lines

You can control whether or not dotted lines indicating page margins appear on the screen.  From the Format menu, select Show Page Lines (ALT, T, S).  If this option has a check next to it, the page lines will be visible.  Otherwise, they won't be.  Page lines never appear on your printed documents.

See also

Changing margins, printers, and page orientation


Zooming in and out

To use the Zoom command:

1.	From the View menu, select Zoom (ALT, V, Z).

2.	Select the option button for the size that you prefer.  Please note that this selection does not change the size at which your document prints.

For a description of your options, click here.

3.	Click OK when you've made your selection.

When your whole document is not visible on the screen, Family Tree Maker places scroll bars on the bottom and right sides of it.


The Zoom dialog box

Select the option button for the size that you prefer.  Size to Window fits your entire document on the screen.  Actual Size shows the document approximately at the size the document will be when you print it.  200% is the largest size.


Using a mouse with trees

You can click in trees to do two different things:

 navigate through Family Tree Maker, moving to different views and making different individuals the primary individual.

 activate Picture/Objects, either viewing pictures at full size or "playing" OLE objects.  For more information about including Picture/Objects in your trees see the topic How to: select information to include.

Whether you navigate through Family Tree Maker or activate your Picture/Objects depends on what you click and whether you double-click or single-click.  The table below describes each of the functions.

Do this...	To do this...
Click once anywhere in a box, or click an individual's name in outline-style trees.	Select the individual.  You can then use the menus or the toolbar to change to any view.  The selected individual becomes the primary individual.
Double-click any text in a box, or double-click an individual's name in outline-style trees.	Go to the individual's Family Page.
Double-click a Picture/Object in a box (not available for outline-style trees).	If the Picture/Object is an OLE object, Family Tree Maker opens the OLE server and "plays" the object.  For example, it plays sound and video files. If the Picture/Object isn't an OLE object, Family Tree Maker displays it in the View Picture dialog box.


Changing the layout in box-style trees

To choose your tree layout:

1.	From the Format menu, select Tree Format (ALT, T, F).

2.	Make your layout selections.  Not all options are available for all tree types.

For a description of the options in the Tree Format dialog box, click here.

3.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the tree view.

See also

How to: select a tree type


The Tree Format dialog box

Fit to page — This option is only available for Ancestor and Fan trees.  Select this option button if you only want one-page trees. When you select this option, Family Tree Maker controls things like the tree's layout, font size, number or generations, and the amount of information that prints in the boxes.

Book Layout — Select this option if you want a tree that is divided into pages (paginated trees).  Each page contains cross-references to the previous and next page so that you can easily include your trees in a family book.  If you plan to create a family book, choose this layout option.  If you choose any other layout option, Family Tree Maker will automatically convert your tree to the Book layout when you add your tree to a book.  For more information about family books see, the topic Creating Family Books.  This option is not available for Fan trees.

Custom — Select this option button if you want to allow your trees to grow larger than one page.  Trees that use this option can have any number of pages, and you have complete control over the tree's appearance, from the information that it contains to the color and size of the text.

Note:  If you want to customize a standard Ancestor or Descendant tree with moveable boxes, you must select this option.

Connections — This option is only available for Ancestor trees.  Click the button showing the type of box connections you prefer.  "Detached" will give you the largest tree and "Fishtail" the smallest, while trees with "Overlap" connections are in the middle.  This option is not available for Fan trees.

Shape — This option is only available for Fan trees.  Click the button showing the tree shape you prefer.  The circle shape creates the largest tree, the semi-circle creates a mid-size tree, and the wedge creates the smallest tree.

Density — This option is only available for Fan trees.  Click the button showing the spacing you prefer.

Layout — Click the button showing the type of tree layout you prefer.  For Ancestor trees, "Perfect" creates the largest tree, "Squished" creates the smallest, and "Collapsed" will give you a tree somewhere in the middle.  For Descendant trees, "Automatic" allows Family Tree Maker to choose the arrangement of boxes, "Horizontal" arranges all boxes side by side in a given generation, and "Vertical" arranges all boxes in the lowest generation of each branch on top of each other.  This option is not available for Fan trees.

Flip text — Select this check box if you want the text on the right side of the page to face right, and the text on the left side of the page to face left.  This enables you to read the text without turning the page upside-down.

Center tree on page(s) — Select this check box if you would like your tree to be centered between the left, right, top, and bottom margins.

Make all boxes same size — Deselect this check box if you want to allow the tree's boxes to vary in size, which saves space.

Boxes overlap page breaks — This check box allows boxes to overlap page breaks (available only for Standard trees of Custom type and if applicable, Detached connections).

Rotate tree to center — This option is only available for Fan trees. Select this check box if you want the branches of your tree to form uniform angles from the center of the tree.  De-select this check box if you want to align the branches with the bottom of the page.


The Timeline Format dialog box
The Format for Timeline dialog box

Time Scale

Years per inch — Sets the number of years displayed (20, 50, or 100) per inch, in the timeline.  Choose a larger number for a more compact view.

Tick mark every — Sets the number of decades between tick marks displayed in the timeline.  Use the arrows to display a number between 1 and 10.

Years flow — Sets the way the flow of years is displayed, either left to right (1800 to 1990) or right to left (1990 to 1800).

Display

Display historical events — Select this check box to enable the display of historical events.

In body of timeline — Select this option to display historical events throughout the body of the timeline.

At bottom of timeline — Select this option to display historical events grouped together at the bottom of the timeline.

Choose — Click to display the Choose Historical Events dialog box.  This dialog allows you to choose which categories of historical events to display on your Timeline, such as: Arts, Asia, Economics, Europe, Military, Politics, Religion, Technology, United States and World.  The default setting is for all of the Categories to be turned on.  Once you have made your selections, click OK to continue.

Graphically display estimated dates — When this check box is selected, life bars that contain estimated birth or death dates will display hash marks instead of closed (solid) end-lines. When deselected, all life bars display closed ends.


The Hourglass Format dialog box

This dialog contains two tabs: General and Density.

General tab for Hourglass tree

Book Layout — Select this option button if you want a tree that is divided into pages (paginated trees).  Each page contains cross-references to the previous and next page so that you can easily include your trees in a family book.  If you plan to create a family book, choose this layout option.  If you choose any other layout option, Family Tree Maker will automatically convert your tree to the Book layout when you add your tree to a book.  For more information about family books see, the topic Creating Family Books.  This option is not available for Fan trees.

Custom — Select this option button if you full control over things like the tree's layout, font size, number or generations, and the amount of information that prints in the boxes.

Center tree on page(s) — Select this option to center your tree on the page.

Make all boxes same size — Deselect this check box if you want to allow the tree's boxes to vary in size, which saves space.

Boxes overlap at page breaks — Select this option if you want to have the boxes overlap at page breaks.  This option will make it easier to attach the pages together if you are putting together a large tree. You cannot center your tree on the page when this option is disabled.

Layout tab for Hourglass tree

Ancestor section — This refers to the top portion of the hourglass.  Choose whether you want a prefect, condensed, or squished Hourglass tree.  The squished format would allow for the most individuals to be displayed.

Descendant section — This refers to the bottom portion of the hourglass.  Choose whether you want a automatic, horizontal, or 1-column Hourglass tree.  The automatic format would allow for the most individuals to be displayed.

General tab for Hourglass Fan tree

Fit to page — Select this option button if you only want one-page trees. When you select this option, Family Tree Maker controls things like the tree's layout, font size, number or generations, and the amount of information that prints in the boxes.

Custom — Select this option button if you full control over things like the tree's layout, font size, number or generations, and the amount of information that prints in the boxes.

Shape — Choose the shape for the display of the hourglass

Make all boxes the same width — Select this option if you want all of the boxes on the Hourglass tree to be the same width

Flip text — Select this option if you want to change the orientation of the text in the boxes.

Density tab for Hourglass Fan tree

Ancestor section — This refers to the top portion of the hourglass.  Choose whether you want a generous, condensed or squished Hourglass tree.  The squished format would allow for the most individuals to be displayed.

Descendant section — This refers to the bottom portion of the hourglass.  Choose whether you want a generous, condensed or squished Hourglass tree.  The squished format would allow for the most individuals to be displayed.


The Fit to Page dialog box

Family Tree Maker has made one or more of the following changes to the format of your Fan tree:

 Reduced spacing between the boxes

 Adjusted the size of the boxes to fit the text. Which means some boxes may be larger than others.

 Changed the shape and rotation of the tree to make it more compact.

 Enabled branches to overlap neighboring branches.

 Reduced the number of items that appear in the boxes.

 Reduced the number of generations and individuals included in the tree.


When your tree grows too large

Currently, the Fit to page option is selected in the Tree Format dialog box.  This option helps prevent your tree from growing larger than one page when you don't want it to.  However, the options that you just selected are too big to fit on a single page.  You can click any of the following:

Undo — Click this button to reverse the last option you selected that made your tree grow too large.

Custom tree — Click this button to allow your tree to grow larger than one page.

Reduce items — Click this button to reduce the amount of information included in your tree.  Family Tree Maker will automatically remove items from the Items to Include list.


Changing the layout in outline-style trees

To format an Outline Descendant tree:

1.	From the Format menu, select Tree Format (ALT, T, F).

2.	Select the formatting options that you want for your tree.

For a description of the options in the Format for Outline Descendant Tree dialog box, click here.  In this dialog box, you can number the generations, change the indentation of the generations, increase the space allowed for individual data, or include blank lines between the people in the tree.

3.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the tree view.


The Format for Outline Descendant Tree dialog box

Indentation — Some people find it easier to distinguish between generations when there are leader dots (........) extending from the left margin of the page to each individual's name.  If you want leader dots in your tree, enter a period (.) in the Indent with which character field.  If you want to indent with a character other than leader dots, enter that character into the field.  Leave it blank if you don't want anything at all.  To increase or decrease the size of each generation's indentation, click the up arrow or down arrow in the Indent each generation by field.

Generation Numbers — Generation numbers can help you see who belongs to which generation.  To include generation numbers, select the Place a generation number before each descendant's name check box.  Normally, "1" is the first generation number in a tree.  However, you can enter any number, up to 9999, in the Starting generation number field.

Size & Spacing — If you choose to include a lot of information for each individual in your tree, it may not always fit on a single line.  To allow an individual's information to wrap over more than one line, enter a number greater than one in the Maximum height (in rows) for each individual field.  To limit each individual to one line only, enter "1" in the field.

Blank lines between each individual's information can make outline-style trees easier to read, but they will also decrease the amount of information that you can fit on a single page.  To include blank lines between each individual in your tree, enter a number greater than zero in the Number of blank lines between individuals field.

Selecting the Always one page wide check box means that Family Tree Maker will not let the tree grow wider than one page.  If any individual's information is too wide to fit on one page, Family Tree Maker will try reducing the size of the text in the tree to make the information fit.  You can avoid this by increasing the number in the Maximum height (in rows) for each individual field.


Selecting the number of generations

To choose the number of generations to include in your tree:

1.	From the Contents menu, select # of Generations to Show (ALT, C, G).

2.	Select the number of generations that you want to include in your tree.

For a description of the options in the # of Generations to Show dialog box, click here.

3.	Click OK when you've made your selection.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the tree view.


The # of Generations to Show dialog box

Select number of generations to show — In this field, enter the number of generations that you want to include in your tree.

 Fan, Descendant and Direct Descendant trees can have up to 99 generations

 Book Layout (paginated trees) and Custom Ancestor trees can have up to 99 generations

 Fit to Page Fan and Ancestor trees can have up to 6 generations

 Outline Descendant and Outline Direct Descendant trees can have up to 250 generations.

When you look at a Fit to Page Fan tree or Ancestor tree, you may notice that Family Tree Maker abbreviates some of the names, locations, and biographical information to get the tree to fit on a single page.  This happens most often with trees of 5 or more generations.


The # of Generations to Show dialog box

Generations of Ancestors and Generations of Descendants — In these fields, enter the number of generations to include in your tree.  You can choose any number from 1 to 99.


Selecting information to include

To add items to or remove items from trees:

1.	From the Contents menu, select Items to Include (ALT, C, I).

2.	Select information for your tree by adding items to or removing items from the list on the right.

You can select from a variety of items, including names, aka’s, birth/death dates, marriage information, medical information, addresses, custom facts, pictures, blank rows, etc.

For a description of the options in the Items to Include dialog box and a selection of related topics, click here.

Some items, such as names and dates, require you to make formatting choices.  Family Tree Maker automatically displays a dialog box that asks you to make a formatting choice when it is necessary.  You can also select an item in the list on the right and click Options to make formatting choices.

3.	Select items in the list on the right and then click the Move up and Move down buttons to place the items in the order that you want.

4.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the tree view.

See also

How to: select formats for names, dates, etc.

Selecting colors and styles for text


The Items to Include dialog box

Include (the arrow pointing to the right) — Select an item in the list on the left and then click this button to include that item in the tree.

Remove (the arrow pointing to the left) — Select an item in the list on the right and then click this button to remove that item from the tree.

Remove all (the double arrows pointing to the left) — Click this button to remove all items from the list on the right.

Move up — Select an item in the list on the right and then click this button to move that item up one space in the list.

Move down — Select an item in the list on the right and then click this button to move that item down one space in the list.

Options — Select an item in the list on the right and then click this button to format that item.  For example, you could choose a name format that uses middle initials instead of full middle names.

Font — Click the name of an item in the list on the right and then click this button to change the font in which that item will print.

See also

How to: select formats for names, dates, etc.

Selecting colors and styles for text


Selecting formats for names, dates, etc.

When you're selecting items to include in your tree, Family Tree Maker sometimes displays a Format dialog box.  You can use the dialog box to control the appearance of the information.  You can also format information after you've chosen to include it in your tree:

1.	From the Contents menu, select Items to Include (ALT, C, I).

2.	Select an item in the list on the right.

3.	Click Options.

Depending on the item, you can change a variety of options, such as the starting Ahnentafel number, or whether you want to include source information, labels of empty fields, and picture captions.

Note:  If Options remains grayed out, that item does not have any formatting options.

For a detailed description of the Options: Name dialog box or Options: aka dialog box, click here; the Options: Picture/Object dialog box, click here; the Options: Date/Location dialog box, click here; the Options: Fact dialog box, click here; the Options: Standard Number dialog box, click here; the Options: Custom Fields dialog box, click here; all other Options dialog boxes, click here.

4.	Make your formatting selections and then click OK.

The selections that you make will affect every occurrence of that information in your tree (e.g., all names, all Pictures/Objects, all birth dates).

5.	Click OK to close the Items to Include dialog box.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the tree view.

See also

How to:  note your sources


Selecting colors and styles

Selecting colors and styles for boxes, lines, & tree borders

Selecting colors and styles for text


Selecting colors and styles for text

To format items that appear in your tree's boxes:

1.	From the Format menu, select Text Font, Style, & Size (ALT, T, T).

2.	In the Items to format list, select an item that you want to format, such as Name.

3.	Choose formatting options for the selected item.

For a description of the options in the Text Font, Style, & Size dialog box, click here.

4.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the tree view.


The Options, Picture/Object dialog box
The Options: Picture/Object dialog box

Preferred picture/object #1-3 — Select one of these option buttons to include the Picture/Objects that you chose as a "Preferred Picture/Object for trees" in each More About Picture/Object dialog box.  For more information about the More About Picture/Object dialog box, see the topic How to: create captions and categories for Picture/Objects.

By Category and Type — Instead of using the "Preferred Picture/Objects," you can choose to include Picture/Objects of a particular category and type.  Categories are classifications that you create.  Types are chosen from a drop-down list in the More About Picture/Object dialog box.  They describe what Picture/Objects are, such as "Pictures" or "Sound Clips."  Again, see the topic How to: create captions and categories for Picture/Objects.  If the category that you assigned to a Picture/Object does not appear in the "By Category" drop-down list, just type it into the field.  When there is more than one Picture/Object in the category that you select, Family Tree Maker uses the first one.

Include caption — Select this check box to include the captions you created in each Picture/Object's More About Picture/Object dialog box.

Include date — Select this check box to include the date you entered in each Picture/Object's More About Picture/Object dialog box.

Picture/Object Placement — To choose how the text and Picture/Objects are arranged in your tree's boxes, select the button picturing the placement that you prefer.

Missing Picture/Objects — Click this button to choose a graphic (or blank space) to place in the boxes of individuals who do not have Picture/Objects in their Scrapbooks.

See also

Changing the width of boxes and Picture/Objects

The Missing Picture/Objects dialog box


The Missing Picture/Objects dialog box

You may not have a Picture/Object for all of the individuals that you are including in the tree.  When this is the case, Family Tree Maker substitutes a graphic (or a blank space) where the Picture/Object normally would be.

When a Picture/Object is missing, use the following — Click the button for the graphic that you prefer or choose the blank space.

Choose Picture — Click this if you want to use your own picture file as a substitute graphic.  The graphic can be in any of the following file formats:  Windows Bitmap (*.BMP), ZSoft Image (*.PCX), Tagged Image Format (*.TIF), JPEG Interchange Format (*.JPG, *.JFF), Photoshop (*.PSD), Windows Metafile (*.WMF), and FlashPix (*.FPX).  When you click this button, Family Tree Maker displays the Insert Picture dialog box.  If you need instructions, see the topic The Insert Picture from File dialog box.


Selecting colors and styles for boxes, lines, & tree borders

To select formatting options for boxes, lines, and borders:

1.	From the Format menu, select Box, Line, & Border Styles (ALT, T, B).

2.	Make your selections by clicking the buttons with the pictures of the borders, lines, and boxes that you like.  You can also select colors for different elements of your tree.

For a description of the options in the Box, Line, & Border Styles dialog box, click here.

3.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the tree view.


The Box, Line, & Border Styles dialog box
The Styles dialog box

This is a three-tabbed dialog that lets you choose the box, line, and border style options that you want for your tree.  Options mentioned relating to boxes are not available for outline-style trees.

Boxes tab

Items to Format — Choose which gender, picture, or caption text you want to format.  You can format all five choices (Females, Males, Unknown Gender, Pictures and Captions) but you need to handle one at a time.

Box style — Click the button showing the style of box that you want drawn around each individual's information.

Outline — Click this drop-down list and select the color that you want to outline the box.

Fill — Click this drop-down list and select the color that you want to fill the box.

Shadow — Click this drop-down list and select the color that you want for the box shadow (only with the bottom two box styles).

Color by generation — Select this check box to have each generation a different color.

Borders tab

Border style — Click the button showing the style of border that you want drawn around each page.

Border color — Click this drop-down list and select the color that you want for the page border.

Background color — Click this drop-down list and select the color that you want for the entire background of the tree.

Lines tab

Line style — Click the button showing the line thickness that you want for the boxes and page border.

Line color — Click this drop-down list and select the color you want for the boxes.

Highlight relationship between — Select this check box to emphasize the relationship between two people by highlighting the line that connects them.

Note:  A second Line color drop-down list appears to the right when the Highlight relationship between option is enabled.

Line color — Click this drop-down list and select the color for the connecting line between any two individuals.

Change — Click the Change buttons to select the two people whose relationship you want to emphasize.

Show non-natural parent/child relationships with dashed lines — Select this check box to display all non-natural parental relationships using dashed lines.  Family Tree Maker draws the dashed line around the child’s box.


The Options, Name dialog box; The Options, aka dialog box
The Options: Name dialog box and the Options: aka dialog box

Options: Name dialog box

Format — Click this drop-down list and select a format for the names in your tree.  For example, you could choose to omit middle names, or split names onto two lines.  A line split is indicated by "\\".

Include Mr./Mrs./Ms. — If you would like titles to appear in your tree, select this check box.  If you entered a title an individual's More About Lineage dialog box, Family Tree Maker uses the title you entered instead of Mr./Mrs./Ms. See Entering nicknames, titles, and parental relationship information..  You must also select the "Use married names for females" option for Family Tree Maker to correctly apply the Ms. and Mrs. titles.

Use married names for females — To use women's married names as last names and maiden names as middle names, select this check box.  Otherwise Family Tree Maker uses women's full maiden names.

Use aka if available — If you prefer to include nicknames, select this check box.  You can replace the given name with the nickname, or place the nickname between the first and last names.

Last name all caps — Select this check box to print last names in all capital letters.

Word wrap — Select this check box to have long names wrap onto two lines, saving space in your tree.

Include reference number with name — If you use reference numbers in your Family File, select this check box to include them next to people's names.

Include standard number with name — Select this check box to have Family Tree Maker calculate Standard (Ahnentafel) numbers for you.  When you select this check box, you should type the number for the primary individual in the Starting standard number field.  Generally, the starting number will be "1".

Include Source — If you documented sources, select this check box to include them in your view.  If you entered a source "Title," the title appears, otherwise the source "Footnote" appears.

Include source label — If you choose to include sources in your view, you can also choose whether to include a label with the source reference.  To include a label, click the Include source label check box, and then select either Source or Src as the label.

Include labels of empty fields — To include a source label when you did not document a source, click this check box.

Options: aka dialog box

Format — Click this drop-down list and select a format for the names in your tree.  For example, you could choose to omit middle names, or split names onto two lines.  A line split is indicated by "\\".

Include Mr./Mrs./Ms. — If you would like titles to appear in your tree, select this check box.  If you entered a title an individual's More About Lineage dialog box, Family Tree Maker uses the title you entered instead of Mr./Mrs./Ms. See Entering nicknames, titles, and parental relationship information..

Last name all caps — Select this check box to print last names in all capital letters.

Word wrap — Select this check box to have long names wrap onto two lines, saving space in your tree.

Include field label — Select this check box to include a field label.

Include labels of empty fields — To include a field label when you do not have an aka, click this check box.


The Options, Date/Location dialog box
The Options: Date/Location and Fact dialog box

Depending on the type of information that you are formatting, all of the options listed below may not be available.

Include — Select the option button next to the information that you want to include:  only the date, only the location, or both.  For example, if you are including marriage information, you can include either the marriage date, the marriage location, or both.

Include field label — Select this check box to include labels for your information.  Then, if you want a complete field label, select the Full option button.  If you want an abbreviated field label, select the Abbreviated option button instead.

Include "in" before comment/location — Select this check box to insert the word "in" between the date and location of an event.  For example "Married: September 12, 1994 in Glendale, California."  (The "in" won't print in bold type.)

Include labels of empty fields — Select this check box if you want field labels to appear when the field doesn't contain any information.  For example, if you didn't have a marriage date for a relative, the word "Married" would appear with blank space next to it.  If you didn't select this check box, the line for that relative's marriage information would be completely blank, or would be replaced by the next item included.

Include source information — Select this check box to print sources next to the information, when available.

Display only preferred dates/locations — Select this check box if you want to show only those dates/locations that you have marked as preferred.

Word wrap — Select this check box to wrap longer information onto several lines.

See also

How to: note your sources


The Options, Standard Number dialog box
The Options: Standard Number dialog box

Starting number — Type the Standard (Ahnentafel) number for the primary individual in this field.  Normally you would type "1" in this field.  However, if you have a set of trees and you want the Ahnentafel numbers to be sequential from tree to tree, choose an appropriate starting number to type in the field.  Ahnentafel numbers are only available in Ancestor trees.


Printing reports

Overview

All about reports

How to...

Select a report type

Select people to include

Select information to include

Add a title and footnote

Format names in reports

Select colors and styles

Select the width of each column

Sort reports

Find someone in a report

Use a mouse with reports

Zoom in and out

Show page lines

Including the current date and time

Print a report

Export a report

See reports and trees

What is this?

The Toobar

The Type name field

The Canon & Civil report format


Printing Genealogy Reports

Overview

All about Genealogy reports

How to...

Select a Genealogy report type

Add a title

Select the number of generations

Select styles for text

Select other printing options

Zoom in and out

Show page lines

Print a Genealogy report

Export a Genealogy report

See reports and trees

What is this?

The Toolbar

"+" signs on report


All other Options dialog boxes

Include field label — Select this check box to include labels for your information.  Then, if you want a complete field label, select the Full option button.  If you want an abbreviated field label, select the Abbreviated option button.

Include "in" before comment/location — Select this check box to insert the word "in" between the date and location of an event.  For example "Married:  September 12, 1994 in Glendale, California."  (The "in" won't print in bold type.)

Include labels of empty fields — Select this check box if you want field labels to appear when the field doesn't contain any information.  For example, if you didn't have a marriage date for a relative, the word "Married" would appear with blank space next to it.  If you didn't select this check box, the line for that relative's marriage information would be completely blank, or would be replaced by the next item included.

Include source information — Select this check box to print sources next to the information, when available.

Word wrap — Select this check box to wrap longer information onto several lines.


The Options, Custom Field dialog box
The Options: Custom Field dialog box

Custom field — Type up to 80 characters of text in this field.  Remember, what you type in this field will appear as part of every individual's information.


Adding a title and footnote to a tree

To add a title or footnote to your tree:

1.	From the Contents menu, select Title & Footnote (ALT, C, T).

2.	Create your title and footnote.

For a description of the options in the Title & Footnote dialog box, click here.

3.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the tree view.


The Title & Footnote dialog box

Automatic title — Select this button if you want Family Tree Maker to create a title for you.

Custom title — Select this button if you want to create your own title.  Type your title in the field provided.

Footnote — Type your footnote in the field provided.  It can be up to four lines long and will print in the lower left corner of your tree.

Draw box around footnote — Select this check box to place a box around your footnote.


Changing the layout in box-style trees

Changing the layout in box-style trees

Changing the width of boxes and Picture/Objects

Adding row or column labels


Changing the width of boxes and Picture/Objects
Changing the width of boxes and Pictures/Objects

To set a maximum width for your tree's boxes and Pictures/Objects:

1.	From the Format menu, select Maximum Box Width.

2.	Enter maximum widths for boxes and pictures in boxes.

For a description of the options in the Maximum Box Width for Each Box dialog box, click here.

3.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the tree view.


The Maximum Box Width dialog box

Maximum box width — Enter a number in this field to limit the width of the tree's boxes.  To get a smaller tree, enter a smaller number.  You may enter any width between 0.10 and 99.99 inches.

Maximum width of pictures in boxes — Enter a number in this field to limit the width of the Pictures/Objects in the tree.  To allow the Pictures/Objects to fit inside their boxes, this number must be slightly smaller than the number in the "Maximum box width" field.  You may enter any width between 0.00 and 99.81 inches.


Including duplicate ancestors and descendants in Hourglass trees and Hourglass Fan trees

If you have an instance of intermarriage in your family (for example cousins marrying cousins), you have duplicate individuals in your tree.  To make it easier for you to identify duplicate individuals, a bracketed number, such as [1] appears next to each occurrence of a duplicate individual's name.  If there are several duplicate individuals, the first one will be assigned [1], the second one will be assigned [2] and so on.  You can choose whether to include these individuals each time they occur or only once.

To include duplicate ancestors and descendants in a tree:

1.	From the Contents menu, select Options (ALT, C, O).

2.	Select the Include duplicate ancestors and descendant each time they appear check box.

3.	Click OK when you've made your selection.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the tree view.


Including duplicate ancestors in Ancestor trees and Ancestor Fan trees

If you have an instance of intermarriage in your family (for example cousins marrying cousins), you have duplicate individuals in your tree.  To make it easier for you to identify duplicate individuals, a bracketed number, such as [1] appears next to each occurrence of a duplicate individual's name.  If there are several duplicate individuals, the first one will be assigned [1], the second one will be assigned [2] and so on.  You can choose whether to include these individuals each time they occur or only once.

To include duplicate ancestors in a tree:

1.	From the Contents menu, select Options (ALT, C, O).

2.	Select the Include duplicate ancestors each time they appear check box.

3.	Click OK when you've made your selection.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the tree view.


Including duplicate descendants in Desendant trees and Descendant Fan trees
Including duplicate descendants in Descendant trees and Descendant Fan trees

If you have an instance of intermarriage in your family (for example cousins marrying cousins), you have duplicate individuals in your tree.  To make it easier for you to identify duplicate individuals, a bracketed number, such as [1] appears next to each occurrence of a duplicate individual's name.  If there are several duplicate individuals, the first one will be assigned [1], the second one will be assigned [2] and so on.

In cases where an individual had multiple spouses, you will also have duplicate individuals in your tree. Family Tree Maker will not display bracketed numbers for these individuals unless you modify Family Tree Maker's configuration file, FTW.INI. If you want to change the configuration file, click here for details.

To include duplicate descendants in a tree:

1.	From the Contents menu, select Options (ALT, C, O).

2.	Select the Include duplicate descendants each time they appear check box.

3.	Click OK when you've made your selection.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the tree view.


Including duplicate descendants in Outline Descendant trees

If you have an instance of intermarriage in your family (for example cousins marrying cousins), you have duplicate individuals in your tree.  To make it easier for you to identify duplicate individuals, a bracketed number, such as [1] appears next to each occurrence of a duplicate individual's name.  If there are several duplicate individuals, the first one will be assigned [1], the second one will be assigned [2] and so on.

In cases where an individual had multiple spouses, you will also have duplicate individuals in your tree. Family Tree Maker will not display bracketed numbers for these individuals unless you modify Family Tree Maker's configuration file, FTW.INI. If you want to change the configuration file, click here for details.

To include duplicate descendants in a tree:

1.	From the Contents menu, select Options (ALT, C, O).

2.	Select the Include duplicate descendants each time they appear check box.

3.	Click OK when you've made your selection.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the tree view.


Changing the Family Tree Maker configuration file

1.	Exit Family Tree Maker.

2.	Use a text editor such as Notepad to open the file FTW.INI.  This file is located in the folder where Family Tree Maker is installed.

3.	Find the line that reads:

;ODTMultipleSpouseDuplicate=TRUE

4.	 Remove the semicolon (;) from the beginning of the line.

5.	Save the file and restart Family Tree Maker.


Including spouses in Outline Descendant trees

To include spouses in an Outline Descendant tree:

1.	From the Contents menu, select Options (ALT, C, O).

2.	Select the Print spouses check box.

3.	Click OK when you've made your selection.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the tree view.  Each descendant's spouse will be directly beneath him or her and will be marked with a plus sign (+).


Including siblings of the primary individual in Ancestor trees and Ancestor Fan trees

To include the siblings of the primary individual in an Ancestor tree:

1.	From the Contents menu, select Options (ALT, C, O).

2.	Select the Include siblings of primary individual check box.

3.	Click OK when you've made your selection.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the tree view.  Even when you select this option, the siblings will be left out of Fit to Page Ancestor trees if there is not enough space for them.


Adding row or column labels

You can add row labels to Descendant trees and Descendant Fan Trees, and you can add column labels to Ancestor trees and Ancestor Fan trees.

To add row or column labels:

1.	From the Contents menu, select Options (ALT, C, O).

2.	Select either the Label columns as "Parents," "Grandparents," etc. or the Label rows as "Children," "Grandchildren," etc. check box.

3.	Click OK when you've made your selection.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the tree view.


Adding empty branches to trees

You can add empty branches to Ancestor trees, Vertical Ancestor trees, and Hourglass trees.  You cannot include empty branches in Fan trees of any sort.

To include empty branches in trees:

1.	From the Contents menu, select Options (ALT, C, O).

2.	Select the Include empty branches check box.

3.	Click OK when you've made your selection.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the tree view.


The Options for Ancestor Tree dialog box

Label columns as "Parents," "Grandparents," etc. — Column labels identify each generation of your tree as the parents, grandparents, great-grandparents, etc., of the primary individual.  These labels appear at the top of each column and make it easy to understand the tree at a glance.

Include duplicate ancestors each time they appear — If you have an instance of intermarriage in your family (for example, cousins marrying back into the family), you will have some duplicate individuals in your tree.  Select this check box if you want these individuals to print in your tree more than once.

Note:  Each time a duplicated individual is listed, it will have a bracketed number next to it, such as [1].  This makes it easier to identify the duplicated individual.  If there are several individuals duplicated the first one will be assigned [1], the second one will be assigned [2] and so on.

Include siblings of primary individual — Usually an ancestor tree doesn't include the siblings of the primary individual.  Instead, it only shows the ancestors of the primary individual.  However, you can select this option if you wish to include them.

Note:  Even when you select this option, the siblings will be left out of Fit to Page Ancestor trees if there is not enough space for them.

Include empty branches — Printing empty branches is useful when you want to collect more information about your family.  You can fill out the boxes by hand and later transfer the information into your computer.


The Options for Descendant Tree dialog box

Label rows as "Children," "Grandchildren," etc. — Row labels identify each generation of your tree as the children, grandchildren, great-grandchildren, etc., of the primary individual.  These labels appear at the left margin of the page and make it easy to understand the tree at a glance.

Include duplicate descendants each time they appear — If you have an instance of intermarriage in your family (for example, cousins marrying back into the family), you will have some duplicate individuals in your tree.  Select this check box if you want these individuals to print in your tree more than once.  The duplicated individuals will have a bracketed number next to their name to help identify them as a repeated individual.

Note:  Each time a duplicated individual is listed, it will have a bracketed number next to it, such as [1].  This makes it easier to identify the duplicated individual.  If there are several individuals duplicated the first one will be assigned [1], the second one will be assigned [2] and so on.


The Options for Hourglass Tree dialog box

Label rows as "Parents," "Grandparents," etc. (Available only for Standard Hourglass trees) — Row labels identify each generation of your tree as the children, grandchildren, great-grandchildren, etc., of the primary individual.  These labels appear on the left side of each row and make it easy to understand the tree at a glance.

Include duplicate individuals each time they appear — If you have an instance of intermarriage in your family (for example, cousins marrying back into the family), you will have some duplicate individuals in your tree.  Select this check box if you want these individuals to print in your tree more than once.

Note:  Each time a duplicated individual is listed, it appears with a bracketed number next to it, such as [1].  This makes it easier to identify the duplicated individual.  If there are several individuals duplicated the first one will be assigned [1], the second one will be assigned [2] and so on.

Include empty branches of ancestor tree — Printing empty branches is useful when you want to collect more information about your family.  You can fill out the boxes by hand and later transfer the information into your computer.


The Options for Outline Descendant Tree dialog box

Print spouses — Select this check box to include descendants' spouses in your Outline Descendant tree.  Each descendant's spouse will be directly beneath him or her and will be marked with a plus sign (+).

Include duplicate children of intermarriages — If you have an instance of intermarriage in your family (for example, cousins marrying back into the family) or multiple marriages for one individual, you will have some duplicate individuals in your tree.  Select this check box if you want these individuals to print in your tree more than once.  The duplicated individuals will have a bracketed number next to their name to help identify them as a repeated individual.

Note:  Each time a duplicated individual is listed, it will have a bracketed number next to it, such as [1].  This makes it easier to identify the duplicated individual.  If there are several individuals duplicated the first one will be assigned [1], the second one will be assigned [2] and so on.

Mark Individuals with multiple spouses — Select this check box if you want Family Tree Maker to include a bracketed number next to the name of any individual with multiple spouses.  Print reports both with and without this option selected if you want to actually see the difference.


The Options for Ancestor Fan Tree dialog box

Include duplicate ancestors each time they appear — If you have an instance of intermarriage in your family (for example, cousins marrying back into the family), you will have some duplicate individuals in your tree.  Select this check box if you want these individuals to print in your tree more than once.

Note:  Each time a duplicated individual is listed, it appears with a bracketed number next to it, such as [1].  This makes it easier to identify the duplicated individual.  If there are several individuals duplicated the first one will be assigned [1], the second one will be assigned [2] and so on.


The Options for Hourglass Fan Tree dialog box

Include duplicate individuals each time they appear — If you have an instance of intermarriage in your family (for example, cousins marrying back into the family) or multiple marriages for one individual, you will have some duplicate individuals in your tree.  Select this check box if you want these individuals to print in your tree more than once.  The duplicated individuals will have a bracketed number next to their name to help identify them as a repeated individual.

Note:  Each time a duplicated individual is listed, it will have a bracketed number next to it, such as [1].  This makes it easier to identify the duplicated individual.  If there are several individuals duplicated the first one will be assigned [1], the second one will be assigned [2] and so on.


The Options for Descendant Fan Tree dialog box

Include duplicate descendants each time they appear — If you have an instance of intermarriage in your family (for example, cousins marrying back into the family), you will have some duplicate individuals in your tree.  Select this check box if you want these individuals to print in your tree more than once.  The duplicated individuals will have a bracketed number next to their name to help identify them as a repeated individual.

Note:  Each time a duplicated individual is listed, it will have a bracketed number next to it, such as [1].  This makes it easier to identify the duplicated individual.  If there are several individuals duplicated the first one will be assigned [1], the second one will be assigned [2] and so on.


Changing a tree's size

Making a tree shorter

Making a tree narrower


Making a tree shorter

Experiment with the following options to help control the height of your tree.

 Choose a format that puts the date and location on the same line or prints the date only.  See How to: select formats for names, dates, etc.

 Include fewer generations in a single tree.  Print multiple trees instead.  See Selecting the number of generations

 Print fewer items for each individual.  See How to: select information to include.

 Omit borders, titles, and footnotes.  See Selecting colors and styles for boxes, lines, and tree borders and How to: add a title and footnote.

 Don't use column labels.  See Adding row and column labels

 Omit empty branches and siblings of the primary individual.  See Adding empty branches to trees and  Including siblings of the primary individual in Ancestor trees and Ancestor Fan trees.

 Select a smaller font size, a smaller font, and the font style "Regular."  See Selecting colors and styles for text.

 Try switching page orientation to "Portrait."  See Changing margins, printers, and page orientation.

 For Outline Descendant trees, reduce the number of rows per individual.  See How to: change the layout in outline-style trees.


Making a tree narrower

Experiment with the following options to help control the width of your tree.

 Choose a format that separates the date and location onto two lines or only prints the date.  See How to: select information to include.

 Choose a name format that omits middle names.  See How to: select formats for names, dates, etc.

 Include fewer generations in a single tree.  Print multiple trees instead.  See Selecting the number of generations.

 If you print "Fact" fields, shorten the information entered in them.  See Entering brief biographical facts.

 Omit borders, titles, and footnotes.  See Selecting colors and styles for boxes, lines, and tree borders and How to: add a title and footnote.

 Don't use row labels.  See Adding row and column labels.

 Omit empty branches and siblings of the primary individual.   See Adding empty branches to trees and Including siblings of the primary individual in Ancestor trees and Ancestor Fan trees.

 Select a smaller font size, a smaller font, and the style "Regular."  See Selecting colors and styles for text.

 Reduce the width of the boxes with the Maximum Box and Picture/Object Width option.  See Changing the width of boxes and Picture/Objects.

 Try switching the page orientation to "Landscape."  See Changing margins, printers, and page orientation.

 For Outline Descendant trees, select the "Always One Page Wide" option.  See How to: change the layout in outline-style trees.


Printing a tree

Printing a tree

Changing margins, printers, and page orientation

Printing large trees on plotters

Printing continuous form trees

Printing banner trees

Adding empty branches to trees

Printing completely empty box-style trees


Printing a tree

To print a tree that you've created:

1.	Make sure you're in a tree view; there should be a tree on your screen.

2.	Turn on your printer.

3.	From the File menu, select Print (ALT, F, P).

4.	Select the printing options that you want.

For a description of the options in the Print dialog box and a selection of related topics, click here.

5.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker prints your tree.


Printing completely empty box-style trees

To print an empty box-style tree:

1.	Make sure you're in a tree view; there should be a tree on your screen.

2.	Turn on your printer.

3.	From the File menu, select Print Tree (ALT, F, P).

4.	Select the printing options that you want.  Be sure to select the Print empty check box.

For a description of the options in the Print dialog box and a selection of related topics, click here.

5.	Click OK when you've made your selection.

Family Tree Maker prints your tree.


Printing large trees on plotters

If you can get access to a large plotter, you can print your tree on a poster-size piece of paper.  To find a plotter, check with engineering and architectural service bureaus in your area.  When you find a service bureau that can plot your tree, follow the instructions below.  If you need other information about family trees, see the topic Family trees.

1.	Find out what type of plotter they use and then install that plotter's printer driver in Windows on your computer.  For information about installing printer drivers, see your Microsoft Windows User's Guide.

2.	Change the settings in Family Tree Maker's Print Setup dialog box so that they match the plotter on which you will print your tree.

3.	Create your tree.

4.	Put a floppy disk in your disk drive.

5.	From the File menu, select Print (ALT, F, P).

6.	Select the Print to file check box.  Also make sure to select Print color if you want the tree printed in color or grayscale and have selected appropriate colors in the process of creating your tree.

7.	Click OK.

8.	Click the Drives drop-down list and select the drive where your floppy disk is located, and then in the File name field, type a name for the tree.

The file name can be any valid Windows file name, up to 255 characters if you will be printing with a printer that is configured for use with Windows 95.  Otherwise, the file name must be no longer than eight characters with a three letter extension.

9.	Click OK.

Family Tree Maker prints your tree to your disk.

You can now take the floppy disk to the service bureau and they can print your tree.  The service bureau does not need a copy of Family Tree Maker to print your tree.  They will simply copy the file directly to the plotter.  For example, if the plotter was connected to LPT 1 and your floppy disk was in drive a:\ of their computer, they would type copy /b A:\hesstree.prn LPT1


The Print dialog box

Print range — If you want to print all of the pages, select the All option button.  If you want to print a range of pages, type the page number of the first page that you want to print in the From field and type the page number of the last page you want to print in the To field.  If you want to print only one page, type the number of that page in both the From and To fields.

Print quality — The higher the print quality you choose, the darker and sharper your printed materials will be.  However, items printed in high print quality also take longer to print.  If your printer does not support different print qualities, this option will not be available to you.

Copies — In this field, type the number of copies that you want to print.

Print to file — If you want to be able to print to a file and send it to your printer at a later time, select this check box.  This option is especially useful if you want to print on a printer or plotter owned by someone who doesn't have Family Tree Maker.  When you print, Family Tree Maker will ask for an "Output File Name."  If you intend to print the file on a printer other than your own, you will need to change the settings in "Print Setup" to match the printer you will be using.  If you are printing labels and cards, see How to: change label size and print setup.  For all other documents, see Changing margins, printers, and page orientation.

Collate copies — Select this check box if you are printing multiple copies of a multiple-page document and want to print complete sets instead of several copies of the first page, then several copies of the second page, and so on.

Print empty — Select this check box if you want to print an empty document.

Note:  This option is not available for Fan trees, Outline Descendant trees, reports, Genealogy reports, Scrapbooks, or Labels/Cards.

Print color — If you have a color printer, select this check box to print in color.  De-select it if you just want to print in black and white.  If you have a black and white printer, select this check box to print in black, white, and shades of gray.

Note:  This option is not available for Genealogy reports.

You can control items such as paper orientation, paper size, margins, and which printer prints your document.  If you want to change any of these items, see the topic Changing margins, printers, and page orientation.  If you are printing labels or cards, see How to: change label size and print setup instead.


All about Family Group Sheets

A Family Group Sheet is a detailed report about a single nuclear family (two parents and their children) including names, birth dates, death dates, marriage dates, and more.  You can also include Picture/Objects for each individual, as well as a Picture/Object for the marriage.

To create a Family Group Sheet, from the View menu, select Family Group Sheet (ALT, V, G).  When you choose the Family Group Sheet view, Family Tree Maker creates a basic Family Group Sheet for you.  You can then use the formatting options on the Contents and Format menus to customize it.

A Note about Special Sections — If you choose to include Special Sections for Info and Lineage, Facts, Addresses, Medical, Notes, Marriage Facts or Marriage Notes, these will appear on separate pages for each individual, following the first, or Standard Page.  In addition, if you also select the Notes check box in the Standard Page options, they will appear on both the first page, and again on the individual(s) separate page(s).

Special Note about LDS format for Family Group Sheets

You can display your Family Group Sheet in LDS layout.  To toggle the LDS mode on or off:

1.	From the File menu, select Preferences, then from the submenu select Labels and LDS Options.

2.	Select (or deselect) the LDS check box.

Note:  Many Family Group Sheet options are unavailable when LDS mode is selected.

A Note about Special Sections — If you choose to include Special Sections for Info and Lineage, Facts, Addresses, Medical, Notes, Marriage Facts or Marriage Notes, these will appear on separate pages for each individual, following the first, or Standard Page.  In addition, if you also select the Notes check box in the Standard Page options, they will appear on both the first page, and again on the individual(s) separate page(s).


Creating a Family Group Sheet

To create a Family Group Sheet:

1.	From the View menu, select Family Group Sheet (ALT, V, G).

Family Tree Maker displays a Family Group Sheet.

2.	You can either print your Family Group Sheet right away or customize it and then print.  See the topic Printing Family Group Sheets.


Selecting information to include

To add items to or remove items from a Family Group Sheet:

1.	From the Contents menu, select Items to Include (ALT, C, I).

2.	Select information for your Family Group Sheet by adding items to or removing items from the list on the right.  Instead of choosing individual pieces of information, you can choose sets of information to include, such as the information from the More About dialog boxes.

A Note about Special Sections — If you choose to include Special Sections for Info and Lineage, Facts, Addresses, Medical, Notes, Marriage Facts or Marriage Notes, these will appear on separate pages for each individual, following the first, or Standard Page.  In addition, if you also select the Notes check box in the Standard Page options, they will appear on both the first page, and again on the individual(s) separate page(s).

For a description of the options in the Items to Include dialog box and a selection of related topics, click here.

3.	Select an item in the list on the right and use the Move up and Move down buttons to place the items in the order that you want.

4.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Family Group Sheet view.


The Items to Include dialog box

Family Group Sheets — are one of the mainstays of genealogical research.  The Standard Page contains the basic information for a single family group on one page, with spaces for recording key facts.

To use this dialog box, select items from the Available column on the left and move them to the Your Family Group Sheet contains list on the right.  As you highlight an item in the right-hand column, you will have an opportunity to select from various Options depending on that particular item.

A Note about Special Sections — If you choose to include Special Sections for Info and Lineage, Facts, Addresses, Medical, Notes, Marriage Facts or Marriage Notes, these will appear on separate pages for each individual, following the first, or Standard Page.  In addition, if you also select the Notes check box in the Standard Page options, they will appear on both the first page, and again on the individual(s) separate page(s).

Include (the arrow pointing to the right) — Select an item in the list on the left and then click this button to include that item on the Family Group Sheet.  The Standard Page contains the basic information.  If you have placed Picture/Objects in Scrapbooks, you can include one for each individual and one for the marriage by selecting Standard Page with Picture/Objects.  Please note that you cannot include Picture/Objects if you selected the LDS option in the Labels dialog box (see the topic How to: change field labels).

Note:  Many people find it helpful to start with just the Standard Page options and then add other items as needed.  This helps reduce the number of pages included in this report.  Also keep in mind that when you include Special Sections in this report, they appear on separate individual pages.

Remove (the arrow pointing to the left) — Select an item in the list on the right and then click this button to remove that item from the Family Group Sheet.

Remove all (the double arrows pointing to the left) — Click this button to remove all items from the list on the right.

Options — Select an item in the list on the right and then click this button to format that item.  For example, you could choose to include empty spaces for adding more children.

Font — Select an item in the list on the right and then click this button to change the font in which that item will print.

Special Note about LDS format for Family Group Sheets

You can display your Family Group Sheet in LDS layout.  To toggle the LDS mode on or off:

1.	From the File menu, select Preferences, then from the submenu select Labels and LDS Options.

2.	Select (or deselect) the LDS check box.

Note:  Many Family Group Sheet options are unavailable when LDS mode is selected.

See also

How to: select formats for the information

The Options: Standard Page with Picture/Objects dialog box

How to: change the appearance of text


Selecting formats for the information

When you're selecting items to include in your Family Group Sheet, Family Tree Maker sometimes displays a Format dialog box.  You can use the dialog box to control the appearance of the information.  Simply make your selections in the dialog box and then click OK.  You can also format information after you've chosen to include it in your Family Group Sheet:

1.	From the Contents menu, select Items to Include (ALT, C, I).

2.	Select an item in the list on the right.

3.	Click Options.

Depending on the item, you can change a variety of options, such as whether you want to include source information or labels for empty fields.

Note:  If Options stays grayed out, that item does not have any formatting options.

For a description of the Options: Standard page dialog box, click here; the Options: Standard Page with Picture/Object dialog box, click here; all other Options dialog boxes, click here.

A Note about Special Sections — If you choose to include Special Sections for Info and Lineage, Facts, Addresses, Medical, Notes, Marriage Facts or Marriage Notes, these will appear on separate pages for each individual, following the first, or Standard Page.  In addition, if you also select the Notes check box in the Standard Page options, they will appear on both the first page, and again on the individual(s) separate page(s).

4.	Make your selections and then click OK.

5.	Click OK to close the Items to Include dialog box.


The Options, Standard Page with Picture/Objects dialog box
The Options: Standard Page with Picture/Objects dialog box

Preferred Picture/Object — Select this option button to include the Picture/Object that you chose as the "Preferred Picture/Object for Fam Grp Sheets" in the More About Picture/Object dialog box.  For more information about the More About Picture/Object dialog box, see the topic How to: create captions and categories for Picture/Objects.

By Category and Type — Instead of using the "Preferred Picture/Objects," you can choose to include Picture/Objects of a particular category and type.  Categories are classifications that you create.  Types are chosen from a drop-down list in the More About Picture/Object dialog box.  They describe what Picture/Objects are, such as "Pictures" or "Sound Clips."  Again, see the topic How to: create captions and categories for Picture/Objects.  If the category that you assigned to a Picture/Object does not appear in the "By Category" drop-down list, just type it into the field.  When there is more than one Picture/Object in the category that you select, Family Tree Maker uses the first one.

Missing Picture/Objects — Click this button to choose a graphic (or blank space) to place in the boxes of individuals who do not have Picture/Objects in their Scrapbooks.

See also

The Missing Picture/Objects dialog box


All other Options dialog boxes

Note:	Not all options are available for every item.

Include labels of empty fields — Select this check box if you want field labels to appear on the Family Group Sheet even when the field doesn't contain any information.  For example, if you didn't have a marriage date for a relative, the word "Married" would appear with blank space next to it.  If you didn't select this check box, the line for that relative's marriage information would be completely blank.

Include source information — Select this check box if you want your Family Group Sheet to include source information for this item.

Display only preferred dates/locations — Select this check box if you want your Family Group Sheet to display only those dates or locations marked as preferred for this item.

A Note about Special Sections — If you choose to include Special Sections (in Family Group Sheets) for Info and Lineage, Facts, Addresses, Medical, Notes, Marriage Facts or Marriage Notes, these will appear on separate pages for each individual, following the first, or Standard Page.  In addition, if you also select the Notes check box in the Standard Page options, they will appear on both the first page, and again on the individual(s) separate page(s).

See also

How to:  note your sources


The Options, Standard Page dialog box
The Options: Standard Page dialog box

Layout Options

•	Questionnaire layout (include empty fields) — Select this check box if you want blank field labels to appear on the Family Group Sheet.  For example, if you don't have a marriage date for a relative, the word "Married" will appear with blank space next to it.  If you don't select this check box, the line for that relative's marriage information will be completely blank.

•	Add blank rows for additional children — Select this check box to print empty rows so you can fill in information about more children.

Facts to Show Options

•	Basic (Birth, Marriage, Death) — Select this option to display only these basic facts.

•	Basic + Burial — Select this option to add Burial facts to the Basic ones above.

•	All Facts — Select this option to display all facts listed on Facts page for each individual.  Also displays all marriage facts for parent’s marriage in the Father’s section.

Spouse Options

•	Include all spouses — Select this option to list all spouses on the Family Group Sheet.

•	Include preferred spouse only — Select this option if you want only the preferred spouse to print.

Include in Standard Page Options

•	Individual reference numbers — Select this option if you want to include reference numbers in your Family Group Sheet.

•	Pictures/Objects — Select this option if you want to include the Pictures/Objects you’ve indicated as “preferred” in the More About Picture/Object dialog box.

•	Preferred facts only — Select this option if you want to display only preferred facts.  If deselected, Family Group Sheet will display both preferred and alternate facts.

•	Sources — Select this option if you want to display source information in your Family Group Sheet.

•	Notes — Select this option if you want to display notes for individuals.  If the All Facts option above was selected, marriage notes will appear in the Father section of your Family Group Sheet.

A Note about Special Sections — If you choose to include Special Sections for Info and Lineage, Facts, Addresses, Medical, Notes, Marriage Facts or Marriage Notes, these will appear on separate pages for each individual, following the first, or Standard Page.  In addition, if you also select the Notes check box in the Standard Page options, they will appear on both the first page, and again on the individual(s) separate page(s).

Special Note about LDS format for Family Group Sheets

You can display your Family Group Sheet in LDS layout.  To toggle the LDS mode on/off:

1.	From the File menu, select Preferences, then from the submenu select Labels and LDS Options.

2.	Select (or deselect) the LDS check box.

Note:  Many Family Group Sheet options are unavailable when LDS mode is selected.

See also

Choosing a preferred spouse


Changing the appearance of text on the Family Group Sheet

To format text on the Family Group Sheet or the More About dialog boxes:

1.	From the Format menu, select Text Font, Style, & Size (ALT, T, T).

2.	In the Items to format list, click an item that you want to format.

3.	Choose formatting options for the selected item.

For a description of the options in the Text Font, Style, & Size dialog box, click here.

4.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Family Group Sheet view.

A Note about Special Sections — If you choose to include Special Sections for Info and Lineage, Facts, Addresses, Medical, Notes, Marriage Facts or Marriage Notes, these will appear on separate pages for each individual, following the first, or Standard Page.  In addition, if you also select the Notes check box in the Standard Page options, they will appear on both the first page, and again on the individual(s) separate page(s).


Adding a title and footnote to a Family Group Sheet

To add a title, page numbers, or preparer information:

1.	From the Contents menu, select Title & Footnote (ALT, C, T).

2.	Make your selections.

For a description of the options in the Title & Footnote dialog box, click here.

3.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Family Group Sheet view.

A Note about Special Sections — If you choose to include Special Sections for Info and Lineage, Facts, Addresses, Medical, Notes, Marriage Facts or Marriage Notes, these will appear on separate pages for each individual, following the first, or Standard Page.  In addition, if you also select the Notes check box in the Standard Page options, they will appear on both the first page, and again on the individual(s) separate page(s).


The Title & Footnote dialog box

Title — Titles print at the top left of the page.  Select the Automatic title option button if you want Family Tree Maker to create a title for you.  To create your own title, select the Custom title option button and type your title in the field provided.

Page number — Select the Include page number check box if you want Family Tree Maker to print page numbers at the bottom of each page.  You can also enter a starting page number in the Starting number field.  Select the Include date of printing and Include time of printing check boxes to include the current date and time at the bottom of the first page.

Preparer Information — Enter your personal information and the current date in these fields so that people who look at the Family Group Sheet will know who prepared it.

Note:  Except for the date, this information prints as a Footnote.  The date will print as a Header, opposite the Title.

LDS Options — If you have selected LDS format in the Labels and LDS Options dialog box, the Automatic Title will change to Family Group Record, and you will have two additional fields available; Stake, and Unit number.

A Note about Special Sections — If you choose to include Special Sections for Info and Lineage, Facts, Addresses, Medical, Notes, Marriage Facts or Marriage Notes, these will appear on separate pages for each individual, following the first, or Standard Page.  In addition, if you also select the Notes check box in the Standard Page options, they will appear on both the first page, and again on the individual(s) separate page(s).


Choosing how pages break

To choose how the pages in your Family Group Sheet break:

1.	From the Format menu, select Family Group Sheet Format (ALT, T, F).

2.	If you want each individual's information to begin on a new page, select the Begin each person on a new page check box.  Otherwise, make sure that the check box is not selected.

3.	Click OK when you've made your choice.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Family Group Sheet view.

A Note about Special Sections — If you choose to include Special Sections for Info and Lineage, Facts, Addresses, Medical, Notes, Marriage Facts or Marriage Notes, these will appear on separate pages for each individual, following the first, or Standard Page.  In addition, if you also select the Notes check box in the Standard Page options, they will appear on both the first page, and again on the individual(s) separate page(s).


The Family Group Sheet Format dialog box

Begin each person on a new page — Select this check box if you want each individual's information to begin on a new page.  Otherwise, make sure that the check box is not selected.

Special Note about LDS format for Family Group Sheets

You can display your Family Group Sheet in LDS layout.  To toggle the LDS mode on or off:

3.	From the File menu, select Preferences, then from the submenu select Labels and LDS Options.

4.	Select (or deselect) the LDS check box.

Note:  Many Family Group Sheet options are unavailable when LDS mode is selected.

A Note about Special Sections — If you choose to include Special Sections for Info and Lineage, Facts, Addresses, Medical, Notes, Marriage Facts or Marriage Notes, these will appear on separate pages for each individual, following the first, or Standard Page.  In addition, if you also select the Notes check box in the Standard Page options, they will appear on both the first page, and again on the individual(s) separate page(s).


Printing a single Family Group Sheet

To print your Family Group Sheet:

1.	Make sure you're in the Family Group Sheet view.

2.	Turn on your printer.

3.	From the File menu, select Print (ALT, F, P).

4.	Select the printing options that you want.

For a description of the options in the Print dialog box and a selection of related topics, click here.

5.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker prints your Family Group Sheet.

A Note about Special Sections — If you choose to include Special Sections for Info and Lineage, Facts, Addresses, Medical, Notes, Marriage Facts or Marriage Notes, these will appear on separate pages for each individual, following the first, or Standard Page.  In addition, if you also select the Notes check box in the Standard Page options, they will appear on both the first page, and again on the individual(s) separate page(s).


Printing Family Group Sheets

Printing a single Family Group Sheet

Printing a set of Family Group Sheets

Printing a completely empty Family Group Sheet

Changing margins, printers, and page orientation

A Note about Special Sections — If you choose to include Special Sections for Info and Lineage, Facts, Addresses, Medical, Notes, Marriage Facts or Marriage Notes, these will appear on separate pages for each individual, following the first, or Standard Page.  In addition, if you also select the Notes check box in the Standard Page options, they will appear on both the first page, and again on the individual(s) separate page(s).


Printing a completely empty Family Group Sheet

To print an empty Family Group Sheet:

1.	Make sure you're in the Family Group Sheet view; there should be a Family Group Sheet on your screen.

2.	Turn on your printer.

3.	From the File menu, select Print (ALT, F, P).

4.	Select the printing options that you want.  Be sure to select the Print empty check box.

For a description of the options in the Print dialog box and a selection of related topics, click here.

5.	Click OK when you've made your selection.

Family Tree Maker prints your Family Group Sheet.

A Note about Special Sections — If you choose to include Special Sections for Info and Lineage, Facts, Addresses, Medical, Notes, Marriage Facts or Marriage Notes, these will appear on separate pages for each individual, following the first, or Standard Page.  In addition, if you also select the Notes check box in the Standard Page options, they will appear on both the first page, and again on the individual(s) separate page(s).


All about calendars

Family Tree Maker can create calendars containing your family's birthdays and/or anniversaries.  To create a calendar, from the View menu, select Calendar (ALT, V, C).  If you notice that anyone is missing from your calendar, go to the Lineage dialog box for that individual and check to see that they are selected to appear in calendars.  For information about the Lineage dialog box, see Entering nicknames, titles, and parental relationship information.

Once you have a calendar on the screen, you can use the formatting options on the Contents and Format menus to customize it.


Creating a calendar

To create a calendar:

1.	From the View menu, select Calendar (ALT, V, C).

Family Tree Maker displays a calendar.

2.	You can either print your calendar right away or customize it and then print.  See the topic Printing calendars.


Selecting people to include

Selecting a group of individuals to include

Including or excluding deceased individuals


Selecting a group of individuals to include

To select a group of individuals for your document:

1.	From the Contents menu, select Individuals to Include (ALT, C, N).

2.	In the Include dialog box, choose All individuals and click OK if you want everyone in your Family File to print.  Skip the remaining steps.  Otherwise, choose Selected individuals and then click Individuals to Include.

3.	Select individuals to include in your document by adding names to or removing names from the list on the right.

For a description of the options in the Individuals to Include dialog box, click here.

4.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Calendar view.

Note:  The group of individuals that you create in one view, such as Labels/Cards, is available to you in the other views that allow you to choose groups:  reports, calendars, and batch print.  If you make changes to the group in one view, the group will change in all other views as well.  If you want to create a group of individuals for a specific view, see Creating Saved Views.


The Include dialog box

All individuals — Select this option button to include everyone in your Family File in your document.

Selected individuals — Select this option button if you want to create a sub-group of individuals to include in your document.

Individuals to Include — Click this to open the dialog box in which you can create a sub-group of individuals to include in your document.


The Individuals to Include dialog box

Name  — To quickly locate an individual in the list on the left, click in this field and type the individual's name in the following format: Last name, First name Middle name.

Include (the arrow pointing to the right) — Select a name in the list on the left and then click this button to include that individual in the group.

Include all (the double arrows pointing to the right) — Click this button to add all names to the list on the left.  The best time to use this button is when you want to create a group that includes almost all of the individuals that are currently in your Family File.  Click this button and then use Remove to remove the few individuals that you don't want.  If you use the "Include All" button to include everyone, individuals that are added to your Family File later will not be added to the group automatically.

Include Ancestors — Select a name in the list on the left and then click this button to include that individual's ancestors in the group.

Include Descendants — Select a name in the list on the left and then click this button to include that individual's descendants in the group.

Find and Include — Click this button to search for one or more individuals to add to the group.  You can search on any field in Family Tree Maker or for the descendants or ancestors of an individual.  If you want to search for an individual's descendants or ancestors, select that individual in the list on the left before you click this button.  For more details about using this button, see the topic The Add Individuals and Remove Individuals dialog boxes.

Remove (the arrow pointing to the left) — Select a name in the list on the right and then click this button to remove that individual from the group.

Remove all (the double arrows pointing to the left) — Click this button to remove all names from the list on the right.

Find and Remove — Click this button to search for one or more individuals to remove from the group.  You can search on any field in Family Tree Maker or for the descendants or ancestors of an individual.  If you want to search for an individual's descendants or ancestors, select that individual in the list on the right before you click this button.  For more details about using this button, see the topic The Add Individuals and Remove Individuals dialog boxes.


The Add Individuals and Remove Individuals dialog boxes

Search — If you want to find individuals who are the living relatives of a particular individual, you would search for all individuals in your Family File who do not have a death date.  In this case you would select "Death Date" from the Search drop-down list.  If you want to find individuals who have something in common, such as a birthplace, use the drop-down list to choose the name of the field that contains that information.  For example, if you wanted to find all individuals who were born in a particular place, you would select "Birth location."

For — In this field, type the information that you want to search for.  For example, if you chose "Birth location" in the Search, and you wanted Family Tree Maker to find everyone that was born in Cleveland, Ohio, then you would type  Cleveland, Ohio  in the "for" field.  If the field that you are searching only has certain legal values (such as "male," "female," and "unknown"), Family Tree Maker will display a drop-down list in the "for" field.  In this case, just click the item that you want to search for.  For tips on searching, click here.


Including or excluding deceased individuals

To choose whether or not deceased individuals appear in calendars:

1.	From the Contents menu, select Items to Include (ALT, C, I).

2.	Select or deselect the Print only if still alive check box.

3.	Click OK when you've made your selection.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Calendar view.


Selecting information to include

To choose information to include in your calendar:

1.	From the Contents menu, select Items to Include (ALT, C, I).

2.	Make your selections.

For a description of the options in the Items to Include dialog box, click here.

3.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Calendar view.


The Items to Include dialog box

Year — Use the up or down arrow in this field to select a year.

Month — Click this drop-down list and select All if you want to print a full year.  Otherwise, select the month that you want to print.

Name format — Click this drop-down list and select the format in which you want each individual's name to appear.  The "\\" indicates that names will be split onto two lines.

Last name all caps — Select this check box if you want to print all last names in capital letters.

Use aka if available — Select this check box if you want nicknames to appear in the calendar when they are available.  See Entering nicknames, titles, and parental relationship information for information about entering nicknames.

Use married names for female family members — To use women's married names as last names and maiden names as middle names, select this check box.  Otherwise Family Tree Maker uses women's full maiden names.

Print only if still alive — Select this check box to exclude information about individuals for whom you have entered death dates or who are more than 120 years old.

Birthdays, Anniversaries, Both — Select an option button according to the type of information you want in your calendar.

Include age for birthdays & years for anniversaries — Select this check box to have Family Tree Maker calculate individuals' ages on their birthdays and the number of years that they have been married on their anniversaries.  This number will appear next to their names.  If a "?" prints, it means that there is no information in the associated date field.  If the word "est" prints, as in "Bonnie Anderson - 85 est," it means that you entered an uncertain date.  (A date that is uncertain contains a modifier such as "about," "before," or "after.")


Selecting the date range

To choose the date range for calendars:

1.	From the Contents menu, select Items to Include (ALT, C, I).

2.	Use the up or down arrow in the Year field to select a year.

3.	Click the Month drop-down list and select All if you want to print a full year.  Otherwise, select the month that you want to print.

4.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Calendar view.


Selecting colors and styles

Selecting colors and styles for boxes and borders

Selecting colors and styles for text


Selecting colors and styles for text

To format text in a calendar:

1.	From the Format menu, select Text Font, Style, & Size (ALT, T, T).

2.	In the Items to format list, click an item that you want to format, such as Month names.

3.	Choose formatting options for the selected item.

For a description of the options in the Text Font, Style, & Size dialog box, click here.

4.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Calendar view.


Selecting colors and styles for boxes and borders

To change border, background, or fill colors on your calendar:

1.	From the Format menu, select Box, Line, & Border Styles (ALT, T, B).

2.	Select the colors and styles that you want.

For a description of the options in the Box, Line, & Border Styles dialog box, click here.

3.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Calendar view.


The Box, Line, & Border Styles dialog box

Box & Line Style — Click the button showing the line thickness that you want to use  in your calendar.

Line color — Click this drop-down list and select the color that you want for the boxes in the calendar.

Fill color — Click this drop-down list and select the color that you want to fill each box in the calendar.

Border style — Click the button showing the style of border that you want drawn around each page.

Border color — Click this drop-down list and select the color that you want for the page border.

Background color — Click this drop-down list and select the color that you want for the entire calendar background.


Adding a subtitle and footnote to a calendar
How to: add a subtitle and footnote

To add a subtitle or footnote:

1.	From the Contents menu, select Title & Footnote (ALT, C, T).

2.	Create your title and footnote.

For a description of the options in the Title & Footnote dialog box, click here.

3.	Click OK when you're done.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Calendar view.


The Title & Footnote dialog box

Subtitle — If you wish to have a subtitle below the name of the month, type one in this field.

Footnote — Use this field to include a footnote in your calendar.

Draw box around footnote — Select this check box to draw a box around your footnote.


Printing a calendar

Printing a calendar

Changing margins, printers, and page orientation

Printing a completely empty calendar

Printing calendars with pictures


Printing a calendar

To print your calendar:

1.	Make sure you're in the Calendar view.

2.	Turn on your printer.

3.	From the File menu, select Print (ALT, F, P).

4.	Select the printing options that you want.

For a description of the options in the Print dialog box, click here.

5.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker prints your calendar.


Printing completely empty calendars

To print an empty calendar:

1.	Make sure you're in a calendar view; there should be a calendar on your screen.

2.	Turn on your printer.

3.	From the File menu, select Print (ALT, F, P).

4.	Select the printing options that you want.  Be sure to select the Print empty check box.

For a description of the options in the Print dialog box, click here.

5.	Click OK when you've made your selection.

Family Tree Maker prints your calendar.


Printing calendars with pictures

Using your Scrapbook images, you can print a year-long calendar with pictures accompanying each month.  You'll start by printing a complete calendar for the year and then make printouts of the twelve different Scrapbook images you'd like to feature.

To start making the calendar, search through your Family Tree Maker Scrapbook files and select one image to show alongside each month.  Choose images which reflect the seasonal and holiday themes of that month or which feature an individual or family who is celebrating a special occasion that month.  If you'd like to have two or more pictures featured in a particular month, make a note of which images to include in that combination.  Then, when you reach step 6 below, follow the special instructions in the note.

1.	First, customize and print a calendar with your choice of fonts, borders, and colors.

For more information about printing calendars, see the topic Printing calendars.

Next, you'll print each one of your images using the same color and font scheme that you used for the calendar.  Start here with your picture for January.

2.	Go to the Scrapbook page containing a picture you would like to feature.

3.	From the File menu, select Print Preview (ALT, F, V).

4.	From the Format menu, select Scrapbook Format (ALT, T, F).

5.	Since you will probably only want one picture per page, select Custom Layout and click Edit.

6.	In the Edit dialog box, enter 1 in the Across field and 1 in the Down field.

Note:  If you have selected multiple images for a particular month, enter the dimensions of your desired layout: for example, for a printout with two pictures side by side, enter 2 in the Across field and 1 in the Down field.  If you need more information about combining pictures from two different individuals' Scrapbooks, see the topic Copying Picture/Objects between Scrapbooks.

7.	Click OK once you've selected the dimensions you want.

8.	Click OK to exit the Scrapbook Format dialog box and return to Scrapbook Print Preview.

9.	If you like, you can include a title at the top of the Scrapbook page.  The Automatic title "Scrapbook of," followed by the individual's name, will appear at the top of the page unless you change it.  To change the title, from the Contents menu select Title & Footnote (ALT, C, T).  Click the Custom Title option button and enter the title you prefer or leave it blank if you don't want a title.

10. Click OK when you've finished creating the title.

11. To choose captions or dates to include underneath each picture, from the Contents menu select Items to Include with each Picture/Object (ALT, C, I).  For each item you would like to include, click the item name in the list on the left and then click the Include button (the arrow pointing to the right) to move the item to the list on the right.  The items will appear on your printout in the same sequence that you add them to this list.

12. Click OK when you've made your selections.

13. Your Scrapbook page is ready to print.  From the File menu select Print Scrapbook (ALT, F, P).

For a description of the options in the Print dialog box, click here.

14. Click OK to print your Scrapbook page.

15. Repeat steps 2 through 14 for each of the other eleven months.

Once you have printed all twelve of your Scrapbook pages, combine them with the calendar pages.  You can use a wall calendar you already own as a model:  glue the calendar from January to the back of the picture from February, the calendar from February to the back of the picture from March, and so on.  Punch holes in the pages along the center seam, and bind all the pages together with ribbon.  If you need a sturdier calendar, paste each of the pages to a piece of cardboard, and bind the cardboard together at the seam.

See also

Printing a Scrapbook


All about reports

Family Tree Maker creates two different types of columnar reports:  Predefined reports and Custom reports.  With Predefined reports, Family Tree Maker chooses the contents, although you can still choose formatting options, such as fonts, borders, and titles.  In some cases you can also choose who appears in a Predefined report.

With Custom reports, you choose the contents as well as the formatting.  Custom reports can contain up to 100 columns of almost any type of information.  You also can choose whom to include.  Custom reports can be useful or just for fun.  Be creative -- you can probably think of all kinds of things that you want to know about your family.

To display a report, from the View menu, select Reports (ALT, V, R), then from the submenu, select the type of report you want to display.  To choose the report format, from the Format menu, select Report Format (ALT, T, F) and make your selection.


The Type name field

To find a name in the report quickly, enter it in the Type name field in the following format:  Last, First, Middle.


Using a mouse with reports

You can click in reports to navigate through Family Tree Maker, moving to different views and making different individuals the primary individual.  The table below describes how.

Do this...	To do this...
Click an individual's name once	Select the individual.  You can then use the menus or the toolbar to change to any view.  The selected individual becomes the primary individual.
Double-click an individual's name	Go to the individual's Family Page


Selecting a report type

To choose a report type:

1.	If you are planning to create a Kinship report, first select the primary individual by highlighting his or her name on a Family Page or in another document.

2.	From the View menu, select Report (ALT, V, R).

3.	From the Format menu, select Report Format (ALT, T, F).

4.	In the Select a format for your report list, click the report format that you want to create.  For a description of each report type, click here.

5.	Click OK after making your selection.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Report view.


Report types

Custom — With Custom reports, you choose the contents as well as the formatting.  You also can choose to include all of the individuals in your Family File or just a smaller group.

Kinship: Canon & Civil — Kinship reports list the names, relationships, and relationship degrees of the primary individual's blood relatives, spouses of blood relatives, and blood relatives of the primary individual's spouse(s).  See Entering nicknames, titles, and parental relationship information.

Kinship: Relationship Only — This type of Kinship report lists each individual's name, birth date, and relationship with the primary individual.

Data Errors — This report helps you locate and fix possible errors in your Family File.  Select this type of report when you want to clean up your file.  See Types of errors that Family Tree Maker finds.

Medical Information — This report lists an individual's name, date of birth, cause of death, and any information that has been entered in their Cause of death, or Medical information fields (limited to 200 characters).  See Entering medical information.

Address — This report lists each individual's name, address, and phone number, if available.  The addresses and phone numbers are taken from the individual's Address dialog box.  See Entering addresses.

Birthdays of Living Individuals — This report lists each living individual's name, birth date, and age at next birthday.

Marriage — This report lists every couple in your Family File, their marriage date, and marriage ending status.

Parentage — This report lists each individual's name, his or her parents' names, and the nature of the relationship between the individual and each parent.  For example, it could show someone as a "Step" relation.

Documented Events — This report lists the events in your Family File that you've documented with sources.  It includes both the events and the sources you've entered in the Source-Citation dialog box.  See Recording sources for information about entering sources.  You can also use the Options for Documented Events dialog box to customize this report to include events without sources.

Bibliography — This report lists the sources of the information in your Family File.  The information comes from the Source-Citation dialog box.  See Recording sources for information about entering sources.

LDS: Incomplete Individual Ordinances — This report lists each individual in the Family File that is missing at least one of the following dates:  birth or christening, death, baptism, endowment, and seal to parents. Note:  This report is only available if you have chosen the LDS mode (see How to: change field labels in the Preferences submenu).

LDS: Incomplete Marriage Sealings — This report lists each individual in the Family File that is missing at least one of the following dates:  marriage or sealing.  Note:  This report is only available if you have chosen the LDS mode (see How to: change field labels in the Preferences submenu).

Alternate Facts — This report lists individuals in your Family File who have duplicate (alternate) information recorded for any facts, such as names or birth/death dates.


Reports submenu

Custom — With Custom reports, you choose the contents as well as the formatting.  You also can choose to include all of the individuals in your Family File or just a smaller group.

Alternate Facts — This report lists individuals in your Family File who have duplicate (alternate) information recorded for any facts, such as names or birth/death dates.

Address — This report lists each individual's name, address, and phone number, if available.  The addresses and phone numbers are taken from the individual's Address dialog box.  See Entering addresses.

Medical Information — This report lists an individual's name, date of birth, cause of death, and any information that has been entered in their Cause of death, or Medical information fields (limited to 200 characters).  See Entering medical information.

Birthdays of Living Individuals — This report lists each living individual's name, birth date, and age at next birthday.

Marriage — This report lists every couple in your Family File, their marriage date, and marriage ending status.

Parentage — This report lists each individual's name, his or her parents' names, and the nature of the relationship between the individual and each parent.  For example, it could show someone as a "Step" relation.

Bibliography — This report lists the sources of the information in your Family File.  The information comes from the Source-Citation dialog box.  See Recording sources for information about entering sources.

If the currently open Family File is in LDS mode (see How to: change field labels), you have the following additional options:

Data Errors — A Data Errors report can show you places in your Family File where there might be mistakes.  It is very thorough in its checking, but in order to fix the mistakes, you have to go into your file and manually locate the errors listed in the report.

You create and print a Data Errors report in the Report view.  For instructions, see Printing Reports.  For a list of the errors that you can find with the Data Errors report, see Error types.

Documented Events — This report lists the events in your Family File that you've documented with sources.  It includes both the events and the sources you've entered in the Source-Citation dialog box.  See Recording sources for information about entering sources.  You can also use the Options for Documented Events dialog box to customize this report to include events without sources.


The Report Format dialog box

Custom — With Custom reports, you choose the contents as well as the formatting.  You also can choose to include all of the individuals in your Family File or just a smaller group.

Marriage — This report lists every couple in your Family File, their marriage date, and marriage ending status.

Kinship: Canon & Civil — Kinship reports list the names, relationships, and relationship degrees of the primary individual's blood relatives, spouses of blood relatives, and blood relatives of the primary individual's spouse(s).  Adopted children, foster children, and children of unknown status will appear in Kinship reports unless you choose to exclude them.  See Entering nicknames, titles, and parental relationship information.

Kinship: Relationship Only — This type of Kinship report lists each individual's name, birth date, and relationship with the primary individual.

Data Errors — This report helps you locate and fix possible errors in your Family File.  Select this type of report when you want to clean up your file.  See Types of errors that Family Tree Maker finds.

Medical Information — This report lists each individual's name, birth date, and any medical information from their Medical dialog box.  See Entering medical information.

Address — This report lists each individual's name, address, and phone number, if available.  The addresses and phone numbers are taken from the individual's Address dialog box.  See Entering addresses.

Birthdays of Living Individuals — This report lists each living individual's name, birth date, and age at next birthday.

Parentage — This report lists each individual's name, his or her parents' names, and the nature of the relationship between the individual and each parent.  For example, it could show someone as a "Step" relation.

Documented Events — This report lists the events in your Family File that you've documented with sources.  It includes both the events and the sources you've entered in the Source-Citation dialog box.  See Recording sources for information about entering sources.  You can also use the Options for Documented Events dialog box to customize this report to include events without sources.

Bibliography — This report lists the sources of the information in your Family File.  This information comes from the Source-Citation dialog box.  See Recording sources for information about entering sources.

If the currently open Family File is in LDS mode (see How to: change field labels), you have the following additional options:

LDS: Incomplete Individual Ordinances — This report lists each individual in the Family File that is missing at least one of the following dates:  birth or christening, death, baptism, endowment, and seal to parents.  This report is only available if you have chosen the Add LDS formats . . . option in the Preferences submenu.

LDS: Incomplete Marriage Sealings — This report lists each individual in the Family File that is missing at least one of the following dates:  marriage or sealing.  This report is only available if you have chosen the Add LDS formats . . . option in the Preferences submenu.


The Tree Format dialog box

This dialog contains two tabs: General and Layout.

General tab for Vertical Ancestor tree

Book Layout — Select this option button if you want a tree that is divided into pages (paginated trees).  Each page contains cross-references to the previous and next page so that you can easily include your trees in a family book.  If you plan to create a family book, choose this layout option.  If you choose any other layout option, Family Tree Maker will automatically convert your tree to the Book layout when you add your tree to a book.  For more information about family books see, the topic Creating Family Books.  This option is not available for Fan trees.

Custom — Select this option button if you full control over things like the tree's layout, font size, number or generations, and the amount of information that prints in the boxes.

Center tree on page(s) — This option is only available when you choose the Book Layout for your hourglass tree.  If the box is checked, then your tree will be centered on the page.

Make all boxes same size — Deselect this check box if you want to allow the tree's boxes to vary in size, which saves space.

Boxes overlap at page breaks — Select this option if you want to have the boxes overlap at page breaks.  This option will make it easier to attach the pages together if you are putting together a large tree.

Layout tab for Vertical Ancestor tree

Click the button showing the type of tree layout you prefer.  For Ancestor trees, Perfect creates the largest tree, Squished creates the smallest, and Collapsed will give you a tree somewhere in the middle.


The Options for Vertical Ancestor Tree dialog box

Label rows as "Parents," "Grandparents," etc. — Row labels identify each generation of your tree as the children, grandchildren, great-grandchildren, etc., of the primary individual.  These labels appear on the left side of each row and make it easy to understand the tree at a glance.

Include duplicate ancestors each time they appear — If you have an instance of intermarriage in your family (for example, cousins marrying back into the family), you will have some duplicate individuals in your tree.  Select this check box if you want these individuals to print in your tree more than once.

Note:  Each time a duplicated individual is listed, it appears with a bracketed number next to it, such as [1].  This makes it easier to identify the duplicated individual.  If there are several individuals duplicated the first one will be assigned [1], the second one will be assigned [2] and so on.

Include empty branches of ancestor tree — Printing empty branches is useful when you want to collect more information about your family.  You can fill out the boxes by hand and later transfer the information into your computer.


Layout and Connections

The tree layout is the placement of the boxes on a page.  For example, in Family Tree Maker you can choose between three different types of layouts:  Perfect, Squished, and Collapsed. "Perfect" creates the largest tree, "Squished" creates the smallest, and "Collapsed" will give you a tree somewhere in the middle.

Box connections are the way that the boxes on the lowest level of your tree are connected to the tree.  For example, Detached attaches the boxes by placing lines between them.  Fishtail, on the other hand, places the boxes against the right edge of the box on the left.

Experiment with these settings and watch how your tree responds to different layouts and box connections.


Selecting people to include

Selecting a group of individuals to include

Selecting the primary individual in Kinship reports

Selecting the number of generations in Kinship reports


Selecting a group of individuals to include

To select a group of individuals for your document:

1.	From the Contents menu, select Individuals to Include (ALT, C, N).

2.	In the Include dialog box, choose All individuals and click OK if you want everyone in your Family File to print.  Skip the remaining steps.  Otherwise, choose Selected individuals and then click Individuals to Include.

3.	Select individuals to include in your document by adding names to or removing names from the list on the right.

For a description of the options in the Individuals to Include dialog box, click here.

4.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Report view.

Note:	The group of individuals that you create in one view, such as Labels/Cards, is available to you in the other views that allow you to choose groups:  reports, calendars, and batch print.  If you make changes to the group in one view, the group will change in all other views as well.  If you want to create a group of individuals for a specific view, see Creating Saved Views

Special Notes about FamilyFinder Report

When you select the individuals to include in the FamilyFinder Report, Family Tree Maker displays the number of individuals currently selected and an estimate of the time it will take to find information for these individuals.  When you click OK, Family Tree Maker begins searching for information about the individuals you selected, and displays a status window to show you the progress of the search.  After completing the search, Family Tree Maker returns you to the FamilyFinder Report view.


Selecting the primary individual in Kinship reports

To select the primary individual for a Kinship report:

1.	Make sure that you are in the Report view and that a Kinship report is on your screen.

2.	From the View menu, select Index of Individuals (ALT, V, I).

3.	Highlight the individual's name in the Index of Individuals and then click OK.

Family Tree Maker displays the Kinship report.


Selecting the number of generations in Kinship reports

To choose the number of generations for a Kinship report:

1.	From the Contents menu, select # of Generations to Show (ALT, C, G).

2.	Select the number of generations that you want.

For a description of the options in the # of Generations to Show dialog box, click here.

3.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Kinship report.


The # of Generations to Show dialog box

Limit size of Kinship report to show — Select this check box if you would like to limit the number of individuals in your Kinship report.  Leave this check box unchecked if you want to include all possible relatives in your Kinship report.  When this check box is unchecked, the next three options in the dialog box are not available.

Generations of Ancestors and Generations of Descendants — Click the up or down arrows in these fields to choose how many generations to include.  You can choose any number from 1 to 99.

Degrees of Cousins — Click the up or down arrows in this field to choose how many cousins to include.  For example, if you don't want to include individuals more distantly related than 3rd cousins, select "5" in this field.  You can choose any number from 1 to 99.

Report only closest relationship for each individual — The individuals in your Family File can be related in more than one way, especially when intermarriage exists.  If you select this check box, Family Tree Maker will include only one relationship between the primary individual and each of the other individuals in the Kinship report.

Display only natural parental relationships — Select this check box to include only natural parents in the Kinship report.


Selecting information for reports

Please note that this option is not available for Data Errors reports.  You can choose whether or not to include name capitalization and empty date errors in Data Errors reports.  See Selecting information for Data Errors reports.

To add items to or remove items from reports:

1.	From the Contents menu, select Items to Include (ALT, C, I).

2.	Select information for your report by adding items to or removing items from the list on the right.

For a description of the options in the Items to Include dialog box and a selection of related topics, click here.

When you include names in your report, the list on the right will show you how the names will appear in the report.  For example, "First M. Last."  To select a different format, highlight the name item in the list on the right and click Options.  For more information about making this selection, see The Options: Name dialog box.

3.	Click an item in the list on the right and use the Move up and Move down buttons to place the items in the order that you want.  In reports, the items that you choose appear in columns, from right to left.

4.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the report view.

See also

Selecting colors and styles for text


Selecting information to include

Selecting information for reports

Selecting information for Data Errors reports


Selecting information for Data Errors reports

Please note that this option is only for Data Errors reports.  To choose information for other types of reports, see Selecting information for reports.

To add items to or remove items from reports:

1.	From the Contents menu, select Options (ALT, C, O).

2.	You can choose whether or not to include name capitalization errors and empty date errors by selecting or deselecting the two check boxes.  All other types of errors are always included in Data Errors reports.  (For a list of the types of errors that will be included, see Types of errors that Family Tree Maker finds).

3.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the report view.

See also

Selecting colors and styles for text


The Options for Reports dialog box

This dialog box lets you choose whether or not to include name capitalization errors and empty date errors by selecting or deselecting the two check boxes.  All other types of errors are always included in Data Errors reports.  (For a list of the types of errors that will be included, see Types of errors that Family Tree Maker finds).


The Items to Include dialog box

Include (the arrow pointing to the right) — Select an item in the list on the left and then click this button to include that item in the report.

Remove (the arrow pointing to the left) — Select an item in the list on the right and then click this button to remove that item from the report.

Remove all (the double arrows pointing to the left) — Click this button to remove all items from the list on the right.

Move up — Select an item in the list on the right and then click this button to move that item up one space in the list.

Move down — Select an item in the list on the right and then click this button to move that item down one space in the list.

Options — Select an item in the list on the right and then click this button to format that item.  For example, you could choose a name format that omits middle names.

Note:  This button is not available for Data Errors reports.

Font — Select an item in the list on the right and then click this button to change the font in which that item will print.

See also

Selecting colors and styles for text


The Options for Bibliography Report dialog box

Standard Bibliography — Select this option button to display source information using a traditional bibliography format.

Annotated Bibliography — Select this option button to display all the information you entered about your sources.

Include footnotes without referenced sources — Select this check box to include footnotes for source entries that did not include a source title.  If you entered sources in a previous version of Family Tree Maker, your source entries will not have a title unless you enter one.  To include source entries from a previous version of Family Tree Maker, select this check box.


The Options for Documented Events Report dialog box

List individuals and marriages with documentation — Select this option button to include only individuals who have at least one source entry associated with their Family Page.  This option is helpful if you want to see a list of all the events you've already documented with sources.

List individuals and marriages with no documentation — Select this option button to include only individuals who have no source entry associated with their Family Page.  This option is helpful if you want to see a list of all the individuals for whom you need to enter source information.

List all individuals and marriages — Select this option button to include everyone in your Family File regardless of whether you've documented sources.

List events and facts with documentation — Select this option button to include only events and facts for which you've entered at least one source entry.  This option is helpful if you want to see a list of all the events you've already documented with sources.

List events and facts without documentation — Select this option button to include only events and facts that have no source entry.  This option is helpful if you want to see a list of all the events and facts that you need to verify and document.

List all events and facts — Select this option button to include all events and facts in your Family File regardless of whether you've documented sources.

Show footnote format of documentation — Select this option button to include the footnote version of your source entry.  This option may not display all the information you've entered about your sources.

Show complete documentation — Select this option button to include all of your source information.


Formatting names in reports

To change the formatting of names in reports:

1.	From the Contents menu, select Items to Include (ALT, C, I).

2.	Click the name item in the list on the right.

3.	Click Options.

4.	Make your formatting selections.

For a description of the options in the Options: Name dialog box, click here.

5.	Click OK to close the Options: Name dialog box.

6.	Click OK to close the Items to Include dialog box.


The Options, Name dialog box
The Options: Name dialog box

From the Name section, select from the following:

Format — Click this drop-down list and select a format for the names in your report.  For example, you could choose to use initials instead of full names, omit middle names, or split names onto two lines.  A line split is indicated by "\\".

Include Mr./Ms. — Select this check box If you would like titles to appear in your report.

Use married names for females — Select this check box if you want to use married names instead of maiden names for females.

Use aka if available — Select this check box if you want to display any available aka’s for this individual.

If you select this option, you may also select whether to display the aka instead of their name, or between their middle and last names.

Last name all caps — Select this check box to print last names in all capital letters.

Note:  Not all name options are available in all views.


Selecting colors and styles

Selecting colors and styles for text

Selecting colors and styles for borders


Selecting colors and styles for text

To format the text and title in a report:

1.	From the Format menu, select Text Font, Style, & Size (ALT, T, T).

2.	In the Items to format list, click an item that you want to format, such as Title.

3.	Choose formatting options for the selected item.

For a description of the options in the Text Font, Style, & Size dialog box, click here.

4.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Report view.


Add a title and footnote to a report

To add a title or footnote:

1.	From the Contents menu, select Title & Footnote (ALT, C, T).

2.	Create your title and footnote.

For a description of the options in the Title & Footnote dialog box, click here.

3.	Click OK when you're done creating your title and footnote.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Report view.  The footnote will appear in the lower right corner of the page.


The Title & Footnote dialog box

Note:  Not all options are available in every view.

Automatic title — Select this if you want Family Tree Maker to create a title for you., select the

Custom title — Select this if you want to create your own title.  Type your title in the field provided.

Print title on every page — Select this check box if you would like the title to print on every page.

Include page number — Select this check box to include page numbers at the bottom of each page of your report.

Starting number  — Enter a starting page number in the field provided.

Include date of printing — Select this check box to include the current date at the bottom of the first page.

Include time of printing — Select this check box to include the current time at the bottom of the first page.

Footnote — Type a footnote in the field provided if you want to include one.

Draw box around footnote — Select this check box to draw a box around your footnote.


Selecting colors and styles for borders

To select formatting options for lines and borders:

1.	From the Format menu, select Box, Line, & Border Styles (ALT, T, B).

2.	Make your box, line, and border selections by clicking the buttons with the styles that you like.  You can also select colors for different elements of your report.

For a description of the options in the Border Styles dialog box, click here.

3.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Report view.


The Border Styles dialog box

Border style — Click the button showing the style of border that you want drawn on each page.

Border color — Click this drop-down list and select the color that you want for the border.

Background color — Click this drop-down list and select the color that you want for the entire background of each page.

Border thickness — Click the button showing the line thickness that you want for the border.


Finding someone in a report

This feature is available in any report that includes names and is sorted alphabetically by last name.

To locate a name in a report:

1.	Click in the Type name field at the top of the screen.

2.	Start typing the last name of the individual that you want to find.

With each character you type, you will get closer to the name you are looking for.  You can type part or all of the name, as long as it is in the same format as the report (Last name, First name Middle name).


Sorting reports

To select a sorting order:

1.	From the Format menu, select Sort (ALT, T, S).

2.	Click the option button for the type of sorting you prefer.

If you want the individuals to print in the order in which you added them to the group in the Individuals to Include dialog box, select Don't Sort Individuals.  This is especially useful for printing individuals in an ancestor or descendant order.

3.	Click OK when you've made your selection.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the document view.


The Sort Report dialog box

Sort by — Select the column heading of the column that you want sorted first and choose whether you want the sort to be ascending (A to Z) or descending (Z to A).

Then by (optional) — Select the column heading of the column that you want sorted second and choose whether you want the sort to be ascending (A to Z) or descending (Z to A).


Selecting the width of each column

To select column widths and spacing in reports:

1.	From the Format menu, select Maximum Width (ALT, T, W).

2.	Enter the column widths and spacing that you want.

For a description of the options in the Maximum Width for Each Column dialog box, click here.

3.	Click OK after you've made your changes.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Report view.


The Maximum Width for Each Column dialog box

On the left side of this dialog box there are numbers that correspond to the columns in your report; "1" is the leftmost column.  On the right side of the dialog box is a list titled "Column item."  This list tells you what information each column contains.  If a column that you want to edit is not visible, use the scroll bar on the left side of the dialog box to scroll through the list.

Set widths automatically — Select this option button if you prefer to have Family Tree Maker choose the widths and spacing for each column.  In this case, none of the other options in the dialog box are available.

Choose widths manually — Select this option button if you prefer to manually set the widths and spacing for each column.

Width — Click either the up or down arrow to change how much space a column occupies.  If you choose a width that is too narrow for the text in the column, Family Tree Maker will try abbreviating the text.  If the abbreviated text does not fit, it will be truncated.

Spacing — Click either the up or down arrow to change the distance between a column and the column to the right of it.

Total report width — This field shows how wide your entire report will be with the currently selected column widths and spacing.  To change these numbers, you must change the numbers in the "Width" and "Spacing" fields.


Printing a report

Printing a report

Changing margins, printers, and page orientation


Printing a report

To print your report:

1.	Make sure you're in the Report view.

2.	Turn on your printer.

3.	From the File menu, select Print (ALT, F, P).

4.	Select the printing options that you want.

For a description of the options in the Print dialog box, click here.

5.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker prints your report.


Exporting a report

You can export the Bibliography report and Documented Events report for use in another software program.

1. First select the report you want to export.

2.	From the File menu, select Export Report (ALT, F,  E).

Family Tree Maker displays the Export Report dialog box.

3.	In the Save as type list, select Formatted Text (RTF) or ASCII as the export file format.

If your the program your other program supports RTF format files, select this format to maintain most of the report formatting.

4.	In the Save in lists, select the folder where you want to store the file you export.

5.	In the File name field, type a name for the file.

If you are exporting the file for use with a non-Windows 95 program, the file name must be eight letters or less plus a three letter extension.  For example, you could type myreport.txt.  Otherwise, the file name can be up to 255 characters.

6.	Click Save when you're done.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the report view.


Selecting other information to print

To add items to or remove items from a printed Scrapbook:

1.	From the Contents menu, select Items to Include (ALT, C, I).  (You must first be in Scrapbook Print Preview.)

2.	Select information for your printed Scrapbook pages by adding items to or removing items from the list on the right.

For a description of the options in the Items to Include dialog box and a selection of related topics, click here.

3.	Use the Move up and Move down buttons to place the items in the order that you want.

4.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker returns you to Scrapbook Print Preview.


The Items to Include dialog box

Include (the arrow pointing to the right) — Select an item in the list on the left and then click this button to include that item in the printed Scrapbook.

Remove (the arrow pointing to the left) — Select an item in the list on the right and then click this button to remove that item from the printed Scrapbook.

Remove all (the double arrows pointing to the left) — Click this button to remove all items from the list on the right.

Move up —- Select an item in the list on the right and then click this button to move that item up one space in the list.

Move down — Select an item in the list on the right and then click this button to move that item down one space in the list.

Font — Select an item in the list on the right and then click this button to change the font in which that item will print.

See also

Formatting text in Scrapbooks


A Picture/Object

A Picture/Object is any item that you insert in a Scrapbook, such as a picture or video clip.


Selecting colors and styles

Selecting colors and styles for text

Selecting colors and styles for boxes, lines, and borders


Selecting colors and styles for text

To format the text and title in a Scrapbook:

1.	From the Format menu, select Text Font, Style, & Size (ALT, T, F).  (You must first be in Scrapbook Print Preview.)

2.	In the Items to format list, click an item that you want to format, such as Title.

3.	Choose formatting options for the selected item.

For a description of the options in the Text Font, Style, & Size dialog box, click here.

4.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker returns you to Scrapbook Print Preview.


Adding a title and page numbers to a scrapbook

To add a title or page numbers:

1.	From the Contents menu, select Title & Footnote (ALT, C, T).  (You must first be in Print Preview.)

2.	Create your title and page numbers.

For a description of the options in the Title & Footnote dialog box, click here.

3.	Click OK.

Family Tree Maker returns you to Scrapbook Print Preview.


The Title & Footnote dialog box

Note:  Not all options are available in every view.

Automatic title — Select this if you want Family Tree Maker to create a title for you., select the

Custom title — Select this if you want to create your own title.  Type your title in the field provided.

Print title on every page — Select this check box if you would like the title to print on every page.

Include page number — Select this check box to include page numbers at the bottom of each page of your report.

Starting number  — Enter a starting page number in the field provided.

Include date of printing — Select this check box to include the current date at the bottom of the first page.

Include time of printing — Select this check box to include the current time at the bottom of the first page.


Choosing the page layout

To choose the Scrapbook page layout:

1.	From the Format menu, select Scrapbook Format (ALT, T, F).  (You must first be in Scrapbook Print Preview.)

2.	Click the button showing the Picture/Object layout you want.

For a description of the options in the Format dialog box, click here.

3.	Click OK when you've made your selection.

Family Tree Maker returns you to Scrapbook Print Preview.


The Format for Printed Scrapbook dialog box

Layout — Click the button containing the number of Picture/Objects that you want on each of your printed Scrapbook pages.

Edit — If you want to create your own special page layout, click this button and enter the number of Picture/Objects that you want across and down each page.  The numbers must be from 1 to 50.  Remember, however, the more Picture/Objects on each page, the smaller they will be.


The Custom Layout dialog box

Across — Enter the number of Picture/Objects that you want running across each printed Scrapbook page.

Down — Enter the number of Picture/Objects that you want running down each printed Scrapbook page.

The numbers must be from 1 to 50.  Remember, however, the more Picture/Objects on each page, the smaller they will be.


Selecting colors and styles for boxes, lines, and borders

To select these formatting options:

1.	From the Format menu, select Box, Line, & Border Styles (ALT, T, B).  (You must first be in Scrapbook Print Preview.)

2.	Make your box, line, and border selections by clicking the buttons with the styles that you like.  You can also select colors for different elements of your Scrapbook.

For a description of the options in the Box, Line, & Border Styles dialog box, click here.

3.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker returns you to Scrapbook Print Preview.


The Box, Line & Border Styles dialog box
The Box, Line, & Border Styles dialog box

Box style — Click the button showing the style of box that you want drawn around each Picture/Object.

Fill color — Click this drop-down list and select the color that you want to fill the box.

Shadow color — Click this drop-down list and select the color that you want for the box shadow (only with the bottom two box styles).

Line style — Click the button showing the line thickness that you want for the boxes and page border.

Line color — Click this drop-down list and select the color that you want for the boxes.

Border style — Click the button showing the style of border that you want drawn around each page.

Border color — Click this drop-down list and select the color that you want for the page border.

Background color — Click this drop-down list and select the color that you want for the entire background of each page.


Selecting Picture/Objects to print

To select Picture/Objects for printing:

1.	From the Contents menu, select Options (ALT, C, O).  (You must first be in Print Preview.)

2.	Select the Picture/Objects that you want to include in your printed Scrapbook pages.

For a description of the options in the Options dialog box and a selection of related topics, click here.

3.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker returns you to Scrapbook Print Preview.


The Options for Printed Scrapbooks dialog box

When you print Scrapbook pages, only the Picture/Objects that are marked to print in Scrapbooks will be included.  (See the topic How to: create captions and categories for Picture/Objects).  In this dialog box, you can further control which Picture/Objects print on the Scrapbook pages.

All — If you wish to print all Picture/Objects that are marked for printing, select this option button.

By category and type — Categories and types are assigned to each Picture/Object in the More About Picture/Object dialog box.  Click these drop-down lists and select the category and type of Picture/Objects that you want to print.

The By Category and and Type fields work together to find the Picture/Objects that you want to place in your Scrapbook.  For example, if you choose the category "Birthdays" and the type "Picture," Family Tree Maker searches for Picture/Objects that fulfill both requirements.  However, both of the fields have an "Any" option, which, in effect, allows you to search only one of the two fields.  If the category that you assigned to a Picture/Object does not appear in the "By Category" drop-down list, just type it into the field.


Rearranging Picture/Objects

To select a sorting order:

1.	From the Format menu, select Sort (ALT, T, S).

2.	Click the option button for the type of sorting you prefer.

3.	Click OK when you've made your selection.

Family Tree Maker returns you to Scrapbook Print Preview.


Printing Scrapbooks

Printing a single Scrapbook

Batch printing a set of Scrapbooks

Changing margins, printers, and page orientation


Printing a single Scrapbook

To print your Scrapbook:

1.	Make sure you're in the Scrapbook view or in Scrapbook Print Preview.

2.	Turn on your printer.

3.	From the File menu, select Print (ALT, F, P).

4.	Select the printing options that you want.

For a description of the options in the Print dialog box, click here.

5.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker prints your Scrapbook.


Printing labels and cards

Overview

All about labels and cards

How to...

Create labels and cards

Select people to include

Select information to include

Enter addresses

Select colors and styles

Change label size and print setup

Select formats for names, etc.

Select the width for Picture/Objects

Sort labels and cards

Zoom in and out

Show page lines

Print labels and cards

Use a mouse with labels and cards

See reports and trees

What is this?

The toolbar


All about labels and cards

With this feature you can print address labels, postcards, name tags, rolling index cards, address book pages, and much more.  For a complete list, look in the Print Setup dialog box for labels and cards (see the topic Print setup and label size).

Family Tree Maker allows you to select a group of individuals for whom to print labels or cards.  In addition, you can choose whether to print one label or card per household or one per individual.  For example, if you print address labels for holiday cards, you probably only want one for each household.  If you print name tags, you would want to print one for each individual.

Because Family Tree Maker recognizes the relationships between the individuals in your family tree, it prints labels and cards intelligently.  For example, if you choose to print one address label per household, it would print address labels that said "The John and Jane Doe Family" for any nuclear families, "John and Jane Doe" for any couples without children, and "Jane Doe" or "John Doe" for any single adults.


Creating labels and cards

To create labels and cards:

1.	From the View menu, select Labels/Cards (ALT, V, L).

Family Tree Maker displays a sheet of labels or cards.  Their size and shape will depend on the type of labels or cards that are currently selected in the Print Setup dialog box.  To change the size, see the topic Print setup and label size.

2.	You can either print your labels and cards right away or customize them and then print.  See the topic Printing labels and cards.


Using a mouse with labels and cards

You can click on labels and cards to do two different things:

 navigate through Family Tree Maker, moving to different views and making different individuals the primary individual.

 activate Picture/Objects, either viewing pictures at full size or "playing" OLE objects.  For more information about including Picture/Objects in your trees see the topic How to: select information to include.

Whether you navigate through Family Tree Maker or activate your Picture/Objects depends on what you click and whether you double-click or single-click.  The table below describes each of the functions.

Do this...	To do this...
Click once anywhere on a label or card	Select the individual.  You can then use the menus or the toolbar to change to any view.  The selected individual becomes the primary individual.
Double-click any text on a label or card	Go to the individual's Family Page
Double-click a Picture/Object on a label or card	If the Picture/Object is an OLE object, Family Tree Maker opens the OLE server and "plays" the object.  For example, it plays sound and video files, and opens pictures and displays them at full size. If the Picture/Object is a not an OLE object, Family Tree Maker displays it in the View Picture dialog box.


Print setup and label size for labels and cards
How to: change label size and print setup

To change the label size or print setup for labels or cards:

1.	From the File menu, select Print Setup (ALT, F, R).

2.	Select the Print Setup options that you want.

For a description of the options in the Print Setup dialog box, click here.

3.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Labels/Cards view.


Changing label size and print setup

Default/Specific Printer — Select the Default printer option button to use the printer that you normally use with your other Windows programs.  If you wish to use a different printer, click the Specific printer drop-down list and select a printer from the list that Family Tree Maker displays.

Note:  If the printer you wish to use is not shown, then you need to install that printer's driver.  Consult your Microsoft Windows User's Guide for information about installing printer drivers.

Portrait/Landscape — If you want your sheet of labels or cards to print with the short edge of the sheet at the bottom select the Portrait option button.  If you want the sheet to print with the long edge of the sheet at the bottom (sideways), select the Landscape option button.

Source — Click the Source drop-down list and choose a paper source from the list that Family Tree Maker displays.

Avery products — Use this list to select the type and size of the label or card on which to print.  The card and label types are based on the Avery line of office products, although you can use any brand.

If you want to see exactly what a label looks like, select the label type in the Avery products list and click OK.  Family Tree Maker will draw the label or card on your screen.

Brightness — The Brightness level that you select will only apply to Picture/Objects that are printed on labels and cards.  When you have selected a brightness setting, click OK in the Brightness dialog box to return to the Print Setup dialog box.

Options — The options available to you depend on your printer.  Make your selections from this dialog box, and then click OK to return to the Print Setup dialog box.


Selecting people to include

Selecting a group of individuals to print

Printing for households or individuals


Selecting a group of individuals to print

To select a group of individuals for your labels or cards:

1.	From the Contents menu, select Individuals to Include (ALT, C, N).

2.	In the Include dialog box, choose All individuals and click OK if you want everyone in your Family File to print.  Skip the remaining steps.  Otherwise, choose Selected individuals and then click Individuals to Include.

3.	Select individuals to include in your document by adding names to or removing names from the list on the right.

For a description of the options in the Individuals to Include dialog box, click here.

Include all of the individuals whose names you want to appear on a label or card.  If you are printing for households and you accidentally leave out a member of a household, the information may not print as you want.

4.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Labels/Cards view.

Once you have created your list of individuals to print, you can choose to print one label or card per individual or one label or card per household.  See the topic Printing for households or individuals.

You can also select name formats for your labels and cards.  The name formatting choices let you control how formal or informal your labels or cards are.  See the topic How to: select formats for names, etc.


Selecting information to include

To add items to or remove items from labels or cards:

1.	From the Contents menu, select Items to Include (ALT, C, I).

2.	Select information for your tree by adding items to or removing items from the list on the right.

For a description of the options in the Items to Include dialog box and a selection of related topics, click here.

Some items, such as names and dates, require you to make formatting choices.  Family Tree Maker automatically displays a dialog box that asks you to make a formatting choice when it is necessary.  You can also select an item in the list on the right and click Options.

If you include addresses, Family Tree Maker takes them from the Address dialog box, described in the topic Entering addresses.  You do not have to type an address into each individual's Address dialog box, because individuals can "inherit" addresses from their spouses or parents.  You can tell when an address has been inherited because the label will have a dotted line around it.  (The dotted line will not print on the label or card.)

3.	Select an item in the list on the right and use the Move up and Move down buttons to place the items in the order that you want.

4.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the tree view.

See also

How to: select formats for names, etc.

Selecting colors and styles for text


The Items to Include dialog box

Include (single arrow pointing to the right) — Select an item in the list on the left and then click this button to include that item on the labels or cards.

Remove (single arrow pointing to the left) — Select an item in the list on the right and then click this button to remove that item from the labels or cards.

Remove all (double arrows pointing to the left) — Click this button to remove all items from the list on the right.

Move up — Select an item in the list on the right and then click this button to move that item up one space in the list.

Move down — Select an item in the list on the right and then click this button to move that item down one space in the list.

Options — Select an item in the list on the right and then click this button to format that item.  For example, you could choose a name format that omitted middle names.

Font — Click the name of an item in the list on the right and then click this button to change the font in which that item will print.

See also

How to: select formats for names, etc.

Selecting colors and styles for text


Selecting formats for names, etc.

When you're selecting items to include on your labels or cards, Family Tree Maker sometimes displays a Format dialog box.  You can use the dialog box to control the appearance of the information.  You can also format information after you've chosen to include it in your tree:

1.	From the Contents menu, select Items to Include (ALT, C, I).

2.	Select an item in the list on the right.

3.	Click Options.

Note:  If Options stays grayed out, that item does not have any formatting options.

For a description of the Options: Name dialog box, click here; the Options: Picture/Object dialog box, click here; the Options: Date/Location dialog box click here; the Options: Fact dialog box, click here; all other Options dialog boxes, click here.

4.	Make your formatting selections and then click OK.

The selections that you make will affect every occurrence of that information in your labels or cards (e.g., all names, all Picture/Objects, all birth dates).

5.	Click OK to close the Items to Include dialog box.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Labels/Cards view.


The Options, Name dialog box
The Options: Name dialog box

There are two different name formats that you can set in this dialog box: one for when you print one label or card per household and one when you print one per individual.

1.	Click the Households/Begin with drop-down list.  You can either type in your own word(s), leave the field blank, or select an item from the drop-down list.

The drop-down list generally uses the titles "Mr." and "Mrs."  However, if you prefer different titles, you can change them in the Titles dialog box, described in the topic How to: select title preferences (Mr., Mrs., etc.).  If there are some individuals in your Family File who use special titles, such as "Dr." or "Reverend," enter their titles in their Lineage dialog boxes.  See the topic Entering nicknames, titles, and parental relationship information for details.

2.	Click the Households/name drop-down list and select an appropriate name format.

3.	Click the Households/end with drop-down list.  You can either select an item from the drop-down list or type in your own word(s).

4.	Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the Individuals fields.

5. Use married names for individual females — Select this check box if you would like Family Tree Maker to use married names for women when printing labels and cards for individuals instead of households.

Use aka if available — Select the check box, if you want to print nicknames where they are available.

Instead of name — Select this check box if you would like to print the aka only.

Between middle and last name — Select this check box if you would like to place the aka between the middle and last names.

Last name all caps — Select this check box if you want the last name to appear in all capital letters.

Word wrap — Select this check box if you want to allow long names to wrap onto two lines.

6. If you documented sources, select the Include Source check box to include them on your Labels/Cards.  If you entered a source "Title," the title appears, otherwise the source "Footnote" appears.  You can also choose whether to include a label with the source reference.  To include a label, click the Include source label check box, and then select either Source or Src as the label.  Finally, to include a source label when you did not document a source, click the Include labels of empty fields check box.

7. Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Labels/Cards view.


The Options, Picture/Object dialog box
The Options: Picture/Object dialog box

Preferred picture/object #1 — Select this option button to include the Picture/Object that you chose as a "Preferred Picture/Object for Labels/Cards" in each More About Picture/Object dialog box.  For more information about the More About Picture/Object dialog box, see the topic How to: create captions and categories for Picture/Objects.

By Category and Type — Instead of using the "Preferred Picture/Objects," you can choose to include Picture/Objects of a particular category and type.  Categories are classifications that you create.  Types are chosen from a drop-down list in the More About Picture/Object dialog box.  They describe what Picture/Objects are, such as "Pictures" or "Sound Clips."  Again, see the topic "How to: create captions and categories for Picture/Objects."  If the category that you assigned to a Picture/Object does not appear in the "By Category" drop-down list, just type it into the field.  When there is more than one Picture/Object in the category that you select, Family Tree Maker uses the first one.

Include caption — Select this check box to include the captions you created in each Picture/Object's More About Picture/Object dialog box.

Include date — Select this check box to include the date you entered in each Picture/Object's More About Picture/Object dialog box.

Picture/Object Placement — To choose how the text and Picture/Object are arranged on the labels or cards, select the button picturing the placement that you prefer.

Missing picture/objects — Click this button to choose a graphic (or blank space) to place in the boxes of individuals who do not have Picture/Objects in their Scrapbooks.

See also

Selecting the width of Picture/Objects

The Missing Picture/Objects dialog box


Selecting colors and styles for text

To format the text on your labels or cards:

1.	From the Format menu, select Text Font, Style, & Size (ALT, T, T).

2.	In the Items to format list, select an item that you want to format, such as Name.

3.	Select formatting options for the item.

For a description of the options in the Text Font, Style, & Size dialog box, click here.

4.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Labels/Cards view.


Selecting colors and styles

Selecting colors and styles for text

Selecting colors and styles for boxes and lines


Selecting colors and styles for boxes and lines

To select these formatting options:

1.	From the Format menu, select Box & Line Styles (ALT, T, B).

2.	Make your box and line selections by clicking the buttons with the styles that you like.  You can also select colors for different elements of your labels or cards.

For a description of the options in the Box & Line Styles dialog box, click here.

3.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Labels/Cards view.


The Box & Line Styles dialog box

Box style — Click the button showing the style of box that you want drawn around the edge of each label.

Fill color — Click this drop-down list and select the color that you want to fill the background of the label.

Line color — Click this drop-down list and select the color that you want for the box line.

Line thickness — Click the button showing the thickness that you want for the box line.


Selecting the width for Picture/Objects

To set a maximum width for Picture/Objects on labels and cards:

1.	From the Format menu, select Maximum Width for Each Picture/Object (ALT, T, W).

2.	Enter a number in the Maximum Picture/Object width field.  To get a smaller Picture/Object, enter a smaller number.  You can enter any width between 0.1 inch and 99.99 inches.  Your Picture/Objects will fit into a square with sides of that length.

3.	Click OK when you've made your selection.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Labels/Cards view.


The Maximum Width dialog box

Maximum Picture/Object width — Enter a number in this field to limit the width of the Picture/Objects on the label.  To get a smaller Picture/Object, enter a smaller number.  You can enter any width between 0.1 inch and 99.99 inches.  Your Picture/Objects will fit into a square with sides of that length.


Printing for households or individuals

To choose between printing for households or individuals:

1.	From the Contents menu, select Options (ALT, C, O).

2.	Make your printing selections.

For a description of the options in the Options for Labels/Cards dialog box and a selection of related topics, click here.

3.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Labels/Cards view.


The Options for Labels/Cards dialog box

Use Name Format for — When you print labels or cards, you must decide if you want to print one label or card for each household or for each individual.  For example, if you are printing address labels for holiday cards, you probably only want to print one label per household.  If you are printing name tags, however, you would want to print one for each individual.

If you select Individual, Family Tree Maker will use the "Individuals" name format you selected in the Options: Name dialog box and will print a label or card for each individual in your list of Individuals to Include.  If you select Household, Family Tree Maker will use the "Household" name format you selected in the Options: Name dialog box and will print a label or card for each group of individuals who share the same address.  Family Tree Maker is smart enough to adjust the name format for all different types of households:

 A family group, such as parents and children, that shares the same address will print on one label with the "Household" name format you have selected.  For example "Mr. and Mrs. Doe and Family."

 A couple that shares the same address will print on one label with a variation of the "Household" name format.  For example "Mr. and Mrs. Doe."

 A single individual with a unique address will print alone on a label with another variation of the "Household" name format.  For example, "Ms. Doe."

That way, all of your labels or cards have the same basic style and formality, but are suitable to the type of household.  The exact name format that is printed on your labels or cards will depend on your selections in the Options: Name dialog box.  For more information, see the topic The Options: Name dialog box.

Print blank rows when fields are empty — When this check box is selected, Family Tree Maker will insert a blank row in the label or card when it comes across an empty field.

See also

Selecting a group of individuals to print


Sorting labels and cards

To select a sorting order:

1.	From the Format menu, select Sort (ALT, T, S).

2.	Click the option button for the type of sorting you prefer.

If you want the individuals to print in the order in which you added them to the group in the Individuals to Include dialog box, select the Don't Sort Individuals option button.  This is especially useful for printing individuals in ancestor or descendant order.

3.	Click OK when you've made your selection.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Labels/Cards view.


Printing labels and cards

Printing labels and cards

Print setup and label size


Printing a set of labels and cards

To print labels and cards:

1.	Make sure you're in the Labels/Cards view.

2.	Turn on your printer.

3.	From the File menu, select Print (ALT, F, P).

4.	Select the printing options that you want.

For a description of the options in the Print dialog box and a selection of related topics, click here.

5.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker prints your labels or cards.

See also

Print setup and label size


Batch printing

When you want to print a lot of information, use the Batch Print command.  It is available for Family Pages, Family Group Sheets, Notes dialog boxes, and Scrapbooks.  The Batch Print command lets you specify what document you want to print, what information it contains, and also provides page numbering functions.

Here are the basic steps to start a batch print (details follow):

1.	Choose what type of document you want to print.

2.	Choose which individuals' information you want to print.

3.	Specify the print settings.

4.	Tell Family Tree Maker to print the documents.

To find out the details about each of these steps, continue with the topics below in the order in which they are listed.

See also

Selecting and setting up the document type

Selecting a print order and individuals to print

Selecting print settings

Special uses for batch printing

Note:  For troubleshooting help and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs), remember to visit www.familytreemaker.com/support.html — this is your best source for accurate assistance with Family Tree Maker.


Selecting and setting up the document type

To select and set up a document for batch printing:

1.	Go to the document that you want to print.

To print Family Group Sheets, from the View menu, select Family Group Sheet (ALT, V, G).

To print Notes for individuals or marriages, go to a Family Page and place the cursor either on the name of the individual or on the marriage.  Then, from the View menu, select More About (ALT, V, M).  From the sub-menu, select Notes (N).

To print Scrapbooks for individuals or marriages, place the cursor either on the name of the individual or on the marriage.  Then, from the View menu, select Scrapbook (ALT, V, S).

2.	Use the commands on the Contents and Format menus to set up the document for printing.

3.	At this time, you may also want to check your print setup, which controls items such as paper orientation, paper size, and margins.  See the topic Changing margins, printers, and page orientation.

4.	When you are ready, continue with the topic Selecting a print order and individuals to print.


Selecting a print order and individuals to print

After you've chosen the type of document you want to print, you're ready to select a printing order and choose individuals to print.

From the File menu, select Batch Print (ALT, F, A).  Family Tree Maker displays the Individuals to Include dialog box.  In this dialog box you can create a group of individuals to include in the batch print.  However, you first need to select a printing order:

1.	Click Sort order.

2.	Click the option button for the type of sorting you prefer.

If you want individuals to print in the order in which you will choose them in the Individuals to Include dialog box, select Don't sort individuals in this dialog box.

3.	Click OK when you've made your selection.

4.	Select individuals to include in your document by adding names to or removing names from the list on the right.

For a description of the options in the Individuals to Include dialog box, click here.

5.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker returns you to your document view.

Note:  The group of individuals that you create in one view, such as Labels/Cards, is available to you in the other views that allow you to choose groups:  reports, calendars, and batch print.  If you make changes to the group in one view, the group will change in all other views as well.  If you want to create a group of individuals for a specific view, see Creating custom book items.

6.	When you are ready, continue with the topic Selecting print settings.


Selecting print settings

After you click OK in the Individuals to Include dialog box, Family Tree Maker displays the Batch Print dialog box.  This is where you can select options for page numbering and print quality.

1.	Select your options in the Batch Print dialog box.

For a description of the options in the Batch Print dialog box, click here.

2.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker begins printing.


The Batch Print dialog box

Print quality — Use this option to select the quality of your printed materials.  The higher the print quality you choose, the darker and sharper your printed materials will be.  However, items printed in high print quality also take longer to print.  If your printer does not support different print qualities, this option will not be available to you.

Page Numbering — Select the option button for the page numbering scheme that you want for your batch print.  If you choose to have page numbers, enter a starting number in the Starting number field.  Please note that when you print Notes, the Don't number pages option button is not available.  In addition, when you print Notes, you cannot select a starting number; all Notes start on page 1.

Print color — If you have a color printer, select this check box to print in color.  If you have a black and white printer, select this check box to print in grayscale.  De-select this check box if you just want to print in black and white.  If you have a black and white printer, color Picture/Objects will always print in grayscale.


Special uses for batch printing

Batch printing comes in handy when you are doing family research.  For example, you can batch print a set of Family Group Sheets to send to relatives so that they can verify the information.  After printing the Family Group Sheets, you can easily switch to the Labels/Cards view and print mailing labels for the same group of people!  This is because Family Tree Maker saves the group that you select in the Individuals to Include dialog box until you change it again.

Batch printing is also especially useful when you want to make family books.  You can choose who to print the documents for and how to number the pages.  You can also select the order in which the documents print  alphabetically, chronologically, or virtually any order you want!  Many people like to print their documents in Ancestor or Descendant order, so we're including general instructions here:

To batch print in Ancestor or Descendant order:

1.	When you first open the Individuals to Include dialog box, click the Remove all button (double arrows pointing to the left.)

2.	Click Sort order.

3.	Select the Don't sort individuals option button and then click OK.

4.	Select the individual whose ancestors or descendants you want to add.

5.	Click either Ancestors or Descendants.

6.	Click OK.

Family Tree Maker displays the Batch Print dialog box.

7.	Make your selections in the Batch Print dialog box.

8.	Click OK.

Family Tree Maker begins printing.


Checking for errors

Checking for errors as you enter data

Checking for existing errors

Creating Data Errors reports

Types of errors that Family Tree Maker finds


Checking for errors

Checking for errors as you enter data

Checking for existing errors

Creating Data Errors reports

Types of errors that Family Tree Maker finds


Checking your file for errors

Checking for errors as you enter data

Checking for existing errors

Creating Data Errors reports

Types of errors that Family Tree Maker finds


Checking for errors as you enter data

To turn on the error checking options:

1.	From the File menu, select Preferences (ALT, F, F).

2.	From the Preferences sub-menu, select Error Checking (ALT, E).

3.	Select the check boxes for the types of errors that you want Family Tree Maker to look for.

4.	Click OK when you've made your selections.


The Error Checking dialog box

Select the check boxes for the types of errors that you want Family Tree Maker to look for.


Data Entry Error dialog box

Family Tree Maker believes there is an error in the information appearing in the field(s).  Fix the error using the controls described below.  Not all of the controls will be available in all cases.

Data Entry Error dialog box

 Correct the information manually by typing the correction in the field and then clicking OK.

 Skip over this particular error for now by clicking Cancel.  It will still show up in future error checking sessions.

 Ignore this error for this particular individual by selecting Ignore error and then clicking OK.  When you ignore a name error, Family Tree Maker will finish checking for name errors in the current field.  However, Family Tree Maker will not find any more name errors for this individual in the future, even if you use the Find Error command, unless you edit the name that caused the original error.

 Have Family Tree Maker attempt to correct the information by clicking AutoFix.  Once you click this button, it changes to "Undo."  Click Undo to revert to the original information.  Click OK to accept Family Tree Maker's changes.  Please note that this option is not available for surname errors.

Date Entry Error dialog box

Family Tree Maker does not understand the date you have entered.  You need to edit the date manually and then click OK to have Family Tree Maker accept the changes.  For additional information about date formats that Family Tree Maker understands, see Entering Dates.


Checking for existing errors

To check your Family File with the Find Error Command:

1.	Go to the Family Page view.

2.	From the Edit menu, select Find Error (ALT, E, E).

3.	Make your error checking selections.

For a description of the options in the Find Error dialog box, click here.

4.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

5.	When Family Tree Maker displays an error dialog box, you can either fix the error manually, fix it automatically by clicking AutoFix (in some cases), skip over it by clicking Find Next, or ignore this error in all your searches by selecting Ignore error.

6.	Click Find next when you want to move on to the next error or click Close when you want to quit searching.

You've reached the end of the search when Family Tree Maker returns you to a Family Page.


The Find Error dialog box

Errors to find in search — Select the check boxes for the types of errors that you want Family Tree Maker to locate.

Click here for information on the types of errors Family Tree Maker will look for in names.

Reset all ignored errors — If you previously chose to ignore some errors by selecting "Ignore error" check boxes, click this button to include those errors in all future searches.


The Find Error dialog box

Family Tree Maker believes there is an error in the information appearing in the field(s).  Fix the error using the controls described below.  Not all of the controls will be available in all cases.

 Correct the information manually by typing the correction in the field and then clicking OK.

 Ignore this error for this particular individual by selecting Ignore error and then clicking OK.  When you ignore a name error, Family Tree Maker will finish checking for name errors for this individual.  However, when you use Find Error in the future, Family Tree Maker will not find any more name errors for this individual, unless you edit the name that caused the original error.  The same rule applies when you ignore date errors.

 Have Family Tree Maker attempt to correct the information by clicking AutoFix.  Once you click this button, it changes to "Undo."  Click Undo to revert to the original information.  Click OK to accept Family Tree Maker's changes.  Please note that this option is not available for surname errors.

 Move on to the next error by clicking Find next.  If you do not fix this error, it will appear in future searches.

 Quit searching by clicking Close.


Creating Data Errors reports

A Data Errors report can show you places in your Family File where there might be mistakes.  It is very thorough in its checking, but in order to fix the mistakes, you have to go into your file and manually locate the errors listed in the report.

You create and print a Data Errors report in the Report view.  For instructions, see Printing Reports.  For a list of the errors that you can find with the Data Errors report, see Error types.


Types of errors that Family Tree Maker finds

Name errors

Date errors

Other errors


Date errors

"Born when parent <name> was under 13"

Available only with Data Errors reports.

According to the dates in your Family File, this individual was born before one (or both) of the parents reached age 13.  Verify the birth dates, then make sure you have the correct relationship between the mother and child.

"<child's name> birth date is after <mother's name> death date"

Available with all three types of error checking.

According to the dates in your Family File, this individual was born after the death date of his or her mother.  Verify the birth and death dates, then make sure you have the correct relationship between the mother and child.

"<child's name> birth date occurred too long after <father's name> death date"

Available with all three types of error checking.

According to the dates in your Family File, this individual was born more than 10 months after the death date of his or her father.  Verify that the child is the natural child of the father and that their birth and death dates are correct.

"Death date is before birth date"

Available with all three types of error checking.

This individual's listed death date indicates that she or he died prior to her or his birth date.  These two dates may simply have been entered in reverse order.

"<Name's> marriage to <name> occurred before age 13"

Available with Data Errors reports and Find Errors command.

This individual was twelve years old or younger on the date of his or her marriage.  Consult a municipal record for the marriage to ensure that you're using the most reliable source.  Also double-check your original source for the marriage date and the birth dates of both spouses.

"Event date is empty"

Available only with Data Errors reports.

Family Tree Maker has found a date field that contains no text or numbers.  Since events always correspond to a date, this indicates a gap in your research.  For events where you do not know an exact date, you may want to use an estimated date (see Entering dates) or type unknown in the date field.  Please note that this error message does not include the Fact fields in the Facts dialog box.

"Death date more than 120 years after birth date"

Available with all three types of error checking.

Your Family File indicates that this individual had a life span of more than 120 years.  Verify both the birth and death dates, making sure that the correct century is entered.  If you do not have an exact death date for an individual, but do know that the individual is deceased, use an estimated death date (see Entering dates).

"<child's name> birth date more than 20 years after the marriage date of <name> and <name>"

Available only with Data Errors reports.

Family Tree Maker has found an individual who was born more than 20 years after his or her parents were married.  Verify both the birth and marriage dates, as well as the relationship between the parents and the child.

"<child's name> birth date before the marriage date of <name> and <name>"

Available only with Data Errors reports.

Family Tree Maker has found an individual who was born before his or her parents were married.  Verify both the birth and marriage dates, as well as the relationship between the parents and the child.

"Not in birth order in the children list"

Available only with Data Errors reports.

Family Tree Maker has found a Family Page on which this child is not listed in his or her birth order.  Go to that Family Page and use the Sort Children command from the People menu (ALT, P, S) to put them in the correct order (see Using Sort Children).

"Mother older than 50 at the time of child's birth"

Available with the Find Error Command and Data Entry Checking.

Family Tree Maker has located a woman who was at least 50 years old on the birth date of one of her children.  The listed child might instead be a grandchild, or there could be a special circumstance such as adoption.

"This date contains a word or character I don't understand"

Available with all three types of error checking.

Family Tree Maker does not understand the date you have entered.  Check the spelling of the month or the format of the date.


Other errors

"Is this <name> the same as <name>?"

Available with the Data Entry Checking and Data Errors reports.

Family Tree Maker has found two people with identical names, sexes, and birth dates.  Make sure that the individuals actually are distinct people.  If you accidentally created more than one record for the same individual, you can eliminate the excess record by merging the information.  See Merging duplicate individuals.

"No parents, no children, and no spouses"

Available only with Data Errors reports.

Make sure you haven't omitted the individuals to whom this individual is related.  If you don't yet know who they are, you'll at least know where to start your research!  In some instances, you may have inadvertently unlinked an individual in order to fix a relationship mistake.  For more information, see Editing the family structure.

"<Fieldname> may have incorrect capitalization"

Available only with Data Errors reports.

Family Tree Maker has found a field where you have typed information in all capital letters.  Check the capitalization.


Combining files

Important:  If you don't work carefully, you may accidentally combine two unique individuals.  We strongly suggest that you first make a backup copy of your file (see Backing up Family Files) so you can return to a previous version in case your file doesn't turn out as you expected.

The first step is to open the files that you want to combine:

1.	Make sure that the correct Family Tree Maker destination file is open.

The "destination" file is the file that you are adding information to; the "source" file is the file from which that information comes.  The destination file will become larger, and the source file remains the same.

2.	From the File menu, select Open Family File (ALT, F, O).

3.	Click the Files of type drop-down list and select the format of the file.

4.	In the Look in lists, select the drive and folder where the source file is located, then select the file name.  If you are unsure where your file is, click Find file and follow the instructions in Finding files.

5.	Click Append file.

If all field labels in the source and destination files are the same, Family Tree Maker displays the Individuals to Include dialog box; go to Selecting individuals to include.  Otherwise, continue with Mapping information.  (If you are appending a GEDCOM file, Family Tree Maker first displays the Import from GEDCOM dialog box.  Make your selections in the dialog box, click Fields to import, and then continue with Mapping information.

Note:  For troubleshooting help and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs), remember to visit www.familytreemaker.com/support.html — this is your best source for accurate assistance with Family Tree Maker.


Mapping information

If the two files contain different fields, you must use the Fields to Import dialog box to decide which fields in the destination file should be filled with which information from the source file.

1.	To map a field in your destination file to a field in your source file, click the field name in the Fields to Import list.

2.	Click Import field.

If there is more than one possible match for the source field, Family Tree Maker displays the Change Fields dialog box.  In this case, continue with step 3.  If there is only one possible match for that source field, Family Tree Maker automatically inserts the destination field name in the "Resulting Fields" list.  In this case, skip to step 5.

3.	In the Change Fields dialog box, click the name of the destination field that you want to fill with information from the source field you selected in step 1.

4.	Click OK to return to the Fields to Include dialog box.

If you wish to change the mapping of a destination field, click the field name in the Resulting Fields list and then click Change field.  If this button stays grayed out, the mapping for that field is preset and cannot be changed.

5.	Repeat steps 1 through 4 until all of the source fields that you wish to map have a destination field in the "Resulting Fields" list.

All fields in the "Fields to Import" list that do not have a field opposite them in the "Resulting Fields" list will not be brought into the destination file.

6.	If you want to remove a field from the "Resulting Fields" list, click the field name and then click Don't import.

7.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker displays the Individuals to Include dialog box.  Continue with Selecting individuals to include.


The Facts to Import dialog box

Fields to Import — This list contains the data fields in the source file—all of the dates, locations, facts, notes, etc.

Resulting Fields — This list contains the fields in the destination file that will be filled with information from the source file.

Import Fact — Click this button to import the currently selected data field into your Family File.

Change Fact — Click this button to select the name of the fact that best describes the information you selected to import.

Create a New Fact — Click this button to create a new fact field that corresponds to the imported data. If none of Family Tree Maker’s built-in fact fields correspond to the data you’re importing, this lets you create a custom fact that fits the description.

Don't Import — Click this button to remove the currently selected destination field from the "Resulting Fields" list.  If you do not import the fact, it will not appear in your new Family File..


The Change Fields dialog box

Select the name of the field that best describes the information you selected to import and then click OK.


Selecting individuals to include

To select individuals from the source file to merge into the destination file:

1.	Select a group of individuals to merge by adding them to or removing them from the list on the right.

For a description of the options in the Individuals to Include dialog box, click here.

2.	Click OK once you've created a group of individuals to merge.

Family Tree Maker displays the Append File dialog box.  Continue with Appending and merging information.


Appending and merging information

The Append File dialog box gives you information about both the source file and the destination file.  At this point, you have two choices.  You can merge the information in the two files together, carefully eliminating possible duplicate information with Family Tree Maker's help.  Alternatively, you can append all of the information from the source file to the destination file without checking for or eliminating any duplicates.  You can then later go through your file and eliminate duplicate information using the instructions in Merging duplicate individuals.  If you wish to completely quit this operation at this time, click Cancel.  Otherwise, continue reading below.

You can do three different things from the Append File dialog box:

 Display a list that tells you whether each of the individuals in the source file is an exact match, possible match, or not a match for someone in the destination file.  See Displaying a merge report.

 Begin merging information by viewing the exact matches and possible matches one at a time, deciding which information to keep and which information to discard.  See Merging matches with confirmation.

 Add all of the information in the source file to the destination file, without merging anyone.  See Appending all information.

Note:  For troubleshooting help and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs), remember to visit www.familytreemaker.com/support.html — this is your best source for accurate assistance with Family Tree Maker.


Displaying a merge report

To see a merge report:

1.	Click Display Merge Report.

2.	Carefully read the information in the report.

Family Tree Maker divides the individuals in your files into several groups:

 People in destination file, but not in source file (or vice versa) —  they will not be merged.

 People who match, will be merged automatically — they will be merged by Family Tree Maker.

 Not sure if same person: data differences or additional relationships — as you go through the merge, Family Tree Maker will give you the opportunity to merge these individuals and resolve the data differences.

 Unable to merge, not sure if same person —  these individuals seem similar to someone in the destination file.  However, they may have too many data differences, or there may be more than one person with whom they can be matched.  You will need to go through your file manually after the merge is complete and resolve this issue manually.

The Birth date column helps you identify each individual in the list.  The Comments column gives you more information about the status of the individual.  For example, "New individual" indicates a new individual and the words "No differences" indicate an exact match.  If someone is a possible match, this column lists which fields in the source and destination files contain differing information.

3.	To see how the information in a field differs, highlight the field name and look at the Individual #1 and Individual #2 fields at the bottom of the dialog box.

"Individual #1" comes from the individual being merged.  "Individual #2" comes from the existing individual.

4.	If you would like to print the report, turn on your printer and click Print.  When Family Tree Maker displays the Print dialog box, you can click OK to print or click Print Setup to choose the printer, paper orientation, and size.

5.	When you are finished reviewing the Merge Report, click Done.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Append File dialog box.


Problems when merging

Family Tree Maker is cautious when merging individuals, because only you know exactly who should be merged.  For Family Tree Maker to consider merging two individuals, their names must be identical, including the case.  In addition, some of the following must be the same:  birth dates, death dates, and relationships to spouses, parents, and children.

If you decide that some individuals were merged when they shouldn't have been, you can undo the merge by selecting Undo from the Edit menu.  However, this option is only available if you select Undo before making any other types of edits to your Family File.

If some individuals weren't merged when they should have been, then you need to spend time manually editing some of the information in your Family File.  Look at the names, birth dates, death dates, and relationships of the individuals that should have been merged, and change that information so that it matches exactly.  Then, from the People menu, select Merge Duplicate Individuals.  If enough of the information for these individuals matches, Family Tree Maker will merge the individuals.  This process will take some time and effort.  Please make a backup copy of your file before making changes (see Backing up Family Files), and then work very carefully.


The Merge Files Report

1.	Carefully read the information in the report.

Family Tree Maker divides the individuals in your files into several groups:

 People in destination file, but not in source file (or vice versa) —  they will not be merged.

 People who match, will be merged automatically — they will be merged by Family Tree Maker.

 Not sure if same person: data differences or additional relationships — as you go through the merge, Family Tree Maker will give you the opportunity to merge these individuals and resolve the data differences.

 Unable to merge, not sure if same person — these individuals seem similar to someone in the destination file.  However, they may have too many data differences, or there may be more than one person with whom they can be matched.  You will need to go through your file manually after the merge is complete and resolve this issue manually.

The Birth date column helps you identify each individual in the list.  The Comments column gives you more information about the status of the individual.  For example, "New individual" indicates a new individual and the words "No differences" indicate an exact match.  If someone is a possible match, this column lists which fields in the source and destination files contain differing information.

2.	To see how the information in a field differs, highlight the field name and look at the Individual #1 and Individual #2 fields at the bottom of the dialog box.

"Individual #1" comes from the individual being merged.  "Individual #2" comes from the existing individual.

3.	If you would like to print the report, turn on your printer and click Print.  When Family Tree Maker displays the Print dialog box, you can click OK to print or click Print Setup to choose the printer, paper orientation, and size.

4.	When you are finished reviewing the Merge Report, click Done.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Append File dialog box.


The Merge Files Report

1.	Carefully read the information in the report.

Family Tree Maker divides the individuals in your files into several groups:

 People in destination file, but not in source file (or vice versa) — they were merged.

 People automatically merged, FTW modified info — they were merged by Family Tree Maker, some slight changes may have been made to their data.

 People you merged — you merged these individuals, selecting which of their conflicting information to keep.

 Unable to merge, not sure if same person — these individuals seem similar to someone in the destination file.  However, they may have too many data differences, or there may be more than one person with whom they can be matched.  You will need to go through your file manually after the merge is complete and resolve this issue manually.

The Birth date column helps you identify each individual in the list.  The Comments column gives you more information about the status of the individual.  For example, "New individual" indicates a new individual and the words "No differences" indicate an exact match.  If someone was not an exact match, this column lists which fields in the source and destination files contained differing information.

2.	If you would like to print the report, turn on your printer and click Print.  When Family Tree Maker displays the Print dialog box, you can click OK to print or click Print Setup to choose the printer, paper orientation, and size.

3.	When you are finished reviewing the Merge Report, click Done.


Merging matches with confirmation

To merge matching individuals one by one:

1.	Click Merge matching individuals.

If you have not already looked at the Merge Report, Family Tree Maker will ask if you want to view it.  Click Yes to see it, click No to move on.

When you click "No," or if you have previously looked at the Merge Report, Family Tree Maker displays the Merge Individuals dialog box.  In this dialog box, you can compare the information associated with the "possible match" individuals.

2.	Look through the information in the second and third columns in the top half of the dialog box.  If you think that the information in these two columns belongs to the same individual, continue with step 3.  If you think that it belongs to two separate individuals, click Don't Merge.

When you click "Don't Merge," Family Tree Maker does not merge the two individuals.  Instead, both individuals will appear in your Family File.  Repeat step 2 with the next set of information.

3.	Carefully compare the information in the bottom half of the dialog box line-by-line.  On each line, select the option button next to the information that you want to keep.

If there is a scroll bar to the right of the option buttons, be sure to scroll down and make selections for all of the information.

4.	After selecting the information that you want to keep, click Merge.

If there are two sets of Notes or two Scrapbooks for that individual, Family Tree Maker joins them together.

If there are more individuals to compare, Family Tree Maker displays the next set of information.  In this case, return to step 2.  If there are no more individuals to compare, Family Tree Maker displays a Family Page.

5.	If at any time you wish to step merging information, click Cancel.  None of your merges will be saved and the two files will not be appended together.  Your file will be exactly as it was before you began merging.

6.	When you are finished merging, print some trees and reports before you quit Family Tree Maker.  Check over the documents to make sure that you didn't make any mistakes when merging the files.  If you did make mistakes, you can reverse the merge by going to the Edit menu and selecting Undo (ALT, E, U) before you quit Family Tree Maker.  You cannot reverse a merge after quitting and restarting Family Tree Maker.

You can also use the Find command to see the results of your merge.  From the Edit menu, select Find individuals (ALT, E, F) to display the Find Individuals dialog box.  Then, in the Find Individuals dialog box, select Merged or appended individuals in the Search field.

Note:  For troubleshooting help and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs), remember to visit www.familytreemaker.com/support.html — this is your best source for accurate assistance with Family Tree Maker.


The Merge Individuals dialog box

In the Merge Individuals dialog box, you can compare the information associated with the "possible match" individuals.

1.	Look through the information in the second and third columns in the top half of the dialog box.  If you think that the information in these two columns belongs to the same individual, continue with step 2.  If you think that it belongs to two separate individuals, click Don't Merge.

When you click "Don't Merge," Family Tree Maker does not merge the two individuals.  Instead, both individuals will appear in your Family File.  Repeat step 1 with the next set of information.

2.	Carefully compare the information in the bottom half of the dialog box line-by-line.  On each line, select the option button next to the information that you want to keep.

If there is a scroll bar to the right of the option buttons, be sure to scroll down and make selections for all of the information.

3.	After selecting the information that you want to keep, click Merge.

If there are two sets of Notes or two Scrapbooks for that individual, Family Tree Maker joins them together.

If there are more individuals to compare, Family Tree Maker displays the next set of information.  In this case, return to step 1.  If there are no more individuals to compare, Family Tree Maker displays a Family Page.

4.	If at any time you wish to step merging information, click Cancel.  None of your merges will be saved and the two files will not be appended together.  Your file will be exactly as it was before you began merging.


The Merge Fields dialog box

Keep #1 — Click this button to keep the Notes listed for Individual #1 and discard the notes for Individual #2.

Keep #2 — Click this button to keep the Notes listed for Individual #2 and discard the notes for Individual #1.

Cancel — Click this button to return to the Merge Individuals dialog box for these individuals without discarding either set of Notes.


Appending all information

To add all of the individuals from the source file to the destination file without merging any information:

1.	Click Append only (no merge).

Family Tree Maker adds all individuals, facts, Scrapbook items, etc. from the source file to the destination file.

2.	Unless all of the individuals from the source file can be considered new individuals, you will need to use the Merge Duplicate Individuals command later to remove the duplicate individuals from your Family File.  See Merging duplicate individuals for instructions.

Note:  For troubleshooting help and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs), remember to visit www.familytreemaker.com/support.html — this is your best source for accurate assistance with Family Tree Maker.


Merging duplicate individuals

On occasion, you may find duplicate individuals (or sources) in your Family File. Duplicates can result from combining files, from appending a World Family Tree pedigree to your Family File, or from accidentally entering the same person or source twice.  The Merge Duplicate Individuals command searches your Family File for duplicates and automatically merges exact matches.  You can also print a report of potential duplicates, review the data that's common between them, and choose which individuals to merge based on the available criteria.

To merge duplicate individuals:

1.	From the People menu, select Merge Duplicate Individuals.

Family Tree Maker displays a dialog box reminding you to back up your file as a safety measure before you continue.

2.	If you have done so, click OK and continue with the next step. If not, click Cancel, back up your file, then go back to step one.

Family Tree Maker displays the Merge Duplicate Individuals dialog box.

3.	Click Display Merge Report to display a list that tells you whether each of the potential duplicates is an exact match, possible match, or no match.  Duplicate sources will be listed at the top of the report, followed by the duplicate individuals.

4.	Click Done when you’re done viewing the report.  You can also print the report by clicking Print in the Merge Individuals Report dialog box.

5.	Click Merge matching individuals to automatically merge the duplicates in your Family File.

6.	If you have not yet viewed the merge report, you will be prompted to view it again.  Click No to proceed with the process.

Family Tree Maker starts merging.  If it finds exact matches, it will merge them without further prompting.  The program only merges individuals automatically if they have the same name and birth date.  If Family Tree Maker finds individuals that seem to match but some of the available information differs, it displays the Merge Individuals dialog box.

Family Tree Maker automatically merges all of the information associated with each duplicate.  If there is conflicting information, such as different birth dates for the same individual, Family Tree Maker will import both pieces of data as alternate facts.

Note:  Family Tree Maker allows you to record and display conflicting information until you can confirm which is correct by later research.  For example, suppose there are two possible birth dates for the same individual, and you won't know which one is correct until you verify the sources.  You can record both birth dates until you have time to do more research.

7.	There are a few facts which do not store alternates: Name, AKA, Medical Information, Sex, Cause of Death, Title, Address and Phone, and in some cases Marriage Beginning Status and Marriage Ending Status.  Carefully compare the information displayed for each data field, then click the option buttons next to the information that you want to keep.  The information that isn't chosen will be discarded.  If both individuals contain Notes, Family Tree Maker appends the Notes from the merged individual to the end of primary individual's Notes section.  You don't have to retype a word.

8.	Once you have made your selections, click Merge to merge the individuals.  If you decide that these two individuals are not duplicates or you do not want to merge them at this time, click Don't merge.

The program will prompt you to repeat steps 7 and 8 as often as necessary until all possible duplicates are merged.

9.	When you have merged the last individual, Family Tree Maker displays a dialog box informing you that the process is complete.  Click OK.

10.	Family Tree Maker displays the merge report.  Use the scroll bars to view the report or click Print to print a paper copy of it.  When you are done viewing the report, click Done.

This concludes the merge process.  Family Tree Maker displays a dialog box prompting you to examine your file closely to assure that you accomplished the desired results.  Click OK.

If some duplicates still remain, you may not have entered enough information about one of the individuals for Family Tree Maker to conclude that they're the same individual (maybe the names of potential duplicates are spelled differently, or the birth dates don't match).  To merge the remaining duplicates, refer to the instructions for manually merging the duplicates in your Family File.

Important:  After completing the merge process, you can always undo the entire process and restore your file to the way it was before you started merging as long as you have not exited the program yet.  Once you exit the program after merging, the changes become permanent and the only way to restore your file to its original state is to restore the backup file.  To undo the merge, from the Edit menu, select Undo Merge Individuals.

Note:  For troubleshooting help and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs), remember to visit www.familytreemaker.com/support.html — this is your best source for accurate assistance with Family Tree Maker.


The Merge Individuals Report

1.	Carefully read the information in the report.

Family Tree Maker divides the individuals in your file into three groups:

 People who match, will be merged automatically — they will be merged by Family Tree Maker.

 People who match with data differences or additional relationships — as you go through the merge, Family Tree Maker will give you the opportunity to merge these individuals and resolve the data differences.

 Unable to merge, not sure if same person — these individuals seem to have matches.  However, they may have too many data differences, or there may be more than one person with whom they can be matched.  You will need to go through your file manually after the merge is complete and resolve this issue manually.

The Birth date column helps you identify each individual in the list.  The Comments column gives you more information about the status of the individual.  For example, "No differences" indicates an exact match.  If someone is a possible match, this column lists which fields contain differing information.

2.	To see how the information in a field differs, highlight the field name and look at the Individual #1 and Individual #2 fields at the bottom of the dialog box.

"Individual #1" comes from the individual being merged.  "Individual #2" comes from the existing individual.

3.	If you would like to print the report, turn on your printer and click Print.  When Family Tree Maker displays the Print dialog box, you can click OK to print or click Print Setup to choose the printer, paper orientation, and size.

4.	When you are finished reviewing the Merge Report, click Done.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Append File dialog box.

Note:  For troubleshooting help and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs), remember to visit www.familytreemaker.com/support.html — this is your best source for accurate assistance with Family Tree Maker.


The Merge Individuals Report

1.	Carefully read the information in the report.

Family Tree Maker divides the individuals in your file into three groups:

 People automatically merged, FTW modified info — they were merged by Family Tree Maker, some slight changes may have been made to their data.

 People you merged — you merged these individuals, selecting which of their conflicting information to keep.

 Unable to merge, not sure if same person — these individuals seem similar to someone in the destination file.  However, they may have too many data differences, or there may be more than one person with whom they can be matched.  You will need to go through your file manually after the merge is complete and resolve this issue manually.

The Birth date column helps you identify each individual in the list.  The Comments column gives you more information about the status of the individual.  For example, "New individual" indicates a new individual and the words "No differences" indicate an exact match.  If someone was not an exact match, this column lists which fields in the source and destination files contained differing information.

2.	If you would like to print the report, turn on your printer and click Print.  When Family Tree Maker displays the Print dialog box, you can click OK to print or click Print Setup to choose the printer, paper orientation, and size.

3.	When you are finished reviewing the Merge Report, click Done.

Note:  For troubleshooting help and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs), remember to visit www.familytreemaker.com/support.html — this is your best source for accurate assistance with Family Tree Maker.


The Merge Duplicate Individuals dialog box

In this dialog box you can either:

 Display a list that tells you whether each of the individuals in the source file is an exact match, possible match, or not a match for someone in the destination file.  See Displaying a merge report.

 View the exact matches and possible matches one-by-one and decide which information to keep and which information to discard.  See Merging duplicates with confirmation.


Displaying a merge report

To see a merge report:

1.	Click Display Merge Report.

2.	Carefully read the information in the report.

Family Tree Maker divides the individuals in your file into three groups:

 People who match, will be merged automatically — they will be merged by Family Tree Maker.

 People who match with data differences or additional relationships — as you go through the merge, Family Tree Maker will give you the opportunity to merge these individuals and resolve the data differences.

 Unable to merge, not sure if same person — these individuals seem to have matches.  However, they may have too many data differences, or there may be more than one person with whom they can be matched.  You will need to go through your file manually after the merge is complete and resolve this issue manually.

The Birth date column helps you identify each individual in the list.  The Comments column gives you more information about the status of the individual.  For example, "No differences" indicates an exact match.  If someone is a possible match, this column lists which fields contain differing information.

3.	To see how the information in a field differs, highlight the field name and look at the Individual #1 and Individual #2 fields at the bottom of the dialog box.

"Individual #1" comes from the individual being merged.  "Individual #2" comes from the existing individual.

4.	If you would like to print the report, turn on your printer and click Print.  When Family Tree Maker displays the Print dialog box, you can click OK to print or click Print Setup to choose the printer, paper orientation, and size.

5.	When you are finished reviewing the Merge Report, click Done.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Append File dialog box.


Merging duplicates with confirmation

To merge matching individuals one by one:

1.	Click Merge matching individuals.

If you have not already looked at the Merge Report, Family Tree Maker will ask if you want to view it.  Click Yes to see it, click No to move on.

When you click "No," or if you have previously looked at the Merge Report, Family Tree Maker displays the Merge Individuals dialog box.  In this dialog box, Family Tree Maker lets you compare the information associated with the "possible match" individuals.

2.	Look through the information in the second and third columns in the top half of the dialog box.  If you think that the information in these two columns belongs to the same individual, continue with step 3.  If you think that it belongs to two separate individuals, click Don't Merge.

When you click "Don't Merge," Family Tree Maker does not merge the two individuals.  Instead, both individuals will appear in your Family File.  Repeat step 2 with the next set of information.

3.	Carefully compare the information in the bottom half of the dialog box line-by-line.  On each line, select the option button next to the information that you want to keep.

If there is a scroll bar to the right of the option buttons, be sure to scroll down and make selections for all of the information.

4.	After selecting the information that you want to keep, click Merge.

If there are two sets of Notes or two Scrapbooks for that individual, Family Tree Maker joins them together.  In addition, if two mothers or two fathers have a "Natural" relationship with the individual, one of the relationships is changed to "Unknown."

If there are more individuals to compare, Family Tree Maker displays the next set.  In this case, return to step 2.  If there is no more information to compare, Family Tree Maker displays a Family Page.

5.	If at any time you wish to discontinue merging information and save the merges that you have already completed, click Stop Merging.  If you do not wish to save any of your merges, click Cancel instead.

6.	When you are finished merging, print some trees and reports before you quit Family Tree Maker.  Check over the documents to make sure that you didn't make any mistakes when merging the individuals.  If you did make mistakes, you can reverse the merge by going to the Edit menu and selecting Undo (ALT, E, U) before you quit Family Tree Maker.  You cannot reverse a merge after quitting and restarting Family Tree Maker.

Note:  For troubleshooting help and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs), remember to visit www.familytreemaker.com/support.html — this is your best source for accurate assistance with Family Tree Maker.


The Merge Individuals dialog box

In the Merge Individuals dialog box, you can compare the information associated with the "possible match" individuals.

1.	Look through the information in the second and third columns in the top half of the dialog box.  If you think that the information in these two columns belongs to the same individual, continue with step 2.  If you think that it belongs to two separate individuals, click Don't Merge.

When you click "Don't Merge," Family Tree Maker does not merge the two individuals.  Instead, both individuals will appear in your Family File.  Repeat step 1 with the next set of information.

2.	Carefully compare the information in the bottom half of the dialog box line-by-line.  On each line, select the option button next to the information that you want to keep.

If there is a scroll bar to the right of the option buttons, be sure to scroll down and make selections for all of the information.

3.	After selecting the information that you want to keep, click Merge.

If there are two sets of Notes or two Scrapbooks for that individual, Family Tree Maker joins them together.

If there are more individuals to compare, Family Tree Maker displays the next set of information.  In this case, return to step 1.  If there are no more individuals to compare, Family Tree Maker displays a Family Page.

4.	If at any time you wish to discontinue merging information and save the merges that you have already completed, click Stop Merging.  If you do not wish to save any of your merges, click Cancel instead.


The Set Relationship with Parents dialog box

Click each of the drop-down lists and select the relationship that each parent has with the child.


Merging specific individuals

The Merge Specific Individuals command enables you to select two individuals in your Family File and to merge them.  Use this command to merge two individuals that Family Tree Maker doesn't recognize as duplicates with the Merge Duplicate Individuals command.  For example, you may not have entered enough information about one of the individuals for Family Tree Maker to conclude that they're the same individual.  Use this command only when you are certain that the two individuals are really the same.

To merge specific individuals:

1.	Go to the Family Page of one of the individuals you want to merge.

2.	From the People menu, select Merge Specific Individuals.

3.	Click the name of the individual you want to merge with the individual you chose in step 1.

4.	Click OK to continue.

Family Tree Maker displays a message asking if you really want to merge these two individuals.

5.	Click Yes to continue, or No to cancel the merge.

6.	If Family Tree Maker displays additional questions about these two individuals, click Yes or No as appropriate.

If Family Tree Maker can complete the merge, it displays the Merge Individuals dialog box.

If you click the name of an "illegal" individual, Family Tree Maker displays an error message and asks you to select another individual.  An "illegal" individual is someone that, for logical reasons, could not possibly be the same individual.  For example, you can't attach someone as a spouse if doing so would make them their own parent.

Note:  The "Don't Merge" and "Stop Merging" buttons are not available with the Merge Specific Individuals command.

7.	Carefully compare the information in the 2nd and 3rd columns and select the option buttons next to the information that you want to keep.

8.	Click Merge to merge the individuals, or if you do not want to merge these individuals, click Cancel instead.

Note:  If there are two sets of Notes or two Scrapbooks for that individual, Family Tree Maker joins them together.  If there isn't enough room for both sets of Notes or Scrapbook pages, Family Tree Maker includes all of the first individual's information and as much of the second individual's as it can fit.  In addition, if two mothers or two fathers have a "Natural" relationship with the individual, one of the relationships is changed to "Unknown."

9.	If you make a mistake, you can reverse the merge by going to the Edit menu and selecting Undo.  However, you must do this immediately after completing the merge.  If you switch to another view or make changes to your Family File after the merge is complete, you will no longer be able to undo the merge and revert to the file’s original state.

Note:  For troubleshooting help and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs), remember to visit www.familytreemaker.com/support.html — this is your best source for accurate assistance with Family Tree Maker.


All about Genealogy reports

A Genealogy report is a detailed listing of family information presented in a narrative format, just like a book.  Included are the basic facts about each family member as well as the biographical information you've entered in your Family File.

Family Tree Maker creates three different types of Genealogy reports:  Register, NGS Quarterly, and Ahnentafel.  As with family trees, you choose the primary individual, the number of generations to include, and many of the formatting options for each of these report types.

To display a Genealogy report, from the View menu, select Genealogy Report (ALT, V, E).  Family Tree Maker displays the last Genealogy report you created.  To choose the Genealogy report format, from the Format menu, select Genealogy Report Format (ALT, T, F) and choose the type of report that you prefer.


Selecting a Genealogy report type

To choose a Genealogy report type:

1.	In any view, highlight the name of the individual whom you want to be the primary individual.  For example, you could highlight the individual's name on a Family Page or in the Index of Individuals.

2.	From the View menu, select Genealogy Report (ALT, V, E).

3.	From the Format menu, select Genealogy Report Format (ALT, T, F).

Family Tree Maker displays the Genealogy Report Format dialog box.

4.	Select either Register (Descendant Ordered), NGS Quarterly (Descendant Ordered), or Ahnentafel (Ancestor Ordered).  For a description of each report type, click here.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Genealogy report view.


The Genealogy Report Format dialog box

Register (Descendant Ordered) — The Register format is a descendant-ordered format; it presents information about your family starting with an ancestor and moving forward in time to that individual's descendants.  The Register format is the format which is accepted by the New England Historic Genealogical Society, one of the oldest genealogical societies in the country.  The Register format dates back to 1870 and is used to establish "pedigree."

NGS Quarterly (Descendant Ordered) — The NGS Quarterly format is also a descendant-ordered format; it presents information about your family starting with an ancestor and moving forward in time to that individual's descendants. The NGS Quarterly format is the preferred genealogical report of the National Genealogical Society.  The format dates back to 1912.

Ahnentafel (Ancestor Ordered) — The Ahnentafel format is ancestor-ordered; it starts with one individual and moves backward in time to that individual's ancestors.  It's not used as frequently as the other two formats for formal presentations of pedigree because it records two family lines in the same report.


Genealogy Report types

Register (Descendant Ordered) — The Register format is a descendant-ordered format; it presents information about your family starting with an ancestor and moving forward in time to that individual's descendants.  The Register format is the format which is accepted by the New England Historic Genealogical Society, one of the oldest genealogical societies in the country.  The Register format dates back to 1870 and is used to establish "pedigree."

NGS Quarterly (Descendant Ordered) — The NGS Quarterly format is also a descendant-ordered format; it presents information about your family starting with an ancestor and moving forward in time to that individual's descendants. The NGS Quarterly format is the preferred genealogical report of the National Genealogical Society.  The format dates back to 1912.

Ahnentafel (Ancestor Ordered) — The Ahnentafel format is ancestor-ordered; it starts with one individual and moves backward in time to that individual's ancestors.  It's not used as frequently as the other two formats for formal presentations of pedigree because it records two family lines in the same report.


Selecting the number of generations in Genealogy reports

To choose the number of generations to include in your Genealogy report:

1.	From the Contents menu, select # of Generations to Show (ALT, C, G).

Family Tree Maker displays the # of Generations to Show dialog box.

2.	Select the number of generations that you want to include in your report.

3.	Click OK when you've made your selection.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Genealogy report view.


The # of Generations to Show dialog box

Click the up or down arrows to choose how many generations of the primary individual's ancestors (for the Ahnentafel format) or descendants (for Register or NGS Quarterly formats) to include.  You can choose any number from 1 to 99.  For more information on the different Genealogy report formats, click here.


Selecting styles for text

To format the text items in a Genealogy report:

1.	From the Format menu, select Text Font, Style, & Size (ALT, T, T).

2.	In the Items to format list, click an item that you want to format, such as Title.

3.	Choose formatting options for the selected item.

For a description of the options in the Text Font, Style, & Size dialog box, click here.

4.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Genealogy report view.


Adding a title to a Genealogy report

To add a title to your Genealogy report:

1.	From the Contents menu, select Title & Footnote (ALT, C, T).

2.	Create your title and select page numbering options.

For a description of the options in the Title & Footnote dialog box, click here.

3.	Click OK when you're done creating your title.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Genealogy report view.


The Title & Footnote dialog box

Automatic title — Select this option if you want Family Tree Maker to create a title for you.

Custom title — Select this option if you want to create your own title. Simply type your title in the field provided.

Include page number — Select this check box if you want to include page numbers at the bottom of each page of your report.

Starting number — Use the up/down arrows to select the beginning page number.

Include date of printing — Select this check box if you want to include the current date at the bottom of the first page.

Include time of printing — Select this check box if you want to include the current time at the bottom of the first page.


Selecting other printing options

To display the special printing options for Genealogy report:

1.	From the Contents menu, select Options (ALT, C, O).

Family Tree Maker displays the Options for Genealogy Report dialog box.

2.	Select the special printing options you would like on your Genealogy report.

For a description of each of the options, click here.

3.	Click OK when you're done.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Genealogy report view.


The Options for Genealogy Report dialog box

Notes —  If you've entered notes for individuals or marriages in the Notes dialog boxes, you can choose to include them in your Genealogy report.  Select the Include individual notes check box to include the notes for individuals.  Select the Include marriage notes check box to include the notes for marriages.  If you've entered facts about individuals in the Facts dialog boxes and you want to include them in your report, select the Include More About facts check box.

Source Information — You can choose to include source information for the facts contained in your Genealogy report.  If you prefer to have the source information appear at the end of the report for all of the items in the report, select the Include source information as endnotes option button.  If you wish to include source information within the body of the text, directly after the piece of information to which it refers, select the Include source information as inline notes option button.  If you prefer to leave the source information out of your Genealogy report, select the Do not include source information option button.

Generation Numbering — You can choose one of two different methods for numbering the generations in your Genealogy report.  Select Automatically find the oldest ancestor if you want Family Tree Maker to begin the generation numbering from the oldest male ancestor in the same blood line as the primary individual you have chosen for your report.  For example, if you select yourself as the primary individual for the report, and your Family File contains information going back to your father, but no further, then your father would be assigned generation number 1 and you would be assigned number 2.  Since you're the primary individual, your Genealogy report would begin the generation numbering with the number 2, next to your name.  Select Assume the primary individual is the immigrant ancestor if you would like the numbering on your report to start with "1" regardless of how many generations precede the primary individual.  The previous generations (older than the primary individual) will be "numbered" A, B, C, D, etc.  This is the style of numbering traditionally used for ancestors who did not immigrate to the United States.


Printing a Genealogy report

Printing a Genealogy report

Changing margins, printers, and page orientation


Printing a Genealogy report

To print your Genealogy report:

1.	Make sure you're in the Genealogy Report view.

2.	Turn on your printer.

3.	From the File menu, select Print (ALT, F, P).

4.	Select the printing options that you want.

For a description of the options in the Print dialog box, click here.

5.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker prints your Genealogy report.


Exporting a Genealogy report

To export a Genealogy report for use in another software program:

1.	From the View menu, select Genealogy Report (ALT, V, E).

2. From the File menu, select Export Genealogy Report (ALT, F, E).

Family Tree Maker displays the Export Genealogy Report dialog box.

3.	In the Save as type list, select Formatted Text (RTF) or ASCII as the export file format.

If your the program your other program supports RTF format files, select this format to maintain most of the report formatting.

4.	In the Save in lists, select the folder where you want to store the file you export.

5.	In the File name field, type a name for the file.

If you are exporting the file for use with a non-Windows 95 program, the file name must be eight letters or less plus a three letter extension.  For example, you could type myreport.txt.  Otherwise, the file name can be up to 255 characters.

6.	Click Save when you're done.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Genealogy report view.


Displaying the FamilyFinder Report

Overview

About the FamilyFinder Report

Things to keep in mind when using the FamilyFinder Report

How to...

Create a CD-based FamilyFinder Report

Create an online FamilyFinder Report

Select a group of individuals to include

Select which results to show

Use a mouse with FamilyFinder Report

Zoom in and out

See reports and trees

What is this?

The toolbar


About the FamilyFinder Report

The Family Finder Report is only one of the convenient tools available from the FamilyFinder Center.  The FamilyFinder Report is a conveniently organized report that is the result of a FamilyFinder Search.  The FamilyFinder Report can be either Internet-, or CD-based.  The Internet-based search is the most comprehensive because it can take advantage of the very latest precision matching technology while it searches genealogy Web sites around the world, and the very latest Family Archive CDs from Family Tree Maker.  The CD-based search can be performed, starting with the FamilyFinder Index that is included on your installation CD, and which searches through the FamilyFinder Index for several, or all, of your relatives at once.

Note — When you run an online version of the FamilyFinder Report, Family Tree Maker Online copies the names and dates in your Family File to our Web server.  Then our special search engines use the names and dates to locate information about your family.  Don't worry, this information is not contributed to the World Family Tree Project or available to other people on the Internet.

When the Family Search is completed, your FamilyFinder Report places only the highest-probability names into their own 5-Star Matches section.  There are additional sections for World Family Tree, Internet, and Family Archive CD matches.

Special Note for Expanded Explanations

For 5-Star Matches only, the FamilyFinder Report will display additional text — an expanded explanation — calling out the oldest individual appearing in both your family file and the source named.  This text will also note how many generations are represented.  Five-Star matches for marriage CDs will not display expanded explanations.

Your FamilyFinder Report results will be even more personalized if you make sure to enter a name in User Information.  From the Help menu, select User Information.

How does the FamilyFinder Report know which matches are mostly likely part of your family tree?  The FamilyFinder Report rates the matches based on many factors such as whether it finds matches for spouses and other family members, dates, locations, and whether the name is very common.  Then it uses a five star system to rate the quality of the matches and places the best matches at the top of the list.


About the FamilyFinder Report Agent

The first time you run an online version of FamilyFinder Report, Family Tree Maker automatically creates an "agent" that continues to search for information about your family even after you end your online session. When the agent finds new information, it sends you an email message instructing you to run an online FamilyFinder Report to view the new information.  The agent sends the messages to the email address you supplied when you registered with the Family Tree Maker Online Web site.

If necessary, you can change the email address where you receive notices from the agent, and if you don't want to use an agent at all, you can disable it.

To change agent options:

From the Internet menu, select FamilyFinder Agents.

Family Tree Maker opens your browser and connects you to Family Tree Maker Online.

Follow the instructions provided online to change the agent options.


The FamilyFinder Report

The FamilyFinder Report is organized into the following four sections:

5-Star Matches — If you select an Online search for your first FamilyFinder Report, or if you update an existing report online, only the best matches (over 95% probability) appear in this section.  (Please note: If there are no 5-star matches, or if they have been checked off (Done), this section will not appear.)

Special Note:  Expanded Explanations

For 5-Star Matches only, the FamilyFinder Report will display additional text — an expanded explanation — calling out the oldest individual appearing in both your family file and the source named.  This text will also note how many generations are represented.  Five-Star matches for marriage CDs will not display expanded explanations.

Your FamilyFinder Report results will be even more personalized if you make sure to enter a name in User Information.  From the Help menu, select User Information.

World Family Tree Matches — This section displays possible matches found on the World Family Tree CDs that rated 4-stars or less.

Other Family Archive CDs — This section displays potential matches found on CDs other than the World Family Tree.

Internet Matches — This section displays clickable links to individual genealogy-related Web sites.

Note — If a category contains more than 10 matches, only the top 10 will be shown.  The rest will be placed in a separate folder called Other Matches.

When opening a FamilyFinder Report created in a previous version of Family Tree Maker, you will be reminded to update it.  Matches in the updated FamilyFinder Report may show some changes in ranking due to improved matching technology.

To create a FamilyFinder Report:

From the View menu, select FamilyFinder.  Then, from the submenu, select FamilyFinder Search/Report.

If you have created a FamilyFinder Report in a previous version of Family Tree Maker, it will be shown here.

Note — If you’ve added or removed individuals, dates, or locations since your last FamilyFinder Report, you may want to update your FamilyFinder Report to include those changes.

From the Edit menu, select Create New FamilyFinder Report.  If you have already created a FamilyFinder Report, the menu will display Update FamilyFinder Report.

Family Tree Maker displays the FamilyFinder Search dialog box.

Select one of the following Search options.

Online — The online searches are faster, more comprehensive, and more up-to-date than the CD searches.

CD — These CDs come with your Family Tree Maker program and provide an index to all of the Family Archives available at the time of production.

Note — If the current Family File contains no FamilyFinder Report or only one created prior to this version of Family Tree Maker, the options in the following step will not appear in the dialog box.

Select one of the following Include options:

All individuals — This option looks for information on all individuals in your Family File.  Please note that large searches may cause Family Tree Maker to display a caution dialog box.

Selected individuals — This option looks for information about specific individuals.  For example, you could limit your search to only your maternal ancestors.

If you select Selected individuals, click Individuals to Include Click here for more detailed information.

After you make your selections, click OK.  Family Tree Maker creates and displays your FamilyFinder Report.

Special Note About Deleting a FamilyFinder Report

The special key combination, Control + Alt + Shift + Down Arrow can be used to delete a FamilyFinder Report if you find that it is too large or difficult to use.  However, be aware that you cannot be in the FamilyFinder Report itself when using the quick-key combination.

Note — If you use this delete option and then create another FamilyFinder Report, any matches that you had previously marked “Done” will appear as new, unmarked matches.

Do any of the following to view additional information:

 Click the folder(s) next to a match to display additional information.

 Click the underlined information in the Possible Matches column to jump to that site on the Internet or to display information about the CD containing the match.

See also

Creating an Online FamilyFinder Report

Things to keep in mind when using the FamilyFinder Report

Selecting which results to show


Things to keep in mind when using FamilyFinder Report

 Though the 5-star rating virtually assures a match, all matches are potential matches.  Use the Family Archives or other resources to verify that the matching name is actually part of your family tree.

 If there are errors in your Family File, (such as titles in the name field), these reports may not be able to find your relatives.  So, we recommend that you check your Family File for errors before you use the FamilyFinder Report.  See Checking Your Files for Errors for instructions.

 The number of individuals you include in your search may affect the number of stars Family Tree Maker assigns to a potential match.  For example, if you search on a husband and a wife, and both are found on a marriage CD, they may score more stars than if you searched on just one of the spouses.

 The FamilyFinder Report does not include matches based on first name initials.  For example, FamilyFinder Report will not consider M. Johnson a match for Mary Johnson, but Search Expert will. See the topic How to: search for names.

 Family Tree Maker stores the information it finds in the FamilyFinder Report to your Family File.  The more names you include in your search, the larger your Family File will become.  If your Family File becomes very large, Family Tree Maker may not respond as quickly as it does now.

The special key combination Control + Alt + Shift + Down Arrow can be used  to delete a FamilyFinder Report if you find that it has become too large or difficult to use.  However, be aware that you cannot be in the FamilyFinder Report itself when using this quick-key combination.

Note:  If you use this delete option and then create another FamilyFinder Report, any matches that you had previously marked “Done” will appear as new, unmarked matches in the new report.


Selecting which results to show
Selecting which matches to show

To select which matches to show:

1.	From the Contents menu, select Items to Display.

Family Tree Maker displays the Items to Display dialog box.

2.	Select the items you want to display in the FamilyFinder Report.

3.	After you make your selections, click OK.


# of Matches to Show dialog box

Show 4 and 5 star matches — Select this option button to display only the best potential matches.

Show all matches — Select this option to show all the potential matches in the current FamilyFinder Report.


Using a mouse with FamilyFinder Report

You can show or hide additional information about a particular entry by clicking the folder icon.  Family Tree Maker expands or collapses the details for the selected line.


Displaying the Research Journal

Overview

All about the Research Journal

How to...

Access your Research Journal

Include a FamilyFinder Report

Add a To Do Item

Edit a To Do Item

Delete a To Do Item

Add a title and footnote

Show page lines

Select colors and styles

Print the Research Journal

What is this?

The toolbar


About the Research Journal

After you have performed a FamilyFinder Search and created a FamilyFinder Report (see Displaying FamilyFinder Report), you need a way to track your research progress.

With its built-in "To Do" list, the Research Journal is the ideal tool to help you stay focused and organized as you continue investigating your family history.  Use it to track research leads generated by the FamilyFinder Report, create, categorize, and sort your own To Do items, and then watch your progress as you mark those To Do items "Done!"


Accessing your Research Journal

To view your Research Journal, from the View menu, select FamilyFinder.  Then, from the submenu, select Research Journal.

Family Tree Maker displays the Research Journal.

The following sections describe the Research Journal features.

Instructions — Offers a reminder that you can press the quick-key combination of Ctrl + T from any Family Tree Maker screen to add a new “To Do” item to the Research Journal.

Click Here to create a new To Do item — This line is always at the top of the Research Journal.  Click the underlined Click Here command to display the Create a New To Do item dialog box.

The Done check box — Click these check boxes to mark items as done, or completed, allowing you to generate lists that show only those items that still need action.

Priority — The Research Journal uses exclamation points (with 5 being the highest) to rate the priority of an item.  You can set your own priority rating for the To Do items you create.

To Do — This is where you log your list of action items and ideas for future research to keep you focused, motivated, and on track.

Category — This column displays the categories you have assigned (if any) to your custom To Do items.

Date — Any dates you may have entered for To Do items will be displayed in this column.  These may be deadlines, dates of entry, or dates of completion.


Adding a New To Do Item

To add a new To Do Item to the Research Journal:

To Do — Enter your To Do item information.  You can enter up to 250 characters.

Priority — Choose a Priority setting by using the up/down arrows to display a number between 1- and 5-stars.

Category (optional) — You may find it helpful to type a Category of your own creation to help organize your future research.  Try a category name based on a specific event, like a special family trip or upcoming reunion, a specific surname, or a meaningful geographical location.  Once you’ve typed it and clicked OK, Family Tree Maker adds it to the drop-down list.

Date (optional) — Use this field to track To Do items by your choice of entry, deadline, or completion dates.

OK — Click to save your To Do item and close the dialog box.

Cancel — Click to close the dialog box without saving a To Do item.


The Add New Item dialog box
The New To Do Item dialog box

To Do — Enter text describing the task to be done.

Priority — Assign a priority to this task  (5 stars is the highest priority)

Category (Optional) — Each To Do Item can be assigned to a group to keep them organized

Date (Optional) — Date of when this task is to be completed


Editing a To Do Item

To edit a To Do Item in your Research Journal:

1.	Double-click the item text you'd like to edit.

Family Tree Maker displays the Edit To Do Item dialog box.

2.	Make your changes and click OK.

The Edit To Do dialog box closes and you are returned to the Research Journal view.

3.	If you remove all of the information in the text field, the To Do item will be deleted.


The Edit Item dialog box
The Edit To Do Item dialog box

By double clicking or otherwise selecting a To Do item that you entered you are able to edit it.  Family Tree Maker will display the information about the current task organized in the following fields.

To Do — Text describing the currently selected item.

Priority — Current priority of the task

Category (Optional) — The group name if any was entered originally

Date (Optional) — Date when this task was to be completed if entered originally.

Simply edit the information you want to change and click OK.  If you remove all of the information in the text field, the To Do Item will be deleted.


Deleting a To Do Item

To delete a To Do Item from your Research Journal:

1.	Select (highlight) the text you want to remove.

2.	Press the Delete key on your keyboard.

The Edit To Do Item dialog box is closed and you are returned to the Research Journal view.


The Matches to Include dialog box
The # of Matches to Include dialog box

Show 4 and 5 star matches — Select this option button to display only the best potential matches.

Show all matches — Select this option to show all the potential matches in the current FamilyFinder Report.


The Categories to Include dialog box

Select the categories of To Do items that you want displayed in your Research Journal.

To select a category to include — highlight a category name in the list on the left, then use the right arrow (add) button to move it to the list on the right.

To remove a category — use the left arrow (remove) button to move an item back to the left-hand list.

To add/remove all items — click a double-arrow key to move all items either left (to include) or right (to remove).


Items to Display in Research Journal dialog box
The Items to Display in Research Journal dialog box

Show items marked — Select either Done, Not Done, or Both Done and Not done. Use this option to select which check boxed items you want to display: complete, incomplete, or both.

Show your To Do items for — Select either All categories, or Selected categories.

Note:  If you select Selected categories, see Categories to Include dialog box


The Sort Research Journal dialog box

Sort your To Do items by — Simply make your selection from the drop-down list to sort your Research Journal’s To Do items by Category, Date or Priority.

Then by — There is no second level sort for To Do items.


Name errors

"Possible misplaced dash in the name"

Available with all three types of error checking.

Family Tree Maker has found a name with either two dashes in a row or a dash at the beginning or end of the name.  Verify the spelling of the name and then delete any extra dashes.

"There may be a title in the name field"

Available with all three types of error checking.

You may have typed an individual's title, such as "Dr." or "Reverend" in the name field on the Family Page instead of in the "Title" field in the Lineage dialog box (see Entering nicknames, titles, and parental relationship information).  Verify the spelling of the name, remove any titles, and type the titles in the "Title" field in the Lineage dialog box.

"The name may contain an illegal character"

Available with all three types of error checking.

Family Tree Maker has found a name containing one or more of the following characters:  ~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * _ + = | : ; " < / ( ) [ ] { }1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0.  Verify the spelling of the name and then delete any extra or special characters.

"Possibly used married instead of maiden name"

Available with all three types of error checking.

Family Tree Maker has found a Family Page where the surname for both the husband and the wife is the same.  Even though women usually assume their husbands' last names, most genealogists record women with their maiden (or family) surname instead of their married surname.  Using this standard is helpful for tracking maternal lineage and for distinguishing between a man's sisters and spouses.  Replace the married name with the maiden name.

"The name may have too many or too few capital letters"

Available with all three types of error checking.

Family Tree Maker has found a word containing more than one uppercase letter.  (Family Tree Maker understands surnames such as "Mac Donnell," "De Long," and "Von Trapp."  Verify the spelling of the name and then switch any extra uppercase letters to lowercase letters.

"The name may contain a nickname"

Available with all three types of error checking.

You may have typed an individual's nickname in the name field on the Family Page instead of in the "aka" field in the Lineage dialog box (see Entering nicknames, titles, and parental relationship information).  Verify the spelling of the name, remove any nicknames, and type the nicknames in the "aka" field.


The FamilyFinder Search Intro dialog box

This is your introduction to the FamilyFinder Search.  Choose from the following:

Online (recommended — Internet access required) — Select this check box if you want to search the Internet for matches to the names you have entered so far in this Family File (Startup Wizard).  The Internet is the most thorough and up-to-date search available.

CD-based search — Select this check box if you want to search the CDs that came with your program.  Family Tree Maker uses the FamilyFinder Index to look for matches to the names you have entered in this Family File (Startup Wizard).

Click here if you don’t want to search — You may also select not to run a search at this time by selecting this check box.


The toolbar and menu commands

Toolbar

Side toolbar

File menu

Preferences sub-menu

Edit menu

Picture/Object sub-menu

View menu

More About sub-menu

Ancestor Tree sub-menu

Descendant Tree sub_menu

Hourglass Tree sub-menu

Books menu

People menu

Fix Relationship Mistakes sub-menu

Picture/Object menu

Contents menu

Format menu

Internet menu

Help menu


File menu

Note:	Some of the commands on this menu may not be available, depending on the currently selected view.

New Family File — Allows you to create and name a new Family File (ALT, F, N).

Open Family File — Opens an existing Family File, Family Tree Maker for DOS file, or Backup file.  You can also use this dialog box to append files (ALT, F, O).

Import Text File — Allows you to import a text file from another program into the Notes dialog box.  This command is only available while you are in Notes (ALT, F, I).

Append/Merge Family File — Allows you to merge or append an existing Family File with another file.  It will have the same name as the original file (ALT, F, A).

Backup Family File — Makes a backup copy of an existing Family File.  It will have the same name as the original file, with the extension .FBC (ALT, F, B).

Export Notes — Allows you to export your Notes from the Notes dialog box into a program that reads ASCII files.  This command is only available while you are in Notes  (ALT, F, E).

Export Report — Allows you to export your Bibliography or Documented Events Report in either ASCII or .RTF format so you can import them into a word processor.  This command is only available in these views  (ALT, F, E).

Export Genealogy Report — Allows you to export your Genealogy Report in either ASCII or .RTF format so you can import it into a word processor.  This command is only available while you are in the Genealogy Report view  (ALT, F, E).

Copy/Export Family File — Lets you make a copy of an existing Family File.  You can copy it to any drive or folder and give it a new name (ALT, F, C).

Restore From Backup — Opens an existing Backup file (ALT, F, S).

Contribute to World Family Tree — Lets you contribute your Family File to the World Family Tree project.  You can contribute online if you have a modem and access to the Internet or by mail (ALT, F, W).

Copy/Export Individuals — Lets you make a copy of a group of individuals and place them in a new Family File (ALT, F, E).

Save View — Opens the Saved View dialog box, or if you are already in a Saved View, lets you save the view without bringing up the dialog box.

Save View as — Lets you copy a Saved View by saving it with a slightly different name.

Open Saved View — Displays the Open Saved View dialog box, which shows a list of all Saved Views.  You may select the view you wish to open.

Print Preview — Changes from the Scrapbook view to Scrapbook Print Preview.  You must be in Scrapbook Print Preview to make formatting changes to Scrapbook pages that you want to print.  This command is only available while you are in the Scrapbook view (ALT, F, V).

Print — Prints the current document (ALT, F, P).

Batch Print — Allows you to print Family Group Sheets, Scrapbooks, and Notes dialog boxes for multiple people all at once (ALT, F, A).

Print Setup — Allows you to change the paper orientation, margins, etc. for your printed documents (ALT, F, R).

Preferences — Opens the Preferences sub-menu where you can access dialog boxes to change a variety of settings (ALT, F, F).

Exit — Closes the program and ends your Family Tree Maker session (ALT, F, X).

Note:	Family Tree Maker does not have a Save command.  For more information, please see the topic Saving Family Files.


Edit menu

Note:	Some of the commands on this menu may not be available, depending on the currently selected view.

Undo — Reverses the last editing command.  Words are added to "Undo"  to describe what will be undone.  For example, "Undo Cut" tells you that the item you cut will be replaced (ALT, E, U).  If you want to restore the editing command that you've just reversed, select Redo immediately.

Cut — Deletes the highlighted item and places it on the Clipboard (ALT, E, T).

Copy — Makes a copy of the highlighted item and places it on the Clipboard (ALT, E, C).

Paste — Takes whatever is on the Clipboard and places a copy of it where the cursor is located (ALT, E, P).

Paste Special — Takes the OLE object on the Clipboard and places a copy of it in the Scrapbook that is currently open (ALT, E, S).

Delete — Allows you to delete selected (highlighted) moveable pictures in a tree, or editable text which is highlighted in either the Family Page, or the More About Facts, Address, Medical, Lineage, or Notes pages.

Create New To Do Item — Lets you create a new To Do Item for your Research Journal (ALT, E, N).

Find Individual — Displays a dialog box where you can type information.  Family Tree Maker will locate the individual(s) that the information is associated with (ALT, E, F).

Find Picture/Object — Allows you to search through the current scrapbook for pictures and objects.  This is only available in the Scrapbook view (ALT, E, F).

Find Error — Allows you to search through your Family File for errors such as conflicting dates and misspelled names (ALT, E, E).

Edit Master Sources — Enables you to change information for sources you already created (ALT, E, D).

Spell Check All — Enables you to search your Family File for spelling errors (ALT, E, K).

Find and Replace — Allows you to search for a specific name or word and replace it with one of your choice, either one at a time, or for all instances found (Global Find and Replace).

Location check — In a Map view, Family Tree Maker checks the locations entered in your Family File against its list of know locations.  Status of the check will be displayed.

Select Entry/Image — Selects the highlighted image or name in FamilyFinder for printing (ALT, E, L).

Deselect Entry/Image — Removes the highlighted image or name from the group that is selected for printing (ALT, E, L).

Select Matching Entries/Images — Selects all images or names in FamilyFinder that meet your search criteria (ALT, E, M).

Deselect Matching Entries/Images — Removes all images or names in FamilyFinder that meet your search criteria from the group that is selected for printing (ALT, E, M).

Deselect All — Deselects all images or names in FamilyFinder that are currently selected (ALT, E, A).

Go To — Displays the Go To dialog box, in which you can select a page in a Family Archive to go to (ALT, E, G).

Clear Search — Allows you to unmark the matches from the previous search (ALT, E, H).


View menu

Note:	Some of the commands on this menu may not be available, depending on the currently selected view.

Index of Individuals — Lists the names, birth dates, and death dates of each individual contained in your Family File (ALT, V, I).

Family Page — Displays the Family Page:  the "page" for entering names, birth dates, and death dates for each member of a nuclear family (ALT, V, F).

More About — Opens the More About submenu where you can choose what type of additional information you want to enter for the current primary individual (ALT, V, M).

Source — This command is only available for selected fields.  It displays a dialog box in which you can enter the name of the source where you found the information that you entered into the currently selected field (ALT, V, U).

Scrapbook — Displays the Scrapbook for the currently selected individual.  If the cursor is on a marriage field, it will display the Scrapbook for the marriage (ALT, V, S).

All-in-One Tree — Displays every member of your Family File in one continuous tree.  You can include individuals who are not blood relatives, as well as unrelated individuals who are not linked to anyone else in your Family File (ALT, V, N).

Ancestor Tree — Opens the Ancestor Tree submenu where you can choose the display format for the Ancestor tree. Family Tree Maker will use the current individual as the primary individual (ALT, V, A).

Descendant Tree — Opens the Descendant Tree submenu where you can choose the display format for the Descendant tree. Family Tree Maker will use the current individual as the primary individual (ALT, V, D).

Hourglass Tree — Opens the Hourglass Tree submenu where you can choose the display format for the Hourglass tree. The Hourglass trees combine both the ancestors and descendants of the current primary individual into a single view (ALT, V, H).

Outline Descendant Tree — Displays an Outline Descendant tree with the current individual as the primary individual (ALT, V, O).

Family Group Sheet — Creates a document summarizing all of the information in your about a nuclear family, including each member's name, birth date, death date, and spouse(s).  Can also include the information contained in the More About dialog boxes (ALT, V, G).

Genealogy Report — Displays a detailed listing of family information presented in a narrative format.  There are three Genealogy report formats to choose from (ALT, V, E).

Kinship Report — Displays a Kinship report with the current individual as the primary individual (ALT, V, K).

Reports — Opens the Reports submenu where you can create a variety of custom and predefined columnar reports from the information in your Family File (ALT, V, R).

Publishing Center — Takes you to the Publishing Center page, from which you have point and click access to everything related to creating or editing an Internet Home Page and creating, editing and publishing Family Books to your Home Page.

Books — Displays the Book view where you can create an outline for a family book (ALT, V, B).

Calendar — Creates a calendar containing the anniversaries and birthdays of every individual in the Family File (ALT, V, C).

Labels/Cards — Displays a set of labels or cards that contain information about a selected set of individuals (ALT, V, L).

Map — Displays a map view showing Fact and Location information about selected individuals (ALT, V, P).

Timeline — Displays the Timeline view based on the individuals you choose to include (ALT, V, T).

FamilyFinder — Opens the FamilyFinder submenu where you can perform a FamilyFinder Search, create, update, or view your FamilyFinder Report, View Family Archive CDs, or view your Research Journal (ALT, V, Y).

Zoom — Allows you to change the size in which a document is displayed on screen (ALT, V, Z).


Books menu

New Book — Creates a new book in your Family File and displays the Books view (ALT, B, N).

Open Book — Displays the outline for an existing book in the Books view (ALT, B, O).

Delete Book — Removes a book and the items in the book's outline from your Family File (ALT, B, D).

Book Properties — Lets you change the book title, author, and page numbering options (ALT, B, P).

Book Header, Footer — Lets you add a header and/or a footer to your book (ALT, B, H).

Add New Book Item — Copies the selected item from the "Available items" list to the "Outline for" list in the Books view (ALT, B, A).

Edit Book Item — Displays the selected item so that you can look at it or change it (ALT, B, E).

Book Item Properties — Lets you change the name of an item and choose whether it begins a new chapter (ALT, B, I).

Close Book Item — Exits book item mode and returns you to the current view (grayed out unless you are editing an item opened from the right-hand column of a Book view).


People menu

Note:	Some of the commands on this menu may not be available, depending on the currently selected view.

Add Unrelated Individual — Displays an empty Family Page where you can enter information about an individual who you know is related to you, but you're unsure how (ALT, P, U).

Fix Relationship Mistakes — Opens the Fix Relationship Mistakes sub-menu where you can access dialog boxes to resolve relationship mistakes (ALT, P, F).

Insert Child — Creates a blank row between two children in the "Children" list on the Family Page so you can add another child (ALT, P, I).

Move Child From — Allows you to change a child's placement in the "Children" list on a Family Page (ALT, P, M).

Delete Individual — Allows you to remove an individual, and all of the information associated with that individual, from your Family File (ALT, P, D).

Delete Individuals — Allows you to remove a group of individuals that are displayed in an Ancestor tree, Descendant tree, Outline Descendant tree, or report.  All of the information associated with those individuals will also be removed from your Family File (ALT, P, L).

Sort Children — Arranges the children listed on a single Family Page in the order of their birth dates (ALT, P, S).

Other Spouses — Displays a dialog box with which you can create an additional spouse for an individual, select the preferred spouse, or navigate to a different spouse (ALT, P, O).

Other Parents — Displays a dialog box with which you can create additional parents for an individual, select the preferred parents, or navigate to a different set of parents (ALT, P, P).

Merge Pedigrees — Allows you to merge the information in a World Family Tree pedigree with your own Family File.  This is only available when you are viewing a World Family Tree pedigree (ALT, P, G).

Merge Duplicate Individuals — Allows you to search your entire Family File for duplicate individuals and merge their information together (ALT, P, G).

Merge Specific Individuals — Allows you to select two individuals and merge their information together (ALT, P, C).

Relationship Calculator — Automatically calculates the relationship for any two individuals in your Family File.  It also gives you their nearest common relative, as well as the canon and civil numbers (ALT, V, R).

Soundex Calculator — Automatically generates the Soundex code for any name in your Family File (ALT, V, X). For more information about Soundex, click here.


Picture/Object menu

Note:	The commands on this menu are only available when you are in the Scrapbook view.  In addition, some of the commands may not be available, depending on the type of Picture/Object that is currently selected in the Scrapbook.

Insert Photo CD Picture — Displays the Insert from Photo CD dialog box where you can select pictures to insert into the current Scrapbook (ALT, O, C).

Insert Picture from File — Displays the Insert from File dialog box where you can select pictures to insert into the current Scrapbook (ALT, O, F).

Insert Picture from Scanner/Camera — Displays the Select Source dialog box where you can select the Twain device (scanner or digital camera) from which you want to import a picture.

Insert Object — Displays the Insert Object dialog box where you can select items to insert into the current Scrapbook (ALT, O, O).

Insert Picture from Scrapbook — In standard Ancestor and Descendant trees, allows you to insert images from a Scrapbook and then move them to the location of your choice.

Insert Caption by itself — In standard Ancestor and Descendant trees, displays the Caption dialog box.  Enter the text you wish and then move your text box to the location of your choice.

Tree Background Picture — Displays the Background Picture dialog box where you can choose a picture to display “behind” the boxes in your tree.

More About — Displays the More About Picture/Object dialog box where you can enter information, such as a caption and description, about the currently selected Picture/Object.  In addition, this is where you indicate to Family Tree Maker in which documents you may want to include the currently selected Picture/Object (ALT, O, A).

Contrast — Displays the Contrast dialog box where you can adjust the coloring for the currently selected Picture/Object (ALT, O, N).

Caption Text — This dialog box allows you to add a caption to a moveable picture.  Available only when a moveable picture in a tree is selected.  An additional check box allows you the option of displaying the caption with the picture (ALT, O, X)

Picture Properties — This dialog box is available when a moveable picture in a tree has been selected.  It allows you to alter the size (scale) and brightness (fade) of the selected picture (ALT, O, P).

Edit — Allows you to open the currently selected Picture/Object for editing (ALT, O, E).

Compression/Resolution — Allows you to open the currently selected Picture/Object and select a new compression or resolution for it (ALT, O, R).

View — Allows you to view the currently selected Picture/Object at full size (ALT, O, V).

Play Scrapbook — Sequentially displays each of the Picture/Objects in the current Scrapbook.  You can select the amount of time that each Picture/Object is displayed (ALT, O, L).


Contents menu

Note:	The commands on this menu will vary depending on which view is currently being displayed.  Below is a list of the possible commands.

Items to Include — Allows you to select and de-select information to include in your trees, calendars, timelines and other documents.  You can also choose the format in which information prints, as well as select the text style in which it prints (ALT, C, I).

Individuals to Include — Allows you to choose which individuals are included in your document.  This command is available in the following views: Labels/Cards, some Report formats, the Outline Descendant tree, Timeline and Calendar view (ALT, C, N).

Title & Footnote — Displays a dialog box where you can create a title and footnote to add to trees, calendars, timelines and other documents (ALT, C, T).

# of Generations to Show — Lets you select the number of generations for your trees and some reports.  This option is not available for Timelines (ALT, C, G).

Tree Options — Displays a dialog box in which you can select various printing options for your trees, such as whether or not to include generation labels and duplicate individuals.  The exact options depend on the tree type (ALT, C, O).

Book Index Options — Displays a dialog box in which you can choose how many columns Family Tree Maker should use to format the index (ALT, C, O).

Label/Card Options — Displays a dialog box in which you can choose whether to print one label or card per household or one label or card per individual (ALT, C, O).

Genealogy Report Options — Displays a dialog box in which you can choose whether to print individual and marriage notes, individual facts, and source information.  You can also choose generation numbering options here (ALT, C, O).

Map Options — Displays a dialog box in which you can choose to allow location labels to overlap on your map view (ALT, C, O).


Format menu

Note:	The commands on this menu will vary depending on which view is currently being displayed.  Below is a list of the possible commands.

Tree Format — Displays a dialog box where you can select the layout and box connections for your trees.  With Ancestor trees, you also can choose between Fit to Page and Custom Ancestor tree (ALT, T, F).

Family Group Sheet Format — Displays a dialog box in which you can choose whether or not each individual's information begins on a new page (ALT, T, F).

Report Format — Displays a dialog box in which you can select a format for the report you want to create, such as Custom, Kinship, Data Errors, Medical Information, Address, Birthdays of Living Individuals, Parentage, and PAF (ALT, T, F).

Genealogy Report Format — Displays a dialog box in which you can select a format for the Genealogy report you want to create, such as Ahnentafel, NGS Quarterly, and Register (ALT, T, F).

Timeline Format — Displays a dialog box in which you can select the scale for the Timeline, the direction the years flow on the Timeline, and how historical events and estimated events will be displayed (ALT, T, F).

Map Format — Displays a dialog box in which you can select book or wall layout, options for numbers of columns, legends, abbreviation of state names, and symbol keys (ALT, T, F).

Map Size and Area — Displays a dialog box in which you can select, crop, and resize map images for display in a map view (ALT, T, M).

Maximum Box Width — Allows you to limit the size of both boxes and pictures in your trees.  This option is not available for Timelines or Fan trees.(ALT, T, W).

Maximum Width for Each Column — Allows you to select the width of the columns and size of the space between the columns in a report (ALT, T, W).

Sort — For Scrapbooks; Sort allows you to select the order in which the Picture/Objects appear in the current Scrapbook (ALT, S).  For Timelines, Custom reports, labels and cards, and batch printing; Sort allows you to choose the order in which individuals print (ALT, T, S).  For FamilyFinder Reports; Sort allows you to select the order in which name matches appear.  First, by Category, Family Archive CD, Individual, or Quality.  Then, each of those first-sort categories can be sorted a second time by Family Archive CD, Individual, Quality, or 'nothing' (ALT, T, S).  For Research Journals; Sort allows you to select the order in which To Do Items are displayed (by Category, Date, or Priority).

Restore Box Positions — Depending on the current tree view, lets you move boxes in trees back to their default (original) positions.  Neither Background Pictures nor Moveable Pictures are affected by this command.

Box, Line, & Border Styles — Lets you select the styles and colors for the boxes, lines, and borders in your documents (ALT, T, B).

Text Font, Style, & Size — Displays a dialog box where you can select the formatting for the text in your documents, including point size, color, font, style, and alignment.  Not all options are available for all documents (ALT, T, T).

Change Map — Displays a dialog box where you can select a different geographical style of map (U.S./Europe/World, political, shaded, or relief) to display your family members.

Show Page Lines — Turns on and off the dotted lines on screen that indicate where a page's margins are (ALT, T, H).


Preferences submenu

From the File menu, select Preferences.  Then, make your selection from the options below:

Startup — Allows you to choose between Insert and Overwrite typing modes, as well as set the size of the cache available to Family Tree Maker (ALT, F, F, U).

Dates & Measures — Lets you choose between using English and metric units of measure, and select the default date format, style and label (ALT, F, F, D).

Error Checking — Family Tree Maker can automatically check the information that you enter in the Family Page for conflicting dates, misspellings, and other types of errors.  Select this command to turn this automatic error checking on and off.  A check mark next to the command means that it is on (ALT, F, F, E).

Fastfields — Displays a dialog box where you can choose which fields in Family Tree Maker act as Fastfields (ALT, F, F, F).

Facts Page — Displays a dialog box where you can choose whether to sort the More About Facts page by fact name or by date.

Help Tools — Displays a dialog box where you can choose in which views Cue Cards and Bubble Help windows appear with helpful tips and information (ALT, F, F, H).

Labels and LDS Options — Displays a dialog box where you can globally change field labels or choose compliance with LDS formatting in Family Tree Maker (ALT, F, F, L).

Pictures/Objects — Displays a dialog box where you can select default compression and resolution levels for any future pictures that you import into Scrapbooks (ALT, F, F, P).

Privatize — Selecting this command hides all data fields for living individuals and marks them with the word “private” (ALT, F, F, V).  Once selected as a preference, privatized text is enforced whenever you copy/export, print, or publish your Family File.  For more information, see the topic Privatizing your Family File.

Reference Numbers — Displays a dialog box where you can activate automatic reference numbers, and customize the number format (ALT, F, F, R).

Spell Check — Displays a dialog box where you can specify the types of words you want to examine when performing a spell check (ALT, F, F, K).

Titles — Displays a dialog box where you can select default titles, such as "Mr." and "Mrs." to use with all of the individuals in your Family File (ALT, F, F, T).

FamilyFinder — Lets you choose whether or not to expand your name searches to include names that sound like but are not spelled exactly like the name that you are searching for (Soundex) (ALT, F, F, Y).

Toolbar — Displays a dialog box where you can choose the buttons that appear on the Family Tree Maker toolbar (ALT, F, F, O).


Help menu

Contents — Displays the Contents screen of the Family Tree Maker on-screen Help system (ALT, H, C).

Search for Help on — Lets you search for a specific topic in the Family Tree Maker on-screen Help system (ALT, H, S).

How to Use Help — Gives basic information about using an on-screen Help system (ALT, H, H).

Genealogy "How-To" Guide — Opens the Family Tree Maker Genealogy "How-To" Guide, a Help system that shows you how to research your family information.  It includes a step-by-step guide for finding information such as birth dates, maiden names, family addresses, and much more.  The Genealogy "How-To" Guide also gives research tips, such as what to watch for in older records, how to keep a correspondence log, and how to use Soundex.  You'll find hundreds of addresses for libraries, genealogy societies, archives, and vital records offices, as well as form letters and census record abstracts to print (ALT, H, G).

FamilyFinder Tips — Displays some helpful tips about information you might need, and ideas on where to find it.

Family File Status — Shows you the name and size of the Family File you're working on, as well as the number of individuals it contains (ALT, H, F).

System Information — Displays a dialog box that gives you information about your computer, such as the amount of memory available to your computer and the display type.  The Run option on this dialog box allows you to access standard Windows system editors (ALT, H, I).

User Information — Opens a form where you can enter information that identifies you as the person who prepared your Family File (ALT, H, U).

About Family Tree Maker — Displays the version number and date of your Family Tree Maker program (ALT, H, A).


Internet menu

Note:	Don't be alarmed if your Internet menu is different from the one described here.  Family Tree Maker Online periodically updates the items on this menu to give you access to the latest features and services.  The list below describes the most common items you will find on this menu.

Go Online — If you have a modem and either America Online, Netscape Navigator, or Microsoft Internet Explorer you can select this menu item to go directly to Family Tree Maker Online on the Internet (ALT, I, O).

Contribute to the World Family Tree — Lets you contribute your Family File to the World Family Tree project via Family Tree Maker Online (ALT, I, C).

Contact a WFT Contributor — Locate contributors to the World Family Tree Project (ALT, I, N).

Find Individual on the Internet — Connects you to the Internet FamilyFinder Web page. You can use this page to search for a particular individual on the Internet (ALT, I, F).

Order Family Archive CDs — Get more information about or order any Family Archive CD (ALT, I, D).

Publish <view> to the Internet — Lets you publish Books, Family Pages, Genealogy reports, Custom reports, and Outline Descendant trees from your Family File on your home page on Family Tree Maker Online (ALT, I, P).

Create Letter to a Relative — Connects you to FamilyTreeMaker.com, where you click the appropriate Letter Link to go to a page of form letters available in 5 languages.

Create Letter to a Record Agency — Like the Letters option above, this link takes you to a site where you can find letters that are appropriate for soliciting information from official agencies.

Articles — Displays an online library of professionally-written genealogy articles (ALT, I, A).

Biography Assistant — Connects you to the Biography Assistant Web page where you'll find a virtual research assistant to help you document your family stories (ALT, I, B).

Message Boards — Enables you to share genealogy research tips and tricks with other Family Tree Maker users (ALT, I, M).

My Home Page — Establishes your own home page on Family Tree Maker Online. Once you've created a home page, use this menu item to access it quickly (ALT, I, Y).

Research Services — Accesses a Web page where you can order a variety of record lookups and in-depth research services. The research is conducted by professional genealogists who can help you locate hard-to-find records. Additional charges may apply for these services (ALT, I, R).

Visit Virtual Cemetery — Activates your browser and takes you to the Virtual Cemetery — an electronic memorial to our ancestors and an invaluable source of genealogical information.

GenealogyLibrary.com — This is your link to an online subscription service offering a rapidly-growing collection of databases and family-finding resources.  GenealogyLibrary.com is your 24-hour research library with hundreds of rare and hard-to-find books that you can see online, anytime.

Browser Setup — Lets you select the browser to use when you go online with Family Tree Maker. You can use Netscape, Internet Explorer, or America Online’s Web browser (ALT, I, W).

Technical Support — Takes you directly to Family Tree Maker’s technical support Web site, where you’ll find solutions to common problems, tutorials, and other useful links (ALT, I, T).

Help using Family Tree Maker Online — Displays basic information about using Family Tree Maker Web site (ALT, I, H).


Toolbar

The toolbar contains buttons you can click to move to different views in Family Tree Maker.  To change views, just click the button corresponding to the view you want to see.  For example, if you want to see the Index of Individuals, click the button on the left that is labeled "Index."  If you want to create and display an Ancestor tree, click the Ancestor button.  See Toolbar buttons for additional information.

You can also customize the toolbar. Maybe you want to remove buttons you don’t use that often, add other buttons, or change the order of the buttons on the toolbar. Family Tree Maker makes it easy for you to display the buttons you want for the features you use most often.  See Customizing the toolbar for more information.


Picture/Object submenu

Note:	The commands on this menu are only available when you are in the Scrapbook view.  In addition, some of the commands may not be available, depending on the type of Picture/Object that is currently selected in the Scrapbook.  These commands can also be found on the Picture/Object menu.

More About — Displays the More About Picture/Object dialog box where you can enter information, such as a caption and description, about the currently selected Picture/Object.  In addition, this is where you indicate to Family Tree Maker in which documents you may want to include the currently selected Picture/Object (ALT, E, O, A).

Contrast — Displays the Contrast dialog box where you can adjust the coloring for the currently selected Picture/Object (ALT, E, O, N).

Edit — Allows you to open the currently selected Picture/Object for editing (ALT, E, O, E).

Compression/Resolution — Allows you to open the currently selected Picture/Object and select a new compression or resolution for it (ALT, E, O, R).

View — Allows you to view the currently selected Picture/Object at full size (ALT, E, O, V).

Play Scrapbook — Sequentially displays each of the Picture/Objects in the current Scrapbook.  You can select the amount of time that each Picture/Object is displayed (ALT, E, O, L).


More About submenu

Facts — Displays the Facts dialog box so you can enter additional facts such as a christening date or burial date/location for the current primary individual.  This dialog will support multiple entries (Alternate Facts) for the same event (ALT, V, M, F).

Address — Displays the Address dialog box which allows you to enter an address for the current primary individual (ALT, V, M, A).

Medical — Displays the Medical dialog box which allows you to enter medical information about the current primary individual (ALT, V, M, M).

Lineage — Displays the Lineage dialog box which allows you to select the relationship between two individuals as well as title or aka for the current primary individual (ALT, V, M, L).

Notes — Displays the Notes dialog box which allows you to enter text about the current primary individual such as a story or short biography (ALT, V, M, N).


Ancestor Tree submenu

Fan — Displays an Ancestor tree showing ancestors in an expanding circle around the current primary individual (ALT, V, A, F).

Standard — Displays an Ancestor tree with the current individual as the primary individual (ALT, V, A, S).

Vertical — Displays a Vertical Ancestor tree with the primary individual centered at the bottom of the tree, and his or her ancestors branching upward (ALT, V, A, V).


Descendant Tree submenu

Fan — Displays a Descendant tree showing the descendants in an expanding circle around the current primary individual (ALT, V, D, F).

Standard — Displays a Descendant tree with the current individual as the primary individual (ALT, V, D, S).


Hourglass Tree submenu

Fan — Displays a Fan Hourglass tree using the fan format for the Ancestor and Descendant portions of the tree (ALT, V, H, F).

Standard — Displays an Hourglass tree using the standard Ancestor and Descendant Tree formats (ALT, V, H, S).


Fix Relationship Mistakes submenu

Note:	Some of the commands on this menu may not be available, depending what is currently selected on the Family Page.

Detach Child — Displays a dialog to detach a child from a Family Page (ALT, P, F).

Detach Spouse — Displays a dialog to detach a spouse from a Family Page (ALT, P, F).

Attach Child — Displays a dialog to attach a child to a Family Page (ALT, P, F).

Attach Spouse — Displays a dialog to attach a spouse to a Family Page (ALT, P, F).


The FamilyFinder submenu

View CD — Displays a view in which you can search an index of more than 200 million names for your ancestors' records.  You can also use this view to read Family Archive CDs (ALT, V, V).

FamilyFinder Center — Takes you to the FamilyFinder Center page that provides links to many research, "How-To," and Online genealogy resources (ALT, V, C).

FamilyFinder Search/Report — Displays your FamilyFinder Report, or takes you to FamilyFinder Search to create or update one (ALT, V, S).

Research Journal — Displays the Research Journal where you can create, edit, and sort research To Do items, and track your research progress (ALT, V, R).


Using the mouse and keyboard

Using the mouse

Using the keyboard


Using the mouse

Using a mouse is one of the easiest ways to move around in Family Tree Maker.  You can use it in many different ways.

In fields:

Just click on a field in which you want to enter or edit information.  The cursor will move to that field and you can start typing.

With menus:

To make a menu selection, click one of the words on the Menu Bar, such as "Edit," and then click one of the commands on the drop-down menu.

For navigation:

In trees, labels and cards, and reports you can change views and primary individuals simultaneously.  Simply click an individual's name and then choose a view from the View menu.  The individual you selected will be the primary individual in the new view.  You can also go directly to an individual's Family Page by double-clicking their name.

On Picture/Objects:

If you double-click a Picture/Object in a tree box or on a label or card, Family Tree Maker will either play the object or display it at full size, depending on the type of Picture/Object.


Using the keyboard

Function keys

Editing keys


Function keys

Note:  Not all function keys are operable in the DOS version of Family Tree Maker.

Press this		To do this
Ctrl + S		Display the Sources dialog box
F1		Display the Contents screen of the Family Tree Maker on-screen Help system
Shift + F1		Display the on-screen Help topic most relevant to your current activity (produces a cursor with a “question mark” and as you click on items, the associated Help will appear)
F2		Display the Index of Individuals, a list of all individuals in your Family File
F3		From the Family Page, display the Other Spouses dialog box for the current individual
F4		From the Family Page, display the Family Page for the parents of the wife
Alt + F4		Exit Family Tree Maker
F5		From the Family Page, display the Family Page for the parents of the husband
F6		From the Family Page, display the Family Page of either the first child in the list, or of the child that the cursor is on
F8		From the Family Page, display the Family Page of the next sibling of the current individual.  The "next" sibling is the child listed below the current individual on the Family Page where the current individual appears as a child
Alt + F8		From the Family Page, display the Family Page of the previous sibling of the current individual.  The "previous" sibling is the child listed above the current individual on the Family Page where the current individual appears as a child


Editing keys

Press this key	To do this
Backspace	Erase the character to the left of the cursor
Insert	Switch back and forth between insert and overwrite modes
Delete	Delete characters to the right, one by one
Ctrl +X	Cut highlighted text and place on the Clipboard
Ctrl +C	Copy highlighted text and place on the Clipboard
Ctrl +V	Paste text from the Clipboard to where the cursor is located


Customizing Family Tree Maker

Selecting startup preferences

Choosing the date format and units of measure

Selecting title preferences (Mr., Mrs., etc.)

Changing field labels

Selecting Fastfield preferences

Selecting errors to check for during data entry

Selecting spell check preferences

Assigning automatic reference numbers

Selecting FamilyFinder searching preferences

Selecting Defaults for Picture Resolution and Compression

Select Help system preferences

Customizing the toolbar


Selecting startup preferences

To set your Startup preferences:

1.	From the File menu, select Preferences (ALT, F, F).

2.	From the Preferences sub-menu, select Startup (ALT, U).

3.	Make your selections.

For a description of the options in the Startup Preferences dialog box, click here.

4.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Some Startup preferences do not take effect until you exit Family Tree Maker and then restart the program.


The Startup Preferences dialog box

Editing mode — Selecting Overtype lets you type over old text.  The old text is lost forever, and the new text is put in its place.  Selecting Insert mode places new text in front of the old text.

Automatically backup Family File — Normally, Family Tree Maker saves a copy of your Family File when you exit the program.  The backup file has the same name as the original file, but with the extension .FBK.  You can use this backup file if your original file is ever lost or damaged.  However, since the backup file takes up space on your computer's hard drive, you may want to deselect this option if your computer's hard drive space is limited.

Allow replacing existing files — Normally, Family Tree Maker does not allow you to replace an old file with a new file of the same name.  If you select this option, Family Tree Maker will only give you a warning message before it writes over an existing file.  Any files that you choose to overwrite will be lost permanently.

Note: The Allow replacing existing files setting does not have any affect on backup files.  Family Tree Maker will not allow you to overwrite a backup file.

Cache size — The cache is the memory where Family Tree Maker stores recently used information.  The program will run more efficiently if you make the optimum amount of cache available to Family Tree Maker.  If you have large Family Files, you should have a larger cache, but if you have small Family Files, you should have a smaller cache.  With larger Family Files, a good rule of thumb for the cache size is about one-fourth of your computer's available memory.  The maximum cache size is 16 megabytes.


Choosing the date format and units of measure

To change date preferences:

1.	From the File menu, select Preferences (ALT, F, F).

2.	From the Preferences sub-menu, select Dates & Measures (ALT, D).

3.	Make your date and measurement system selections.

For a description of the options in the Dates & Measures dialog box, click here.

4.	Click OK when you've made your selections.


Selecting Help system preferences

Cue Cards — appear automatically when you enter a view.  They give you tips about what you can do in that view.  Click OK to close a Cue Card after you finish reading it.

Bubble Help — pops up when you hold your mouse pointer over things like buttons and fields for more than two seconds.  It gives you instructions related to the item under your mouse pointer.  When you move your mouse pointer away from a Bubble Help window, it closes.

To turn Cue Cards and Bubble Help windows on or off:

1.	From the File menu, select Preferences (ALT, F, F).

2.	From the Preferences sub-menu, select Help Tools (ALT, H).

3.	Choose whether you want Help to appear in Family Tree Maker.

For a description of the options in the Help Tools dialog box, click here.

4.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker closes the dialog box and saves your changes.


The Help Tools Preferences dialog box

Bubble Help — Select this check box if you want Bubble Help to appear while you are working.  Bubble Help pops up when you hold your mouse pointer over things like buttons and fields for more than two seconds.  It gives you instructions related to the item under your mouse pointer.  When you move your mouse pointer away from a Bubble Help window, it closes automatically.

Cue Cards — Select this check box if you want Cue Cards to automatically appear while you are working.  They give you tips about what you can do in that view.  Click OK to close a Cue Card after you finish reading it.

Note:  You can turn off only some of the Cue Cards, by selecting the Cue Cards check box and then clicking the Click here if you don't want to see this window again check box on the Cue Cards you do not want to see.


Cue Card dialog boxes

Click here if you don't want to see this Help Window again — Select this check box to prevent an individual Cue Card from appearing.  Once you select this check box, the Cue Card will no longer pop up in Family Tree Maker.  To turn all Cue Cards off or on, see How to: select Help system preferences.


The Dates & Measures Preferences dialog box

Date Format:

Order — Select the MDY option button if you want the month to appear before the date (e.g., January 07, 1995).  Select the DMY option button if you want the date to appear before the month (e.g., 07 January, 1995).

Styles — Click the drop-down lists and make selections for the month, date punctuation, and day.

Double dates — Change the year in this field to change the default double date cutoff year.  If you don't want double dates to print, set the double date cutoff year to zero.

Measurement System — Select the English option button if you want to use feet, inches, pounds, and ounces.  Select the Metric option button if you prefer to use meters, centimeters, grams, and kilograms instead.

Range Styles:

Prefix — Click the drop-down lists and make a selection for the date range prefix (Bet., Btn., or blank).

Separator — Click the drop-down lists and make a selection for the date range separator (-, to, and, or &).

Date Labels:

About — If you want Family Tree Maker to display different text for the term “About” in reports, trees, and other views, enter your preferred label in the field indicated.

Abt — If you want Family Tree Maker to display a different abbreviation for the term “Abt” in reports, trees, and other views, enter your preferred label in the field indicated.

in — If you want Family Tree Maker to display different text for the term “in” in reports, trees, and other views, enter your preferred text in the field indicated.

Note:  When entering dates/location information, please remember to use the original terms About, Abt, or in.


Changing the field labels

To change field labels:

1	From the File menu, select Preferences (ALT, F, F).

From the Preferences sub-menu, select Labels and LDS Options.

2	Type over the field labels that you want to change.

For a description of the options in the Labels and LDS Options dialog box, click here.

3	Click OK when you've made your changes.


Labels and LDS Options

Labels — Select (highlight) the label fields you wish to change (Husband, Wife, Marriage, and Married) and type over with your new preferred labels.

Note:  When changing field labels, remember that you're changing the label for each and every individual in your Family File.  You cannot change a field label for only one individual.

Reset labels to default — Click if you want to return to the original (default) fact and name labels.

Add LDS formats to Reports and LDS layout . . . — Select this checkbox if you want your field labels to conform to LDS standards for reports and Family Group Sheets.

Note:  When selected, the Family Group Sheet will print in the LDS format and the list of Reports in the Report Format dialog box will include LDS reports. Some options in the Standard Page Options dialog box will be unavailable when the Add LDS formats box is selected.


LDS Options

Select this checkbox if you want to add LDS formatting to Reports and use LDS Layout for Family Group Sheets.

Note: When selected, the Family Group Sheet will print in the LDS format and the list of Reports in the Report Format dialog box will include LDS reports. Some options in the Standard Page Options dialog box will be unavailable when the LDS format box is selected.


LDS Ordinance Information

If you choose to use the LDS format, some field labels and the Family Group Sheet change to conform to LDS standards.

 Five of the Comment/Location field labels in the Facts dialog box change to the following: "Baptism," "Endowment," "Christened," "Buried," and "Seal to Parents."

 The field labels in the More About Marriage - Facts dialog box now ask for the Sealing date and location.

 The location and date fields will accept temple codes and several special date codes.  These codes can be spelled out or abbreviated as follows:

BIC (born in the covenant)

Canceled or CAN

Child or CHI

Cleared or CLE

Completed or COM

DNS (do not seal)

Infant or INF

See notes

Stillborn or STI

Submitted or SUB

Uncleared or UNC

The Family Group Sheet will reflect these changes:

 Ordinance data is now listed along the right hand side of the sheet.

 Last names are printed in capital letters.

 All dates are automatically formatted -- Day/Month/Year -- with the month abbreviated (10 Sep 1988).

 The Title & Footnote dialog box for Family Group Sheets will provide space for entering the submitter's name, address, stake, and unit number.

 Space is provided for entering information about proxies.

 Space is provided for entering the relationship of the submitter to the husband or wife.

 The title will change to "Family Group Record."


Available Facts Default List

Adopted, Baptized, Baptized (LDS), Bar Mitzvah, Bas Mitzvah, Blessed (LDS), Born, Buried, Caste, Census, Christened, Confirmation, Confirmation (LDS), Cremated, Degree, Died, Education, Elected, Emigration, Endowed (LDS), Excommunicated, First Communion, Graduated, Immigrated, Military Service, Mission (LDS), Namesake, Nationalitly, Naturalized, Occupation, Ordained, Probate, Property, Religion, Residence, Retired, Sealed to parents (LDS), Social Security number, Temple, and Will signed.


Selecting Fastfield preferences

To change Fastfield preferences:

1.	From the File menu, select Preferences (ALT, F, F).

2.	From the Preferences sub-menu, select Fastfields (ALT, F).

3.	Select the check boxes for the fields that you want to act as Fastfields, or deselect the check boxes for the fields that you don't want to act as Fastfields.  Click All to select all of the check boxes.  Click None to deselect all of the check boxes.

4.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

See also

Fastfields


The Fastfield Preferences dialog box

Select the check boxes for the fields that you want to act as Fastfields, or deselect the fields that you don't want to act as Fastfields.

All — Click this button to select all of the check boxes.

None — Click this button to deselect all of the check boxes.

See also

Fastfields


Selecting defaults for picture resolution and compression

To set default compressions and resolutions for pictures:

1.	From the File menu, select Preferences (ALT, F, F).

2.	From the Preferences sub-menu, select Picture/Objects (ALT, P).

3.	Choose the compression and resolution that you prefer.

For a description of the options in the Picture/Objects dialog box and a selection of related topics, click here.

4.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker saves your changes.


The Picture/Objects Preferences dialog box

Degree of Compression — Select the option button corresponding to the degree of compression that you want for your picture.  Higher ratios give you a greater loss in picture quality, but the pictures will take up less space on your hard disk.  Lower ratios give you pictures with less loss in quality, but will take up the most disk space.

Resolution — This option is only available for Kodak Photo CD Pictures.  Select the option button corresponding to the resolution that you want for your picture.  A higher resolution will create a larger picture, and a larger picture will be sharper and have more detail.  Choosing resolutions higher (larger) than the recommended "256 x 384" will use up large amounts of your hard disk space.  See the topic Picture size and your computer for more information.


Selecting errors to check for during data entry

To turn on the error checking options:

1.	From the File menu, select Preferences (ALT, F, F).

2.	From the Preferences sub-menu, select Error Checking (ALT, E).

3.	Select the check boxes for the types of errors that you want Family Tree Maker to look for.

4.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker closes the dialog box.


The Error Checking Preferences dialog box

1.	Select the check boxes for the types of errors that you want Family Tree Maker to look for.

Click here for information on the types of errors Family Tree Maker will look for in names.

2.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker closes the dialog box.


Selecting FamilyFinder searching preferences

To choose preferences for searching:

1.	From the File menu, select Preferences (ALT, F, F).

2.	From the Preferences sub-menu, select FamilyFinder (ALT, Y) and choose from the following:

Use Soundex to find similar last names — Select this check box to allow the Search Expert to use Soundex codes (finds ‘Smythe’ and ‘Smithe’ for ‘Smith’) while searching.

Soundex coding is a system that gives a unique code to all names that sound the same, even when they are spelled differently, such as ‘Smith’ and ‘Smithe.’  Using Soundex codes can help you find records that you may otherwise not know to look for.

Show reminder when FamilyFinder Report is out of date — Select this check box if you want Family Tree Maker to automatically remind you when a FamilyFinder Report is out of date.

Show star on Family Page for “X”-star and better matches — Use the up and down arrows to select a number (from 1 to 5) as the number of stars Family Tree Maker looks for when alerting you of matches to individuals in your Family File.  5-Stars is the highest number of stars (95% certain) that a match can earn.

3.	Click OK.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the FamilyFinder view.


The FamilyFinder Preferences dialog box

1	Use Soundex to find similar last names (find “Smythe” for “Smith”) — Select this check box if you want to search for names using Soundex codes.

Note:  Soundex coding is a system that allows searching for names based on their sounds, rather than their spellings.  This helps you find names that sound alike, but that are spelled differently, such as "Smith," “Smithe,” and "Smythe."  Using Soundex codes can help you find records that you may otherwise not know to look for.

2	Show reminder when FamilyFinder Report is out of date — Select this check box if you want Family Tree Maker to remind you when your FamilyFinder Report is out of date.

3	Show star on Family Page for (???) and better matches — Select this check box if you want to see a small star by the name of the individual for whom your FamilyFinder Report has found matches.

Note:  If you select this option, use the pull-down list to set the level of matching to which you want to be alerted (usually 4-, or 5-star).


Selecting spell check preferences

To select spell check preferences:

1. From the File menu, select Preferences (ALT, F, F).

2.	From the Preferences sub-menu, select Spell Check (ALT, K).

Family Tree Maker displays the Spell Check Preferences dialog box.

3.	Select the types of words you want Family Tree Maker to check.

For a description of the options in the Spell Check dialog box, click here.

4.	Click OK.


The Spell Check Preferences dialog box

Ignore known names — By default, Family Tree Maker recognizes most of the names in your Family File as words that are spelled correctly. If you want to disable this option, turn off this check box.

Ignore capitalized words — When this option is on, Family Tree Maker will not attempt to correct words that include upper-case letters, such as abbreviations for state names.  When it is off, it will flag these words as misspelled. The default setting for this option is off.

Ignore words with numbers — This option controls whether Family Tree Maker treats words that include numbers as misspellings.  If you often use alpha-numeric reference numbers in your notes, you can select this option to avoid constantly approving your reference number text. The default setting for this option is off.


Assigning automatic reference numbers

To assign automatic reference numbers:

1. From the File menu, select Preferences (ALT, F, F).

2.	From the Preferences sub-menu, select Reference Numbers (ALT, R).

Family Tree Maker displays the Reference Numbers Preferences dialog box.

3.	Select the numbering options you want to assign.

For a description of the options in the Reference Numbers dialog box, click here.

4.	Click OK.


The Reference Numbers Preferences dialog box
The Automatic Reference Numbers Preferences dialog box

Individuals — Activates the assignment of automatic reference numbers to individuals in your Family File.  You can also choose the type of numbering scheme you want to use: Numbers only, Prefix plus numbers (a number preceded by up to four letters or numbers), or Numbers plus suffix (a number followed by up to four letters or numbers).

Marriages — Activates the assignment of automatic reference numbers to marriages in your Family File.  You can also choose the type of numbering scheme you want to use: Numbers only, Prefix plus numbers (a number preceded by up to four letters or numbers), or Numbers plus suffix (a number followed by up to four letters or numbers).


World Family Tree: what it is & how to join

Genealogy.com is inviting all Family Tree Maker customers to participate in a remarkable genealogical opportunity - the World Family Tree project.  In 1995 the World Family Tree project was started in response to our customers' many requests for a way to share their research with the ever-growing Family Tree Maker community.  We invested in the equipment and know-how needed to compile all of those family trees.  The result is a massive CD-ROM database consisting of thousands of family trees, and millions of individuals that is constantly growing!

Your family history is an important part of this collection.  Your participation in the World Family Tree can help you, and others, advance your research.  By making it easier than ever to discover connections between family trees, the World Family Tree is leading to many research breakthroughs and reunions between distant relatives.

You can use the multiple volume World Family Tree CD collection to further your research too!  Imagine uncovering generations of new information about your family without even leaving your computer.  You can do that when you find just one shared ancestor among the millions of records available.  All of the individuals in the World Family Tree are listed in the FamilyFinder Index.  So you can put the World Family Tree to work for you right away.

What are the benefits of sharing your family tree?

 Extend your family tree — when others who share your ancestry locate your family tree and contact you, you may find new branches in your family tree.

 Safely store your research — protect your family history data from loss or damage.  Your family tree will be part of a readily-accessible database, to be archived at the Library of Congress in Washington, D.C.

 Help other genealogists — by allowing access to your family tree, you may help others who need the information you have.

 For future generations — your family history data will be preserved so that your descendants can access it.  What a wonderful gift for future generations!

Most genealogists don't ever feel that their work is done, but we assure you that your family tree is valuable to other researchers, no matter how large or small, complete or incomplete.  Whether you have just begun your family tree or you are looking to add more branches, contributing your family tree immediately is important to the creation of the World Family Tree.  You can always send additions or changes to us at a later date; we will regularly modify the database and make updated versions available.

For information about privacy issues, the quality of the information in the World Family Tree, or contributing your family tree to the World Family Tree project, select one of the topics listed below.

See also

Protecting your privacy

Information quality

Instructions for contributing your tree


Protecting your privacy

In the interest of privacy, we suggest that you review the contents of your family tree before contributing it.  If there is any information that you want to keep confidential, make a copy of your Family File, delete the information that you don't want to share with others, and then send the new, edited version of the file to the World Family Tree Project.  When your tree becomes available on a World Family Tree CD, only the names, genders, and family links of living individuals will be published.  The birth date and status fields of these individuals will contain the word "Private" and all other fields will either be empty.

Ultimately, the more information we're able to include in the database, the better your chances are for linking family trees together.  You may end up with an expanded family reunion invitation list, not to mention a larger family tree!

When you send in your file, you need to include your own name and address, and can also include your phone number if you wish.  Although we will not publish this information with the CD, by contributing your Family File, you give Genealogy.com the permission to provide this information to World Family Tree users who want to contact you through the Contributor Information Service on the Family Tree Maker Online Web site.  We urge you to let us know if your address changes so that we will always know how to get in touch with you.

See also

Information quality

Instructions for contributing your tree


Information quality

We realize that much of the information in your family tree was probably collected by speaking with relatives.  For this reason, we do not expect complete documentation of your family information.  However, if you did get your information from sources outside of your family, we encourage you to record those sources in Family Tree Maker's Source fields (see How to:  note your sources).  If you are not sure how to document your sources, check "Documenting Your Sources" in the Genealogy "How-To" Guide.  You can also check the genealogy books at your local library, or ask a local genealogy society for more information.

We also understand that the potential for data errors exists, even in the most careful genealogist's family tree.  Family Tree Maker can help you find possible errors (see Checking your file for errors), but it's still up to you to correct the mistakes.  We want to remind participants to research carefully, and to try to avoid contributing confusing or misleading information.

By the same token, when you use the World Family Tree, you should recognize that it is meant to be a research tool, not a source of completely error-free data.  The genealogical information in the World Family Tree was contributed by genealogy enthusiasts like yourself, and has not been verified by Genealogy.com.  Verify all information before adding it to your own collection of family information.

Finally, we ask that you do not contribute information that infringes on copyrights, invades the privacy of others, or is defamatory or profane in any way.  Again, please review the contents of your file carefully before you contribute it.

See also

Protecting your privacy

Instructions for contributing your tree


Instructions for contributing your tree

Contributing your tree on diskette

Contributing your tree online


The Contribute to World Family Tree dialog box

Name, address — Genealogy.com needs your name and address in case there is a problem with your Family File and we need to contact you.  Family Tree Maker cannot finish the submission process until you have filled in your first name, last name, street address (or P.O. Box), city, state, and zip.  If your address is in a country other than the United States, Family Tree Maker does not require the state and zip fields.  However, please fill out the entire address needed for mail delivery.

Phone (optional) — If you want Genealogy.com and other World Family Tree users to be able to contact you by phone, include your phone number.  Don't forget your area or country code!

Date — Family Tree Maker uses the date from your computer's internal calendar.  If the date is incorrect, please change it.  It is vital to have the correct date on your Family File in case you later send us an updated version.

Email — Please fill in your email address if you want Genealogy.com or other World Family Tree users to be able to contact you by e-mail.


Contributing your tree on diskette

Before you begin, you should have an empty, formatted 3.5" or 5.25" diskette.  The diskette should be labeled with your name, address, and the present date; use a standard diskette label sticker if you have one.

Important:  Before you contribute your files to the World Family Tree Project, please follow the procedures described in Checking Your File for Errors.  This will help maintain the quality of the information in the World Family Tree Project.

To contribute a copy of your Family File to the World Family Tree Project:

1.	With the blank, formatted diskette in your diskette drive, start Family Tree Maker and open the Family File that you want to contribute.

2.	From the File menu, select Contribute to World Family Tree (ALT, F, C).

If you have the Family Tree Maker Online button set up, Family Tree Maker will ask how you want to contribute via online or diskette.  Click here for information about contributing online.

3.	Click Diskette.

Family Tree Maker displays the Your Rights as a Contributor dialog box.

4.	Read the agreement carefully and then click either Yes or No.

By clicking "Yes," you indicate that you understand and accept your responsibilities as a contributor to the World Family Tree.  Family Tree Maker will continue the submission process.  If you click "No," Family Tree Maker cancels the submission process.

5.	Select the Destination Drives option button corresponding to the diskette drive that your blank diskette is in.

6.	Type in the requested contributor information.

Name, address — Genealogy.com needs your name and address in case there is a problem with your Family File and we need to contact you.  Family Tree Maker cannot finish the submission process until you have filled in your first name, last name, street address (or P.O. Box), city, state, and zip.  If your address is in a country other than the United States, Family Tree Maker does not require the state and zip fields.  However, please fill out the entire address needed for mail delivery.

Phone (optional) — If you want Genealogy.com and other World Family Tree users to be able to contact you by phone, include your phone number.  Don't forget your area or country code!

Date — Family Tree Maker uses the date from your computer's internal calendar.  If the date is incorrect, please change it.  It is vital to have the correct date on your Family File in case you later send us an updated version.

Email — Please fill in your email address.  We may use this address to notify you of problems with your submission.

7.	Click OK.

8.	Important:  When Family Tree Maker is finished copying your Family File onto the diskette, be sure to write your name and address on a label and place it on the diskette if you haven't already done so.

Please don't skip this important step.  If your diskette is damaged in transit, the Family File will be unreadable, and the label is the only way that we will know who sent the diskette.

9.	Seal the diskette in a sturdy envelope and send it to:

Genealogy.com

World Family Tree Project

P.O. Box 760

Fremont, CA  94537-0760

Thank you for contributing to what will be a remarkable and unequaled source of linked genealogical data.


Contributing your tree online

If you have the Family Tree Maker Online button set up, you can contribute your family tree to the World Family Tree Project directly through the Internet.

Important:  Before you contribute your files to the World Family Tree Project, please follow the procedures described in Checking Your File for Errors.  This will help maintain the quality of information in the World Family Tree Project.

To contribute a copy of your Family File to the World Family Tree Project online:

1.	Start Family Tree Maker and open the Family File that you want to contribute.

2.	From the Internet menu, select Contribute to World Family Tree (ALT, I, C).

3.	Click Online.

Family Tree Maker starts your Web browser and connects you to the Internet.  Next, it displays the Your Rights as a Contributor dialog box.

4.	Read the agreement carefully and then click either Yes or No.

By clicking "Yes" you indicate that you understand and accept your responsibilities as a contributor to the World Family Tree.  Family Tree Maker will continue the submission process.  If you click "No" Family Tree Maker cancels the submission process.

5.	Type in the requested contributor information.

Name, address — Genealogy.com needs your name and address in case there is a problem with your Family File and we need to contact you.  Family Tree Maker cannot finish the submission process until you have filled in your first name, last name, street address (or P.O. Box), city, state, and zip code.  If your address is in a country other than the United States, Family Tree Maker does not require the state and zip code fields.  However, please fill out the entire address needed for mail delivery.

Phone (optional) — If you want Genealogy.com and other World Family Tree users to be able to contact you by phone, include your phone number.  Don't forget your area code or country code!

Date — Family Tree Maker uses the date from your computer's internal calendar.  If the date is incorrect, please change it.  It is vital to have the correct date on your Family File in case you later send us an updated version.

Email — Please fill in your email address.  We may use this address to notify you of problems with your submission.

6.	Click OK.

Thank you for contributing to what will be a remarkable and unequaled source of linked genealogical data.


Other information

Technical support

Select this topic to get help about contacting Family Tree Maker Technical Support.

Family File Status

Select this topic to get help about the size of your Family File.

System information

Select this topic to get help about your computer's setup and available resources.

The README file

Select this topic to get information about displaying the README file, which contains last-minute information that didn't make it into the manual.

The Data Exchange Utility (DEU)

Select this topic to get help about using the Data Exchange Utility with Family Tree Maker for Windows.

Genealogy research sources

Select this topic to get help about researching your family.

Preserving photos

Select this topic to get help about safeguarding your family photographs.

Picture size and your computer

Select this topic to get help about the resources that are required to import pictures.


Technical support

If you need technical assistance with Family Tree Maker, take the following steps:

1.	From the File menu, select Preferences (ALT, F, F).

2.	From the Preferences sub-menu, select Help Tools (ALT, H), and make sure that all of the Cue Cards and Bubble Help check boxes are selected.  This will ensure that Bubble Help and Cue Cards are available in all parts of Family Tree Maker.  Then, go to the place in Family Tree Maker where you are having difficulties; Family Tree Maker will display help that may provide you with a solution.

3.	From the Help menu, select Search for Help on . . ..

Family Tree Maker displays a dialog box with three tabs.  Select the Index tab, and enter a key word or phrase.  As you type, you will see the Index scroll through any available matches.  Once a match is located and highlighted, click Display.

Hint:  Consider printing out the Help pages you find useful.  You may want to keep a file for future reference.

4.	In addition, you can press F1 (in the top row of keys on your keyboard) to receive context-specific help related to the currently selected page or view.

5.	For tutorials, additional technical support and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs), visit the Family Tree Maker Technical Support Web site:

•	From the Internet menu in Family Tree Maker, select Technical Support,

•	Or, using your Web browser, navigate to: www.FamilyTreeMaker.com/support.html

6.	Or, write to us at:  Genealogy.com, P.O. Box 22295, Denver, CO 80222

Additional Online Resources

There is another valuable resource you should be aware of on the Web.  If you direct your browser to: www.Genforum.Genealogy.com you will find a number of different tools to help you in your research.  There are message boards that allow users to help each other, plus alphabetical listings of surnames where you may contact others who are researching branches of your own family’s history.  Once you get to the Genforum page, simply scroll to the bottom and follow the links for computers and software.

Note:  If your Web browser doesn’t start when you attempt to go online through Family Tree Maker, refer to the Browser Setup help topic.

Contact Genealogy.com Technical Support

Make sure to call while you are at your computer.  It's also useful if you have information about your printer and monitor handy, as well as the release date and version of your software.  To find the release date, from the Help menu, select About Family Tree Maker (ALT, H, A).

To speak to a Technical Support Representative call 1-510-794-6850. Live assistance is available Monday through Friday, 7:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. Pacific Time.

Or, fax us at 1-877-849-9541.

The Technical Support phone number is for questions specifically about Family Tree Maker.  The person you speak to cannot tell you about Microsoft Windows or genealogical research.  For help with Windows, consult your Windows manual.

In the United Kingdom:

Phone:  0870 7416821

Fax:  0870 7416822

Email:  uktechsupport@learningco.com

For help with genealogical research:

From the Help menu, select Genealogy How-To Guide.  It contains extensive information about conducting family research.  In addition, several genealogical resources are listed in the Help system topic Genealogy research sources.  You may also contact your local library, historical society, or genealogical society.


Family File Status

The Family File Status dialog box contains information about the number of individuals in your Family File.  If you call our technical support lines, a technical support representative may ask for this information.

To display the Family File Status dialog box:

 From the Help menu, select Family File Status (ALT, H, F).

Family Tree Maker displays the Family File Status dialog box.

When you're finished looking at the information, click OK.

Note:  For troubleshooting help and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs), remember to visit http://www.familytreemaker.com/support.html — this is your best source for accurate assistance with Family Tree Maker.


Family File Status
The Family File Status dialog box

The Family File Status dialog box tells you the name of your file, the size of your file, how many individuals it contains, and how many text records it contains.  When you're finished looking at the information, click OK.


The ReadMe file

The ReadMe file contains a brief explanation of what’s new in this version of Family Tree Maker, plus any last minute information that couldn't be included in the manual.

The ReadMe file is in the form of a Help system, just like the one that you're reading now.  It was installed in the same folder as Family Tree Maker, and is called Readme32.HLP.

To see the ReadMe file, go to your Windows Explorer, navigate to the folder in which you have installed Family Tree Maker (usually “ftw”) and double-click Readme32.HLP.

In addition, we have included:

•	Changes you will notice from the previous version of Family Tree Maker

•	Tips on saving your Family File information

•	Updated information on how to contact Technical Support

•	Additional technical tips that have been requested by some of our users


The Data Exchange Utility (DEU)

The Data Exchange Utility is no longer needed to export information to GEDCOM and to import information from GEDCOM.  Family Tree Maker for Windows can do this automatically.  "GEDCOM Import and Export" gives instructions on transferring data between Family Tree Maker and GEDCOM.

See also

GEDCOM Import and Export


Picture size and your computer

Family Tree Maker cannot import a Kodak Photo CD picture file that is larger than the amount of physical RAM or hard disk space available on your machine.  Physical RAM refers to the size of the memory chips that are in your computer.  Keep in mind that once Windows is running, some of your computer's physical RAM is already in use and is not available for importing pictures.

The higher the resolution of a particular picture, the larger the picture file will be.  If your machine is unable to handle a picture at a higher resolution, try importing it at a lower resolution.  Please note that the compression that you choose for a picture does not affect whether or not Family Tree Maker can import it.  This is because compression takes place after a picture has been imported.

The table below should give you an idea of approximate picture sizes before compression.  For example, if you wanted to import a picture at the 1024 x 1536 resolution, you would need 4.7 MB of physical RAM available, no matter what compression you chose for the picture.  Please keep this limitation of your computer hardware in mind when you work with Kodak Photo CD pictures.

Photo CD Picture Resolution	Approximate Required Physical RAM
64 x 96 (thumbnail)	36K
128 x 192	73K
256 x 384 (recommended)	295K
512 x 768	1.2 MB
1024 x 1536	4.7 MB
2048 x 3072	18.9 MB

Note:  For troubleshooting help and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs), remember to visit http://www.familytreemaker.com/support.html — this is your best source for accurate assistance with Family Tree Maker.


System information

System Information is a dialog box that gives you information about your computer, such as the amount of memory available to your computer and the display type.  If you call our technical support lines, a technical support representative may ask for this information.

To display the System Information dialog box:

1.	From the Help menu, select System Information (ALT, H, I).

Family Tree Maker displays the System Information dialog box.

The Run option on this dialog box also allows you to access standard Windows system editors.

2.	When you’re finished using this dialog box, click OK.

Note:  Your printer driver information will be displayed in this window if they have installed properly.


System Requirements

Family Tree Maker requires an IBM PC or compatible that meets the requirements listed below.  Please realize that these are the minimum requirements.  As with all programs, a faster processor, more RAM, and more free disk space will enhance performance.

Also keep in mind that the more family information you enter, the more free hard disk space and available RAM you will need.  If you plan to include many pictures, sounds, or videos in your Family Tree Maker Scrapbooks, you will need a substantial amount of hard disk space.

If your system does not meet these minimum requirements, we cannot guarantee that the program will function correctly.  You will need to upgrade your system to meet these requirements if you wish to use Family Tree Maker.

Component	Minimum Requirement
CPU	486 IBM PC or compatible (Pentium or higher strongly recommended)
Operating System	Microsoft® Windows® 95
RAM	16 MB (more strongly recommended)
Free Disk Space	50 MB (after installation)
CD-ROM Drive	This drive must be part of your system — as opposed to a drive that you access via a network Note: This drive does not need to be Kodak compatible unless you want to insert Kodak Photo CD pictures into your Scrapbooks.
Monitor	640x480 display running at least 16 colors (256 colors and higher supported)
Mouse	Microsoft compatible
Optional Devices:

You can take advantage of Family Tree Maker's optional features with the following optional devices:

•	Modem (to connect to Family Tree Maker Online)

•	Printer or plotter (to print trees, reports and other documents)

•	Scanner (to digitize graphic images)

•	Kodak Photo CD-compatible CD-ROM drive (to use Kodak Photo CDs)

•	Video capture card (to use video clips)

•	Sound card (to use audio clips)


Entering user information

To enter user information:

1. From the Help menu, select User Information.

Family Tree Maker displays the current information on record.

2. To make changes or additions, click Update.

Family Tree Maker asks if you are a member of the Family File.

3. If Yes, Family Tree Maker displays the Index of Individuals dialog box.  Select yourself from the list and click OK.  Family Tree Maker automatically displays your available information in the User Information dialog box.

If No, Family Tree Maker displays the User Information dialog box.

4. Edit your User Information and click OK.

Family Tree Maker makes your changes and closes the dialog box.


The User Information dialog box

Family Tree Maker provides a form in which you can enter information that identifies you as the person who created the Family File.   This information is stored with your file and is automatically added to your World Family Tree submissions.

Name, address — Entering your name and address will allow the people you share your files with to contact you.  It will also act as source information in their files.  In the case of a World Family Tree submission, Genealogy.com needs your name and address in case there is a problem with your Family File and we need to contact you.  Family Tree Maker cannot finish the submission process until you have filled in your first name, last name, street address (or P.O. Box), city, state, and zip.  If your address is in a country other than the United States, Family Tree Maker does not require the state and zip fields.  However, please fill out the entire address needed for mail delivery.

Phone (optional) — If you want to be contacted by phone, include your phone number.  Don't forget your area or country code!

Date — Family Tree Maker uses the date from your computer's internal calendar.  If the date is incorrect, please change it.  It is vital to have the correct date on your Family File in case you later send out an updated version.

E-mail (optional) — Please fill in your e-mail address if you want users of your file to be able to contact you by e-mail.


The Merge Fields dialog box

When you have entered the same person twice, Family Tree Maker attempts to merge that person's information together.  In this process, occasionally Family Tree Maker will have to ask you which of two sets of information is correct.  In this case, Family Tree Maker will display the Merge Fields dialog box.  When it appears, select the information that you want to keep in your Family File.  Family Tree Maker will discard the incorrect information.


FamilyFinder: what it is & how to use it

Overview

All about FamilyFinder

How to...

Open Family Archives

Use Introduction, Contents, Index, and Information pages

Search for names

Move between pages

Scroll through an index

Copy and print information

Purchase Family Archives

See reports and trees

See also...

Using the FamilyFinder Report

Search for your relatives on the Internet


All about FamilyFinder

You can use the FamilyFinder view to read Family Archives and the FamilyFinder Index.

Family Archives are CDs containing information from a variety of records, such as census records, marriage records, Social Security death records, and linked pedigrees.  They come in four varieties:

 Image Family Archives contain microfilmed images of records, such as military records.

 Data Family Archives consist of information from marriage records, death records, and much more.

 Text Family Archives contain paragraphs of information from books, such as genealogies.

 World Family Tree Archives contain family trees that were contributed to the World Family Tree Project by Family Tree Maker customers.  World Family Tree Archives work slightly differently than the other Family Archives, so you'll see separate sets of instructions for them.

The FamilyFinder Index is the index to all of the Family Archives.  You already have the FamilyFinder Index -- it came on the same CDs as your Family Tree Maker program.  You can also access it at http://www.familytreemaker.com.  Family Archives are available from Genealogy.com.  For more information, contact Genealogy.com Customer Service at 800-548-1806.

The FamilyFinder view is equipped with a special tool called the Search Expert.  The Search Expert can help you locate the names of your ancestors in the FamilyFinder Index and Family Archives.  When the Search Expert finds a matching name in the FamilyFinder Index, it tells you which Family Archive contains more information about the name.  Reading the information in that Family Archive will help you determine if you've actually found your ancestor, or just someone with a similar name.  When you do find one of your ancestors, you can add information from the Family Archive directly to your Family File.


Opening Family Archives

To open the FamilyFinder Index or a Family Archive:

1.	Insert the CD in your computer's CD-ROM drive.

2.	From the View menu, select FamilyFinder (ALT, V, Y).

Family Tree Maker displays the Introduction page of the FamilyFinder Index or Family Archive.  If this is the first time that you've opened a particular Family Archive, you will see a license agreement.  Please read it carefully.


Using Introduction, Contents, Index, and Information pages

Using Introduction pages

Using Contents pages

Using Index pages

Using Information pages


Using Introduction pages

Overview

All about Introduction pages

How to...

Search for names

Move between pages

Copy text

Print text

Purchase Family Archives

See reports and trees

What is this?

The toolbar

The tabs on the right side of the screen


All about Introduction pages

Introduction pages give you general information about the contents of Family Archives.  They also provide you with important information about searching in different types of records.  Understanding this information can help you research your family more effectively.


The tabs on the right side of the screen

Click these tabs to turn to the different types of pages in the Family Archive.


Using Contents pages

Overview

All about Contents pages

How to...

Search for names

Turn to more detailed information

Move between pages

Purchase Family Archives

See reports and trees

What is this?

The toolbar

The tabs on the right side of the screen

The CD icon


All about Contents pages

The FamilyFinder Index Contents page lists all of the Family Archives.  The Contents pages of most Family Archives are similar to the contents pages of a book:  they tell you how the information is divided into sections and chapters.  For example, in some Family Archives, each section contains information from a state, and each chapter contains information from a county in that state.


Turning to more detailed information

You can use the Contents page to go to information that interests you:

 In the FamilyFinder Index, for details about the information in the currently selected Family Archive, click Find out in the lower left corner.  To view the information in a Family Archive that you own, select the Family Archive's title and click Open.  The titles of the Family Archives that you own will have CD icons to the left of them.

Note:  If you've never used the Family Archive before, you will see a "How to order" button instead of an "Open" button.  Once you've viewed a Family Archive, the How to order button changes to an Open button.  To use the Family Archive for the first time, simply insert the CD in your CD-ROM drive.

 In Family Archives, select the section and chapter that you want to see and click Turn to.

 In World Family Tree Archives, select the pedigree that you want to see and click Turn to.

See also

How to: search for names


The CD icon

The CD icon indicates which Family Archives you own.  It is only visible on the Contents page of the FamilyFinder Index.


The ellipsis button

The Ellipsis button indicates that there is too much information in a field for it all to be visible.  Click the button to display a dialog box containing all of the information for that field.


Using Index pages

Overview

All about Index pages

How to...

Search for names

Turn to more detailed information

Scroll through an index

Copy and print index entries

Move between pages

Purchase Family Archives

See reports and trees

What is this?

The toolbar

The tabs on the right side of the screen

The CD icon

The ellipsis button

The magnifying glass

The Next, Previous, First, and Final buttons


All about Index pages

Index pages provide you with more detailed information than Contents pages.  Instead of showing you how the information is organized, they list the names of the individuals in the Family Archives.  The Index page in the FamilyFinder Index lists all names from all Family Archives (over 250 million unique names).  The Index page of a Family Archive shows the name of every individual in that particular Family Archive.


Turning to more detailed information

You can use the Index page to go to information that interests you:

 In the FamilyFinder Index, for details about the information in the currently selected Family Archive click Find out in the lower left corner.  To view the information in a Family Archive that you own, select the Family Archive's title and click Open.  The titles of the Family Archives that you own will have CD icons to the left of them.

Note:  If you've never used the Family Archive before, you will see a "How to order" button instead of an "Open" button.  Once you've viewed a Family Archive, the How to order button changes to an Open button.  To use the Family Archive for the first time, simply insert the CD in your CD-ROM drive.

 In Family Archives, select a name and click Turn to.

 In World Family Tree Archives, select a name and click Turn to.  To the right of each name is the number of the family tree in which you can find that name.  Also listed are the individual's birth date and the state, country, or geographic area of their birth, death, or marriage, if available.

See also

How to: search for names


The More About dialog box

This dialog box summarizes what type of information is available about an individual on a particular Family Archive.  For more details about the Family Archive, click Archive info.  For purchasing information, click To order.


The More About dialog box

This dialog box contains all of the information from the field whose Ellipsis button you just clicked.  The field has an Ellipsis button because there is more much information than will fit in the actual field.  Click OK when you're finished reading the information.


The More About dialog box

This dialog box summarizes what type of information is available in a particular tree or record.  Click OK when you're finished reading the information.


Scrolling through an index

The "Scroll to name" field is for jumping from one section of the index to another when you are browsing through the names.  Do not use it to do a thorough search for a name.  Instead, when you want to do a thorough search, use the Search Expert.  See the topic How to: search for names.

To scroll to a name in an index:

1.	Click in the Scroll to name field.

2.	Start typing the last name of the individual that you want to scroll to.

With each character you type, you will get closer to the name you are looking for.  You can type part or all of the name, as long as it is in the following format:  Last name, First name Middle name.


Copying and printing index entries

Selecting and deselecting index entries

Printing selected entries

Copying selected entries


The magnifying glass

After you use the Search Expert to perform a search, the magnifying glasses appear to indicate which information matches your search request.


The Next, Previous, First, and Final buttons

After you use the Search Expert to perform a search, these buttons appear so that you can jump from one match to the next.  Click Next to move forward and Previous to move backwards.  Click First to go to the very first match and Final to go to the last match.


Using Information pages

Overview

All about Information pages

How to...

Use record Information pages

Use text Information pages

Use image Information pages

Use World Family Tree mode pages


All about Information pages

The Information pages contain actual genealogical information and can also tell you where to go to find the record that the information in the Family Archive was taken from.  They come in four different varieties:

 First, there are data Information pages.  They consist of records about individuals or marriages.  You can copy the information in these records directly to your Family File.

 Second, there are text Information pages.  They contain free-form text that you can select and copy to the Clipboard.

 Third, there are image Information pages.  These are images of records and book pages, as though someone took pictures of them.  You can print the images, or copy them to the Clipboard or to Scrapbooks in your Family File.

 Finally, there are World Family Tree Information pages.  You can view and print them on Family Pages or in trees, reports, Family Group Sheets, and more.  When you find a connection to your family, you can append or merge these family trees with your Family File.


Using record Information pages

Overview

All about record Information pages

How to...

Search for names

Scroll through Information pages

Go to a specific page

Copy individual records

Move between pages

Purchase Family Archives

See reports and trees

What is this?

The toolbar

The tabs on the right side of the screen

The magnifying glass

The Next, Previous, First, and Final buttons

The Copy Information button


All about record Information pages

Record information pages contain records about individuals or marriages.  You can copy the information in these records directly to your Family File.  When a field contains too much information to fit in the allotted space, Family Tree Maker places an ellipsis button (...) to the right of it.  Click the button to see the rest of the information.


The Copy Information button

Click this button to copy the information in a record directly to your Family File.


Using text information pages

Overview

All about text Information pages

How to...

Search for names

Scroll through Information pages

Go to a specific page

Move between pages

Copying text

Printing text

Purchase Family Archives

See reports and trees

What is this?

The toolbar

The tabs on the right side of the screen

The magnifying glass

The Next, Previous, First, and Final buttons


All about text Information pages

Text Information pages contain paragraphs of information from books, such as genealogies.  You can search through the pages in these Family Archives to look for more family information and copy the text to the Clipboard.


Using image Information pages

Overview

All about image Information pages

How to...

Search for names

Scroll through Information pages

Go to a specific page

Move between pages

Change the size of an image

Copy images

Print images

Purchase Family Archives

See reports and trees

What is this?

The toolbar

The tabs on the right side of the screen

The magnifying glass

The Next, Previous, First, and Final buttons

The Copy buttons

The Zoom buttons

The Prev Pg/Next Pg buttons

The View button


All about image Information pages

Image Information pages contain scanned images of records, such as military records.  You can read these images to get family information, and copy the images to the Clipboard or into Family Tree Maker Scrapbooks.


The Copy buttons

Click either of these buttons to select the current image for copying to the Clipboard or to a Scrapbook in your Family File.


The Zoom buttons

Click Zoom In to make the text in the image larger.  Click Zoom Out to make the text in the image smaller.  Please note, however, that these buttons only affect the size of the image on the screen, and will not change the size of the image when you print.


The Prev and Next buttons
The PrevPg and NextPg buttons

Click PrevPg to turn one page backward.  Click NextPg to turn one page forward.


The View button

Click the View button to increase the size of the viewing area.  You'll be able to see more of the image at once.


Scrolling through Information pages

Please note that the "Scroll to name" field is only available when the information in the Family Archive is organized alphabetically.  In addition, the "Go To" command is only available for Text and Image Family Archives.  When you want to do a thorough search for a name, be sure to use the Search Expert.  See the topic How to: search for names.

To scroll with the "Scroll to name" field:

1.	Click in the Scroll to name field.

2.	Start typing the last name of the individual that you want to find.

With each character you type, you will get closer to the name you are looking for.  You can type part or all of the name, as long as it is in the following format:  Last name, First name Middle name.

To use the "Go To" command:

1.	From the Edit menu, select Go To (ALT, E, G).

Family Tree Maker displays the Go To dialog box.

2.	In most cases there are Page and Record fields.  Enter the number of the page and/or record that you want to see.

3.	Click OK.

Family Tree Maker displays the page you requested.


Going to a specific page

To use the "Go To" command:

1.	From the Edit menu, select Go To (ALT, E, G).

Family Tree Maker displays the Go To dialog box.

2.	In most cases there are Page and Record fields.  Enter the number of the page and/or record that you want to see.

3.	Click OK.

Family Tree Maker displays the page you requested.


The Go To dialog box

You can use this dialog box when you know exactly where you want to go to.  This is faster than browsing or doing a search.  Sometimes the field names will be slightly different than what's listed below.

Volume — This list includes the titles of all Volumes that are on the CD that is currently in the CD-ROM drive.  Select the Volume that you want to open.

Page number — Type the number of the page that you want to turn to.


Moving between pages

Both the Family Archives and the FamilyFinder Index have labeled tabs along the right side of the screen.  You can click these tabs to turn to the Introduction, Contents, Index, and Information pages.  You always know what page you are on, because each page has a title at the top, such as "FamilyFinder Index -- Master Table of Contents."


Searching with the Search Expert

Selecting FamilyFinder searching preferences

Searching in the FamilyFinder Index

Searching in Family Archives

Searching in Family Archives containing free-form text

Searching in World Family Tree Archives

Using the Soundex Calculator


Searching for names

Selecting FamilyFinder searching preferences

Searching in the FamilyFinder Index

Searching in Family Archives

Searching in Family Archives containing free-form text

Searching in World Family Tree Archives

Using the Soundex Calculator


Searching in the FamilyFinder Index

To search in the FamilyFinder Index:

1.	Click Search Expert.

2.	To find matches for someone who is in your Family File, click Search for Someone from your Family File.  When you select this option, Family Tree Maker will use the information in your Family File, such as birth dates, death dates, married names, maiden names, and nicknames to help find matches for the individual that you choose in step 3.  To find matches for other names, or to search for someone you know is on a specific World Family Tree pedigree, click Search for Someone NOT from your Family File.

3.	Now you must tell Family Tree Maker what to search for.

If you chose "Search for Someone from your Family File," Family Tree Maker displays a list of the individuals from your Family File.  Select a name from the list.

If you chose "Search for Someone NOT from your Family File," Family Tree Maker displays a dialog box containing a "Name" field and a "Tree #" field.  Type the name you are looking for.  It can be in any basic name format, such as First Middle Last or Last, First.  Click here for details.  If you also want to look for that person on a specific World Family Tree pedigree, type the tree number also.

4.	Click Start search.

If there are no matches, Family Tree Maker displays a message telling you this.  You may want to read What if I can't find my ancestor's name?  Otherwise, Family Tree Maker places a magnifying glass to the left of the matches, and highlights.  the best match.

What can you do with these matches?  Your options are listed below.

 Click Next to move forward and click Previous to move backwards through the matches.  First will take you to the very first match, and Final will take you to the last match.

 Select and deselect index entries so you can print a list of them or copy a list to the Clipboard.  See Selecting and deselecting index entries.

 If you own a Family Archive containing a match, you can open it and view the information associated with the match.  See Opening Family Archives from within the FamilyFinder Index.

 If you do not own a Family Archive containing a particular match, you can get purchasing information by highlighting the match and clicking How to order.

 Find out what type of information is available in a Family Archive that contains a match.  See Getting more information about a match.

You can also use the scroll bars and the "Scroll to name" field to move through the FamilyFinder Index and look at names other than the matches, if you like.  The current matches will remain marked until you begin another search, leave the FamilyFinder view, or choose the Clear Search command from the Edit menu.


The Search Expert dialog box

Search for Someone from your Family File — To find matches for someone who is in your Family File, click this button.  When you select this option, Family Tree Maker will use the information in your Family File, such as birth dates, death dates, married names, maiden names, and nicknames to help find matches for the individual that you are looking for.

Search for Someone NOT from your Family File — To find matches for any other name, click this button.


The Search Expert dialog box

Name  Type the name that you want to find in this field.  It can be in any basic name format, such as First Middle Last or Last, First.  Click here for details.

Start search  When you are ready to begin your search, click this button.


Name formats

You can use any of the following name formats listed in the table below.  In addition, you may use a question mark (?) to hold the place of a single character or an asterisk (*) to indicate "any."  For example, you could type Sm?th to look for both "Smith" and "Smyth" simultaneously.  If you typed Smith* you would find any word that began with the letters "Smith", such as "Smithe," "Smithy" "Smithson," and also "Smith."

A note about “special characters” — If the name you are searching for contains a special letter with a symbol over it (such as š or û), try searching for that name by replacing the special letter with the “wildcard” asterisk (*) mentioned above.

If you type this...	You find this...
Last	Entries only containing the surname
First Last or Last, First	Entries containing the first name and surname
, First	Entries only containing the first name
, First Middle	Entries only containing the first name and middle name
Last, First Middle or First Middle Last	Entries containing the first name, middle name, and surname


Name formats

You can use any of the following name formats listed in the table below.  In addition, you may use a question mark (?) to hold the place of a single character, or an asterisk (*), also called a “wildcard,” to indicate "any."  For example, you could type Sm?th to look for both "Smith" and "Smyth" simultaneously.  If you typed Smith* you would find any word that began with the letters "Smith", such as "Smithe," "Smithy" "Smithson," and also "Smith."

A note about “special characters” — If the name you are searching for contains a special letter with a symbol over it (such as š or û), try searching for that name by replacing the special letter with the “wildcard” asterisk (*) mentioned above.

If you type this...	You find this...
Last	Entries only containing the surname
First Last or Last, First	Entries containing the first name and surname
, First	Entries only containing the first name
, First Middle	Entries only containing the first name and middle name
Last, First Middle or First Middle Last	Entries containing the first name, middle name, and surname


Date formats

You can use any of the date formats listed in the table below.

If you type this...	You find this...
Month Day, Year	The exact date
Year	Any date in that year
Month and Year	Any date in that month of that year
Year - Year	Any date between the beginning of the first year and the end of the second year


Date formats

You can use any of the date formats listed in the table below.

If you type this...	You find this...
Month, Day, Year	The exact date
Year	Any date in that year
Month and Year	Any date in that month of that year
Year - Year	Any date between the beginning of the first year and the end of the second year


Tips for searching Family Archives

Look at the records on the Family Archive before searching.  This will provide you with useful information for your search.  Whenever possible, enter your text into the search field in the same general format as it appears in the records.  For example, on some Census Family Archives, there is a field called "Township."  If the only item that appears in that field is the name of the location, you'll know  to enter just "Jefferson" and not "Jefferson Township" when searching.

Entering less information is usually better.  For example, if there is a date field on the Family Archive, and the dates appear as both "May 23, 1899" and "May 1899", try entering your date with the month and year only, "August 1900".  Because the Family Archive contains dates in both formats, your chances of finding a match will be much higher when you use "less" information.  Click here for a list of valid date formats.

Some fields require specific formatting.  For example, the Social Security Number field on the Social Security Death Benefits Family Archive requires that you enter the number you are looking for in one of the following formats:

333-22-4444  (9 digits in 3 groups, separated by hyphens)

333224444  (9 digits only - no separators)

333 22 4444  (9 digits in 3 groups, separated by single spaces)

If you try to use any other characters as separators or if you group the numbers differently than the examples above, Search Expert will not be able to find a match.

Wildcards, such as the "*" (asterisk) and "?" (question mark) will generally work only in fields which contain words.  For example, "name" fields and "location" fields.

Don't forget the "other" CDs in a multiple-volume set!  Some Family Archives are so large, they require two or more CDs.  For example, the FamilyFinder Index is now split across 2 CDs by last name -- the first CD contains surnames from A to K and the second CD contains surnames from L to Z.  Check to see if you have the correct CD in the CD-ROM drive for the name you wish to find.


Selecting and deselecting index entries

When you see index entries that interest you, you can place check marks next to them to select them for printing or copying.  The table below describes how to select index entries.

To do this...	Do this...
Select a single entry	Highlight the entry and press the spacebar, or from the Edit menu, choose Select Entry
Deselect a single entry	Highlight the entry and press the spacebar, or from the Edit menu, choose Deselect Entry
Select all matching entries	From the Edit menu, choose Select All Matching Entries
Deselect all matching entries	From the Edit menu, choose Deselect All Matching Entries
Once you have made your selections, you can either print the entries in a list or copy the list to the Clipboard.  The list that you create will include the individual's name, as well as the information listed to the right of the name, such as the Family Archive number and date range.  See either Printing selected entries or Copying selected entries.


Copying and printing information

Selecting and deselecting index entries

Printing selected entries

Copying selected entries

Copying individual records

Copying images

Printing images

Copying text

Printing text


Printing selected entries

To print selected entries:

1.	Turn on your printer.

2.	From the File menu, select Print (ALT, F, P).

Family Tree Maker displays the Print dialog box where you can select printing options.  For a description of the options in the Print dialog box, click here.

3.	Click OK when you've selected your printing options.

Family Tree Maker prints the list.


Copying selected entries

To copy selected entries to the Clipboard:

1.	From the Edit menu, choose Copy (ALT, E, C).

2.	You can now use the Paste command to insert the contents of the Clipboard wherever you like.  In most cases, you probably want to open a Windows word processor or spreadsheet and paste the text in there.

If you need help with another Windows program, please refer to that program's manual.


Getting more information about a match

To find out what information a Family Archive contains about a match, highlight the match and click Find out in the lower left corner.  Family Tree Maker displays the More About dialog box.  It summarizes what type of information is available in the Family Archive.  For more details about the Family Archive, click Archive info.  For purchasing information, click To order in the lower left corner.


Opening Family Archives from within the FamilyFinder Index

To open a Family Archive from within the FamilyFinder Index:

1.	Do a search using the Search Expert.  See Searching in the FamilyFinder Index for details.

2.	Click the matching name you want to view.  This name must have a magnifying glass next to it.

3.	Highlight a matching name and click Open.

Note:  If you've never used the Family Archive before, you will see a "How to order" button instead of an "Open" button.  Once you've viewed a Family Archive, the How to order button changes to an Open button, and Family Tree Maker also places a CD icon to the left of the archive title on the FamilyFinder Index Contents page.  To use the Family Archive for the first time, simply insert the CD in your CD-ROM drive

4.	Insert the correct Family Archive into your CD-ROM drive when Family Tree Maker asks you to do so.

5.	Family Tree Maker opens the Family Archive and displays the Information page containing the first match.

What can you do with these matches?  Your options are listed below.

 Click Next to move forward and click Previous to move backwards through the matches.  First will take you to the very first match, and Final will take you to the last match.

 Copy matching information directly to a Family File, either merging it with an existing individual's information or creating a new individual.  See Copying individual records.

 From image Information pages, copy images to the Clipboard or select them for printing.  See Copying images or Printing images.


Searching in Family Archives

Family Archives are large collections of genealogical data copied onto CDs. They are easily viewable in Family Tree Maker.

To open the FamilyFinder Index or a Family Archive:

1.	Insert a FamilyFinder Index CD in your computer's CD-ROM drive.

2.	From the View menu, select FamilyFinder, then from the sub menu, select View CD.

Family Tree Maker displays the Introduction page of the FamilyFinder Index or Family Archive.  If this is the first time that you've opened a particular Family Archive, you will see a license agreement.  Please read it carefully.

You can begin a search from any page of a Family Archive:

1.	Click Search Expert.

2.	If you want to find matches for someone who is in your Family File, click Search for Someone from your Family File.  When you select this option, Family Tree Maker will use the information in your Family File, such as birth dates, death dates, married names, maiden names, and nicknames to help find matches for the individual that you choose in step 3.  If you want to find matches for a name that is not in your Family File, or if you want to search on another field in the Family Archive, click Search for Someone NOT from your Family File.

3.	Now you must tell Family Tree Maker what to search for.  There are two options, as described below.

If you chose "Search for Someone from your Family File," Family Tree Maker displays a list of the individuals from your Family File.  Select a name from the list.

If you chose "Search for Someone NOT from your Family File,", type the name in the Name field.  It can be in any basic name format, such as First Middle Last or Last, First.  Click here for details.  On some Family Archives, you can also search for other information such as dates and locations.  Click here for a list of valid date formats.  In the Tree # field, enter the tree number listed in your FamilyFinder Report, if available.

Note:  For Marriage Family Archives, Soundex codes are available only for the first spouse and not for the second spouse.  So, if you want to find the husband's name, enter his name in the first spouse field, if you want to find the wife's name, enter her name in the first spouse field.

4.	Click Start search.

If there are no matches, FamilyFinder displays a message telling you this.  You may want to read What if I can't find my ancestor's name?  Otherwise, Family Tree Maker displays the first Information page containing a match.  If the Family Archive contains images, there will be a magnifying glass next to the page number below the image.

If the information in the Family Archive is in records, there will be a magnifying glass to the left of the matches.  When a field in a record contains too much information to fit in the allotted space, Family Tree Maker places an ellipsis button (...) to the right of it.  Click the button to see the remaining information.

What can you do with these matches?  Your options are listed below.

 Click Next to move forward and click Previous to move backwards through the matches.  First will take you to the very first match, and Final will take you to the last match.

 From record Information pages, copy matching information directly to a Family File, either merging it with an existing individual's information or creating a new individual.  See Copying individual records.

 On image Information pages, view the image at different sizes.  See Changing the size of an image.

 From image Information pages, copy images to the Clipboard or select them for printing.  See Copying images or Printing images.

You can also use the scroll bars and the "Scroll to name" field to move through the FamilyFinder Index and look at names other than the matches, if you like.  The current matches will remain marked until you begin another search, leave the FamilyFinder view, or choose the Clear Search command from the Edit menu.


The Search Expert dialog box

Search for Someone from your Family File — To find matches for someone who is in your Family File, click this button.  When you select this option, Family Tree Maker will use the information in your Family File, such as birth dates, death dates, married names, maiden names, and nicknames to help find matches for the individual that you are looking for.

Search for Someone NOT from your Family File — To find matches for any other name, click this button.

Search all archives — If you decide that instead of searching only the Family Archive that is currently in your CD-ROM drive, you want to search all Family Archives simultaneously, click this button.  Family Tree Maker will ask you to insert the FamilyFinder Index and will then display the FamilyFinder Index Search Expert.


The Search Expert dialog box

Name — This list contains all of the individuals in your Family File.  Click the name of the individual you want to search for in the FamilyFinder Index or Family Archive.

Scroll to name — To quickly locate a name in the list, type that name in the following format:  Last name, First name Middle name.  With each character you type, you will get closer to the name you are looking for.

Start search — When you have selected the name that you want to find matches for, click this button.


The Search Expert dialog box

Name — Type the name that you want to find in this field.  It can be in any basic name format, such as First Middle Last or Last, First.  Click here for details.

Depending on which Family Archive you currently have in your CD-ROM drive, you can also search on other fields.  Type the appropriate information in the field.  Keep in mind that some fields require you to type the information exactly as it appears in entries on the Family Archive in order to find a match.  For more tips on searching, click here.

Start search  When you are ready to begin your search, click this button.


Copying individual records

Before you begin with the steps below, be sure that you have the correct Family File open.

To copy information to a Family File:

1.	Select the record that you want to copy by clicking it.

2.	Click Copy information.

Note:  This option may not be available with all Family Archives.

3.	If you want to merge the information with an existing individual's information, click Copy to someone already in your Family File and continue with Merging information.  If you want to create a new individual, click Create a new individual to copy to and continue with Adding new information.


The Copy Information dialog box

Name — This list contains all of the individuals in your Family File.  Click the name of the individual who you want to associate this information with.

Scroll to name — To quickly locate a name in the list, type that name in the following format:  Last name, First name Middle name.  With each character you type, you will get closer to the name you are looking for.

Copy information — When you have selected the individual that you want to associate with this information, click this button.


The Copy Information dialog box

This dialog box tells you that Family Tree Maker is going to add a new individual to your Family File.  The information you selected to copy will be associated with the new individual.

Copy information — Click this button if this is what you want to do.


The Choose Sex dialog box

Select the option button corresponding to the sex of the individual listed in the dialog box and then click OK.


Merging information

1.	Highlight the individual you want to merge the information into and then click Copy information.

2.	To map a field in your destination file to a field in your source file, click the field name in the Fields to Import list.

3.	Click Import field.

If there is more than one possible match for the Family Archive field, Family Tree Maker displays the Change Fields dialog box.  In this case, continue with step 4.  If there is only one possible match for that Family Archive field, Family Tree Maker automatically inserts the Family File field name in the "Fields in Family Tree Maker" list.  In this case, skip to step 6.

4.	In the Change Fields dialog box, click the name of the Family File field that you want to fill with information from the Family Archive field you selected in step 2.

5.	Click OK to return to the Fields to Include dialog box.

If you later wish to change the mapping of a Family File field, click the field name in the Fields in Family Tree Maker list and then click Change field.  If this button stays grayed out, the mapping for that field is preset and cannot be changed.

6.	Repeat steps 2 through 5 until all of the source fields that you wish to map have a destination field in the "Fields in Family Tree Maker" list.

All fields in the "Fields to Import" list that do not have a field opposite them in the "Fields in Family Tree Maker" list will not be brought into your Family File.

7.	If you want to remove a field from the "Fields in Family Tree Maker" list, click the field name and then click Don't import.

8.	Click OK in the Fields to Include dialog box after making your selections.

Family Tree Maker adds the information to your Family File.  Some of the fields that Family Tree Maker fills with information may have sources (see How to: note your sources).  When this is the case, Family Tree Maker adds a description of the Family Archive on which you found the information to the corresponding Source field.

9.	If some of the fields already contain information, Family Tree Maker lets you choose which information to keep in your Family File.  Click OK after making your selections.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Family Archive's Information page.


Adding new information

1.	Family Tree Maker tells you that it is adding a new individual to your Family File.  If this is what you want to do, click Copy information.

2.	Select the option button corresponding to the sex of the individual listed in the dialog box and then click OK.

3.	To map a field in the Family Archive to a field in your Family File, click the field name in the Fields to Import list.

4.	Click Import field.

If there is more than one possible match for the Family Archive field, Family Tree Maker displays the Change Fields dialog box.  In this case, continue with step 5.  If there is only one possible match for that Family Archive field, Family Tree Maker automatically inserts the Family File field name in the "Resulting Fields" list.  In this case, skip to step 7.

5.	In the Change Fields dialog box, click the name of the Family File field that you want to fill with information from the Family Archive field you selected in step 3.

6.	Click OK to return to the Fields to Include dialog box.

If you later wish to change the mapping of a Family File field, click the field name in the Resulting Fields list and then click Change field.  If this button stays grayed out, the mapping for that field is preset and cannot be changed.

7.	Repeat steps 3 through 6 until all of the source fields that you wish to map have a destination field in the "Resulting Fields" list.

All fields in the "Fields to import" list that do not have a field opposite them in the "Resulting Fields" list will not be brought into your Family File.

8.	If you want to remove a field from the "Resulting Fields" list, click the field name and then click Don't import.

9.	Click OK in the Fields to Include dialog box after making your selections.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Family Archive's Information page.

Family Tree Maker adds the individual to your Family File, but the individual will not be linked to anyone else in your Family File.  You will need to use one of the Attach commands to create links with other individuals.  See Editing the family structure.

Some of the fields that Family Tree Maker fills with information may have sources (see How to: note your sources).  When this is the case, Family Tree Maker adds a description of the Family Archive on which you found the information to the corresponding Source field.


The Facts to Import dialog box

Import Fact — Click this button to import the currently selected data field into your Family File.

Change Fact — Click this button to select the name of the fact that best describes the information you selected to import.

Create a New Fact — Click this button to create a new fact field that corresponds to the imported data. If none of Family Tree Maker’s built-in fact fields correspond to the data you’re importing, this lets you create a custom fact that fits the description.

Don't Import — Click this button to remove the currently selected destination field from the "Resulting Fields" list.  If you do not import the fact, it will not appear in your new Family File..


The Change Fields dialog box

Select the name of the field in your Family Tree Maker file that you want to fill with information from the field in the currently selected Family Archive field.


The Copy Information to Family File dialog box

Copy to someone already in your Family File — If you want to merge the information with an existing individual's information, click this button.

Create a new individual to copy to — If you want to create a new individual to associate the information with, click this button.


Changing the size of an image

There are two ways to change the size of an image:

 You can make the text in the image larger or smaller by clicking Zoom In or Zoom Out.  Please note, however, that these buttons only affect the size of the image on the screen and will not change the size of the printed image.

 You can increase the size of the viewing area and see more of the image at once by clicking View.  Family Tree Maker will display the image in the View dialog box.  You can move from image to image by clicking the PrevPg and NextPg buttons, and you can use Zoom In and Zoom Out to change the size of the text in the image.  However, most menu commands and toolbar buttons are unavailable while you are in the View dialog box.  To close the View dialog box and return to the Image page, click Go Back.


The View dialog box

Zoom In — Click this button to make the text in the image larger.

Zoom Out — Click this button to make the text in the image smaller.

Note:  These buttons only affect the size of the image on the screen, and will not change the size of the image when you print.

PrevPg — Click this button to move backward through the images.

Next Pg — Click this button to move forward through the images.

Close — Click this button to close the View dialog box and return to the Register page.

The following buttons only appear when you have started a search by clicking Search on the toolbar, or by choosing Search from the Edit menu.

Prev Match (down arrow with magnifying glass) — Click this button to move backward through the matches.

Next Match (up arrow with magnifying glass) — Click this button to move forward through the matches.

First Match (down arrow with line and magnifying glass) — Click this button to move to the first match.

Final Match (up arrow with line and magnifying glass) — Click this button to move to the last match.


Copying images from Family Archives

To copy an image:

1.	Display the image that you want to copy.

2.	Click Copy this image to the Clipboard.

If you want to paste the image to a Windows word processor or spreadsheet program; skip the remaining steps.  If you are copying the image to a Scrapbook, continue with step 3.

3.	Select the individual whose Scrapbook you want to add the image to.

4.	From the View menu, select Scrapbook.

Family Tree Maker displays the Scrapbook for the selected individual.

5.	From the Edit menu, select Paste Picture/Object.

Family Tree Maker adds the image to the individual's Scrapbook.


The Copy Image to Family File dialog box

1.	Select the individual whose Scrapbook you want to add the selected image to.

2.	Click Add image to Scrapbook page.

Family Tree Maker adds the image to the individual's Scrapbook.  In addition, Family Tree Maker adds a sentence to the "Description" field in the image's More About dialog box (see How to: create captions and categories for Picture/Objects).  This sentence begins with the word "Source," and gives information about the Family Archive from which you copied the image.


Printing text

To print text:

1.	Turn on your printer.

2.	Highlight the text that you want to print by clicking it with your mouse pointer and dragging over it.

You cannot select partial lines of text, only whole lines.  In addition, if you want to select more text than is visible in the text window, just keep dragging.  The text window will scroll as you drag.

3.	From the File menu, select Print Selected FamilyFinder Text (ALT, F, P).

Family Tree Maker first reminds you how to change the text formatting; click OK to clear the message.  (For instructions on changing the text formatting, see Selecting colors and styles for text.  Family Tree Maker then displays the Print dialog box where you can select printing options.  For a description of the options in the Print dialog box, click here.

4.	Click OK when you've selected your printing options.

Family Tree Maker prints the text.  Along with the text, Family Tree Maker prints source information about the Family Archive from which you selected it.


Printing images

To print an image:

1.	Display the image that you want to print.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Select Image (ALT, E, L).

Family Tree Maker places a printer icon in the upper-left corner of the dialog box.

3.	Repeat step 2 for any additional images that you want to print.

4.	When you have selected all of the images you want to print, from the File menu, choose Print (ALT, F, P).

Family Tree Maker asks you to confirm that you want to print all of the images you have selected.

5.	Click OK to print them.

Each image is printed on a separate page.  At the bottom of each page, Family Tree Maker prints source information about the Family Archive from which you copied the image.


Copying text

To copy text:

1.	Highlight the text that you want to copy by clicking it with your mouse pointer and dragging over it.

You cannot select partial lines of text, only whole lines.  In addition, if you want to select more text than is visible in the text window, just keep dragging.  The text window will scroll as you drag.

2.	Release the mouse button.

The text is now on the Clipboard.

3.	From the Edit menu, select Copy (ALT, E, C).

You may now paste the text anywhere you like, such as a Family Tree Maker Notes dialog box or a word processor.


Searching in Family Archives containing free-form text

You can begin a search from any page of a Family Archive:

1.	Click Search Expert.

2.	In the Find field type the text that you want to locate.

You can enter up to four words.  You may use a question mark (?) to hold the place of a single character or an asterisk (*) to indicate "any."  For example, you could type Sm?th to look for both "Smith" and "Smyth" simultaneously.  If you typed Smith* you would find any word that began with the letters "Smith", such as "Smithe," "Smithy" "Smithson," and also "Smith."  Please note that if you use a question mark or asterisk early in a word, it will take a long time for Family Tree Maker to complete the search.

3.	If you entered more than one word in step 2, enter a number from 1 to 99 in the field labeled Find these words within X words of each other.

This indicates how close the words must be to each other in the text.

4.	Click Start search.

If there are no matches, FamilyFinder displays a message telling you this.  Otherwise, Family Tree Maker displays the first page containing a match.  There will be a magnifying glass to the left of any line containing a match.

What can you do with these matches?  Your options are listed below.

 Click Next to move forward and click Previous to move backwards through the matches.  First will take you to the very first match, and Final will take you to the last match.

 Copy text to the Clipboard.  See Copying text.

 Print text for easy reading or filing.  See Printing text.

You can also use the scroll bars and the "Scroll to name" field to move through the text, if you like.  The current matches will remain marked until you begin another search, leave the FamilyFinder view, or choose the Clear Search command from the Edit menu.


The Search Expert dialog box

1.	In the Find field type the text that you want to locate.

You can enter up to four words.  You may use a question mark (?) to hold the place of a single character or an asterisk (*) to indicate "any."  For example, you could type Sm?th to look for both "Smith" and "Smyth" simultaneously.  If you typed Smith* you would find any word that began with the letters "Smith", such as "Smithe," "Smithy" "Smithson," and also "Smith."

2.	If you entered more than one word in step 1, enter a number from 1 to 99 in the field labeled Find these words within X words of each other.

This indicates how close the words must be to each other in the text.

3.	Click Start search.

Family Tree Maker begins the search.


Searching in World Family Tree Archives

You can begin a search from either the Index or Introduction page of a World Family Tree Archive:

1.	Click Search Expert.

2.	If you want to find matches for someone who is in your Family File, click Search for Someone from your Family File.  When you select this option, Family Tree Maker will use the information in your Family File, such as birth dates, death dates, married names, maiden names, and nicknames to help find matches for the individual that you choose.  If you want to find matches for a name that is not in your Family File, click Search for Someone NOT from your Family File.

If you decide that instead of searching only this Family Archive, you want to search all Family Archives simultaneously, click Search all archives.  Family Tree Maker will ask you to insert the FamilyFinder Index and will then display the FamilyFinder Index Search Expert.  Continue with step 2 in Searching in the FamilyFinder Index..

3.	Now you must tell Family Tree Maker what to search for.  There are two options, as described below.

If you chose "Search for Someone from your Family File," Family Tree Maker displays a list of the individuals from your Family File.  Select a name from the list.

If you chose "Search for Someone NOT from your Family File," Family Tree Maker displays a dialog box containing a "Name" field.  Type the name in that field.  It can be in any basic name format, such as First Middle Last or Last, First.  Click here for details.  You can also search for other information such as dates and locations.  Click here for a list of valid date formats.

A note about “special characters” — If the name you are searching for contains a special letter with a symbol over it (such as š or û), try searching for that name by replacing the special letter with the “wildcard” asterisk (*) mentioned above.

4.	Click Start search.

If there are no matches, FamilyFinder displays a message telling you this.  You may want to read What if I can't find my ancestor's name?  Otherwise, Family Tree Maker places a magnifying glass to the left of the matches, and highlights the best match.

What can you do with these matches?  Your options are listed below.

 Click Next to move forward and click Previous to move backwards through the matches.  First will take you to the very first match, and Final will take you to the last match.

 Select and deselect index entries so you can print a list of them or copy a list to the Clipboard.  See Selecting and deselecting index entries.

 Find out what type of information the World Family Tree pedigree contains about a matching name.  See Getting more info about a name from the World Family Tree.

 Go to the pedigree containing the information associated with a match.  Once the pedigree is open you can look through it and print it.  You can also add the information to your Family File if you believe that it is part of your family.  See Turning to a World Family Tree pedigree and How to: merge a World Family Tree Pedigree with a Family File. Please note that you will need between 3MB and 10MB free hard disk space to view World Family Tree pedigrees.

You can also use the scroll bars and the "Scroll to name" field to move through the FamilyFinder Index and look at names other than the matches, if you like.  The current matches will remain marked until you begin another search, leave the FamilyFinder view, or choose the Clear Search command from the Edit menu.


Using World Family Tree mode pages

Overview

All about World Family Tree mode pages

How to...

Merge a World Family Tree pedigree with a Family File

See other individuals in the pedigree

See and print trees and more

Exit World Family Tree mode

Purchase Family Archives

What is this?

The toolbar


The More About dialog box

This dialog box tells you what type of information about the currently selected individual is available in the World Family Tree pedigree containing that individual.


All about World Family Tree mode pages

World Family Tree mode pages contain family trees that were contributed to the World Family Tree Project by Family Tree Maker customers just like yourself.  You can view and print the information on Family Pages or in trees, reports, Family Group Sheets, and more.  When you find a connection to your family, you can append the information directly to your Family File.


Toolbar buttons in World Family Tree Mode

Toolbar buttons let you change views and exit World Family Tree mode, depending on which button you click.

Index — Click this button to see the Index of Individuals

FamPg — Click this button to see the current individual's Family Page.

Ancestor — Click this button to display an Ancestor tree with the current individual as the primary individual.

Descend — Click this button to display a Descendant tree with the current individual as the primary individual.

Kinship — Click this button to display a Kinship report for the primary individual.

FamGrp — Click this button to display a Family Group Sheet for the current individual.

Report — Click this button to display a report.

FamFind — Click this button to exit the World Family Tree pedigree and return to the World Family Tree Archive Index.


Getting more info about a name from the World Family Tree

To find out what type of information the World Family Tree contains about a name, highlight the name and click Find out in the lower left corner.  Family Tree Maker displays the More About dialog box.  It summarizes what type of information is available in the World Family Tree pedigree.  For more details about the pedigree, click Archive info.


Turning to a World Family Tree pedigree

To view a pedigree that's in a World Family Tree Archive, click Turn to from the Index page.  Family Tree Maker goes into a special World Family Tree mode that allows you to look at the pedigree just as if you were looking at your own Family File -- on Family Pages, in trees, and in reports.  Please note that you will need between 3MB and 10MB free hard disk space to view World Family Tree pedigrees.

When you open a pedigree, Family Tree Maker displays a Family Page from the pedigree.  The title bar at the very top of your screen will say, for example, "World Family Tree Pedigree #0323" instead of listing the name of your Family File.

To look at the information in a World Family Tree Pedigree, you can click the tabs along the right side of the screen to move between Family Pages.  To see a different set of parents for a child, click that child and then from the People menu, select Other Parents (ALT, P, P).  In addition, you can click the buttons on the Family Page, the toolbar buttons, and use the commands on the View menu, just as you would with your own Family File.  And, once you're in a tree, for example, you can control the formatting options, such as which individuals and information appear in the tree.

If you find it easier to look at information on paper, you can print trees, reports, and other documents, just as you would with your own Family File.  Simply go to the view that you want to print and use the commands on the Contents and Format menus to set up the document as you want it.  Then, use the Print command on the File menu to print it.

See also

How to: merge a World Family Tree pedigree with a Family File

How to: exit World Family Tree mode


Viewing other individuals in the pedigree

You can navigate through a World Family Tree pedigree in the same way that you navigate through your own Family File.  Click the tabs on the right side of the screen to move to the Family Pages of the individuals whose names are on the tabs.  You can also use the Index of Individuals to move to anyone in the pedigree:  from the View menu, select Index of Individuals (ALT, V, I).


Displaying, printing, and formatting trees

To look at reports and different types of trees, click the toolbar buttons or use the commands on the View menu, just as you would with your own Family File.  Once you're in a tree, for example, you can control the formatting options, such as which individuals and information appear in the tree.  Please note that when you choose the FamilyFinder view, you will exit the pedigree and return to the World Family Tree Archive Index page.

If you find it easier to look at information on paper, you can print trees, reports, and other documents, just as you would with your own Family File.  Simply go to the view that you want to print and use the commands on the Contents and Format menus to set up the document as you want it.  Then, from the File menu, select Print.


Merging a World Family Tree pedigree with a Family File

To merge a World Family Tree pedigree into a Family File:

1.	Look at the title bar at the very top of the screen.  It says "Family Tree Maker," followed by the name of the Family File that is currently open.  Verify that this is the file with which you want to merge the pedigree.

If not, from the View menu, select FamilyFinder (ALT, V, Y) to exit World Family Tree Mode.  Then from the File menu, select Open (ALT, F, O) and open the correct file.  Finally, return to the FamilyFinder view and re-open the World Family Tree pedigree that you want to merge.

2.	From the People menu, select Merge Pedigree (ALT, P, G).

Family Tree Maker compares the field labels in the source file (the World Family Tree pedigree) and the destination file (your Family File).  If all of the field labels are the same, Family Tree Maker displays the Append File dialog box.  In this case, continue with Appending and merging information.  Otherwise, continue with Selecting individuals to include.


Exiting World Family Tree mode

To exit World Family Tree mode, click the FamilyFinder toolbar button or choose FamilyFinder from the View menu (ALT, V, Y).  Family Tree Maker closes the World Family Tree Pedigree and returns you to the Index page in the Family Archive.


The Family Archive Version Information dialog box

You have just inserted a new version of the FamilyFinder Index.  Since you last purchased a FamilyFinder Index, several of the Family Archives have been improved and updated.  This new FamilyFinder Index reflects the updated information.

The purpose of the Family Archive Version Information dialog box is to alert you to the fact that some of the Family Archives that you currently own, while still containing good, useful information, are now slightly outdated.  For example, this new FamilyFinder Index may say that a "John Smith Rogers" appears on Family Archive 22.  However, if you have an outdated version of Family Archive 22, you may not find his information on the Family Archive.


What if I can't find my ancestor's name?

If you can't seem to find the exact name you are looking for in the FamilyFinder Index, don't despair!  There are two things you should realize before giving up:

First, even if you can't locate your ancestor's name in the FamilyFinder Index, it is still possible that a record with your ancestor's name exists.  It just happens that the record was not in an index that is available electronically, and therefore couldn't be included in the FamilyFinder Index.

Second, it may be that the individual whose record you want to locate really is listed in the FamilyFinder Index, but their name has been disguised by errors or a name change.  Because the FamilyFinder Index is composed from many different sources, including hand-written census records more than a century old, there are spelling errors, misinterpretations of names, transpositions of first and last names, first initials being used instead of first names, abbreviations being used instead of full or middle names (like Edw. Wm. instead of Edward William), and other errors.  Even name changes may play a part in "hiding" a name you are looking for.  For example, if you are looking for the name of a female in the Social Security Death Index, most likely you should look under her married name rather than her maiden name.

The Search Expert can help you locate names that may have been hidden by many of these types of problems.  To get the best results when you are looking for a name in the FamilyFinder Index, be sure to use the Search Expert to search for an individual that's been entered in your Family File.  This way, the information in your Family File can be used to help find matching names in the FamilyFinder Index.

To help you locate specific names, you may use a question mark (?) to hold the place of a single character, or an asterisk (*), also called a “wildcard,” to indicate "any."  For example, you could type Sm?th to look for both "Smith" and "Smyth" simultaneously.  If you typed Smith* you would find any word that began with the letters "Smith", such as "Smithe," "Smithy" "Smithson," and also "Smith."

A note about “special characters” — If the name you are searching for contains a special letter with a symbol over it (such as š or û), try searching for that name by replacing the special letter with the “wildcard” asterisk (*) mentioned above.

If you are still having trouble locating an individual in the FamilyFinder Index, there are two places you can go for advice and more examples of what types of errors you should be aware of.  First, click the Introduction tab on the Family Archive in which you think you should find your ancestor's name.  You may find helpful information there.  Second, see this topic, from the Help menu, select Genealogy "How-To" Guide (ALT, H, G).  On the first screen of the Genealogy "How-To" Guide, click FamilyFinder.  Towards the bottom of that topic, select Issues with using FamilyFinder (and Family Archive CDs).

If you want to return to the topic that you were reading previously, click the Back button at the top of this screen.


Purchasing Family Archives

To purchase a Family Archive CD or for other Customer Support issues:

Call toll-free at 1-800-548-1806.  Lines are open 24 hours every day.

Remember to mention Priority Code #3090002 when phoning, faxing, or mailing your Family Archive order.

Fax us at 1-877-849-9541 or write to Genealogy.com, P.O. Box 22295, Denver, CO 80222.

If you need help or if you have product information questions, you can speak directly to a technical support representative Monday through Friday, 7:00 AM to 5:00 PM (PST) by calling 1-(510) 794-6850.

In the United Kingdom, call 0870 7416821 to place an order, or fax 0870 7416822.  In addition, you may Email us at: uktechsupport@learningco.com

Don’t forget that there is a great deal of information online that can help you with technical issues, provide how-to instruction, or suggest ideas on how to continue your research. Simply use your browser to navigate to www.familytreemaker.com/support.html for the latest from Family Tree Maker.

You can also find the Family Archives at selected libraries around the country.  Check with your local libraries for more information about their CD-ROM index collection.


A sample search

Robert Cooper is searching for information about his great-grandfather, Michael William Cooper, who was from Alabama.  Before he begins to look through microfilm indexes and records at his local genealogy library, he uses the FamilyFinder Index.  Robert gives his great-grandfather's name to the Search Expert in the FamilyFinder Index, and it goes to work.  After quickly searching through approximately 115 million names, the FamilyFinder Index highlights the following name:  "Cooper, Michael W."  Next to it is "Married 1641-1944 AL, GA, or SC Marriage Index."  Since Robert's great-grandfather was from Alabama and the time frame seems about right, this looks like a possible match.  Robert clicks the More About button and finds out that this particular marriage index is contained on Family Archive 3.  This may be a Family Archive that Robert wants to look at.

From the More About dialog box, Robert also learns the following:  Family Archive 3 contains approximately 190,000 entries.  It is an index of marriage records from selected counties in Alabama and Georgia from 1641-1944 and in South Carolina from 1911-1944.  He also finds out that he can get the following information from Family Archive 3:  the county where this individual named Michael W. Cooper lived at the time of the marriage, his spouse's name, and the date of the marriage.  It's incredible how much information he can get from just the Family Archive.  Robert decides to order Family Archive 3 so that he can access this information from his own computer.  The information that he finds on the Family Archive will then help him determine if this Michael W. Cooper is actually his great-grandfather.


Genealogy research sources

Note:  These addresses and phone numbers were verified at the time of this manual's printing.  It is possible that they have since changed.  If you have trouble reaching any of these places, dial 1+ (area code) + 555-1212 for information.

National Sources

African-American Genealogy Group, P.O. Box 1798, Philadelphia, PA, 19105, (215) 572-6063

Afro-American Historical and Genealogical Society, Inc., P.O. Box 73086, Washington, DC 20056, (202) 234-5350

Local History and Genealogy Reading Room, Thomas Jefferson Building, 101 1st St. SE, Washington, DC 20540-5554, (202) 707-5537

National Archives and Records, Records Administration, 7th and Pennsylvania Ave. N.W., Washington, DC 20408, (202) 501-5402

National Genealogical Society, 4527 Seventeenth Street North, Arlington, VA 22207-2399, (703) 525-0050

National Society of Daughters of the American Revolution, 1776 D Street, NW, Washington, DC 20006-5392, (202) 628-1776

State Sources

Alabama

Alabama Archives and History Dept., 624 Washington Ave., Montgomery, AL 36130

Alaska

Alaska Historical Collections, P.O. Box 110571, Juneau, AK 99811-0571, (907) 465-2925

Kenai Community Library, 163 Main St. Loop, Kenai, AK 99611, (907) 283-4378

Arizona

Arizona Dept. of Library Archives & Public Records, 1700 W. Washington St., Phoenix, AZ 85007, (602) 542-3942

Arizona State Genealogical Society, 500 S. Langley, Tucson, AZ 85710

Arkansas

Arkansas History Commission, One Capital Mall, Little Rock, AR 72201, (501) 682-6900

California

California Genealogical Society, 1611 Telegraph Ave., Suite 200, Oakland, CA 94612-2152, (510) 663-1358

California Historical Society, 678 Mission St., San Francisco, CA 94109, (415) 357-1848

California State Archives, 1020 "O" St., Sacramento, CA 95814, (916) 653-7715

California State Library, 914 Capitol Mall, Sacramento, CA 95814, (916) 654-0261

Los Angeles Westside Genealogical Society, P.O. Box 10447, Marina del Rey, CA 90295

Napa Valley Genealogical & Biographical Society, 1701 Menlo Ave., Napa, CA 94558, (707) 252-2252

Orange County Genealogical Society, 7111 Talbert Ave., Huntington Beach, CA 92648

San Diego Genealogical Society, 2925 Kalmia St., San Diego, CA 92104

San Luis Obispo Genealogical Society, Inc., P.O. Box 4, Atascadero, CA 93423-0004

Southern California Genealogical Society, 417 Irving Drive, Burbank, CA 91504, (818) 843-7247

Sutro Library, 480 Winston Drive, San Francisco, CA 94132, (415) 731-4477

Colorado

Colorado Genealogical Society, P.O. Box 9218, Denver, CO 80209, (303) 571-1535

Colorado State Archives and Public Records, 1313 Sherman St., Rm. 1B-20, Denver, CO 80203, (303) 866-2390

Connecticut

Connecticut State Library, 231 Capitol Ave., Hartford, CT 06106

The Stamford Historical Society, 1508 High Ridge Rd., Stamford, CT 06903, (203) 329-1183

Delaware

Delaware Genealogical Society, 505 Market Street Mall, Wilmington, DE 19801, (302) 995-2783

Historical Society of Delaware, 505 Market Street Mall, Wilmington, DE 19801, (302) 655-7161

Florida

Miami-Dade Public Library, Genealogy Dept., 101 West Flagler St., Miami, FL 33130

State of Florida, Bureau of Archives, 500 S. Bronough St., Tallahassee, FL 32399-0250

Tampa Public Library Special Collections, 900 North Ashley Dr., Tampa, FL 33602

Georgia

Atlanta History Center, 130 W. Paces Terry Rd., Atlanta, GA 30305, (404) 814-4000

Georgia Department of Archives and History, 330 Capitol Ave., Atlanta, GA 30334, (404) 656-2350 or (404) 656-2393

Hawaii

Hawaii State Library, 478 S. King St., Honolulu, HI 96813, (808) 586-3500

Hawaiian Historical Society, 560 Kawaiahao St., Honolulu, HI 96813, (808) 537-6271

Idaho

Idaho Genealogical Society, 4620 Overland Rd. #204, Boise, ID 83705, (208) 384-0542

Idaho State Historical Society Genealogical Library, 450 North 4th St., Boise, ID 83702

Illinois

Chicago Genealogical Society, P.O. Box 1160, Chicago, IL 60690

Illinois State Archives, Margaret Gross Norton Bldg., Springfield, IL 62756, (217) 782-4682

Illinois State Genealogical Society, P.O. Box 10195, Springfield, IL 62791, (217) 789-1968

Illinois State Historical Library, Old State Capitol, Springfield, IL 62701, (217) 524-7216

Indiana

Allen County Public Library, 900 Webster St., Ft. Wayne, IN 46802, (219) 421-1200

Indiana Historical Society, 315 West Ohio Street, Indianapolis, IN 46202, (317) 232-1882

Indiana State Library, 140 North Senate Ave., Indianapolis, IN 46204, (317) 232-3675

Iowa

State Historical Society of Iowa, 600 East Locust St., Des Moines, IA 50319, (515) 281-6200

Kansas

Kansas State Historical Society and Library, 6425 S.W. 6th Ave., Topeka, KS 66615, (785) 272-8681

Midwest Historical & Genealogical Library, P.O. Box 1121, Wichita, KS 67201, (316) 264-3611

Kentucky

Kentucky Historical Society, Old Capitol Building, P.O. Box 1792, Frankfort, KY 40602, Station 2108,(502) 564-3016

Kentucky State Library and Archives, 300 Coffee Tree Rd., P.O. Box 537, Frankfort, KY 40602, (502) 564-8300

Louisiana

Louisiana Genealogical and Historical Society, P.O. Box 82060, Baton Rouge, LA 70884-2060, (504) 654-5044

Louisiana State Library,  760 N. 3rd St., Baton Rouge, LA 70802, or P.O. Box 131, Baton Rouge, LA 70821-0131, (504) 342-4914

Maine

Maine Historical Society, 485 Congress Street, Portland, ME 04101, (207) 774-1822

Maine State Library, Cultural Building, State House Station 64, Augusta, ME 04333, (207) 287-5600

Maryland

Maryland Genealogical Society, 201 West Monument St., Baltimore, MD 21201, (410) 685-3750

Maryland Historical Society, 201 West Monument St., Baltimore, MD 21201, (410) 685-3750

Massachusetts

Massachusetts Historical Society, 1154 Boylston St., Boston, MA 02215, (617) 536-1608

Massachusetts State Library, State House, Rm. 341, Boston, MA 02133, (617) 727-2590

New England Historic Genealogical Society, 101 Newbury Street, Boston, MA 02116-3007, (617) 536-5740

Michigan

Archives and Regional History Collections, Western Michigan University, Room 111 E. Hall, Kalamazoo, MI 49008-5081, (616) 387-8490

Detroit Public Library, Burton Historical Collections, 5201 Woodward Ave., Detroit, MI 48202, (313) 833-1480

Michigan State Library, 717 W. Allegan St., P.O. Box 30007, Lansing, MI 48909, (517) 373-5400

Minnesota

Minnesota Genealogical Society, 5768 Olson Memorial Highway, Golden Valley, MN 55422, (612) 595-9347

The Prairieland Genealogical Society, Southwest State University, Marshall, MN 56258

Mississippi

Mississippi Dept. of Archives and History, 100 S. State St., Jackson, MS 39201, Fax: (601) 359-6876

Mississippi Genealogical Society, P.O. Box 5301, Jackson, MS 39236-5301

Missouri

Heart of America Genealogical Society, c/o Public Library, 311 East 12th St., Kansas City, MO 64106, (816) 221-2685

Missouri State Genealogical Association, 4302 Barth Drive, St. Louis, MO 63125

Montana

Montana Historical Society Foundation, P.O. Box 863, Helena, MT 59624, (406) 449-3770

Yellowstone Genealogy Forum, c/o Parmly Billings Library, 510 North Broadway, Billings, MT 59101, (406) 657-8257

Nebraska

Eastern Nebraska Genealogical Society, c/o Clare Mares, 1722 E. 19th St., Fremont, NE 68025, (402) 721-9553

Nebraska State Historical Society Library, P.O. Box 82554, Lincoln, NE 68501, (402) 471-4751

Nevada

Nevada Historical Society, 1650 N. Virginia, Reno, NV 89503, (702) 688-1191

Northeastern Nevada Genealogical Society, P.O. Box 1903, Elko, NV 89801

New Hampshire

New Hampshire Historical Society Library, 30 Park Street, Concord, NH 03301, (603) 225-3381

New Hampshire State Library, 20 Park Street, Concord, NH 03301, (603) 271-2144

New Jersey

New Jersey State Archives, 185 West State Street, CN 307, Trenton, NJ 08625, (609) 292-6260

New Jersey State Library, P.O. Box 520, Trenton, NJ 08625, (609) 292-6220

New Mexico

Albuquerque Public Library, Special Collections Branch, 423 Central Ave. NE, Albuquerque, NM 87102, (505) 848-1376.

New Mexico Genealogical Society, P.O. Box 8283, Albuquerque, NM 87198

New Mexico State Library, 325 Don Gasper, Santa Fe, NM 87503, (505) 827-3800

New York

The Brooklyn Historical Society, 128 Pierrepont St., Brooklyn, NY 11201, (718) 624-0890

Buffalo and Erie County Public Library, Laffayette Square, Buffalo, NY 14203, (716) 858-7103

Central New York Genealogical Society, P.O. Box 104, Covin Sta., Syracuse, NY 13205

New York Genealogical and Biographical Society, 122 East 58th Street, New York, NY 10022-1939, (212) 755-8532

New York State Historical Association, P.O. Box 800, Cooperstown, NY 13326

New York State Library & Cultural Education Center, Empire State Plaza, Seventh Floor, Albany, NY 12230, (518) 474-5355

North Carolina

The North Carolina Genealogical Society, P.O. Box 1492, Raleigh, NC 27602

North Carolina State Library, 109 East Jones Street, Raleigh, NC 27601-2807, (919) 733-7222

North Dakota

State Historical Society of North Dakota, 612 East Blvd., Bismarck, ND 58505-0830, (701) 328-2666

Ohio

Ohio Genealogical Society, 34 Sturges Ave., P.O. Box 2625, Mansfield, OH 44906-0625

Ohio Historical Society Library, 1982 Velma Avenue, Columbus, OH 43211-2497, (614) 297-2510

State Libraryof Ohio , c/o Genealogy Section, Rm. 308, 65 South Front Street, Columbus, OH 43215-4163, (614) 644-6966

Warren-Trumbull County Public Library, History & Genealogy Room, 444 Mahoning Ave. NW, Warren, OH 44483

Oklahoma

Oklahoma Historical Society, 2100 N. Lincoln Blvd., Oklahoma City, OK 73105-4997, (405) 521-2491

Oregon

Multnomah County Library, 801 SW 10th Ave., Portland, OR 97205, (503) 248-5234

Oregon Genealogical Society, 223 North A St., Suite F, Springfield, OR 97477

Oregon State Library, State Library Building, 250 Winder St. N.E., Salem, OR 97310, (503) 378-4277 Ext. 240

Pennsylvania

Carnegie Library, Pennsylvania Dept., 4400 Forbes Ave., Pittsburgh, PA 15213, (412) 622-3154

Pennsylvania Genealogical Society, 1305 Locust St., Philadelphia, PA 19107-5405, (215) 545-0391

Pennsylvania State Archives, P.O. Box 1026, Harrisburg, PA 17108-1026, (717) 783-3281

State Library of Pennsylvania, P.O. Box 1601, Harrisburg, PA 17105, (717) 783-5991

Rhode Island

Rhode Island State Archives, 337 Westminster St., Providence, RI 02903, (401) 222-2353

Rhode Island State Historical Society Library, 121 Hope St., Providence, RI 02906, (401) 331-8575

South Carolina

South Carolina Historical Society, 100 Meeting Street, Charleston, SC 29401, (843) 723-3225

South Carolina State Archives, 1430 Senate St., P.O. Box 11669, Columbia, SC 29211, Fax: (803) 898-7793

South Carolina State Library, 1500 Senate Street, P.O. Box 11469, Columbia, SC 29211, (803) 734-8666

South Dakota

State Historical Society, 900 Governors Dr., Pierre, SD 57501-2217, (605) 773-3458

Tri-State Genealogical Society, 905 Fifth Avenue, Bell Fourche, SD 57717

Tennessee

Tennessee Genealogical Society, P.O. Box 111249, Memphis, TN 38111-1249

Tennessee State Library and Archives, 403 7th Avenue North, Nashville, TN 37243, (615) 741-2764

Texas

Texas State Library, Box 12927, Austin, TX 78711, (512) 463-5463

Utah

Family History Library, 35 North West Temple Street, Salt Lake City, UT 84150, (801) 240-2364

Genealogical Society of Utah, P.O. Box 114, Salt Lake City, UT 84110, (801) 240-2091

Vermont

Genealogical Library, Bennington Museum, West Main St., Bennington, VT 05201, (802) 447-1571

Vermont Historical Society, Pavilion Office Bldg., 109 State Street, Montpelier, VT 05609-0901, (802) 828-2291

Virginia

Central Rappahannock Regional Library, 1201 Caroline St., Fredericksburg, VA 22401-3798

College of William and Mary, Earl Gregg Swem Library, P.O. Box 8794, Williamsburg, VA 23187-8794, (804) 221-3050

George M. Jones Library Association, Jones Memorial Library, 2311 Memorial Ave., Lynchburg, VA 24501, (804) 846-0501

Handley Library P.O. Box 58 100 West Picadilly St., Winchester, VA 22604

Jefferson-Madison Regional Library, 201 East Market St., Charlottesville, VA 22902-5287, (804) 979-7151

Lloyd House, 220 N. Washington St., Alexandria, VA 22314, (703) 838-4577

Norfolk Public Library, Kirn Memorial Library, 301 East City Hall Avenue, Norfolk, VA 23510-1775

Thomas Balch Library, 208 West Market Street, Leesburg, VA 20175, (703) 779-1328

University of Virginia, Alderman Library, Charlottesville, VA 22903-2498, (804) 924-0311

Virginia Historical Society, P.O. Box 7311, Richmond, VA 23221-0311, (804) 358-4901

Virginia Room, Fairfax City Regional Library, 3915 Chain Bridge Road, Fairfax, VA 22030, (703) 246-2281

Virginia State Library, 11th St. at Capitol Square, Richmond, VA 23219

Washington

Seattle Genealogical Society, 815 NE 45th St., Seattle, WA 98105, (206) 522-0220

Washington State Library, P.O. Box 42460, Olympia, WA 98504-2460, (360) 753-4024

West Virginia

West Virginia Historical Society, Cultural Center, 1900 Kanewha Blvd E., Charleston, WV 25305-0300, (304) 558-0220

Wisconsin

Milwaukee Public Library, 814 West Wisconsin Ave., Milwaukee, WI 53233-2385, (414) 286-3000

Wisconsin Genealogical Society, c/o Mrs. John Irvin, 2109 20th Ave., Monroe, WI 53566, (608) 325-2609

Wisconsin Jewish Genealogical Society, 9280 N. Fairway Dr., Milwaukee, WI 53217, (414) 351-2190

Wisconsin State Historical Society Library, 816 State St., Madison, WI 53706, (608) 264-6534

Wyoming

Department of Commerce, Historical Research Unit, Barrett Bldg., 2301 Central Avenue, Cheyenne, WY 82002, (307) 777-7018

Canadian Sources

Archives Nationales du Québec, Service Au Public, P.O. Box 10450, 1210 Avenue du Seminaire, Saint-Foy, Qué., G1V4N1, (418) 643-1322

Archives of Ontario, 77 Grenville St., Toronto, Ont., M5S 1B3, (416) 327-1600

National Archives of Canada, 395 Wellington St., Ottowa, Ont., K1A 0N3, (613) 995-5138

Northwest Territories Archives, Department of Educational, Cultural, & Employment Programs, Government of the Northwest Territories, Print of Wales Northern Heritage Center, Yellowknife, N.W.T., X1A 2L9

Provincial Archives of Alberta, 12845 - 102 Ave., Edmonton, Alba., T5N 0M6, (403) 427-1750

British Columbia Archives and Records Service, 655 Belleville St., Victoria, B.C., V8V 1X4,

Provincial Archives of Manitoba, 200 Vaughan St., Winnipeg, Man., R3C 1T5, (204) 945-3971

Provincial Archives of New Brunswick, P.O. Box 6000, Fredericton, N.B., E3B 5H1, (506) 453-2122

Provincial Archives of Newfoundland and Labrador, Colonial Building, Military Road, St. John's Nfld., A1C 2C9, (709) 729-3065

Public Archives, 6016 University Ave., Halifax, N.S., B3H 1W4, (902) 424-6060

Public Archives of Prince Edward Island, P.O. Box 1000, Charlottetown, P.E.I., C1A 7M4, (902) 368-4290

Saskatchewan Archives Board, Regina Office, University of Regina, Regina, Sask., S4S 0A2, (306) 787-4068

Saskatchewan Archives Board, Saskatoon Office, University of Saskatchewan, Marie Building, #3 Campus Dr. Saskatoon, Sask., S7N 5A4, (306) 933-5832

Yukon Archives, P.O. Box 2703, Whitehorse, Y.T., Y1A 2C6


Preserving photos

For more than a century, people have enjoyed the ability to capture a special moment in time with a photograph.  People enjoy seeing pictures of their parents and grandparents when they were young.  Many take it for granted that their children and grandchildren will someday enjoy the pictures they take today.

However, you probably have experienced yellowing, cracking, and fading of some of your photographs.  Still others are destroyed or simply lost.  Although some photographs last for generations, none of them are immune to the effects of time.

What A Photograph Is Made Of

Photographs are made up of several layers of materials.  The top layer contains the image suspended in gelatin (purified animal protein).  It is called the emulsion layer.  This layer is coated on to a base layer of photographic paper or film.  A middle layer of adhesive is used to make the emulsion stick to the base.

The materials used to form the image depend on the type of photograph.  The image for black and white photographs is made up of light-sensitive silver salts (silver halides).

Color photographs and slides are made up of dyes instead of silver deposits.  Like all dyes, those used in photography fade and/or change color over time.  Since most of the photographs taken today are made in color, researchers continue to work on dye stability.  With proper care you can expect your color prints to last for decades, but in general, they do not preserve as well as black and white images.

Causes Of Deterioration

Many factors can contribute to the deterioration of photographs.  Since photos are made up of layers of material, damage to any one layer can ruin the image.  Often, it is a combination of factors causing the damage.  The following are some of the most destructive influences.

High temperature and relative humidity

These factors by themselves are damaging and together they are the most destructive factors that affect photographs.  Temperatures above 70F and relative humidity above 60% for long periods should be avoided.  Daily, drastic temperature changes (such as those that may occur in an attic) and continuously damp areas (such as basements) should also be avoided.  At the other extreme, very low humidity, under 25%, is also damaging.  It causes the emulsion layer to crack and the base material to curl.

Because the emulsion layer is composed of organic materials (the gelatin), heat and high humidity promote the growth of mold and fungi on it.  The gelatin also softens and becomes sticky as it begins to retain moisture.  Heat and humidity also make base materials deteriorate quickly.  Cold temperatures (refrigeration) are preferable, especially for color photos, but only if humidity can also be controlled.  Standard refrigerators have a high relative humidity and are NOT a good place to store photographs.  Air-conditioning used with a dehumidifier helps control the effects of temperature and humidity when refrigeration is not an option.

Residual processing chemicals

Damaging chemicals can be left on photographs if they are not processed correctly.  In black and white photographs, these chemicals are made up of sulfur and silver compounds which react with the silver of the image to turn it a yellowish brown color.  Over time, the silver compounds can become silver sulfide which will not only discolor the photograph, but also fade the image.  Residual chemicals also increase the effect of external influences such as heat and humidity.  For these reasons it is important that you have your film developed by reputable professionals or, if you develop your own, that you follow processing procedures precisely as the manufacturer suggests.

Air pollutants

All kinds of airborne substances can be damaging to photographs.  Those people living in cities with high pollution levels will find this especially true.  Oxidizing gases containing sulfur compounds, paint and varnish fumes, cleaning agents (chlorine and ammonia), tobacco smoke, auto exhaust, salty sea air, and dust are some of the most troublesome pollutants.  Photos should not be stored in areas where these pollutants are present.  For example, avoid closets that also contain cleaning products and remove photos from rooms freshly painted with an oil based paint for at least a month (latex paint is safe).

Nitrate based film

This type of film base was common in the early 1900's.  It is relatively unstable and decomposes rapidly.  It is also flammable and in large quantities is considered a fire hazard.  During decomposition it produces oxidizing gases such as nitric oxide and nitrogen dioxide.  These by-products of decomposition also speed up the decomposition process and are damaging to other negatives and photographs that may be stored near them.  If possible, have pictures on nitrate based film converted to newer, safer film.  At the very least, store nitrate based film away from your other photographs.

Ultraviolet light

Direct sunlight and fluorescent light can be very damaging to the image on a photograph.  This is particularly true of the dyes in color photos which will fade rapidly when exposed to light.  For all types of photographs, it is best to avoid prolonged exposure to direct sunlight and to use ultraviolet filters on fluorescent lights.  Tungsten lights are much safer than fluorescent lights.

Mishandling

Much of the damage to photos comes from the way we handle them.  Always try to avoid touching the emulsion surface.  Some other obvious things to avoid are bending, cutting, or scratching photographs.  Less obvious dangers are such common household items as ink, staples, paper clips, glue, and tape.  These products all contain substances harmful to photographs.  The section below, "Proper Storage Methods and Materials" will list products safe to use with photographs.

Natural Disasters

There are a few things you can do to protect your photographs from flood, fire, and other natural disasters.  Storing them up off the floor is relatively simple and can help tremendously in case of minor flooding.  Storage in an enameled steel file cabinet can prevent photographs from being crushed and offers some safety from water and fire damage.  You may want to consider a safe deposit box for extremely valuable photographs.  It is also wise to give copies of special photographs to relatives to avoid having them all in one place in case of a disaster.

Proper Storage Methods and materials

In addition to avoiding the conditions mentioned in the previous section, using specialized storage methods and materials helps prolong the life of photographs.  The storage environment is very important.  Heat, relative humidity, light, and air pollutants should be maintained as close to acceptable levels as possible.  The two places photographs are most often stored, attics and basements, do not provide the best conditions.

When storing prints and negatives, a general rule is never store them in contact with one another.  Prints and negatives can stick to each other.  Also, any print with residual processing chemicals could affect the prints around it as it begins to decay.  Each should be stored in a separate paper or plastic enclosure.  If you have mounted prints, be sure to place a sheet of paper or plastic (interleaving sheets) between them during storage.  The prints and negatives within their enclosures can be stored in acid-free storage boxes on a shelf or in enameled steel file cabinets.

If you prefer the convenience of a photograph album, take great care in choosing it.  Ironically, many mass produced photograph albums are made from photo-damaging materials.  Albums can be safe if made of proper materials.

Sources Of Safe Storage And Display Materials

Light Impressions, P.O. Box 940, Rochester, NY 14603-0940,  (800) 828-6216

Archival Quality Materials, University Products Inc., P.O. Box 101, 517 Main Street, Holyoke, MA 01041, (800) 628-1912

Additional Preservation Techniques

Another method for preserving your photographs is to have copies made of them while they are still in good condition.  It is also wise to display these copies instead of the originals.

For black and white photographs, toned prints tend to be more stable.  The toning process changes the metallic silver of the image to a form that is more resistant to oxidizing gases.  The toning is performed during the developing process and results in the photograph having a brownish or purplish tone to it.  This process is not recommended for old prints.

For color prints, consider having black and white negatives and prints made since these tend to last longer.  There is a method which produces black and white separation masters.  These separate the different layers of color into a black and white format which can be recombined and colored at a later time if desired.  However, this procedure is costly and difficult.

As you can see, there are several relatively simple things you can do to help your photographs last longer.  By carefully choosing the mounting materials, storage materials, and storage location for your photographs, you can preserve memories for generations to enjoy.

Bibliography

Eastman Kodak Company.  Conservation of Photographs.  Rochester, NY, 1985.

Keefe, Laurence E., Jr. and Inch, Dennis.  The Life of a Photograph.  Boston:  Butterworth Publishers, 1984.

The Polaroid Corporation.  Storing, Handling and Preserving Polaroid Photographs:  A Guide.  1983.

Weinstein, Robert A. and Booth, Larry.  Collection, Use and Care of Historical Photographs.  Nashville:  American Association for State and Local History,


When your report is too big

Your report may become too big for different reasons.  For example, you may have included too much information in the report.  If Family Tree Maker displays this error message, try the following:

 Use the Items to Include in Reports dialog box to reduce the number of items that you have selected to include in the report.

 Reduce the size of the font that you have selected for your report.


Family Tree Maker Online, what it is & how to use it
Family Tree Maker Online: what it is & how to use it

Overview

About Family Tree Maker Online

How to...

Start Family Tree Maker Online

Select the Web browser Family Tree Maker should use to go online

Navigate between Web pages and use your browser

Create your own Home Page

Publish a family tree on the Internet

Publish a report on the Internet

Publish a family book on the Internet

See also

More about the Internet and the World Wide Web

How Family Tree Maker Online and your Family Tree Maker software interact

The Publishing Center


More about the Internet and the World Wide Web

The Internet is made up of interconnected computers from all over the world.  It was created by the United States government and universities as a method of communicating and sharing research-related information, such as medical databases.  It grew to include businesses, and in recent years, has exploded in popularity among the general population.  With the Internet, you can now find almost anything, from famous paintings to Italian recipes.

The World Wide Web is a graphical interface for certain parts of the Internet.  Using software called a "Web browser," you can jump from one Internet location ("Web site") to another by clicking buttons or textual links.  In addition, the Web allows you to view information on screen, so you don't necessarily have to download files and view or read them while you're off-line.

When you use a Web browser to go to the Family Tree Maker Online Web site, you will also be able to go from there to any other Web site.  As a note of caution, remember that the World Wide Web is a public place.  In non-Family Tree Maker Web sites, you may come across information that you don't agree with or don't want to see.  It is generally easy to avoid these Web sites because their titles give good clues about their contents.  In addition, you can ask your local software retailer about software that can block various kinds of information.

See also

About Family Tree Maker Online

How Family Tree Maker Online and your Family Tree Maker software interact

Family Tree Maker Online: what it is & how to use it

The Publishing Center


Starting Family Tree Maker Online

Before you use Family Tree Maker Online, you must first link the Online button to your Web browser.  Refer to "Selecting a Web Browser" and "Changing Your Online Setup" in the Family Tree Maker manual for details.

To go to Family Tree Maker Online:

1.	Start your Family Tree Maker software if it is not already running.  In addition, be sure your modem is on and is connected to your phone line.

2.	If you're creating a new Family File, enter at least one individual's name on the Family Page.

3.	Click the Online toolbar button.

Alternatively, from the Internet menu, select Go Online.

Your Web browser opens, and if your modem has a speaker, you will probably hear some dialing and beeping noises.  Then, after a few moments, Family Tree Maker Online displays a registration form.

Note: If no browser or the wrong browser starts when you attempt to go online, you must specify the Web browser Family Tree Maker should use to access the Internet. See the Browser Setup topic for detailed instructions.

The first time you use Family Tree Maker Online, you need to complete an online registration form.  After you complete the form, Family Tree Maker Online displays the Family Tree Maker Online Home Page.  If you aren't sure how to use a particular feature of Family Tree Maker Online, check for instructions online.

Be sure to use the Online button or Go Online option on the Internet menu to access Family Tree Maker Online.  Otherwise Family Tree Maker Online may not recognize you as a Family Tree Maker customer and you will not be able to take advantage of all the Family Tree Maker Online features. You must also set your Web browser to allow the acceptance of "cookies," and if you normally use third party software to prevent "cookie" delivery, you must turn it off while using Family Tree Maker Online.

See Also

The Publishing Center


How Family Tree Maker Online and your Family Tree Maker software interact

When you open Family Tree Maker Online, your Family Tree Maker software does not shut down, but is still running in the background.  This means that you can press Alt+Tab and go work in it again while Family Tree Maker Online is still running.  Family Tree Maker Online and your Web browser will not shut down when you go back into Family Tree Maker.  When you want to return to Family Tree Maker Online, just click the Online toolbar button again.

However, if you use an Internet service provider that charges you an hourly fee, you probably won't want to open Family Tree Maker Online and then let it run while you do work in Family Tree Maker that can be done off-line -- that could be expensive!  It's probably best to open Family Tree Maker Online, find the information you want, and then close it down by exiting your Web browser.  When you exit your Web browser (by selecting Exit from your Web browser's File menu), Family Tree Maker reappears.

Note:	With some Internet connections, you will also need to disconnect from your Internet service provider to end your Internet session.

See also

Select the Web browser Family Tree Maker should use to go online

More about the Internet and the World Wide Web

Family Tree Maker Online: what it is & how to use it

The Publishing Center


Navigating between Web pages and using your browser

When you first start Family Tree Maker Online, you will register as a Family Tree Maker Online user and then will see the Family Tree Maker Online Home Page.  This is the main Web page for our Web site.  You can think of it as a table of contents, because it contains links to each of the main sections of Family Tree Maker Online.

To move from one section of Family Tree Maker Online to another, click on the colored, underlined text on the screen.  Sometimes there are also buttons that you can click.  If you want to return to the home page, you can click the Home button at any time.  Your Web browser may also have buttons such as Back and Forward.  You can use these buttons to retrace your steps.

Because you navigate by clicking links, you won't need to work with your Web browser software very much.  The most important thing to know about your Web browser is how to close it when you are finished so that you don't incur unnecessary phone or Internet service provider charges.  You can do this by selecting Exit from the Web browser's File menu.  Your Web browser may also let you create "bookmarks," so you can jump directly to your favorite Web pages in Family Tree Maker Online.  Of course, each Web browser works slightly differently, so the best way to learn about it is to use its Help system.

See Also

The Publishing Center


All about Family Tree Maker Online

We are dedicated to giving our customers the easiest, most powerful, and most convenient way to research their family history.  For this reason, we have created Family Tree Maker Online, an Internet Web site where you have access to valuable genealogical resources that can speed your research.  Get expert answers to your Family Tree Maker and genealogy questions, while you share tips, tricks, and success stories with other users.  Plus, your input can help us develop future versions of Family Tree Maker, while you stay informed about Family Tree Maker and other products.  For your convenience, Family Tree Maker Online, along with other research resources can be easily accessed from the FamilyFinder Center

For instructions on setting up your Family Tree Maker software for use with the Family Tree Maker Online Web site, see the Browser Setup topic.  In addition, see any of the topics listed below.

See also

About Family Tree Maker Online

More about the Internet and the World Wide Web

How Family Tree Maker Online and your Family Tree Maker software interact

The Publishing Center


About Family Tree Maker Online

Family Tree Maker is the #1-selling program for organizing and printing your family information, but through our genealogy Web site, you can also:

Locate Your Ancestors

 Internet FamilyFinder(TM)  — Type in a name and instantly scan hundreds of thousands of genealogy sites and our own data collections, Family Home Pages, and GenalogyLibrary.com for your information.

 Record Lookup Services — Order photocopies and scanned images of records right from your home computer!

 World Family Tree(TM) Online — Thanks to donations from genealogists like you, the World Family Tree is now one of the largest tree collections in the world.  Search for names in these trees, buy a subscription, and then download trees to merge into your Family File.

 Keyword Searches — A keyword search locates information anywhere in the Family Tree Maker Online Web site, except the FamilyFinder Index and the Social Security Death Index.

Share with and Learn from Others

 FREE Home Pages — Create your own Web page to share family history with relatives near and far.  It can include up to five reports, a box-style InterneTree(TM), and even a Family Book!

 Genealogy Message Boards — Share your genealogy tips and tricks and tap into the collective experience of thousands of other Family Tree Maker Online visitors.

 Virtual Cemetery — Visit this collection of tombstone photos (you can even submit your own), and its fully searchable archive of text transcriptions in an electronic memorial to our ancestors.

Get Research Hints and Help

 A 1,200-page Genealogy "How-To" Guide — Thousands of library, association, and county addresses and phone numbers; detailed instructions for locating names, dates, and locations; a genealogy dictionary, and printable census abstracts.

 Online Genealogy Classes — Sharpen your skills in our university.  Each lesson is fun and informative.

 Professionally-Written Articles — Church records, Irish research, Family Associations -- every three weeks we add a new topic to this growing collection.

To take full advantage of Family Tree Maker Online, use the Online toolbar button to visit the site.  See our instructions.

See Also

The Publishing Center


Creating a FamilyFinder Search

This is an enhanced version of the FamilyFinder Report that uses the most up-to-date FamilyFinder Index and hundreds of other genealogical resources on the Internet.  (Don't worry, your information is not available to other people on the Internet and is not contributed to the World Family Tree Project during this process.)

To create a FamilyFinder Search Report:

1.	From the View menu, select FamilyFinder.  From the submenu, select FamilyFinder Search/Report.

2.	Then from the Edit menu, select Create New FamilyFinder Report (ALT, E, F)

Note:  If you already created a FamilyFinder report, this menu item appears as Update FamilyFinder Report instead.

You may also access this feature directly from the FamilyFinder Center.

3.	Select the Online option button.

4.	Select one of the following Include options:

Online — The online searches are faster, more comprehensive, and more up-to-date than the CD searches.

CD — These CDs come with your Family Tree Maker program and provide and index to all of the Family Archive CDs available at the time your program was produced.

5.	After you make your selections, click OK.

6.	Explore Family Tree Maker Online in your browser while you wait for the FamilyFinder Report to finish downloading new matches.

7.	Click the Family Tree Maker button on the Taskbar to view the Family Tree Maker window.

8.	Do any of the following to view additional information in the online version of the FamilyFinder Report:

•	Click the folder(s) next to a match to display additional information

•	Click the underlined information in the Possible Matches column to jump to that site on the Internet or to display information about the CD containing the match

9.	After you finish reviewing the information, close your browser and disconnect from your online service.

See also

Selecting which results to show

Things to keep in mind when using the FamilyFinder Report


Create your own home page

You can create your own Internet home page within Family Tree Maker to share with family, friends, and others who can see what family lines you are researching.

To create your own home page in Family Tree Maker:

1	From the Publishing Center in Family Tree Maker, click Create a Family Home Page.

2	The first page of this wizard lists the items your home page site will include:

•	Your personalized home page

•	List of all surnames in your tree

•	Index of everyone in your tree

•	Biographical information on each individual

•	A dynamic tree showing all connected individuals

3	The next page, Individuals to Include, is where you decide which family members to include in your Home Page.

Note:  If you decide to include only certain individuals from your Family File, click Select Individuals to Include.  Family Tree Maker then displays the Individuals to include dialog box.

4	The Pictures page is where you decide which pictures to display on your home page.  Pictures are added and stored in Scrapbooks.

5	Hide Information on Living Individuals allows you to “privatize” information (highly encouraged) related to those individuals in your Family File who are still living.

6	Before finalizing and uploading your new home page, the Make a Connection page is your reminder to have your Internet browser connection open.

7	The final wizard page — Home Page is Building — advises that your home page is being completed.  Your browser is opened so that you can select styles and other options to customize your new Web page’s appearance.

Now that you have created a basic home page, you can make reports, books or trees with the information in your Family File and link them to your home page.  To find out how to do this, see the topics listed below.

See also

The Publishing Center

Publish a family tree on the Internet

Publish a report on the Internet

Publish a family book on the Internet


The Create Your Own Home Page Web page

Title — Type the title you want to appear at the top of your home page.

Contact Information — Type the information you want to provide for people to contact you. Notice that Family Tree Maker Online supplies the information you entered when you registered the first time you used Family Tree Maker Online.

URL Information — If you already have another home page, type the address and title of this page in these fields.

Text — Type the text you want to appear on your home page.

Style — Click an option button to choose the layout format you want to use.  You can view a sample of each Style, by clicking the Sample link next to each option.

See also

The Publishing Center


Finding your ancestors across the entire Internet

To find your ancestors across the entire Internet:

1.	Make sure your modem is on and is connected to your phone line.

2.	From the Internet menu, select Find Individual on the Internet (ALT, I, F)

Your Web browser opens, and you may hear dialing and beeping noises.  If this is the first time you are using your Internet service provider, you may need to answer some setup questions before you continue.  If you have already set up your Internet account, you may still need to type a user name and password to access the Internet.

If you have not registered on Family Tree Maker Online before, Family Tree Maker will display a registration form.  This is not a form for registering your software.  It is a form that enables Family Tree Maker Online to identify you as a Family Tree Maker customer.  As a Family Tree Maker customer, you receive special benefits at our Web site, such as your own home page, access to the message board, and more!

3.	If necessary, follow the instructions on the screen to complete the Family Tree Maker Online registration form.

Family Tree Maker displays the Family Tree Maker Online Search page containing the Internet FamilyFinder.  Follow the on-screen instructions and have fun exploring.


Publishing a family tree on the Internet

After you create your home page, you can add a family tree or report from your Family File.  For information about adding a report, click here.  Your family tree will include the following information for each of the individuals you choose to include:

 Birth date and location

 Marriage date and location

 Death date and location

To publish a family tree on the Internet:

1.	From the Internet menu, select Go Online (ALT, I, O).

Family Tree Maker opens your Web browser, connects you to your Internet service provider, and takes you to the Family Tree Maker Online Web site.

2.	Click Family Tree Maker on the Windows 95 taskbar or press Alt + Tab to switch back to Family Tree Maker.

3.	From the Internet menu, select Publish Family Tree to the Internet (ALT, I, P).

Family Tree Maker will display the Publish Family Tree on Internet dialog box.

4.	Click OK to continue.

Family Tree Maker displays the Include dialog box.

5.	Select the individuals you want to include and then click OK.  For specific instructions, see Selecting a group of individuals to include.

Family Tree Maker displays a status bar while the tree is being copied to your home page.  As the transfer is beginning, Family Tree Maker also displays a dialog box asking whether you want to contribute your Family File to the World Family Tree Project.

6.	If you have already checked your Family File for errors and want to contribute it to the World Family Tree Project, click Yes.  Otherwise, click No.

If you selected "Yes," see Contributing your tree online on contributing your Family File to the World Family Tree Project.  If you selected "No," Family Tree Maker returns to the previous view in Family Tree Maker.  Family Tree Maker displays a confirmation dialog box when the transfer is complete.

7.	After you finish reading the message, click OK.

Do not forget to close your Internet connection when you are done exploring the Internet.  Depending on your setup, you may need to close both your browser and the connection to your service provider.

Note:	  When you first contribute your tree, it may take several hours for it to appear on your home page.

See also

The Publishing Center


Publishing a Family Tree on the Internet

The Publish Family Tree dialog box gives you the opportunity to place your entire Family File on the Family Tree Maker Web site in a tree format.  The resulting tree will be attached to your home page.  Visitors to your page will be able to choose any individual in your file and have both the ancestors and descendants displayed for them.  This feature requires you to have a home page.  If you have yet to set one up, click here for instructions on creating your home page.  Since the submission process can take a while depending on the size of your file, you are given the opportunity to contribute your file to the World Family Tree at the same time.  For a description of the World Family Tree Project, click here.

See also

The Publishing Center


Publishing a report on the Internet

Once you've created your home page on the Family Tree Maker Online Web site, you can add trees, reports, books, pictures, and more.

To publish a report from your Family File on the Internet:

1.	From the View menu in Family Tree Maker, select the view that you want to use to create your report (Report, Genealogy Report, or Outline Descendant Tree).

2.	Using any of the features available on the Contents or Format menus, select individuals and make formatting choices.  We recommend, however, that you focus more on the content of your report than the formatting.  Some formatting options in Family Tree Maker (like colors and borders) may not appear the same when transferred to the Web.

Note:  Please keep in mind that the Internet is a public forum.  The information you provide will be available to anyone who has access to the Internet.

3.	From the Internet menu, select Go Online.

Family Tree Maker opens your Web browser, connects you to your ISP (Internet Service Provider), and takes you to the Family Tree Maker Online Web site.

4.	Now that you are connected to Family Tree Maker Online, click the Family Tree Maker icon on your Windows© taskbar to return to the report you want to publish.

Note:  You may also use the Quick Key combination of Alt + Tab to toggle back to Family Tree Maker (or any other open application).

5.	From the Internet menu select Publish Report to the Internet.

Family Tree Maker displays the Publish Report on Internet dialog box.

6.	Click OK to continue.

During the process of adding items to your home page, you may be asked if you would like to contribute your Family File to the World Family Tree Project.

Note:  You can have a maximum of five reports on your home page.  If you are attempting to exceed this limit, Family Tree Maker displays a message advising that you will have to delete a report before continuing.

7.	If you have already checked your Family File for errors and want to contribute it to the World Family Tree Project, click Yes.  Otherwise, click No.

If you selected Yes, see Contributing your tree online for more information.  If you selected No, Family Tree Maker returns to the previously selected view.

8.	After Family Tree Maker displays a confirmation message advising that the transfer to your home page is complete, click OK.

Note:  It may take 15 minutes or more before you are able view your report online.

Do not forget to close your Internet connection when you are done exploring the Internet.  Depending on your setup, you may need to close both your browser and the connection to your service provider.

See also

The Publishing Center


Publishing a report from your Family File on the Internet

The Publish Report on the Internet dialog box gives you the opportunity to display a report created in Family Tree Maker on your home page.  Visitors to your home page will be able to see the report just as you created it in Family Tree Maker.

For more information on the types of reports you can publish, click here.  This feature requires you to have a User home page.  If you have yet to set one up, click here for instructions on creating a home page.  Since the publishing process can take a while depending on the size of your file, you are given the opportunity to contribute your file to the World Family Tree at the same time.  For a description of the World Family Tree Project, click here.

See also

The Publishing Center

Note:  For troubleshooting help and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs), remember to visit www.familytreemaker.com/support.html — this is your best source for accurate assistance with Family Tree Maker.


Publishing a report on the Internet

The easiest way to publish a report is from the Publishing Center, but you may also follow the steps below.

Once you have created a home page on the Family Tree Maker Online Web site, you can add a variety of reports that give details from your Family File.  You can choose to display any amount of information in one of 3 formats:  Outline Descendant tree, Columnar report (choose from any of the report formats available in the Report view such as Alternate Facts Report or Medical Report), or Genealogy report (choose from any of the formats available in the Genealogy Report view).  For example, you can choose to display a simple Outline Descendant tree showing only your immediate family or you can choose to display something as elaborate as a multiple-column custom report showing information about all of the individuals in your Family File.

Note:  For troubleshooting help and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs), remember to visit www.familytreemaker.com/support.html — this is your best source for accurate assistance with Family Tree Maker.


Publishing a Family Book on the Internet

Once you've created your home page in Family Tree Maker, you can publish a Family Book to it.

The easiest way to publish your Family Book is from the Publishing Center, but you may also follow the steps below.

1.	From the View menu, select Books (ALT, V, B).

2.	Open the book you want to publish on the Internet.

Note: Due to the current limitations of the HTML "language" used to display information on the Web, the format of your book may look very different on the Web than it does within Family Tree Maker.  Some formatting options available in Family Tree Maker, like colors and borders, may not transfer to the Web at all.  Also, please keep in mind that the Internet is a public forum.  The information you provide will be available to anyone who has access to the Internet.

3.	From the Internet menu, select Go Online (ALT, I, O).

Family Tree Maker opens your Web browser, connects you to your Internet service provider, and takes you to the Family Tree Maker Online Web site.

4.	Now that you are connected to FamilyTreeMaker.com, click the Family Tree Maker icon on your Windows© taskbar to return to your book view.

Note:  You may also use the Quick Key combination of Alt + Tab to toggle back to Family Tree Maker (or any other open application).

5.	From the Internet menu, select Publish Book to the Internet (ALT, I, P).

Family Tree Maker displays the Publish Book on Internet dialog box.

6.	Click OK to continue.

Family Tree Maker displays a status bar while the book is being copied to your home page.  As the transfer is beginning, Family Tree Maker also displays a dialog box asking whether you want to contribute your Family File to the World Family Tree Project.

7.	If you have already checked your Family File for errors and want to contribute it to the World Family Tree Project, click Yes.  Otherwise, click No.

If you selected "Yes," see Contributing your tree online for more information.  If you selected "No," Family Tree Maker returns to the previous view in Family Tree Maker.  Family Tree Maker displays a confirmation dialog box when the transfer is complete.

8.	After you finish reading the message, click OK.

The title of your book soon appears as a link on your home page. Click the link to view your book.

Note:  When you first upload your book, it may take several hours for it to appear on your home page.

Do not forget to close your Internet connection when you are done exploring the Internet.  Depending on your setup, you may need to close both your browser and the connection to your service provider.

See also

The Publishing Center


Publishing a book on the Internet

The Publish Book on the Internet dialog box gives you the opportunity to place a book you created in Family Tree Maker.  The book will be attached to your personal home page at FamilyTreeMaker.com.  Visitors to your page will be able to see the book just as you created it in Family Tree Maker.

This feature requires you to already have a home page.  If you have yet to set one up, click here for instructions on creating a home page.  Since the publishing process can take a while depending on the size of your file, you are given the opportunity to contribute your file to the World Family Tree at the same time.  For a description of the World Family Tree Project, click here.

Here are a few things to keep in mind when you publish your family book on the Internet:

 Your book must include a Table of Contents and an Index.  If you don't have these items in your book, Family Tree Maker prompts you to add them when you publish the book.

 Some of the text styles in your book may not be available online.  Family Tree Maker Online maintains your text styles whenever possible.

 Any images you inserted do not appear in the online version of your book.

 Each tree in your book can contain up to 2,000 individuals, and you can have a combined total of up to 60,000 individuals in all the trees in your book.

 If your book contains more than 10,000 pages, you must create a shorter version of the book before you publish it on the Internet.

See also

The Publishing Center

Publish a family tree on the Internet

Publish a report on the Internet


Viewing your report on the Internet

To view your report on the Internet, return to the Family Tree Maker Web site and navigate to your home page.  Once there, Family Tree Maker Online will display the title of your report as a link.  Simply click the link to view your report.

Note:  Most uploads to your home page take place quickly, however, depending on the size of your report and Internet traffic, it may take up to several hours for your report to appear on your home page.


Viewing your tree on the Internet

To view your tree on the Internet, return to the Family Tree Maker Web site and navigate to your home page.  Once there, Family Tree Maker Online will display the title of your tree as a link.  Simply click the link to view your tree.

Note:  Most uploads to your home page take place quickly, however, depending on the size of your tree and Internet traffic, it may take up to several hours for your tree to appear on your home page.


Spell checking your Family File

The spell check feature can proofread the text in your Notes and Books for you. The information included in the spell check depends on which view you start the spell check from.  To spell check:

All notes and text items in the current Family File — switch to the Family Page, Tree, or Report view.

All text items in a book — switch to the Book Outline for that book.

A specific text item in a book — switch to the Text Item window for that item.

A specific individual or marriage note — switch to the More About Note dialog box for that note

To use the spell checker:

1.	Decide which items you want to spell check and then switch to the appropriate view.

2.	From the Edit menu, select Spell Check (ALT, E, K).

Family Tree Maker opens the Spell Check dialog box and starts checking the file.

3.	If Family Tree Maker detects a potential spelling error, it displays the error in the Not in dictionary field.

4.	Correct or ignore the word.

For a description of the options in the Spell Check dialog box, click here.

5.	If you checked only one item, Family Tree Maker asks if you want to check other items in your Family File. Click Yes to continue spell checking or No to return to the view where the last spelling correction was made.

6.	When a dialog box appears to tell you that the spell check is complete, click OK.

Note:  You can tell Family Tree Maker to ignore captilalized words, words with numbers, and known names.  To customize spell check’s preferences, from the File menu, select Preferences, and then Spell Check.


The Spell Check dialog box

Correct the error — Select a word from the Suggestions list and then click the Change button, or type the correct spelling in the Change to field and then click the Change button.

Add the word to the dictionary — Click the Add button to accept the current spelling and to add it to your dictionary. Once you add the word to your dictionary, Family Tree Maker will not treat it as an error during future spell checks.

Ignore the error for the rest of this spell check — Click the Ignore button to accept the current spelling and to ignore all instances of this word in the current spell check session.

Stop spell checking your file — Click the Close button to interrupt the spell checker and return to the view where the last spelling correction was made.


The Facts to Export dialog box

Available Facts — This list contains the available facts in your Family File—all of the dates, locations, facts, notes, etc.

Facts to Export — This list contains the facts in your Family File that will be exported to the destination file.

Export Fact — Click this button to export the currently selected fact and include it in the destination file.

Don't Export — Click this button to remove the currently selected fact field from the "Facts to Export" list. If you do not export the fact, it will not appear in the destination file.


Setting up your Web browser

Family Tree Maker is fully integrated with Family Tree Maker Online—the premiere genealogy Web site on the Internet. In order to access the Web site from within Family Tree Maker, you must first set up the Web browser Family Tree Maker should use to go online. If no browser or the wrong browser starts when you attempt to go online, you can use the following steps to set up the browser of your choice (Netscape, Internet Explorer, or America Online).

Note: Family Tree Maker doesn't have a preference for any particular Internet Service Provider. The only thing Family Tree Maker looks for, and works with, is your World Wide Web browser.

To set up your Web browser for use with Family Tree Maker:

1. From the Internet menu, select Browser Setup (ALT, I, W).

2. Click Continue to search your computer for compatible Web browsers.

Family Tree Maker displays a list of available Web browsers.

3. If your browser is not highlighted in the window, click the button next to the name shown to display a list of available browsers.

4. Highlight your browser, and then click Continue.

Family Tree Maker displays a confirmation message saying that the browser has been successfully installed.

5. Click OK to return to Family Tree Maker.

Note: If your browser isn't listed, you can still set it up manually. You’ll find step-by-step setup instructions for all compatible Web browsers on Family Tree Maker’s Technical Support Web site at www.familytreemaker.com/support.html


Creating Family Books

Overview

All about books

How to...

Create a new book

Open an existing book

Work with the contents of your book

Change book properties

Add a header and footer to your book

Add a Table of Contents and Index to your book

Print your book

Delete a book

What is it?

The Toolbar

The Books view buttons

See Also

The Publishing Center


All About Books

In addition to printing trees, reports and other views as individual documents, Family Tree Maker provides everything you need to create a professional looking book.  You can include a Title Page, Dedication, Preface, Foreword, Table of Contents, Chapters, Bibliography, and an Index.  What's even better is that you can use the Saved Views you've already created.  Just imagine combining family trees and reports, with a nice Title Page, a Table of Contents, Scrapbook pictures — even audio and video files — to create a unique family album that your relatives will cherish for generations.

Using Family Tree Maker's built-in word processor, you can add stories, family anecdotes, chapter introductions, and other descriptive text to complete your book.

You can begin creating your book by using the convenient links in the Publishing Center, or from the Books menu, select New Book.  The Book View is where you create the outline for your book by collecting trees, reports, and other items you want to include.

The "Available items" list on the left side of the screen shows the items you can include in your book, and the "Outline for" list on the right side of the screen shows the items you've already added to your book.

After you have created a book, you can again use the links in the Publishing Center to add it to your home page.

When you create a book, you can add many different types of items.  These items fall into three basic categories:

"Standard" book items — Standard book items enable you to add trees, specific reports, calendars, a Table of Contents, and an Index to your book. In addition to these items, Family Tree Maker automatically adds a Title Page to every book.  For details, see Adding trees, reports, and calendars to your book, and Adding a Table of Contents and Index to your book.

Text items — Text items enable you to add your own text and Scrapbook pictures to your book.  You can start with a blank page, or choose from a variety of templates.  For details, see Creating text items for your book, and Adding pictures to your book.

Saved Views — Saved Views enable you to add items that are not part of the standard book item list to your book.  For example, if you want to add a bibliography to your book, you can create, customize, and name a Bibliography report as a Saved View and then add it to your book.  For details, see Creating Saved Views

Note:	 In the Books view, the top portion of the "Available items" list includes standard book items based on the current primary individual.  The middle section of the list includes text items and standard book items that do not change when you change the primary individual, such as a Calendar, Table of Contents, and Index.  The lower portion of the list includes any Saved Views you've created.

See Also

The Publishing Center

Note:  For troubleshooting help and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs), remember to visit http://www.familytreemaker.com/support.html — this is your best source for accurate assistance with Family Tree Maker.


Books view buttons

You may create or edit a book using the convenient links in the Publishing Center, and then add it to your home page.  Or, from the View menu, select Books.

Depending on the book displayed or the item selected in either column of the Books view, you may select from the following:

Add — Click this button to add the selected item to your book outline.

Delete — Click this button to remove the selected item from your book outline.

Edit — Click this button to display the contents of the selected item.

Properties — Click this button to display the properties for the selected item.

Move up — Click this button to move the selected item up one line in the book outline.

Move down — Click this button to move the selected item down one line in the book outline.

Help — Click this button to display a list of help topics for the Books view.


Creating a new book

To create a new book:

1	From the Publishing Center use the Create a Family Book link to begin creating one that you can share with family and friends, present as a gift, display at the next reunion, or upload (sometimes called posting) to your Family Home Page.

2	New Book — When you first click Create a Family Book, Family Tree Maker displays the New Book dialog box.  Simply enter the title for your new book, and then enter your name, assuming you are the author.  This information will be displayed (and/or printed) in your book.

3	Creating a Book — After entering the title and author information, Family Tree Maker takes you to the Books view, where you will select the items you want to include in your new Family Book.

4	Converting to Book Layout — If you choose a Saved View (indicated with an asterisk [*]) from the list for inclusion in your book, Family Tree Maker will advise you that it must be converted to Book Layout before proceeding.

See Also

The Publishing Center


New Book dialog box

Book Title — Type the title of the book you want to create.

Author — Type your name, or the name of the person who did most of the genealogical research.


Opening an existing book

To open an existing book:

1.	From the Books menu, select Open Book (ALT, B, O).

2.	Select the name of the book you want to open.

3.	Click OK.

Family Tree Maker displays your selected Book view.

See Also

The Publishing Center


Open Book dialog box

Available books — Select the book you want to open from the list and then click OK.


Working with book items

Adding trees, reports, and calendars to your book

Adding a Table of Contents and Index to your book

Skipping pages to make room for external items

Creating text for your book

Adding pictures to your book

Creating Saved Views

Adding a bibliography to your book

Copying items to another book

Deleting items from your book

Customizing items in your book

Changing item names and other properties

Arranging items in your book

Changing printer settings for items in your book

See Also

The Publishing Center


Changing book properties

To change the book properties:

1.	From the Books menu, select Book Properties (ALT, B, P).

2.	Select the options you want.

For a description of the options in the Book Properties dialog box, click here.

3.	Click OK.

Family Tree Maker returns to the Books view.


Book Properties dialog box

Book title — The name of your book.  To change the name, type the new name in this field.

Author — The name of the person who did most of the family research.  In most cases, this will be your name.

Starting number — This determines the page number that will appear on the first page of your book.  In most cases this number will be "1."  To change this number, click the arrows in this field, or type a number.

Use Roman numerals for Table of Contents and preceding items — Many books use Roman numeral page numbers for pages that precede the Table of Contents.  To use this format, select this check box.


Adding a header and footer to your book

Most printed books include a header and footer on each page.  The header appears at the very top of the page and the footer appears at the very bottom of the page.  In addition to choosing a header and footer for your book, Family Tree Maker also allows you to turn the header and footer off on an item by item basis.  See Changing item names and other properties

To add a header and footer:

1.	If you aren't in the Books view, open the book you want to change.  See Opening an existing book.

2.	From the Books menu, select Book Header, Footer (ALT, B, H).

3.	Select the options you want to use.

For a description of the options in the Book Header and Footer dialog box, click here.

4.	After you make your selections, click OK.

Family Tree Maker returns to the Books view.

See Also

The Publishing Center


Book Header and Footer dialog box

Header — Select a header format from the drop-down list. If you do not want a header, select None.

Footer — Select a footer format from the drop-down list. If you do not want a footer, select None.

If you choose to have headers or footers for your book, you can also turn off the header or footer on an item by item basis.  For more information, click here.

Set Font — Click this button to adjust the header and footer text style.  Select the text styles you want to use and then click OK.  For a description of these options, click here.


Printing your book

After you create your book outline, arrange the book items in the order you want them to appear, optionally add a header and footer, and adjust the item and book properties, you are ready to print your book.

Note:	We recommend that you view each of the Ancestor and Descendant trees you have added to your book before printing.  These trees will print in "book layout" format (also called paginated trees) when printed from within a book.  You may want to adjust some of the formatting before printing.  For information on viewing the trees you have added to your book, see Customizing items in your book.

When you print a book, Family Tree Maker uses the printer settings you chose for the individual items in your book.  If you need to change the printer settings for a particular item in your book, click here for details.

To print your book:

1.	From the File menu, select Print Book (ALT, F, P).

2.	Select the printing options.

For a description of the options in the Print Book dialog box, click here.

3.	Click OK.

Family Tree Maker prints your book.

See Also

The Publishing Center


Print Book dialog box

Print range — If you want to print all of the pages, select the All option button.  If you want to print a range of pages, type the page number of the first page that you want to print in the From field and type the page number of the last page you want to print in the To field.  If you want to print only one page, type the number of that page in both the From and To fields.

Print color — If you have a color printer, select this check box to print in color.  De-select it if you just want to print in black and white.  If you have a black and white printer, select this check box to print in black, white, and shades of gray.

Print to file — If you want to be able to print to a file and send it to your printer at a later time, select this check box.  This option is especially useful if you want to print on a printer or plotter owned by someone who doesn't have Family Tree Maker.  When you print, Family Tree Maker will ask for an "Output File Name."

Mirror Margins — Select this option button if you want the left and right margins you have set for each book item to "flip" on alternating pages.  This allows you to have a larger margin on the "inside" edge if you want to copy the pages back to back.

Copies — In this field, type the number of copies that you want to print.

You can control items such as paper orientation, paper size, margins, and which printer prints your book.  If you want to change any of these items, see the topic Changing margins, printers, and page orientation.


When your tree grows too large

Currently, the Book layout (paginated trees) option is selected in the Tree Format dialog box.  This option formats your tree into multiple sections that easily fit on one page each.  However, the options that you just selected prevent Family Tree Maker from fitting at least one of the sections on one page.

Note:	Family Tree Maker automatically changes the format of Ancestor and Descendant trees that you have included in a book to Book layout.  If you received this warning while working in a book, it means the choices you made when you created your tree in Custom layout format need to be adjusted for Book layout format.

To resolve this problem, you can click any of the following:

Undo — Click this button to reverse the last option you selected that made your tree grow too large.  (Note, this option is unavailable if you are currently in a book.)

Custom tree — Click this button to allow your tree to be formatted as one large tree spanning multiple pages.  This changes the setting in the Tree Format dialog box from "Book layout" to "Custom layout."  (Note, this option is unavailable if you are currently in a book.)

Change font — Click this button to reduce the font sizes that are currently selected for the items in your tree.  Family Tree Maker will display the Text, Font, Style, & Size dialog box.

Reduce items — Click this button to reduce the amount of information that is included in your tree.  Family Tree Maker will display the Items to Include dialog box.

Cancel — Click this button to stop the tree formatting.  Family Tree Maker will return you to a blank page in the tree view.  If you were printing a book, Family Tree Maker cancels the printing of this tree and resumes printing the next item in your book.  Please note that this will result in incorrect page numbers for the remaining items to be printed.

See Also

The Publishing Center


Deleting a book

In the event that you decide you no longer want a particular book, you can delete it from your Family File.  When you delete a book you also remove everything in the outline for this book.

Note:	If your book includes any Saved Views, deleting a book will not remove these items from your Family File.  When you delete a book, Family Tree Maker removes only the copy of the item you placed in the book outline.

To delete a book:

1.	From the Books menu, select Delete Book (ALT, B, D).

2.	Select the name of the book you want to delete.

3.	Click Delete.

Family Tree Maker displays a dialog box asking you to confirm this action.

4.	To delete the book, click Yes, to keep the book, click No.

Family Tree Maker removes the book from the list of Books available to open.


Delete Book dialog box

Choose the book you wish to delete — Select the book you want to delete from your Family File.

Delete — Click this button to delete the selected book.

Cancel — Click this option to keep the selected book.


Adding trees, reports, and calendars to your book

When you add trees, reports, and calendars to your book, you are actually adding a copy of the view to your book.  This means that you can customize these reports using the options on the Contents and Format menus, and Family Tree Maker remembers the options you choose for your book.  Don't worry, Family Tree Maker still updates the information in your book items when you change the information in your Family File.

To add items to your book:

1.	Select the tree, report, or calendar you want to add in the Available items list on the left.

Note:  When you select Genealogy Report, Family Tree Maker prompts you to choose the report format.  For a description of these options, click here.

2.	Click Add.

Family Tree Maker adds the item you selected to the bottom of the Outline for list on the right (directly above the Index if you have one).

3.	Repeat steps 1 and 2 to add other items for this individual to your book.

After you finish adding items for this individual, you can change the primary individual and add items based on another individual.

4.	From the View menu, select Index of Individuals.

5.	Select the name of the person you want as the new primary individual and then click OK.

Family Tree Maker returns to the Books view and displays a list of trees and reports based on the new primary individual.

6.	Repeat the steps above to add items for this individual and all the other individuals you want to include in your book.

See also

Changing item names and other properties

Arranging items in your book

The Publishing Center

Note:  For troubleshooting help and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs), remember to visit http://www.familytreemaker.com/support.html — this is your best source for accurate assistance with Family Tree Maker.


The Add Genealogy Report dialog box

Register (Descendant Ordered) — This format is accepted by the New England Historic Genealogical Society, one of the oldest genealogical societies in the country.  The Register format dates back to 1870 and is used to establish "pedigree."

NGS Quarterly (Descendant Ordered) — This format is the preferred genealogical report of the National Genealogical Society.  The format dates back to 1912.  It is similar to the Register format, but uses slightly different numbering and symbol systems.

Ahnentafel (Ancestor Ordered) — This format lists both the maternal and paternal family lines in the same report.  It is not as popular as the other two formats for formal presentations.


Adding a Table of Contents and Index to your book

Family Tree Maker helps you create a professional looking book with a Table of Contents and an Index.  If you choose to include these items in your book, Family Tree Maker will do all the work for you.  It generates the lists for you, formats the layout, and maintains the page numbers and other information as you create your book.

To add a Table of Contents and Index to your book:

1.	Select Table of Contents in the Available items list.

2.	Click Add.

Family Tree Maker adds the Table of Contents to the bottom of the Outline for list and removes it from the Available items since you can have only one Table of Contents per book.

3.	Select Index in the Available items list.

4.	Click Add.

Family Tree Maker adds the Index to the bottom of the Outline for list and removes it from the Available items since you can have only one Index per book.

See also

Arranging items in your book

Options for Book Index

The Publishing Center


The Text Item window

The Text Item window is a mini-word processor that you can use to add text and pictures to your book.  For example, you can include a family member's favorite recipes, jokes, or even a short biography.  You can also insert images from your Family Tree Maker Scrapbook pages to make your book more informative and exciting to read.

You will find many similarities between the word processing features in the Notes dialog box and the Text Item window, but the  Text Item window has a convenient toolbar, more powerful formatting capabilities, and it can include Scrapbook pictures as well as text.

How to...

Format text in a text item

Format paragraphs in a text item

Insert pictures in a text item

Copy text from one text item to another

Print a text item

Save a text item

Close a text item

Insert page breaks in a text item

What is it?

The Text Item Toolbar


Options for Book Index

You can customize the book index in a number of ways. You can change the number of columns, display indexing letters, or group together individuals who share a common surname.

To change the options for the book index:

1.	Select Index in the Outline for list.

2.	Click Edit.

3.	From the Contents menu, select Options.

4.	Select the number of columns you want.

One Column — Index will be formatted using only 1 column per page.

Two Column — Index will be formatted using 2 columns per page.

Three Column — Index will be formatted using 3 columns per page.

5. Group first names under each surname — Select this check box to group together the first names of individuals who share a common surname.  The surname appears in the first entry, with the first and middle names following alphabetically.

6. Display indexing letters — Select this checkbox to display a letter at the beginning of each alphabetical section.

7.	Click OK to save the changes and return to the book index.


Creating Saved Views

Saved Views allow you to customize or reformat trees, reports, or other items and then save them for future use.

To create a Saved View:

1.	Go to the view on which you wish to base your Saved View.

Customize or reformat the view as you wish with moveable boxes or by changing text fonts, styles and colors, or box and border styles and colors.

Note:  Moveable boxes are available only in standard Ancestor and Descendant trees.

2.	From the File menu, select Save . . .As.

Family Tree Maker inserts the type of view you are saving, such as Save Ancestor Tree As . . . or Save Genealogy Report As . . ..

If you are making additional changes to a previously created Saved View, you may select Save . . . instead.  This allows you to update or make additional changes without having to rename the view.

3.	In the Please give a name to this view field, accept the name Family Tree Maker suggests, or type a unique name for the item.

4.	Click OK.

Family Tree Maker returns to your Saved View and displays the name you created in the Title bar.

See also

Copying Saved Views

Displaying and editing Saved Views

Deleting Saved Views

Adding a bibliography to your book

The Publishing Center


The Save View As dialog box

Please give a name to this view— Type a name for the Saved View, or accept the name Family Tree Maker suggests.

For reference, Family Tree Maker displays all of your existing Saved Views so that you can confirm that your new name is unique.


Copying Saved Views

To copy a Saved View:

1.	From the File menu, select Open Saved View.

Family Tree Maker displays the Open Saved View dialog box.

2.	Select one of the Saved Views listed in the Select view field, and click Copy.

Family Tree Maker displays the Copy Saved View dialog box.

3.	Accept the name suggested by Family Tree Maker, or enter your own unique name for the copy to be created.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Open Saved View dialog box and highlights the name of the copy you just created.

4.	Click Open to display the copy you just created and make any additional changes you wish.

At this point, you have a couple options:

•	From the File menu, select Save . . . .  This allows you to save your edited copy without having to rename it.

•	From the View menu, select a different view to display.  When Family Tree Maker asks if you want to save your changes, click No.  Family Tree Maker will then return you to the Books view, and your Saved View copy will appear in the Available items list on the left.

See Also

The Publishing Center


The Copy Saved View dialog box

1.	Type a name for the Saved View copy in the Please give a name to this view field or accept the name that Family Tree Maker suggests.

2.	Click OK.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Open Saved View dialog box and highlights the name of the newly created Saved View.


Displaying and editing Saved Views

To display or edit a Saved View:

1.	From the File menu, select Open Saved View.

Family Tree Maker displays the Open Saved View dialog box.

2.	Select the Saved View you wish to display/edit from the list in the Select view field.

3.	Click Open.

Family Tree Maker displays the view you selected.

After you have edited your view, you may:

•	From the File menu, select Save  . . . to save your current changes.

•	From the View menu, select a different view and click No when prompted whether or not to save your changes.  Family Tree Maker will display the new view you selected without saving your current changes.

See Also

The Publishing Center


Deleting Saved Views

To delete a Saved View:

1.	From the File menu, select Open Saved View.

Family Tree Maker displays the Open Saved View dialog box.

2.	Select the Saved View you want to delete from the list in the Select view field.

3.	Click Delete.

Family Tree Maker deletes the selected Saved View and returns you to the Open Saved View dialog box.

4.	Click Close to return to the previous view.


The Custom Book Items dialog box
The Open Saved View dialog box

Open — Displays the selected item.  You can simply look at the view, or change it and Family Tree Maker will prompt you to save your changes.

Copy — Displays the Copy Saved View dialog box.  Type a name for the copy in the Please give a name to this view field, or accept the name that Family Tree Maker suggests.  The item name must be unique.  Family Tree Maker copies the selected item with the new name.  You may now Open the newly created copy and make additional changes.

Delete — Removes the selected item from your Family File.


Adding a bibliography to your book

You can use the Create Saved Views command to add a bibliography to your book.  First you customize a Bibliography report to include only the individuals in your book.  Then you can create a Saved View for this report and add it to your book.

To add a bibliography to your book:

1.	From the View menu, select Report.

2.	From the Format menu, select Report Format.

3.	Select Bibliography from the list and then click OK.

Note:  If your book does not include information about all of the individuals in your Family File, you will need to customize the report to show only the individuals included in your book.  See Selecting a group of individuals to include.

4.	From the File menu, select Save Bibliography of Sources As.

5.	In the Please give a name to this view field, accept the name Family Tree Maker suggests, or type a name for the item.

6.	Click OK to save the item.

7.	Open the book where you want to add the bibliography.  See Opening an existing book.

8.	In the Available items list, select the bibliography report (it will have the name you entered in step 5).

9.	Click Add.

Family Tree Maker adds a copy of the bibliography to your book.

See Also

The Publishing Center


Copying Saved Views to another book

If you decide to create more than one book, you may want to include some Saved Views used in a prior book.  You can save time by copying items from one book to another book.

To copy a Saved View to another book:

1.	Open the book containing the Saved View(s) you want to copy.  See Opening an existing book.

2.	In the Outline for list, select the Saved View you want to copy.

3.	Drag the item to the Available items list.

Family Tree Maker displays the Copy Book Item dialog box.

4.	In the New name field, enter the name you want for the Saved View copy and click OK.

Family Tree Maker copies and renames the Saved View and displays it in the Available items list.

5.	Open the book where you want to add the new copy.

6.	In the Available items list, select the custom book item you copied from the first book.

7.	Click Add.

Family Tree Maker adds the item to the currently open book.

See Also

The Publishing Center


The Copy Book Item dialog box
The Copy Saved View dialog box

New name — Type a unique name for the copy of the selected Saved View.

Family Tree Maker copies the Saved View to the Available items list and renames it with the title you have entered.


Deleting items from your book

To delete an item:

1.	In the Outline for list, select the item you want to delete.

2.	Click Delete.

Family Tree Maker displays a dialog box asking you to confirm that you want to delete this item from your book.

3.	To delete the item, click Yes.  To keep the item, click No.

Family Tree Maker returns to the Books view and the item you deleted no longer appears in the "Outline for" list.


Customizing items in your book

After you create your book outline, you can customize the book items to suit your taste.  For example, you can change the information and formatting options in your trees and reports.  Keep in mind, that a well-designed book maintains a consistent look and feel throughout the book.  For example, all the titles should use the same text styles and all the body text should use the same text styles (which may be different from the title styles).

Note:	If you included a Saved View in your book and you customize it using the steps below, the changes you make will appear only in your book.  The original custom book item remains unchanged.  Likewise, if you edit the custom book item, as described in Displaying and editing Saved Views those changes will not appear in your book.

To customize the items in your book:

1.	In the Outline for list, select the item you want to customize.

2.	Click the Edit button, or from the Book menu, select Edit Book Item.

Family Tree Maker displays the item you selected.

3.	To customize trees and reports, use the options on the Contents and Format menus.  To customize a text item, use any of the menus in the Text Item window.

See Also

The Publishing Center


Changing item names and other properties

Family Tree Maker automatically assigns a title to each item in your book.  If you like, you can change the name of an item as well as other item properties.

To change an item's name and other properties:

1.	In the Outline for list, select the item you want to change.

2.	Click Properties.

3.	Select the options you want to use.

For a description of the options in the Book Item Properties dialog box, click here.

4.	Click OK.

Family Tree Maker returns to the Books view.


The Item Properties dialog box

Item Name — The name that appears at the top of the page associated with the selected item.  To change the item's name, type the new name in this field.

# of pages — This option is only available when editing the Place Holder item.  In this field, enter the number of pages you want to skip.  For example, to make room for a ten page document you created in another program, you would enter 10 in this field to skip that number of pages.

This item begins a Chapter — Indicates whether this item is a chapter heading or a section within a chapter.  Click this check box to make this item a chapter heading.  To make this item a section within a chapter, do not select this check box.

Start this on odd numbered page — In most books, the first page of a chapter appears on a right-hand page with an odd page number.  If this item begins a chapter and you want Family Tree Maker to place it on a right-hand page, select this check box.

If you have chosen to use book headers or footers, (see Adding a header and footer to your book) you can use the following options to control whether they are used for the current book item:

Include the header in this section — For some book items, you may want to omit the book header.  For example, a Title page generally does not have a header.  To omit the header only for this book item, de-select this check box.

Include the footer in this section — For some book items, you may want to omit the book footer.  For example, a Title page generally does not have a footer.  To omit the footer only for this book item, de-select this check box.


Arranging items in your book

After you create your book outline, you can put the book items in any order you like.  The only restriction is that the Title Page must be the first item in your book, and if you include an Index, it must be the last item.

To arrange the items in your book:

1.	In the Outline for list, select the item you want to move.

2.	Click Move up or Move down to move the item up or down one line at a time.

Alternatively, you can use your mouse to drag an item to another position provided it is after the Title Page and before the Index.

See Also

The Publishing Center


Changing printer settings for items in your book

To change the printer settings for an item in your book:

1.	From the Books view, select the item you want to change in the Available items list.

2.	Click the Edit button.

Family Tree Maker displays the item you selected.

3.	From the File menu, select Print Setup.

4.	Select the printer settings you want to use.

For a description of the options in the Print Setup dialog box, click here.

5.	Click OK.


Adding text to your book

Creating text items in your book

Moving or copying text from one text item to another

Copying text from another Windows program into a text item

Formatting text in a text item

Formatting paragraphs in a text item

Inserting page breaks in a text item

Spell checking a text item

Saving a text item

Printing a text item

Closing a text item

See Also

The Publishing Center


The Text Item toolbar

Note: If you cannot read all of the text below, click the maximize icon in the upper right portion of this window, or  “grab” the left side of this window frame with your mouse and drag to the left to increase the window size.

The Text Item window has its own toolbar.  Each of the toolbar buttons is described below.

 Save — Saves the changes you've made to the text item.

 Cut — Deletes the selected text and places it on the Clipboard.

 Copy — Copies the selected text and places it on the Clipboard.

 Paste — Inserts text from the Clipboard at the cursor's location.

 Undo — Reverses the last editing action.

 Redo — Restores the editing action that you just reversed.

 Font — Allows you to select a different font.

 Font size — Allows you to change the font size.

 Bold — Makes the currently selected text bold.

 Italic— Makes the currently selected text italic.

 Underline — Underlines the currently selected text.

 Superscript — Makes the currently selected text superscript.

 Left align — Aligns the currently selected text on the left side of the page.

 Center align — Centers the currently selected text on the page.

 Right align — Aligns the currently selected text on the right side of the page.

 Justify — Arranges the currently selected text into uniform blocks across the page.

 Insert Scrapbook Picture — Inserts a scrapbook picture in your text.


Creating text items in your book

The Text Item window is a mini-word processor that you can use to add text and pictures to your book.  You will find many similarities between the word processing features in the Notes dialog box and the New Text Items window, but the New Text Items window has a convenient toolbar, more powerful formatting capabilities, and it can include Scrapbook pictures as well as text.

To create a text item in your book:

1.	In the Books view, select Text Item in the Available items list.

2.	Click Add.

3.	Select the option button that best describes the type of text item you want to create.

For a description of the options in the Add Text Item dialog box, click here.

4.	In the Outline for list, select the text item you just added.

5.	Click Edit or double-click the item.

Family Tree Maker displays a text item window.  The name of the window is based on the type of text item you selected in step 3.

6.	Type the text you want to include in your book.  You can use the same keys you use to move around the Notes dialog box.  Click here for details.

See also

Formatting text in a text item

Formatting paragraphs in a text item

Moving or copying text from one text item to another

Copying text from another Windows program

Spell checking a text item

Saving a text item

Printing a text item

Inserting page breaks in a text item

The Publishing Center


The Add Text Item dialog box

New Text — Select this item to start with a blank text page.

Introduction — Select this option to create an Introduction based on a Family Tree Maker template.

Preface — Select this option to create a Preface based on a Family Tree Maker template.

Foreword — Select this option to create a Foreword based on a Family Tree Maker template.

Dedication — Select this option to create a Dedication based on a Family Tree Maker template.

Copyright Notice — Select this option to create a Copyright Notice based on a Family Tree Maker template.


Moving or copying text from one item to another

As you create your book, you may find that you want to repeat the same text in more than one part of your book.  For example, you may want to include a story about grandmother Smith delivering grandchild Jones in both the Smith and Jones chapters of your book.  Or, you may decide that you want to move the story from the Smith chapter to the Jones chapter.  Family Tree Maker lets you do just that.

Note:	You cannot copy pictures from one text item to another.  You can only copy text.

To move or copy sections of text from one text item to another.

1.	In the Outline for list, select the text item containing the text you want to move or copy.

2.	Click Edit to display the text item you selected.

3.	Highlight the text you want to move or copy.

4.	From the Edit menu, select Cut to move this text to another text item, or select Copy to copy this text.

Family Tree Maker copies the highlighted text to the Clipboard.

5.	From the File menu, select Close to return to the Books view.

6.	In the Outline for list, select the text item where you want to insert the text

7.	Click Edit to display the text item you selected.

8.	Position your cursor where you want to insert the text.  If you want the new text to replace existing text, highlight the existing text.

9.	From the Edit menu, select Paste.

Family Tree Maker pastes the text from the Clipboard into this text item and repositions any existing text, if necessary.  Since the Clipboard is not erased until you use the Copy or Cut command again, you can paste the same text as many times as you like.


Copying text from another Windows program into a text item

If you have family stories in another Windows program, you can copy them to the Clipboard and then paste them into a text item in your book.  When you copy formatted text from another program, it appears as "Plain" unformatted text in Family Tree Maker.  To format the text see Formatting text in a text item

To transfer text from another Windows program into Family Tree Maker:

1.	In the other Windows program, copy the text to the Clipboard.

If you need assistance with this, please consult the manual that came with the other program.

2.	In Family Tree Maker, open the book where you want to add the text, and go to the text item where you want to place the information.

3.	Position your cursor where you want to insert the text.  If you want to use the new text to replace a section of existing text, highlight that section of text.

4.	From the Edit menu, select Paste.

Family Tree Maker inserts the text in your text item.  If the text contained pictures in the other program, the pictures will not appear in the text item.

Since the Clipboard is not erased until you use the Copy or Cut command again, you can paste the same information as many times as you like.


Formatting text in a text item

You can use the commands on the Format menu to format text in the text items in your book.

Font — Select this command to change the font selection.

Size — Select this command to change the font size.

Style — Select this command to apply Bold, Italic, Underline, or Superscript to the text.  To remove any of these style options, select Plain.


Formatting paragraphs in a text item

You can use the Alignment command options on the Format menu to format paragraphs in the text items in your book.

Left Aligned — Select this option to align the text on the left side of the page.

Centered — Select this option to center the text on the page.

Right Aligned — Select this option to align the text on the right side of the page.

Fully Justified —- Select this option to arrange the text into uniform blocks--which may result in uneven word spacing.


Saving a text item

As you add or change a text item, you should save it periodically.  From the File menu, select Save.  Family Tree Maker saves your text item as part of the current book.  If you forget to save a text item, Family Tree Maker will prompt you to save it when you close the Text Item window.


Printing a text item

Just as you can control the printer settings for your trees, reports and other views, you can control the printer setting for each of your text items.  To change the printer settings for a text item, you must be in the Text Item window with that item displayed on the screen.  For specific instructions, click here.

You can also print your text items independently from the rest of the book.  This enables you to see if the text item looks the way you want it before you print the entire book.

Note:	Although the book header and footer do not appear in the text item window, they will appear when you print a text item.

To print your text item:

1.	From the File menu, select Print.

2.	Select the printing options.

For a description of the options in the Print dialog box, click here.

3.	Click OK.

Family Tree Maker prints your text item.


Closing a text item

After you finish creating or changing your text item, you will need to close the Text Item window to return to the Books view.  From the File menu, select Close.  If you haven't saved all of your changes, Family Tree Maker asks if you want to save them, and then returns to the Books view.


Adding pictures to your book

Inserting pictures in a book

Moving pictures in a book

Sizing pictures in a book

Saving pictures in a book

Deleting pictures in a book

See Also

The Publishing Center


Inserting pictures in a book

You can add pictures to your book by inserting pictures from your Family Tree Maker Scrapbooks in a text item.  You must first add the picture to a Scrapbook in order to use it in a book.  For information about adding pictures to a Scrapbook, click here.

To make it easier for you to place your picture where you want it, we recommend that you add your text before you add your picture.

To add a Scrapbook picture to a text item:

1.	In the Books view, go to the text item where you want to place the picture.  See Customizing items in your book.

2.	In the Text Item window, position the cursor where you want to insert the picture.

3.	From the Picture menu, select Insert from Scrapbook.

Family Tree Maker displays the Individuals with Scrapbook Pictures dialog box.

Note: The list of individuals with Scrapbook pictures also includes individuals with Marriage Scrapbook pictures.

4.	In the Name field, type the name of the individual whose Scrapbook contains the picture you want to insert, or select the person's name from the list, and then click OK.

Family Tree Maker displays the Insert Scrapbook Picture dialog box.

5.	From the Available pictures list, select the picture you want to add to the text item.

Note:  If the picture you want isn't in the list, or you selected the wrong Scrapbook, click Select new individual to select a different Scrapbook.

Family Tree Maker displays the picture you select in the Preview area.  If the picture does not display, select the Preview Picture check box.

6.	If the picture has a caption and you want to display it in your Book, select the Display Caption with Picture check box.

Note:  The caption will not display in the Preview screen, but will appear in the text item.

7.	Click OK to add the picture to the text item.

Family Tree Maker displays the picture in the text item.  At this point you have the following options:

Move the picture — Select the picture and drag it to another location in the text item.  If you don’t like the new location, click the Undo toolbar button or from the Edit menu, select Undo.

Size the picture — Select the picture, and then from the Picture menu, select Size Picture.  In the Size Picture dialog box, type the new picture size in the Picture width field, and then click OK.

Save the picture in the text item — Click the Save toolbar button, or from the File menu, select Save.

Delete the picture from the text item — Select the picture, and then from the Picture menu, select Delete Picture.

Add/edit a caption — Select the picture, and then from the Picture menu, select More About.  In the More About Picture/Object dialog box, type or edit the caption in the caption field and then click OK.

Close the text item window — Click the Close toolbar button or from the File menu, select Close

See Also

The Publishing Center


The Individuals with Scrapbook Pictures dialog box

Name field — To find a name quickly, type it in this field in the following format:  Last, First, Middle.  The list must be sorted alphabetically by last name from A to Z.

Name list — This list includes the names, birth dates, and death dates of everyone in your Family File whose scrapbook contains pictures.

Find — Click this button to search for any name or name part.

Next and Previous — Click these buttons to look through the matching names.

Options — Click this button to change the order of the names.


The Insert Scrapbook picture dialog box

Available pictures — Lists the pictures in the current scrapbook.  Select the picture you want to add to this text item.  You can choose between individual and marriage scrapbook items.

Select new individual — Click this button to select a Scrapbook for a different individual.

Preview Picture — Select this check box to display the picture in the Preview area.

Display Caption with Picture — Select this check box to include a caption with the picture. For information about creating captions for scrapbook pictures, click here.


Title and Description

Add a title and description for the picture you are adding to your Home Page.  If you leave the title blank, your picture will be posted to your Home Page as “Untitled.”

Note:  Titles entered in this dialog box have no effect on captions or descriptions in the Scrapbook.

Title — Add the title you want to appear with this picture in your Home Page.

Description — Add a brief description explaining the context of the picture, or providing additional information for your Home Page visitors to enjoy.

See Also

The Publishing Center


Moving pictures in a book

To move a picture in a book, click the picture and drag it to another location in the text item.  If you don't like the new location, click the Undo toolbar button or from the Edit menu, select Undo.

See Also

The Publishing Center


Sizing pictures in a book

To size a picture in a book:

1.	Click the picture.

2.	From the Edit menu, select Size Picture.

3.	Enter a number in the Picture width field.  To get a smaller picture, enter a smaller number.

4.	Click OK.


The Size Picture dialog box

Picture width — Use this field to change the width of the picture.  Type the width you want to use in this field, or click the arrows to change the numbers.


Saving pictures in a book
Saving a picture in a book

To save a picture in a book, from the Text Item window, click the Save toolbar button, or from the File menu, select Save.


Deleting pictures in a book

To delete a picture from a text item:

1.	Click the picture.

2.	From the Edit menu, select Delete Picture.


Formatting the Index

Family Tree Maker automatically generates and arranges the Index of all of the individuals in your book.  From this window, you can change the title or the font selections.

To change the title:

1.	From the Format menu, select Title and Footnote.

2.	Make your selections and click OK.

To change the fonts:

1.	From the Contents menu, select Text Font, Style, and Size.

2.	Make your selections and click OK.


Options for Book Index dialog box

Family Tree Maker automatically generates and arranges the Index of all of the individuals in your book.  From this dialog, you can choose how many columns (one, two or three columns) Family Tree Maker should use to format this index.

Group first names under each surname — Select this check box to group together the first names of individuals who share a common surname.  The surname appears in the first entry, with the first and middle names following alphabetically.

Display indexing letters — Select this checkbox to display a letter at the beginning of each alphabetical section.

For additional information about the Books feature, click here.


Formatting the Table of Contents

Family Tree Maker automatically generates and arranges the Table of contents from all of the items in your book.  From this window, you can change the title or the font selections.

To change the title:

1.	From the Format menu, select Title and Footnote.

2.	Make your selections and click OK.

To change the fonts:

1. From the Contents menu, select Text Font, Style, and Size.

2. Make your selections and click OK.


Inserting page breaks in a text item

Family Tree Maker automatically draws a dotted line to reflect each page break in a Text Editor document.  However, there are times when you’ll want to control where the page breaks occur.  Suppose you want to keep a picture from breaking across pages, or start a new section at the top of a page.  Family Tree Maker lets you insert your own page breaks and control the flow of the document.  The page breaks you insert will appear as a solid black line, so that you can easily differentiate them from the page breaks the Text Editor inserts automatically.

To insert a page break:

1. Insert the cursor at the spot where you want the page break to occur.

2. From the Insert menu, select Page Break (Ctrl, Enter).

Note: Pictures do not move when you insert a page break.  If you notice that a page break cuts across a picture, you’ll need to drag the picture above or below the break to prevent it from being broken across pages.

To delete a page break:

Place the cursor in front of the page break, and then press the Delete key on the keyboard; or place the cursor after the page break, and then press the Backspace key.


Skipping pages in a book

Family Tree Maker lets you skip pages in the book to accommodate items you may have created outside of the program. Suppose you wrote a story in your word processor and you want to retain the original format, or perhaps you created another document that you can’t incorporate into Family Tree Maker.  You can skip pages to accommodate these external elements so that you can bind them into the book at a later time.

To skip pages in a book:

1. Select Place Holder in the list of Available items on the left.

2. Click Add.

Family Tree Maker displays the Place Holder Properties dialog box.  For a description of the options in the Place Holder Properties dialog box, click here.

3. Make your selections, and then click OK.

Family Tree Maker adds the item you selected to the bottom of the Outline for list on the right (directly above the Index if your book has one).

See also

Changing item names and other properties

Arranging items in your book


The Place Holder Properties dialog box

Item name — In this field, type a name for your new External Item.

# of pages — In this field, enter the number of pages you want to skip.  For example, to make room for a ten page document you created in another program, you would enter 10 in this field to skip that number of pages.

This item begins a Chapter —  Indicates whether this item is a chapter heading or a section within a chapter.  Select this check box to make this item a chapter heading.  To make this item a section within a chapter, do not select this check box.

Start this item on odd numbered page — In most books, the first page of a chapter appears on a right-hand page with an odd page number.  If this item begins a chapter and you want Family Tree Maker to place it on a right-hand page, select this check box.


Using the Relationship Calculator

Family Tree Maker helps you determine how two individuals are related.  You may select any two individuals from your Family File and Family Tree Maker will automatically calculate their relationship, including canon and civil numbers.  In some cases, Family Tree Maker will also display their nearest common relative.

To use the Relationship Calculator:

1. From the People menu, select Relationship Calculator (ALT, P, R).

Family Tree Maker displays the Relationship Calculator dialog box and automatically calculates the relationship between the selected individual and his or her spouse, child, father, or mother.

2. To change either individual, click the corresponding Change button.

Family Tree Maker displays the Index of Individuals dialog box.  For more information on the Index of Individuals, click here.

3. Select an individual from the index, and then click OK.

4. Click Close to exit the Relationship Calculator.


The Relationship Calculator dialog box

Change — Click the Change buttons to select any two individuals in your Family File and calculate the relationship between them.


Using the Soundex Calculator

Genealogy presents some interesting challenges to the modern researcher.  Looking for specific names can be tricky, especially when there is the possibility of variable spellings and misspellings.  Soundex is one of the tools genealogists use to seek out names that might have been either purposefully changed, or unknowingly altered through clerical error.  For example, "Smith" can also be spelled "Smyth," "Smithe," and "Smythe."

Soundex is an index of surnames that are coded based on their consonant sounds, rather than their spellings.  With Soundex, you can find matches for names that also sound the same despite these slight variations.  Family Tree Maker can automatically determine the Soundex code for any name you wish. For more information about Soundex, click here.

To use the Soundex Calculator:

1. From the People menu, select Soundex Calculator (ALT, P, X).

Family Tree Maker displays the Soundex Calculator dialog box.

2. In the Surname field, enter the name for which you want the Soundex code.

Family Tree Maker automatically calculates the code as you type in the name.

Note: You may also click the Index button to display the Index of Individuals dialog box. Select the name in the index, and then click OK to calculate the corresponding Soundex code.

3. Click Close to exit the Soundex Calculator.


The Soundex Calculator dialog box

Name — In this field, type the name for which you want the Soundex code.

Choose — Click this button to select a name from the Index of Individuals.  Family Tree Maker will automatically calculate its Soundex code.


Adding a background image to a tree
Adding a Background Picture to a tree

To add a Background Picture to a tree:

1. From the Picture/Object menu, select Tree Background Picture.

Family Tree Maker displays the Background Picture dialog box. For a description of the options in the Background Picture dialog box, click here.

2. Make your selections and then click OK to return to the tree.


The Background Picture dialog box

Display picture in background — Select this check box to display a picture in the tree’s background.

Choose — Click this button to select the image you want to display.

Position — Select Centered to center the picture between the tree’s borders.  Select Tiled to repeat the picture across the entire background of the tree.

Re-size picture to fit tree borders — Select this check box to shrink or enlarge the picture so that it better fits the tree’s dimensions.  Family Tree Maker still retains the original aspect ratio of the picture.

Fade picture — In this field, specify the density or darkness of the background image. You may enter a range from 0 to 100 percent, where 0 is solid white and 100 is the darkest image possible.


Including the current date and time

To include the current date and time:

1.	From the Contents menu, select Title & Footnote (ALT, C, T).

2.	Select the Include date of printing and Include time of printing check boxes to include the current date and time at the bottom of the first page.

3.	Click OK when you're done.

Family Tree Maker closes the Title & Footnote dialog box.  The date and time will appear in the lower right corner of the page.


Emphasizing the relationship between two people

To emphasize the relationship between two people

1. From the Format menu, select Box, Line, & Border Styles.

2. Click the Lines tab.

3. Select the Highlight the relationship between check box to emphasize the relationship between two individuals in your tree.

4. Click the Change buttons to display the Change Individual dialog box and select the two individuals whose relationship you want to emphasize.  For a description of the options in the Change Individual dialog box, click here.

5. Click the Line Color drop-down list to select the color used to emphasize the relationship specified in step 4.

6. When you’re finished, click OK to return to the tree.


The Change Individual dialog box

Name list — Select one of the two individuals whose relationship you want to emphasize.  The options described below can help you locate a name in the list.

Name — To find a name in the Name list, type it in this field last name first.  The list must be sorted alphabetically by last name to use this feature.

Find — Click this button in order to start a search for any name or group of letters.  After typing a name and clicking OK, click Next and Previous to look through the matching names.

Options — Click this button to change the order of the names in the Name list.


The Options for All-In-One Tree dialog box

Show unconnected step-family trees — Select this check box to display the relationships of people who are not blood relatives of the primary individual (but are related by marriage).  For example, if your sister’s husband has descendants from another marriage, then the descendants from his second marriage would also be included in the All-in-One tree.

Show unrelated trees — Select this check box to display trees that are not part of the primary individual’s lineage.  For example, if two or more people in the Family File are related to each other, but to no one else, then their tree is displayed.

Show solitary, unlinked boxes — Select this check box to display people who are not related to anyone else in the Family File.  Family Tree Maker places these boxes at the bottom of the tree.

Display siblings in order shown on Family Page — Select this check box to display siblings from left-to-right, in the order they are listed on the Family Page.  When unchecked, Family Tree Maker places them in the order that makes the best use of space.

Use thicker line for primary individual’s box — Select this check box to emphasize the primary individual by thickening the line around his/her box.


All-in-One tree

The All-in-One Tree allows you to display every member of your Family File in one continuous tree.  You can include individuals who are not blood relatives, as well as unrelated individuals who are not linked to anyone else in your Family File. For a detailed description of some the more difficult concepts, click here.


Vertical Ancestor tree

Vertical Ancestor trees, like Standard Ancestor trees, show the family roots for any individual.  For example, if you created your own Vertical Ancestor tree, it would show your two parents, four grandparents, eight great-grandparents, and so forth.  It would not show your aunts, uncles, nieces, nephews, or cousins. The Vertical Ancestor tree centers the primary individual at the bottom of the tree, with his or her ancestors branching upward.


Privatizing your Family File

Part of the reward of genealogy is the exchange of information with other hobbyists and professionals, as well as your own family members.  You can send portions of your file to others via email, publish Family Tree Maker reports and trees to the Internet, and even submit your file to Broderbund’s World Family Tree Project.  While sharing information is the key to expanding your family tree, it also brings up the question of how to protect the privacy of living family members.  Maybe your Family File includes some personal information you would rather not share with people outside the family, or perhaps you’d like to omit addresses and phone numbers.

Family Tree Maker now allows you to assure the privacy of others (as well as your own) by designating certain facts as private, which prevents this information from being imported/exported, printed, copied, or published on the Internet.

To use the privatization feature:

1. From the File menu, select Preferences, then Privatize (ALT, F, F, V).

Family Tree Maker displays the Privatize information dialog box.

2. Select the Privatize check box if you want Family Tree Maker to hide the Birth, Death, Marriage, More About Facts, Medical, and Notes information for living relatives.

3. Click OK.

Family Tree Maker displays a progress meter while it privatizes your Family File.  It hides all data fields for living individuals and marks them with the word “private.” Only relationships between living individuals will be retained. As an added indication that you have selected to display privatized text, Family Tree Maker also changes the background color of the Family Page to green.  Once selected as a preference, privatized text is enforced whenever you copy/export, print, or publish your Family File.

Note:  When privatized, your file will become "read-only."  This means you cannot modify the file in any way until you leave this mode.  You can deselect the Privatized mode at any time in the original Family File by returning to the Preferences dialog box.


The Privatize Information dialog box

Privatize information — Select this check box to hide the Birth, Death, Marriage, More About Facts, Medical, and Notes information for living relatives.  For complete instructions on privatizing your Family File, click here.


Sharing information with others

Copying/Exporting Family Files

Select this topic to learn how to make copies of your Family Files so that you can send them to your friends and relatives.

Copying/Exporting groups of individuals

Select this topic to learn how to export selected individuals to a new Family File.  Maybe you want to send a particular branch of your family tree, or perhaps you want to send only your newly collected information.

GEDCOM import and export

Select this topic to get information about the GEDCOM file format—the standard file format for exchanging information between genealogy programs. Learn how to import and export GEDCOM files with Family Tree Maker.

Exporting reports

Select this topic to learn how to export various reports for use in another software program.  Save the report in a format compatible with most Windows word processors, so that even people without Family Tree Maker can view your family information.

Family Tree Maker Online

Select this topic to get information about the Family Tree Maker Web site -- a place to find and share genealogical information.

World Family Tree:  what it is & how to join

Select this topic to get information about the World Family Tree project and instructions for submitting your family tree.


The Open Backup Family File dialog box

The following steps can be used to restore a backup Family File.  If your original Family File is damaged or you want to revert to a previous copy, you need to restore it from a backup.  Backup files are stored as either *.FBK or *.FBC files.

1.	In the Look in list, select the drive and folder where the file you want to open is located and then select the file name.  If you are unsure where your file is, click Find file and follow the instructions in Finding files.

2.	Click Restore.

Family Tree Maker displays the New Family File dialog box.

3.	In the Save in list, select the drive and folder where you installed Family Tree Maker.  Usually this is the FTW folder on drive C.

4. You must give your file a new name so that Family Tree Maker can make a copy of your original file and then convert the copy to a Family Tree Maker for Windows file.  Click Save to accept the name that Family Tree Maker suggests, or type a new name in the File name field and then click Save.

The file name can be any valid Windows file name, up to 255 characters, although it must have the extension .FTW.  If you do not type in the .FTW extension, Family Tree Maker will add it for you.

Family Tree Maker begins restoring your file.  If you are restoring a file from diskettes, Family Tree Maker will prompt you to insert the diskettes as needed.


The New FamilyFinder Report dialog box

Search Options

Online — Select this to create an Online FamilyFinder Report. The online search is faster and more comprehensive than its CD-based counterpart, and it includes matches for genealogy sites all over the Internet.

CD FamilyFinder Index — Select this to search the standard CD-based FamilyFinder Index.

Include Options

All individuals — Select this option to find matches for every person in your Family File.

Selected individuals — Select this option to search only a subset of the individuals in your Family File. This is a good choice if you want to save time or limit the length of the report.

Individuals to Include — Click this button to bring up the Individuals to Display dialog box.  Highlight individuals in the left column and move them to the right column to include in your FamilyFinder Report.


The Update FamilyFinder Report dialog box

Search Options

Online — Select this to create an Online FamilyFinder Report. The online search is faster and more comprehensive than its CD-based counterpart, and it includes matches for genealogy sites all over the Internet.

CD FamilyFinder Index — Select this to search the standard CD-based FamilyFinder Index.

Include Options

All individuals — Select this option to find matches for every person in your Family File.

Selected individuals — Select this option to search only a subset of the individuals in your Family File. This is a good choice if you want to save time or limit the length of the report.

Individuals to Include — Click this button to bring up the Individuals to Display dialog box.  Highlight individuals in the left column and move them to the right column to include in your FamilyFinder Report.


Researching your family from home

FamilyFinder: what it is and how to use it

Select this topic to get help about using FamilyFinder; an index right on your own computer that can help you locate your relatives.

Using the Research Journal

Select this topic to learn about the Research Journal—a powerful tool to help you organize and track your progress as you research your family history. The FamilyFinder Report, an integral part of the Research Journal, automatically searches the Internet and the entire FamilyFinder Index for several or all of your relatives at once, and rates the validity of each match.

Finding your ancestors on the Internet

Select this topic to learn about the Internet FamilyFinder.  Use your Web browser to search for your relatives on Family Tree Maker Online and other genealogy sites on the Internet.


Printing the Research Journal

To print the Research Journal:

1.	Make sure you're in the Research Journal view.

2.	Turn on your printer.

3.	From the File menu, select Print (ALT, F, P).

4.	Select the printing options that you want.

For a description of the options in the Print dialog box, click here.

5.	Click OK when you've made your selections.

Family Tree Maker prints the Research Journal.


Printing the Research Journal

Printing the Research Journal

Changing margins, printers, and page orientation


Relationship Calculator

The Relationship Calculator automatically calculates the relationship for any two individuals in your Family File.  It also gives you their canon and civil numbers, and in some cases, will identify their nearest common relative.


Soundex Calculator

The Soundex Calculator automatically generates the Soundex code for any name in your Family File.

For more information about Soundex, click here.


Soundex

Soundex is a method of coding names with unique numbers based on the way the names sound — not on their spelling.

It is important to understand because of its use by the United States government to index the surnames of some of the U.S. Census records and ships’ passenger lists.  By grouping together last names that sound similar (such as Story, Storey, and Storie), Soundex allows people to search for ancestors, even when the surname may have been recorded in any of several different spellings.

Only the 1880, 1900, 1920, and part of the 1910 census have Soundex indexes.

Family Tree Maker allows you to automatically generate these Soundex codes with the Soundex Calculator:

From the People menu, select Soundex Calculator.

Family Tree Maker displays the Soundex Calculator.

Type in the name for which you want to generate a Soundex code and watch Family Tree Maker create it as you type the name.


Customizing the toolbar

Family Tree Maker makes it easy for you to custom tailor the main toolbar.  Now you can display the buttons you want for the features you use most often.  Just select your choices from a list of available buttons and add them to you custom toolbar list.

To add or remove toolbar buttons:

1. From the File menu, select Preferences, then Toolbar (ALT, F, F, O).

Family Tree Maker displays the Toolbar Settings dialog box.  It contains two lists. This list on the left displays the buttons available for display on your toolbar. The list on the right shows the buttons you’ve currently selected.

2. To add a button to you toolbar, select that item in the Available buttons list and then click the right arrow button.

Family Tree Maker adds the selected button to the toolbar list on the right.

3. To remove a button from your toolbar, select that item in the Your toolbar contains list and click the left arrow button.

Family Tree Maker deletes the item from your custom toolbar and moves it back to the list of available buttons.

4. If you prefer, use the Move up and Move down buttons to change the order of the buttons in the toolbar.

5. Click OK to accept the changes and return to Family Tree Maker.


The Toolbar Settings dialog box

Include (the arrow pointing to the right) — Select a button in the list on the left and then click this button to include that button in your toolbar.

Remove (the arrow pointing to the left) — Select a button in the list on the right and then click this button to remove that button from your toolbar.

Move up — Select a button in the list on the right and then click this button to move that item up one space in the list.

Move down — Select a button in the list on the right and then click this button to move that item down one space in the list.


Exporting reports

Exporting a Genealogy Report

Exporting a Bibliography or Documented Events Report


The # of Generations to Show dialog box

Show all generations — Select this option to display all generations in your tree.  When this option is turned off, the tree will only include the blood relatives of the primary individual.

Generations of Ancestors and Generations of Descendants — In these fields, enter the number of generations to include in your tree.  You can choose any number from 1 to 99.


Special Cases

The All-in-One Tree can be a large and very complex tree, depending on the size of your Family File.  When you create a tree that represents the many complex interconnections between all of the individuals in your database, there may be some special cases that seem confusing at first glance.  For example, how does Family Tree Maker represent intermarriages, and what happens to the unrelated individuals?  Family Tree Maker can accommodate many of these special relationships, but its methods may not be immediately obvious.  The following descriptions will help clarify some of these situations and help you better understand the tree you created.

Intermarriages

Each individual that appears more than once in a tree due to an intermarriage will have a bracketed number next to their name.  An intermarriage creates more than one relationship between two people.  For example, suppose two cousins are married and you're generating a tree starting with their common grandparents.  The couple will appear on both sides of the tree -- once in the wife's side of the family and once in the husband's.  The numbers tell you that [1] John Wilson is the same as [1] John Wilson.  If you see a John Wilson on the same tree that doesn't have [1] before his name, he is not the same person.  If several individuals appear more than once in a tree, the first set of duplicates will be assigned [1], the second will be assigned [2], and so on.  Lower numbers indicate that the person is closer to the intermarriage (or fewer generations away).

Note:  You will also see these numbers for children with multiple sets of parents.  Suppose you have given a child two sets of parents and you've included both sets in your tree.  The child will appear twice with a bracketed number next to his or her name, once under each set.

Unconnected step-family trees

By default, Family Tree Maker displays the relationships of people who are not blood relatives of the primary individual (but are related by marriage).  For example, if your sister’s husband has descendants from another marriage, then the descendants from his second marriage will also be included in the All-in-One tree.  You can omit these relationships by configuring the options for the All-in-One Tree.

Unrelated trees

By default, Family Tree Maker displays trees that are not part of the primary individual’s lineage.  For example, if two or more people in the Family File are related to each other, but to no one else, then their tree is displayed.  These unrelated trees appear at the left side of the tree.  You can omit these unrelated people by configuring the options for the All-in-One Tree.

Solitary, unrelated individuals

By default, Family Tree Maker does not include unrelated individuals.  However, you can include them by configuring the options for the All-in-One Tree.  When these solitary, unlinked individuals are displayed, they will appear in their own boxes at the bottom of the tree.


Selecting options for your tree

Maybe you want to label the generations in your Ancestor Tree, or include unrelated individuals in your All-in-One Tree.  With Family Tree Maker, you can specify these kinds of options with a few clicks.

To specify the options for your tree:

1. Display the tree you want to print.

2. From the Contents menu, select Options.

3. Select the options you’re interested in by clicking their associated checkboxes.  Removing the checkmark disables the option.

Note:  If you’re not sure what some of the options do, click the Help button in the dialog box (or press the F1 key on the keyboard).

4. Click OK to accept the changes and return to the tree.


Side Toolbar

In order to make it easier to access the options available to you in various views, Family Tree Maker now incorporates a special side toolbar.  This new toolbar automatically appears along the right margin in each of the tree and report views (Ancestor Trees, Descendant Trees, Genealogy Reports, Family Group Sheets, etc.).  Take a moment to review this convenient addition — we’re sure you’ll find it quick and easy to use.

Using the Side Toolbar

Family Tree Maker automatically changes the buttons that are displayed in the side toolbar depending on the view you have chosen.  For example, the buttons available for the Family Group Sheet reflect the options available for that view and differ from those you will find in the Ancestor Tree.  Side toolbars contain a title bar (with no text), and buttons that are the same size as the main toolbar.  Simply click any of the buttons to display the most frequently used feature or option dialog boxes available for the current view.

The side toolbar can also be minimized, or made smaller, by clicking the small icon located in the upper right corner of the title bar.  When the toolbar is minimized, it appears only as a small title bar.

To restore the toolbar to its full size again, click the icon in the upper right corner of the title bar.

Note:  If you’re not sure what a particular button does, hover the mouse over the button for a moment and a small description will appear.


The Ambiguous Location dialog box

To look up a location, click here.

The upper portion of the dialog box shows the location in question while the field (window) in the lower half shows a list of possible choices.

1	Select (highlight) the location you want to use and then click Use This Location.

Family Tree Maker displays the Confirm Change dialog box.  Note that clarifying text has been added without deleting any of your original text.

2	OK — Click if you agree with the addition.

Family Tree Maker applies the revised location text to your Family File and continues to the next ambiguous location, if any.

3	Cancel — Click if you want to make a different selection.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Ambiguous Location dialog box.

Note:  To minimize the occurrence of location errors, make sure to enter comments in your More About Facts or Marriage pages, followed by a slash “/” mark.  Then type the location.  Family Tree Maker recognizes the text after the slash, or after the last slash if there is more than one, as the location to use.

4	Skip — Click to skip the item and move to the next location in question, if any, or back to your Map View.

5	Skip all — Select this if you want to skip all of the missing location messages without making any text changes and return to the map view.

6	Edit — Click to display the Edit Location dialog box.

7	Close — Click to cancel any changes to the currently displayed field and close the dialog box.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the current Map view.


The Edit Location dialog box

To look up a location, click here.

Make any changes to the location information displayed in the window, and then click OK to accept the edited text.  Select Skip to move to the next location in question, or select Cancel if you do not want to make any changes at this time.


The Location Not Found dialog box

To look up a location, click here.

Depending on your error message, check any of the following areas that may apply:

•	The fact location fields are empty — The comment/location field for the fact you are trying to display contains no information.  For best results, remember to enter your comment, followed by a slash “/” mark, then your location information.

Note:  The location name Georgia, if entered alone, presents a unique situation.  Georgia is the name of a country in what we now know as Russia, as well as one of the United States.  If you mean to specify the U.S State of Georgia, add USA to the location name.

•	Cannot find the locations for facts included in map — Make sure that you have provided enough information for Family Tree Maker to recognize the location. Check the spelling. Make any changes to the text shown in the window and click OK.  Family Tree Maker will make the same changes to your Family File.

Note:  If Family Tree Maker is not recognizing a town or city name, try following it with the state, province, or country name.  For example, “Anywhere, California” or  “Smalltown, British Columbia.”  If the name of the location could be either one or two words, such as "Old Town/Oldtown," or "LaCross/La Cross," try using both formats.

Skip — Select this if you want to make no changes to the text shown and skip to the next missing location, if any.

Skip all — Select this if you want to skip all of the error messages for this location.

OK — Click this to make your changes and move to the next location error.


The Options for Maps dialog box

Allow location labels on map to overlap — Select this option if you want map labels to be displayed on your map, even if they will overlap.


The Change Map dialog box

1.	From the Look in drop-down list, select C: as the drive.

If you installed Family Tree Maker on a drive other than drive C, then select that drive.

In the box below the “Look in” field, Family Tree Maker displays a list of all the files and folders on the selected drive.

2.	Double click the FTW folder.

If you installed Family Tree Maker in a folder other than “FTW,” select that folder instead.

Family Tree Maker displays a list of all the graphic files in the selected folder.  Please note that map image files have the extension “fmp.”

3.	In the box below the “Look in” field, click the map image file you want to use.

Note:  Select the Preview Picture check box to display the map images at a reduced size in the “Preview” field.

4.	When you have selected your map image, click Open.

Family Tree Maker displays the Map Size and Area dialog box.  In this dialog box you can crop and scale your map image even further.


The Map Format dialog box

1.	Select one of the following Layout options:

Book layout — Select this option to create a map that will fit on a single page.

Wall map layout — Select this option to create a larger map that requires multiple pages (wall chart) to display.

2.	Select from the following Legend options:

Include Legend — Select this check box to include a Legend with your map.

Show symbol key — Select this check box to display the symbols used to designate towns, cities, large cities, and counties.  Symbols will display under the Distance scale if it has also been selected.

3.	Select from the following Book Layout options:

Number of columns — Select a number from 1 to 4 to choose the number of columns for your legend.

Start on page with map — Select this check box if you want the legend to begin on the same page as the map.  Otherwise, the legend will begin on the following page.

4.	From the Wall Map Layout section:

Use the up and down arrows to choose the Column width for the legend in your wall map.  Note that the unit of measure is the same as selected in Preferences.

5.	After you make your selections, click OK.

Family Tree Maker returns you to the Map view.

Note:  Once you have created and saved maps, they may also be displayed from a Book view.


The Map Size and Area dialog box

To change the size and/or area of your map image:

1.	Click and drag on map to select area for display — Move the cursor (which becomes a “crosshair,” or large “plus” sign) onto the thumbnail image shown in the dialog box then click and drag as described below.

2.  Position the crosshair over the exact spot where you want the top-left corner of the cropped map image to be.

3.  Press and hold the mouse button while you drag the crosshair diagonally to the exact spot where you want the bottom-right corner of the cropped map image to be, then release the mouse button.

The area inside the box you just created is what will remain of the map after it is cropped.  If you want to change the selected area, simply repeat the steps above until you are happy with the selection.

4. Select from the following options:

Map scale — Click on the slider and move left to right to change the map image from its smallest to largest possible size.

Scale map to fit page — Select this option to automatically make the selected map image area as large as possible while still fitting the current page.

Click OK — when you have a box around the area you want to keep.

Family Tree Maker “crops” and/or resizes the image, then closes the dialog box and returns you to the Map view with your newly created map image.

Note:  If there are missing or ambiguous locations for the newly cropped map area, Family Tree Maker may ask you to resolve these issues before displaying your new map.


The Startup Wizard dialog box

This is the first screen of the Family Tree Maker Startup Wizard.

When creating a new Family File, Family Tree Maker uses the Startup Wizard to help you form a solid foundation on which to build your new record.  Simply fill in the blanks with as much information as you have.  Where there is missing information, use the Research Journal to begin a To Do list so that you can keep track of the facts you want to research.

1.	Your name — Enter your name or the person’s name for whom you are creating a Family File.  This person is known as the primary individual for this Family File.

Note:  Be sure to enter maiden names for women.

2.	Your gender — Before you can continue, you need to select your gender, or, the gender of the primary individual shown in the Your name field.

3.	Your father/mother — Enter the names of your, or the primary individual’s, father (above) and mother (below) in the spaces provided.

4.	His/her father/mother — Enter the names of the primary individual’s grandparents (both paternal and maternal) in the appropriate fields.


The Enter Births dialog box

1.	Date of Birth — Enter the dates of birth for as many of the individuals shown as you know.  The first (top) field is for the paternal grandfather of the primary individual.  The primary individual (fourth row down) is either you, or the person you named first in this Startup/Data Entry Wizard.

Note — Fields are grayed out where no individuals were entered on the first page of this Wizard.

2.	Location — Enter the birth locations for the same individuals as above.

Note — You may enter dates and locations in any order you choose.


The Enter Deaths dialog box

1.	Date of Death — Enter the dates of death for as many of the individuals shown as you know.  The first (top) field is for the paternal grandfather of the primary individual.  The primary individual (fourth row down) is either you, or the person you named first in this Startup Wizard.

Note — Fields are grayed out where no individuals were entered on the first page of this Wizard.

2.	Location — Enter the locations of death for as many of the individuals shown as you know.

Note — You may enter deaths and locations in any order you choose.


The Items to Display in FamilyFinder Report dialog box

Make your selections from the following options offered in the Items to Display in Family Finder dialog box.

Show items marked:

Select either Done, Not Done, or Both Done and Not done.  Use this option to select which check boxed items you want to display: complete, incomplete, or both.

Show these FamilyFinder Report matches:

All matches — This option displays all matches found in the FamilyFinder Report.

Selected individuals — This option allows you to choose only those matches for individuals you want to see in your report

Selected Family Archive CDs — This option allows you to show only those matches found in the Family Archive CDs of your choice.

Show only 4 and 5-star matches — This option allows you to display only the highest-ranking matches in your report.


The Sort FamilyFinder Report dialog box

Sort Family Report by — This is your first-level sort option.  From the pull-down list, select to sort the FamilyFinder Report by Category, Family Archive CD, Individual, or Quality.

Note:  If you selected Category as a first-level sort, the report will be split into sections for World Family Tree, Family Archive CD, and Internet matches (plus 5-star, if any).  Otherwise, only 5-star matches will have their own section.

Then by — This is your second-level sort option.  If you wish, you can sort once again by selecting Family Archive CD, Individual, or Quality from the pull-down list

Note:  If you selected Category for the first-level sort, then this second-level sort will occur within each of those categories.


The Facts Page Preferences dialog box

Fact name — Select this option if you want to sort the facts (including Alternate Facts) in your More About Fact page based on the fact name.

Date — Select this option if you want to sort the facts (including Alternate Facts) in your More About Fact page based on the date the fact occurred.

Note:  The setting you choose will apply to both Individual and Marriage fact pages.


How Map Locations are Determined

To look up a location, click here.

When creating maps, Family Tree Maker looks at different locations you’ve entered for the facts in your Family File and tries to determine where to place them on the map.  The Individuals to Include, and Items to Include dialog boxes determine which facts it will try to place on the map.

Family Tree Maker may “bump” some locations from the map to avoid overlapping or crowding labels.  To see all locations:

From the Contents menu, select Options. Then, select “Allow location labels on map to overlap.”

Facts, like Birth, Death, and many others, plus your comments about them and where they took place, are entered on the More About Facts and Marriage pages.  The Individuals to Include dialog box is where you tell Family Tree Maker whose facts and locations you want displayed in your Map view.

In a More About Facts or Marriage page, enter the fact name and date in the appropriate fields.  Then, in the Comment/Location field, first enter any comment you wish.  After the comment, enter a slash “/” mark, followed by the location information.  Family Tree Maker uses the text after the slash mark (or after the last slash mark if there is more than one) to determine the location.

When creating a Map view, Family Tree Maker may display one of the following error messages. Depending on the exact message, you may need to review the More About pages or the Individuals to Include dialog boxes.  Just click on the links above for more information.

“Family Tree Maker cannot display any facts for the individuals included in this map.  The fact location fields are empty.”

Family Tree Maker has located the individuals selected for the map, but the Comment/Location fields do not contain any information.  Review the More About pages for the selected individuals and make your entries.  If you click OK, Family Tree Maker will display a blank map.

“Family Tree Maker found locations for (X) of the (Y) facts selected for this map.”

As in the example above, take a look at the More About Facts or Marriage pages for the individuals in question.  Of the (Y) fact/location fields selected to display in your map, (X) have been identified, but the remaining ones need to be edited for some reason.

Check Locations — Click to display the Location not Found dialog box.  Edit the text in the window and click OK.  Family Tree Maker makes the same changes to your Family File and completes the Map view.

“Family Tree Maker cannot find the locations for any facts included in this map.”

Once again, begin with the More About Facts or Marriage pages for the selected individuals.  Remember to add a slash mark after the comment and then enter the location information.

Check Locations — Click to display the Location not Found dialog box.  Edit the text in the window and click OK.  Family Tree Maker makes the same changes to your Family File and completes the Map view.


The Confirm Change dialog box

After editing location information, Family Tree Maker asks you to confirm that the location shown is correct.

If you click OK, Family Tree Maker also makes the same changes to your Family File.


Report Truncated

Because of the particular combination of styles, Items to Include, or both, your Report has grown too large to fit the current format.  Family Tree Maker has truncated, or selectively edited portions of your Report in order to fit this format.  Review the Text Font, Size, and Style dialog box or the Items to Include dialog box to see if you can select options which will decrease the size of the Report.


Printing Maps

Overview

About Maps

How to. . .

Determine locations

Format maps

Fix ambiguous locations

Change map images

See also. . .

Editing locations

Print Setup


About Maps

Family Tree Maker allows you to display family information in the form of a map, with or without an accompanying legend, showing the locations where facts noted in your family file occurred.  You can see both what and where milestone events happened in your family history.

The individuals for whom facts are displayed are the same as those listed in the Individuals to Include dialog box.  The kinds of facts displayed are listed in the Items to Include dialog box.

The styles of the legend and map labels are determined by your selections in various Options dialog boxes, such as the Map Format dialog box below, or the Text Font, Style & Size dialog box.

Map legends comprise a location, followed by all standard and custom facts for that location (including Name), as entered in the More About Facts and More About Marriage pages.  You can select the facts you want to display using the Items to Include dialog box.  Facts (or locations) from the More About Medical, Lineage, or Notes pages are not available to be included in your map legend

Skipped Locations in Maps

If there is not enough room on the map to display all the locations in the legend, certain ones will be skipped (though the associated fact still appears in the legend).

Locations are displayed, in order, by Nation, State, County, Big City (population greater than 500,000), and finally, City or Town.  If there is no more room for a location label without it overlapping another label, then it will be skipped.

Note:  Cropping the map, and then using the slider to make the map larger will help decrease location “skipping.”

How to. . .

Determine locations

Format maps

Fix ambiguous locations

Change map images

See also. . .

Editing locations

Print Setup


Picture Properties dialog box

Scale:  Enter a number, or use the up/down arrows to select a number, to determine the size of the picture you are adding to your tree.

Fade:  Enter a number, or use the up/down arrows to select a number, that indicates how light you want the picture to appear when added to your tree.

Note:  100% indicates a picture that is not faded at all, while at 0%, you will see only a white field the same size as selected in the Scale option above.


Caption

Caption text may be used with pictures or as stand-alone text.

Caption — Enter or edit the caption text you wish to use.

Display caption with picture — Select this checkbox if you want the text to display with a picture.

Note:	Depending on your usage, the Display caption with picture checkbox may not appear.


Caption Properties

Use this dialog box to set the width of the text block as it will appear in your ancestor or descendant tree.

Width:  Use the up/down arrows, or enter a value, to select a width for your caption.


Find and Replace dialog box

The Find and Replace feature allows you to search for all instances of a particular name or phrase and replace it with the text of your choice.

Note:  The Find and Replace feature does not include dated fields.  If you want to search for dates, use Find Individual (also found in the Edit menu) instead.

From a Family Page, select the Edit menu.  Then select Find and Replace.

Find (field) — Enter the text that you want Family Tree Maker to find.

Find (button) — Click after you have entered the text you want found.

Replace with — Enter the text that you want Family Tree Maker to use instead of that which you entered in the Find field.

Replace all — Click if you want Family Tree Maker to replace all instances of your Find text with that entered in the Replace with field.  Family Tree Maker will find and replace every instance without further confirmation.

Note:  If you are using Find and Replace in a single Note or Text Item, only text in those items will be replaced.  If you want to replace text throughout your entire Family File, you must perform the Find and Replace from the Family Page.

Match case — Select this check box if you want Family Tree Maker to find only text that matches exactly the text entered in the Find field.

Find whole words only — Select this check box if you want Family Tree Maker to find only matching whole words.  For example, Find and Replace would not match “Billy” if you asked only for “Bill.”

See also:

Found Text


Found Text dialog box

This dialog box appears after Family Tree Maker has located the text you specified using the Find and Replace feature.

Find — Enter the text that you want Family Tree Maker to find.

Find next — Click to find the next instance of the text you entered in the Find field.

Replace with — Enter the text that you want Family Tree Maker to use instead of that entered in the Find field.

Replace all — Click if you want Family Tree Maker to replace all instances of your Find text with that entered in the Replace with field.  Family Tree Maker will find and replace every instance without further confirmation.

Note:  If you are using Find and Replace in a single Note or Text Item, only text in those items will be replaced.  If you want to replace text throughout your entire Family File, you must perform the Find and Replace from the Family Page.

Match case — Select this check box if you want Family Tree Maker to find only text that matches exactly (upper and lower case) the text entered in the Find field.

Find whole words only — Select this check box if you want Family Tree Maker to find only matching whole words.  For example, Find and Replace would not match “Billy” if you asked only for “Bill.”

Found! — This message informs you where the Find text has been located.  The window below this message displays at least 25 words prior to your “found” text and the 25 words after (where it exists).

Replace — Replaces the found text with the text entered in the Replace with field.

Note:  The Find and Replace feature does not include dated fields.  If you want to search for dates, use Find Individual (also found in the Edit menu) instead.

See also:

Find and Replace text


The FamilyFinder Center

The FamilyFinder Center is where you begin researching your family history.  All the search, report, and reference power of Family Tree Maker can be accessed from this convenient location.

FamilyFinder Search

Online Resources

Tips, Tools, and References


FamilyFinder Search

Run a FamilyFinder Search — With its highly accurate matching capabilities, the FamilyFinder Search researches and analyzes a vast amount of information, providing you with a segmented and prioritized FamilyFinder Report.  This report is the cornerstone of your research efforts.

View your FamilyFinder Report — If you have already created a FamilyFinder Report, you can view it directly from the FamilyFinder Center.


Online Resources

The FamilyFinder Center makes it easy to link to a variety of Internet resources.

Family Tree Maker Online — Family Tree Maker opens your browser and connects you to Family Tree Maker Online, providing you with the very best searching capabilities available on the Internet.

Research Services — FamilyTreeMaker.com and Genealogy Research Services have teamed up to help you with your family history research by providing you with the convenience of genealogy research and record lookup services that you can order from your home computer.

The professional staff of Genealogy Research Associates can perform a variety of record lookups and provide you with photocopies and/or scanned images of the results, plus expert research guidance to other sources of information for solving your family history mysteries.

www.genealogylibrary.com —  Find your ancestors in the premier collection of more than 2500 online databases and primary resources. This subscription collection is growing every week, so visit often!

GenForum Message Boards — Find out what others who share your interest in genealogy have to say about virtually any topic you can imagine.  Chat, search, share and discuss whatever’s on your mind at this convenient and interesting Web site.


Tips, Tools, and References

This section of the FamilyFinder Center provides quick answers about how to get started with your family research

How to Get Started — Takes you to the Genealogy “How To” Guide.  Take some time to explore this extraordinary resource.  It’s full of ideas for how to kick your research in to high gear.

My Research Journal/To-Do List — Follow this link to your personal Research Journal.  Use this online journal to track keep track of your research ideas, progress, and To-Do items for the future.

Genealogy Contacts and Resources — This link takes you to a section of the “How-To” Guide offering a collection of National, State and County resources, as well as a International, Ethnic, and Religious resources.  You will be amazed at the wealth of information available at the click of your mouse.

Family Archive CD Catalog — Family Archives are large collections of genealogical data copied onto CDs. They are easily viewable in Family Tree Maker.  This page provides a comprehensive list of all available CDs and their descriptions.

How to Find a Missing Fact — Use this convenient link to step-by-step guides to finding all kinds of information — from basic facts like Birth, Death, and Marital Status to Immigration, Military, and Adoption records.  You will also find a list of additional resources for a variety of topics helpful to the beginner and advanced researcher alike.


The Publishing Center

The Publishing Center view in Family Tree Maker is where you can link to features that allow you to share your family information with others.

From the View menu, select Publishing Center and use the active ‘links’ to create, edit, and maintain your own Family Home Page — then add pictures, trees, and reports for family and friends to view.

You can also use the handy links to other “wizards” that walk you through the steps required to produce your own Family Books, and then publish them on your home page as well.

Find out more about how to:

Create a Family Home Page

Update or Edit Your Home Page

View Your Home Page

Add a Picture to Your Home Page

Add a Tree or Report to Your Home Page

Create a Family Book

Edit Your Book

Publish Your Book on Your Home Page


Create a Family Home Page

1	From the Publishing Center in Family Tree Maker, click Create a Family Home Page.

2	The first page of this wizard lists the items your home page site will include:

•	Your personalized home page

•	List of all surnames in your tree

•	Index of everyone in your tree

•	Biographical information on each individual — Note: this “linked” report format is where pictures will display when you select the Preferred Picture for Home Page check box in the More About Picture/Object dialog box.

•	A dynamic tree showing all connected individuals

3	The next page, Individuals to Include, is where you decide which family members to include in your Home Page.

Note:  If you decide to include only certain individuals from your Family File, click Select Individuals to Include.  Family Tree Maker then displays the Individuals to include dialog box.

4	The Pictures page is where you decide which pictures to display on your home page.  Pictures are added and stored in Scrapbooks.

5	Hide Information on Living Individuals allows you to “privatize ” information (highly encouraged) related to those individuals in your Family File who are still living.

6	Before finalizing and uploading your new home page, the Make a Connection page is your reminder to have your Internet browser connection open.

7	The final wizard page — Home Page is Building — advises that your home page is being completed.  Your browser is opened so that you can select styles and other options to customize your new Web page’s appearance.

Back to:

The Publishing Center


Update or Edit Your Home Page

Selecting this Publishing Center link walks you through steps similar to those in the Create a Home Page Wizard.

The difference is that on the first page of this Wizard, you have the choice of selecting a check box called Skip update and go straight to my Home Page.  This allows you to bypass the remaining editing pages and go directly to the online Text and Contact Information form so you can make any changes you want to appear in your Home Page.

Back to:

The Publishing Center


View Your Home Page

Selecting this link from the Publishing Center automatically opens your browser and takes you to your personal Family Tree Maker Home Page.


Add a Tree or Report to Your Home Page

1	From the Publishing Center view in Family Tree Maker, click Add a Tree or Report to your Home Page and follow the steps for the pages listed below:

2	Add a Tree or Report — You can add a tree or report that you’ve saved as a Saved View, or a standard tree or report for the currently selected individual.

Note:  If you want to change the selected individual, click Cancel, then from the View menu, select Index of Individuals.  After you have made your selection, return to this Wizard.

3	Select a Tree or Report — This page of the Wizard displays a list of the trees, reports, and Saved Views (indicated by and asterisk [*] at the end of the title) available to be added to your home page.

Note:  Trees will display online as dynamic InterneTrees.

If the list is too long to view completely in the window, a scroll bar will appear along the right-hand edge.  Scroll to the tree or report you want to use, select it, then click Next.

4	Info on Living Individuals — In order to respect the privacy of living relatives and their families, it is strongly suggested that their information be privatized.  Follow the instructions on this page to find out how to select the privatization option.

5	Make a Connection — This is a reminder to make sure you have a working Internet connection before you continue.  When ready, click Finish to proceed.  Once your tree or report has been successfully uploaded, you will receive a status message from Family Tree Maker.

Back to:

The Publishing Center


Add a Picture to Your Home Page

1	From the Publishing Center view in Family Tree Maker, click Add a Picture to your Home Page and follow the steps for the pages listed below:

2	Individuals with Scrapbook Pictures — This dialog box displays a list of everyone in your Family File who has a Scrapbook picture.  You can enter a name (last name first), or select a name from the list, then click OK.

3	Insert Scrapbook Picture — This dialog box displays all the pictures available for the selected individual.  Select the picture you want to add to your home page.

Note:  Select the Preview check box to display the picture in the window on the right.

4	Title and Description — Add a title and description for the picture you are adding to your home page.  If you leave the title blank, your picture will be posted to your home page as “Untitled.”

Note:  Titles entered in this dialog box have no effect on captions or descriptions in the Scrapbook.

Back to:

The Publishing Center


Create a Family Book

1	From the Publishing Center use the Create a Family Book link to begin creating one that you can share with family and friends, present as a gift, display at the next reunion, or upload (sometimes called posting) to your Family Home Page.

2	New Book — When you first click Create a Family Book, Family Tree Maker displays the New Book dialog box.  Simply enter the title for your new book, and then enter your name, assuming you are the author.  This information will be displayed (and/or printed) in your book.

3	Creating a Book — After entering the title and author information, Family Tree Maker takes you to the Books view, where you will select the items you want to include in your new Family Book.

4	Converting to Book Layout — If you choose a Saved View from the list for inclusion in your book, Family Tree Maker will advise you that it must be converted to Book Layout before proceeding.

Back to:

The Publishing Center


Edit Your Book

From the Publishing Center, this link allows you to quickly select any available Family Book, and then add or remove individual items.

You simply select the book you want to edit from the Open Book dialog box.  Family Tree Maker displays the appropriate Book view, allowing you to decide which items you wish to add or remove.

To go to a different view, make your selection from the View menu.


Publishing a Book on Your Home Page

If you’ve already created a Family Home Page, you can use this link from the Publishing Center to add a Family Book for other relatives and friends to view, anytime they want to stop by.